^^>^^:

^^^#

Jf. •• *

«#<» 'i

>• ^■^W-.K#>-- W

(ji^jk^-frt^ftrtihiv^'-^

Journal

OF THE

New- York
Microscopical Society

VOLUME IX.

LIBRARY

■BOTANICAL
GARDEN

NEW YORK:
PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY,

QUARTERLY.

LIBRARY
NEW YORK

IBOTANICAL

Journal °^«°^'^

OF THE

NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

Vol. IX. JANUARY, 1893. No. 1.

NOTES ON CORDYLOPHORA LACUSTRIS AND MELI-
CERTA RINGENS.

BY STEPHEN HELM.
(_Read November i^ih, 1892.)

CoRDYLOPHORA LACUSTRIS. — Prof. Allmaii is, I believe, the
only scientist who has investigated the life-history of C. lacus-
tris, and although nearly forty years have elapsed since those
investigations were made public, they still stand alone. This is
attributable in all probability to two causes : first, the exhaus-
tive character of that memoir; and, second, the rarity of the form
itself — the former rendering observers shy of entering upon
ground already so ably trodden ; the latter placing a very effec-
tive barrier in the path of those who might have felt inclined to
investigate had circumstances favored them.

Notwithstanding this, and the expressive and derisive represen-
^tation applied to certain persons who " rush in where angels fear
gyo tread," I am desirous of placing on record some observations
^made during the past summer, and I venture to hope I may be
;^|forgiven for re-introducing this form to the Society after so short
py^an interval.

■<5 To make the present remarks clearer I am compelled to refer

^;o my paper published in the April number of the Journal, in

which I speak of my anxiety to complete my observations on cer-

2 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

tain new forms therein mentioned, at the earliest possible moment.
With that idea I have made repeated visits to the locality in search
of specimens, although as yet without result. On one of those
visits, that of July 17th, however, I took comfort to my soul, for
on peering into the canal I perceived a form which, from its gene-
ral aspect and enormous numbers, I at once jumped to the con-
clusion was my long-desired C. coronata. But on transferring a
colony to one of my bottles for closer examination, to my amaze-
ment I found that instead of C. coronata I had C. lacustris, about
the very last form I should have expected. In the paper referred
to, on these two forms, I have said that after the most painstaking
and diligent search I was only able to find one solitary specimen
of C. lacustris — and that by accident — amongst the tens of thousands
of C. coronata. But here I had before me C- lacustris enough to
supply every microscopist in the world to his heart's content and
a few millions of millions over ; for although prospecting only on
one side of the canal for convenience, it was, for a couple of miles
at least, literally lined with it. Wherever there was a resting-
place there were the tiny but beautifully branched stems of C. la-
custris. That I was pleased, nay, delighted, goes without saying,
and dreams of a thorough side-by-side comparison of the two
forms rose before me, being now sure that, as I had had the good
fortune to find C. lacustris, I should find C. coronata also.

1% \.\\Q.XQ any unmixed ]q-^ va. \\Vi% world? I pressed the cup of
joy — not canal-water — to my lips, but the pleasure was evanes-
cent, being soon embittered by disappointment ; for, after two
hours' careful sea,rch, C. corojiata was still " conspicuous by its ab-
sence." I could not find even one solitary specimen to console me.
On reaching home I prepared a tank for my new capture, filling it
entirely with the water obtained in this expedition — about a gal-
lon— and looked forward to a grand distribution during the week
amongst the members of the New- York Microscopical Society and
other friends, even going so far as to make a careful list of those
who I knew would value it. Alas ! now followed my second dis-
appointment. I had reckoned without my host. The next day my
collection looked queer, and I thought it best to defer my distri-
bution. And well it was for my friends I did so. For in three or
four days C. lacustris was defunct and the water vile enough and
black enough for Styx.

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 3

Nothing daunted, even though the weather was still very hot, I
made another visit. That collection^ " hurried up " and went bad
the following day. Again and again I tried, but, from some inex-
plicable cause, every gathering went in the same manner, and
finally C lacusti'is went also, gradually disappearing from the
canal. I did hope to secure some germs at least, but the only re-
sult I to-night have of all these rich hauls, and after some eight or
ten visits, is a piece of weed in spirit, which originally carried a few
hundred forms, three to six on a stem. This I exhibit to give an
idea of the enormous numbers in which it was found.

What investigations I was able to make confirmed a good many
of Allman's illustrations. But I found two points of difference,
otherwise the Society would have been spared a narration of my
experiences.

One point of difference relates to the general position of the
tentacula, which were spread in all directions and presented a
free, wavy appearance, as in C. coronata. As shown by Allman —
see April Journal, plate 30 — they stand almost vertical, whilst
in my "solitary specimen," exhibited November 6th, 1891, they
stood out like wires from a telegraph pole. Some few specimens
which I was able to retain up to ten days ago had the same free,
wavy appearance. Allman's presentation, however, may have
been an accidental difference, produced by exceptional environ-
ments, and I do not lay much stress upon the point.

But the second point, as to the numbers of the tentacula,
seems to me an important one. Allman very strangely omits to
specifically state the number of tentacula, except in his descrip-
tion where he says, " Polypi tentaculis numerosis sparsis tereti-
bus," thus leaving it to be inferred that, although numerous, their
number is uncertain. And yet in his illustrations, of which he
gives four, one, an immature form, is figured with thirteen, whilst
of the three matured forms one is figured with twelve and two
with thirteen. So that, to say the least, tentacula are " an un-
certain quantity." But it is not unfair to Allman to assume that
he considered thirteen the maximum number. Now, I found in
these captures the tentacula varied in number from ten to twenty,
and of these latter so many instances as to convince me that it
was not an abnormal number, but quite common. However,
that this statement might not go forth on my unsupported testi-

4 JOURNAL OF THE [January^

mony, I requested Dr. Pierson, my medical adviser, to count
them also, and he confirmed my observations.

To sum up : This experience is certainly one of the strangest
I ever passed through. Here is one form — Cordylophora coronafa^
and a new one — existing in countless millions, and for months
together, in 1891, disappearing altogether in 1892; whilst the
typical form Cordylophora laciistris, represented in 189 1 by solitary
specimens, appeared in 1892 in the same countless millions, but
only for a few weeks. Is it possible that in these facts we have
an illustration of " alternation of generations " ?

Melicerta ringens. — In a contribution to the Quarterly
Journal of Microscopical Science, Philip Henry Gosse described
for the first time the building-up of the tessellated tube of this
lovely form of rotifer, which took place under his very eyes.
Although nearly every writer on this form since that time quotes
more or less from Gosse, I am not aware that any other observer
has witnessed the complete operation.

I have felt a desire to do so all my life, and have searched
amongst Melicertians hundreds of times, in the hope that I might .
be so favored, but in vain. At last, on July 26th of this year, I
had the ambition of my life gratified. At 10:30 a.m. I perceived
a young specimen busily engaged in this interesting occupation.
Six rows of pellets had already been completed, and the young,
builder was still hard at work. I watched this combination of
brickmaker, architect, and builder at work for five hours uninter-
ruptedly, which I claim was, for so small and so young an opera-
tor, an unparalleled feat even amongst the hard-worked mam-
malians. To be sure, the object, the establishment of a home,,
and that for a lifetime, was a noble one, and who would not vigor-
ously labor for such a purpose ? However, dropping reflections,
suffice it to say that at the expiration of these five hours the young
artisan rested, evidently considering "the house '^ high enough
for the present, and then proceeded to devote " the wheel of life '^
to the acquisition of food.

But what had been accomplished in these five hours ? Starting
with six rows of pellets at the time of first observation, twenty-one
rows more were piled up, viz., fourteen rows up to 1:30 p.m., and
seven more up to 3:30 p.m. These consisted, as near as I could

•^1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 5

count, of twenty-four or twenty-five each on the average, giving a
■total of over five hundred pellets.

My experience confirmed that of Gosse, that the time occupied
in forming a pellet averaged about one minute, for there were
short intervals, as you will hear presently. The deposition was
accomplished by a sudden jerking of the head, but so rapidly that
I could not determine the precise instant of deposit. When we
consider that the material for the formation of these pellets had
to be gathered from the surrounding medium, in which scarcely a
trace could be discovered — literally a case of " making bricks with-
•out straw" — it would seem a stupendous effort. All through, the
same perfect order in deposition, the same delicately graduated
and enlarging diameter, which we are so accustomed to admire in
Melicertians, had been maintained — one more proof of the un-
erring instinct bestowed by the Omniscient Architect on the first
Melicertian that ever built its case on these lines, and which had
descended through countless generations to the one now before me.

Prof. Williamson says the first rows of these cases are depos-
ited upon a '' thin hyaline cylinder, the dilated extremity of which
is attached to the supporting object." Now, with his paper and
illustrations before me, I looked very carefully for this cylinder,
all through the process of building, but looked in vain. A sup-
port of some kind seems essential on which to agglutinate the
first pellet, and from it the first caudal row of pellets. For al-
though adhesion to each other by means of the viscous secretion
-employed can be understood, they would hardly keep in position
without some attachment. But, assuming the existence of this
•*'thin hyaline cylinder," another difficulty arises, that of com-
pleting the connection between the tube and the base on which it
is designed to finally rest, when the cylinder would manifestly be
in the way. Gosse does not mention such a " cylinder," but the
omission is accounted for by the fact that he witnessed the con-
struction from a vertical point of view.

Whilst 1 entertain the highest regard for Prof. Williamson's
paper and for his general erudition, I beg respectfully to say that
the after-process I observed leads me to a different conclusion.
When I first observed the tiny worker the lowest row of pellets was
the y^ of an iiich from the base of operations. After three
hours' labor in building, this had been reduced one-half. At the

6 JOURNAL OF THE [January^

expiration of five hours, and the termination of its labor, the in-
terval had vanished altogether, and the junction of the case with
the base to which the animal still adhered by its suctorial disc was
complete. It seems to me that a " hyaline tube," on which the
first rows of pellets are said to be deposited, must first be con-
structed, and that when these rows are completed it would have
to be got rid of in some way, unless the intervening space were
filled up by continuing to build upon it downward, which idea
was not warranted by my observations.

The conclusion I am led to is that the first pellet is held in po-
sition by a temporary attachment, proceeding from its own body,
in some unknown manner, and so situated as not to be in the way
when its purpose is accomplished. My theory was produced by
observing the singularly beautiful manner in which the tube was
brought down. At short intervals the little builder ceased " making
bricks," and, suddenly contracting itself upon its adhering tail,
pulled the tube down with it for a short distance. By these re-
peated contractions and efforts the interval was gradually re-
duced, until the connection with the base was made and the work
finished.

We have hitherto been accustomed to account for the tapering
construction of the case solely by the different diameters of the
body and the tail, but it is possible that a double purpose led to
the conception of the design, viz., the lessening of labor in build-
ing, and the facilitation of the "pulling-down process" I have de-
scribed, which latter is no doubt materially aided thereby. Of
course it will be asked why the Melicertian does not solve the dif-
ficulty by laying the foundations of its tube upon the base on
which it finally rests. I simply reply, I don't know. But I also
add that, on October 2d, I had the pleasure of seeing another
young Melicertian engaged in building, and I also observed the
same interval between the caudal end of the tube and the base.

l893-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 7

THE CAUSE OF ASIATIC CHOLERA.

BY LOUIS HEITZMANN, M.D.
{Read October 2ist, 1892.)

Before Koch's great discovery of the "comma bacillus of
cholera Asiatica" many different views were held as to the
cause of cholera: first a gas theory, then a miasma theory, a soil
theory, and so on, each finding its supporters. In 1884 Koch
announced the fact that a "comma bacillus," or rather a " spiril-
lum," found only in the intestines of patients and their dis-
charges, but neither in the blood nor in any other organ, was the
sole cause of the disease.

Under the microscope the comma bacillus proves to be a
small, somewhat curved rod, in the fresh state often forming
long curved threads, and hence its name " spirillum." It is best
colored with either fuchsin or methylin blue. Microscopical
examinations, however, are not conclusive. A number of other
bacteria, such as Finkler and Prior's comma bacillus of cholera
morbus, Deneke's comma bacillus found in cheese, Gamaleia's
Vibrio Metschnikoff found in the intestines of fowls, or Miller's
comma bacillus isolated from the mouth, can often not be dif-
ferentiated, looking almost exactly alike.

Cultures are necessary for an absolutely certain differential
diagnosis. Koch has shown that his comma bacillus grows on
gelatin in an entirely different manner from that of the other
comma bacilli. On the plate small colonies develop in from
eighteen to twenty-four hours, which have a pale color, darker in
the centre, with a slightly uneven contour, and soon look as if
studded with particles of glass. These increase in size, and soon
the gelatin commences to liquefy in the centre, forming a small
funnel, the gelatin having sunk below the level of the surround-
ing portions. In a stick culture the same features take place.
The funnel in the centre becomes larger and larger, the upper
portions apparently becoming filled with an air bubble. The
liquefaction of the gelatin goes along slowly, and only by about
the sixth day the whole of the upper portion is liquefied.

All other comma bacilli grow differently on gelatin. Finkler

8 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

and Prior's liquefies the gelatin very quickly; Deneke's and the
Vibrio Meischnikoff not quite as fast as Finkler and Prior's, but
faster than Koch's; and Miller's not growing at all. Koch's
spirillum also grows on agar-agar, milk, serum, potatoes, and, in
fact, on almost any cultivating medium, if not too greatly diluted.
It needs oxygen, grows best at a temperature between 60° and
105° F., is completely destroyed at a temperature of 140° F. in
ten minutes, only grows on neutral or slightly alkaline media,
and is soon destroyed by drying.

The last feature shows that it cannot spread through air. It
can only act when introduced through the mouth into the stomach.
It can be destroyed by sublimate (i: 2,000), carbolic acid (half of
one per cent), chloride of lime, sulphuric acid, etc. The disease
can be prevented with comparative ease. All contact with infected
material must be absolutely avoided, and such material thor-
oughly disinfected. The hands must be kept scrupulously clean,
and all water must be boiled before use. The stomach should
be kept in good condition, as the comma bacillus will be de-
stroyed in the stomach if the latter performs its functions nor-
mally.

PROCEEDINGS.

Meeting of October 7th, 1892.

The President, Mr. J. D. Hyatt, in the chair.

Twenty-eight persons present.

The Corresponding Secretary read a communication from Mr.
K. M. Cunningham, dated Houston, Texas, September 29th, 1892,
accompanying a donation to the Cabinet of the Society of a slide
of pyritized diatoms and foraminifera, as follows :

'* I forward a slide of marine diatoms and foraminifera, pyrit-
ized, or metamorphosed. They are derived from a stratified
clay, at a depth of about thirty feet, in the deepening of the slip
in front of the new grain elevator at Galveston, Texas. The natu-
ral submarine strata were removed by powerful suction dredges,
and discharged in a continuous flow into the adjacent lowlands,
with the object of securing deeper water and at the same time of
reclaiming a littoral marsh for railroad purposes. In the expul-

1893.] NEW-VORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 9

sion of the liquid marine mud and sands, numerous large masses
of the stratified cl^y were discharged through the twelve-inch dis-
charge pipes, and an examination (71 situ revealed the presence of
the pyritized diatoms and foraminifera. In order to put the in-
teresting occurrence on record, I prepared a selected slide, show-
ing about fifty of the fossilized remains, and this is the only one I
had leisure to prepare. With a one-fourth objective and con-
densed light a pleasant and instructive study may be made of the
metamorphism of forms which were once of silicious and calca-
reous nature.

" Putting this locality upon record extends the known area of
distribution for mineralized diatoms. The earlier known speci-
mens were from the London clay basin. Mr. Lewis Woolman's
researches in the artesian-well area of the New Jersey coast have
extended the subject for that locality. What I have previously
put on record with your Society, for the artesian area of Mo-
bile, Ala., has disclosed its further areal extension. And my
present contribution from Galveston Bay continues the chain, to
be carried on by others interested in the subject.

'* I noted the following genera : Coscmodisais, Actinoptychus,
and Campylodiscusi but did not observe a single Tricefatium in my
limited study of the material."

Mr. Cornelius Van Brunt donated to the Cabinet a photographic
negative of Pleurosigina angulatum, taken with a Natchet immer-
sion, No. 7 lens, by the late Samuel Jackson. Mr. Van Brunt
also placed before the Society a cabinet of one hundred and fifty
microscopical slides, of the collection of Mr. Jackson, which his
family now offered for sale to the Society, and stated that Mr.
Jackson was one of the best preparers of microscopical objects,
and, until near the time of his death, was one of the most active
members of the American Microscopical Society of the City of
New York. It was proposed to purchase the collection of slides
for the Cabinet of the Society, the expense to be defrayed by
subscription.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Section of leaf of Hoya carnosa., with crystals of calcium
oxalate.

2. Transverse section of stem of Hoya carnosa.

3. Transverse section of petiole of Aspidestris.

10 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

4. Pipette Filter, for the easy manipulation of hgematoxylin,
anilin green, etc.

Exhibits 1-4 by Frank D. Skeel.

5. Codfish, entire, three days old, from the Biological Labora-
tory at Wood's Holl : by H. W. Calef.

6. Photomicrograph of the epiderm of the stem of Geranium :
by Carl Heitzmann.

7. Pyritized diatoms, from Galveston, Texas, prepared by K.
M. Cunningham : by J. L. Zabriskie.

8. Stinging hairs of the larva of Einpretia stimtilea Clemens,
the "Saddle-back Caterpillar" : by J. L. Zabriskie.

Dr. Skeel stated, concerning his exhibit of Hoya, that the plant
belongs to the Palm family, and that the sections were stained
with anilin green, the fibro-vascular bundles taking the green,
while the other structures remain unstained.

Dr. N. L. Britton referred to the great abundance of sclerotic
cells in the stem of Hoya, and said that Dr. Northrup, using the
same stain as Dr. Skeel, was examining this stem near the time of
his death, attempting to find the origin and function of these
sclerotic cells.

Dr. Skeel also explained the Pipette Filter contrived and ex-
hibited by him.

Mr. F. W. Leggett gave some observations on Paradise Fish
reared by him in an aquarium, remarking upon the dissimilarity
of the male and female, and upon their quarrelsome disposition.

Dr. Bashford Dean stated that in 1840 a French officer brought
home a pair of these fish in an ice-pitcher ; that they are now
abundant in the aquaria of Europe ; and that they show most re-
markable endurance of foul water and careless treatment.

Dr. Carl Heitzmann explained that the photomicrograph exhib-
ited by him v/as taken under a power of 1,000 diameters, and il-
lustrated the reticular structure of the protoplasm, and the so-
called ''intercellular connections" in the stem of Geranium, and
continued as follows :

"The reticular structure of animal protoplasm I demonstrated
first twenty years ago, although S. Strieker, of Vienna, succeeded
two years since in reproducing the reticulum in a living, colorless,
coarsely granular blood-corpuscle of a proteus, by means of the
electric microscope, with a power of 2,500 diameters. In Ger-

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 11

many this fact is not yet generally acknowledged. In this coun-
try Dr. Alfred C. Stokes, of Trenton, N. J., has recently de-
scribed the reticular structure of red blood corpuscles of man
after treatment with dilute solution of bichromate of potash, as
first discovered by Louis Elsberg twelve years ago. The same
author has described the reticular structure in Pelomyxa, an
amoeboid protozoan quite common around Trenton.

"In the speaker's laboratory Mr. Maximilian Toch has studied
the structure of vegetable protoplasm for more than a year, and
has succeeded in photographing this structure by new methods,
which he will soon publish. The specimen exhibited was treated
with one-half of one per cent solution of chloride of gold, and
afterward with sulphuric acid. The reticulum has assumed a
dark violet color, and appears dark in the photograph. In many
places numerous delicate spokes are seen traversing the cellulose,
or cement substance, interconnecting the reticulum of all so-
called ' cells,' and thus rendering the plant a continuous indi-
vidual, from the tips of the leaves dov/n to the ends of the root-
lets. This fact was first established by Louis Elsberg in 1883.
The connecting threads are far more numerous than represented
by Walter Gardiner, also in 1883.

"Since in the animal organism all so-called 'cells' are of a re-
ticular structure, and all basis and cement substances are pierced
by a similar reticulum of living matter, we readily understand the
fact that, after liquefaction of the basis substance, its protoplasmic
condition is re-established. This happens in inflammation, as
proven by the speaker in 1873. Quite recently Prof. Grawitz, of
Greifswald, Germany, has rediscovered the appearance of 'cells'
in the basis substance of fibrous connective tissue in inflammation,
dubbing them 'slumbering cells.' The discovery is twenty years
old, and was ignored in Germany for no other reason but that
it proved the fallacy of the cell theory and the cellular path-
ology."

Prof. Edmund B. Wilson, Ph.D., of the Department of Bio-
logy, Columbia College, being introduced to the Society by Dr.
N. L. Britton, related some observations on the germinal cells of
Amphioxus : Hans van Vleich, of Zurich, observed with regard to
the sea-urchin that, at the two-cell stage of the egg, if these cells
were shaken apart, each cell produced an embryo of one-half the

12 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

natural size. Last summer Dr. Wilson repeated this experiment
in the case of Amphioxiis. If the two cells are simply disturbed
the result will be two embryos; and so, in the four-cell stage, the
result will be four embryos, showing an original connection be-
tween the cells.

Meeting of October 2ist, 1892.

The Vice-President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Forty persons present.

Mr. William Wales was elected Recording Secretary//-^ tern.

The Corresponding Secretary presented a communication from
Mr. K. M. Cunningham, accompanying a donation to the Cabi-
net of two slides of diatoms, and dated Houston, Texas, Octo-
ber i2th, 1892, as follows :

" Notes explanatory of two slides of diatoms :

" I. Slide of Terpsinoe musica Ehrbg. On the occasion of a
visit to San Antonio, Texas, in the spring of 1887, I secured a
specimen of a filamentous alga from the fresh water, flushing
ditches permeating the streets of San Antonio. Without know-
ing what I had secured, I forwarded the material to Mr. C. L.
Peticolas, who returned me beautifully prepared slides of T. musica,
and at the same time solicited a larger quantity of the material.
I found it impossible to secure any one who could procure addi-
tional material from the same locality. But recently, in August,
1892, while on an excursion to San Antonio, 1 visited the San
Pedro Springs and tested for the presence of T. musica. I
promptly verified the fact that it grew in the greatest abundance
on the water plants choking up the shallow waters of the minia-
ture lake. I secured a rake and landed a mass of Myriophyllum,
which I allowed to dry in the sun. This I took to Houston, and
in a month or more found leisure to make a reduction for the dia-
toms therein.

" A little acquaintance with the diatoms occurring in this fresh-
water lake enables me to tabulate the following species, which
may be seen on the slide sent herewith : Biddulphia Icevis, Cytn-
bella gastroides, C. affinis, Cocconeis scutellum, Gomphonema capita-
turn, Cymatopleura elliptica, Melosira crenulata, Navicula nobilis
and others, Nitzschia panduriforjiiis, Synedra ulna, several species

Io93-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. IS

of Suriella, Stauroneis phcenicenteron, Terpsinoe musica. But the
slide is characterized by the richness of this last species.

"At least forty years ago Dr. Ehrenberg noted the occurrence
of T. musica in the rivers of Texas. But only a year ago it was
announced in The Microscope, under the warrant of a leading
New Jersey diatomist in his criticism of a popular article in re-
gard to the distribution of the various genera, that T. musica was
an exclusively marine genus. This statement met with no denial,
so far as I am aware of. The park resort at San Antonio derives
its name from the San Pedro Springs, which are bold, fresh-water
springs flowing from fissures in a cretaceous, fossiliferous stratum.
The flow is so great that it is conducted in bridged ditches, or
small canals, through the heart of the city of San Antonio, a mile
and one-half distant. The little pleasure lake is, of course, fed
by these springs.

" Having placed with the Society two typical representative
species or varieties of that American T. musica, a field is presented
to diatomists to make a comparative study of this genus, with
a view of noting the biological divergence between the Mobile
River, Ala., marsh deposit of T. musica, and the San Antonio T.
musica. M. J. Tempere, editor of Le Diatomiste, Paris, has al-
ready in print critically classed the Mobile marsh species as being
more nearly related to T. i/itermedia Pantcschek than to the ordi-
nary type of T. musica Ehrbg.

''2. The other slide sent herewith is derived from an exca-
vated lake bottom, the result of cutting a canal, or artificial ' cut-
off,^ to reclaim a large area of land subject to periodical inunda-
tion, and now to be filled in for railroad station grounds, at Hous-
ton, Texas. The lake traversed by the canal once formed a part
of White Oak Bayou, and only in the period of high water in the
bayou the bayou and lake became coterminous. In low-water
periods the lake had a restricted area, containing living mussels,
salamanders, etc. Through whatever period the lake may have
survived, it became the receptacle for many kinds of microscopic
vegetable remains and seeds, as well as a diatom deposit, sur-
rounded on all sides by barren red and white, silicious, sandy
strata.

" The slide, while containing hundreds of frustules, was predi-
cated upon the examination of a dry clod of the earth, on the sur-

14 . JOURNAL OF THE [January,

face of which just one frustule could be made out. At a second
visit I found streaks in which the clay partook of the nature of a
richer clay, the frustules being easily seen because densely packed.

" The interest in this deposit is somewhat intensified, as the
apocryphal ' Navicula craticula^ or ' Suriclla cra/iciila,' is quite
abundant therein, as may be noted on the slide. The other
former congeners, N'avicula cuspidata and Stauroieis phcemcente-
ron, form a majority, which characterizes the slide. Together
with these there are species, such as T. 7iiustca, Nitzschia circum
suta, Cymatopleura elUpiica, Navicula nobilis, JV. major., and a
number of other species, as mentioned in the list of San Pedro
Springs. Gen. J. D. (^ox has investigated the question of N. era-
ticula, and, I believe, regarded it at one time as possibly an in-
ternal plate or an integral part of JV. cuspidata, a matter which
also interested Dr. D. B. Ward in its solution. He communicated
to me, what he regarded as probable at the time, that he had
found JV. craticula in the Montgomery, Ala., fossil, fresh-water
earth, where he had not at the time been able to detect N. cuspi-
data.

" Frustules of N. craticula occur on the Society's slide, having
one-eighth the length of N. cuspidata; and likewise frustules of
N. craticula as large as N. cuspidata. The N. cuspidata of this
deposit are relatively very large and strongly lined, and, side by
side with Stauroneis ph(Enicenteron, are very striking under study.
Duplicates of either of these slides, in the hands of expert system-
atists, would furnish data to extend present knowledge or clear
up disputed and doubtful points, as the case may be."

The Corresponding Secretary also presented an additional
communication from Mr. Cunningham, accompanying a dona-
tion of packets of gravel, and dated Houston, Texas, October
14th, 1892, as follows:

" A visitor at Houston, Texas, would be at once impressed by
the immense use made of a certain kind of coarse gravel as bal-
last for the various railroad tracks, and for surfacing the streets
of the city ; and, if he v/ere a mineralogist, he would at once
recognize the presence of petrified wood richly associated with
this gravel. In order to place them before the Society, I have
made a selection of about a dozen different specimen varieties of
these very highly silicified woods. The specimens present some-

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 15

thing of structural interest even on casual examination, and they
are likewise well adapted to making very fine thin rock sections.
This gravel is brought from near Leadbetter, Lee Co., Texas, not
far from the Colorado River, and the bulk of the gravel is of a
flinty nature, seeming to be of calcareous fossil strata, altered
through silicification.

" I have sent, with the fossil wood, a specimen of oolitic and
foraminiferal flint, nearly equal in translucency to the chalk flints
of the British coast, which can be taken as a type of the flinty
gravel of the Colorado River basin.

" In another package I have sent five specimens of a cretaceous
or calcareous gravel from San Antonio, Texas, where it is exten-
sively used in the park walks and the pavements around the city.
Most of this gravel is in the shape of ovoid or spherical balls, and,
if broken in two, are found to be composed of concentric, spher-
ical, concretionary layers, that may be detached continually until
the central core, or nucleus, is found. In the specimens sent I
have polished each face, to show the peculiar crystalline deposit,
from the central nucleus to the outer margin. The two larger
pieces are from the one original, and may be fitted together to
illustrate the ovoid shape. Inspection suggests that thin sec-
tions, when examined with the polariscope, would give concentric
radial color effects, which would prove quite interesting. I
noticed that children in San Antonio played with them as mar-
bles, using, of course, the roundest that could be found.

"These gravel specimens possibly illustrate a recomposition
product of calcareous strata, as in limestone caves, and then, while
in solution, redepositing upon some granule or fragment as a
nucleus, and gradually augmenting by the same law of calcareous
deposition indefinitely, as the balls vary from very small to very
large, in the general mass of gravel as distributed. Single and
double centres of concretionary action may be noted in the seve-
ral specimens."

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Micrococcus pneujnonicus Friedlander, under a Zeiss one-
twelfth homogeneous immersion lens: by Charles S. Shultz.

2. Bacillus tuberculosis, under a Spencer one-tenth homogeneous
immersion lens : by Charles S. Shultz.

3. Comma bacillus, X 900 : by Louis Heitzmann.

16 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

4. The "S" form of the same, X 1,000: by Louis Heitz-

MANN.

5. Test-tube cultures of the same: by Louis Heitzmann.

6. Slide of mucous membrane of a patient in Calcutta: by L.

SCHONEY.

7. Photomicrograph of the same: by L. Schoney.

8. Radial section of the thallus of Nostoc sphericum Vauch : by
J. L. Zabriskie.

9. Living specimens of the same in water: by J. L. Zabriskie.
Dr. Louis Heitzmann, of New York, being introduced by the

Vice-President, read the paper announced on the programme, en-
titled " The Cause of Asiatic Cholera." This paper is published
in this number of the Journal, page 7.

Dr. George M. Sternberg, of Brooklyn, being introduced by
the Vice-President, gave many interesting and valuable points of
information on the action and prevention of cholera. He stated,
with other items, that the spirillum is quickly killed by desicca-
tion. If little squares of infected blanket are exposed to sunlight
two, three, and four hours, it is found that the spirillum will grow
after two hours' exposure, but not after four hours' exposure.
Sunlight is one of the best disinfectants. In the late operations
of the quarantine of our port many articles of clean linen were
injured by the steam process, when a little sunlight would have
been equally effective. In future operations, doubtless, sunlight
would be much employed. With ordinary care nurses of cholera
patients do not contract the disease. There is no great danger
from germs wafted over in the air from an infected region.

A discussion of the subject also ensued, participated in by Dr.
Carl Heitzmann, Dr. Louis Heitzmann, Dr. L. Schoney, Rev.
George E. F. Haas, and others.

On motion the thanks of the Society were tendered Dr. Louis
Heitzmann and Dr. George M. Sternberg for their interesting
addresses.

Meeting of November 4TH, 1892

The President, Mr. J. D. Hyatt, in the chair.
Twenty-six persons present.

Dr. Arthur Mead Edwards was elected a Corresponding Mem-
ber of the Society.

l893-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 17

The following Committee on Annual Exhibition was appointed
by the Chair : Dr. E. G. Love, Dr. F. D. Skeel, Mr. Charles S.
Shultz.

The Corresponding Secretary read a communication from Mr.
K. M. Cunningham, dated Houston, Texas, October 28th, 1892,
accompanying the donation of a package of tripoli, as follows:

"I forward to the Society a cabinet specimen of tripoli de-
rived from a superficial outcrop near Navasota, Texas. After
having submitted it to a micro-analysis I am able to present the
following points of interest in relation thereto. The deposit pre-
sents a striking interest geologically, as it appears to be of com-
posite origin, as developed during its analysis. Ninety percent of
the mass may be regarded as made up of what may be alumina in
its most highly divided state, or, if not alumina, an amorphous sil-
ica, all of which may be completely removed by elutriation. The
heavier sediment remaining is found to be volcanic glass, or some
like product of igneous fusion, as indicated by its physical char-
acters, viz., complete transparency, flat angular fragments, free-
dom from admixture with the ordinary silicious, rounded, and
abraded grains derived from the decomposition of the azoic or
granitic rocks, and whose protean distribution is known to all who
have made sands a study. The particles composing this glass are
further characterized as being thin plates, filled with vesicles and
tubuli, which are very evident in any of the media used in an ex-
amination of the same. Examined dry (in air), the vesicles or
minute bubbles are very evident, while in balsam they are nearly
obliterated. Likewise the tubuli in balsam are differentiated or
made quite plain, and finally become indistinct as the balsam in-
vades the air channels of the tubuli; and if the study is made
with bisulphide of carbon as a medium, the fragments and plates
show with double intensity. (The bisulphide of carbon I refer
to is used for patching shoes, and costs ten cents a bottle any-
where, and is called 'quick cement,' and offers a useful medium
for the immediate study of diatoms, giving intense and brilliant
images before evaporation takes place.)

" If it be admitted that this glass is of volcanic origin, we must
necessarily recur to the conditions under which it became a part
of this deposit. To do so we are brought face to face with the
hypothesis of volcanic dust showers, transported through aerial

18 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

currents from distant centres of eruptive activity, and finally
settling down on some aqueous area, as a gentle and intermitting
rain of mineral particles, during a lengthy period of time. The
deposit from which the specimen came is five feet in thickness,
and is known to underlie a relatively wide area. Intimately asso-
ciated with this mineral basis are several kinds of fossil organic
microscopic remains, as smooth, non-tubercular, arcuate sponge
spicules, crystalline spheres, intermediate in their characters be-
tween the polycistinse and the fossil gemmules of sponges. The
spheres have in some instances surface ornamentation of minute
bosses, and in others short pyramidal processes or points, giving
them a stellate appearance. These spherules had never hitherto
been observed by me in any of the many preparations of fossil
■earths examined. I also saw a few discs, which may be diatoms,
but they were unfamiliar shapes to me.

" Touching what has preceded, it is a matter of geological record
that in the territory contiguous to the canons of the Colorado
River, and between the Rocky Mountains and Sierra Nevada,
there have been observed vast deposits or strata of fresh-water in-
fusorial origin, alternating between beds of volcanic tuffs, lava,
and other phenomena of volcanic activity characterizing the
struggle between the igneous and aqueous elements for supremacy,
in that rock-ribbed region of the earth, now in a state of compa-
rative quiescence. The deposit varies in its composition. Some
of the material is as white as chalk and has no admixture of
alumina to bind the grains together, and it can be dissipated as
dust by dry brushing. When a mount of this is made it shows
purely the glassy, angular plates, and nothing else. The eco-
nomic value of the deposit, either as tripoli or kaolin, has
not been overlooked by the commercial instinct, and a sample of
the porcelain made from it, and just received from England,
shows that it is not adapted to making white porcelain or china-
ware, as a cube of it burned into a sort of salmon-colored, trans-
lucent glass. A previous trial of it at Pittsburg reported it as
unfit for porcelain ware, on account of an oxide of iron that
contaminated it."

On motion the thanks of the Society were tendered Mr. Cun-
ningham for this donation and communication.

Mr. Stephen Helm read the paper announced on the programme,

1893-.] ' NEW-YORtC MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 19

entitled " Notes on Cordylophora lacustris and Melicerta ringens.'
This paper was illustrated by objects under microscopes and by
blackboard drawings, and is published in this number of the
Journal, page i.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

I. Octocella libertas Helm, living: by Stephen Helm.

• 2. Cordylophora lacustris Allman, living : by Stephen Helm.

3. Lagotia cceruleus Helm, living : by Stephen Helm.

4. Lophopus crystalltmis, living : by F. W. Devoe-

5. Statoblasts of the same : by F. W. Devoe.

Dr. Romyn Hitchcock, a Corresponding Member, being called
upon by the President, gave some reminiscences of the time of
his resident membership, and complimented the Society on its
vitality and industry.

Mr. F. W. Devoe called attention to the beautiful action of the
statoblasts of Lophopus crystallinusm his exhibit, revolving inside
their gelatinous sacks by means of cilia inserted on the margin of
the disc between the anchors.

Dr. F. D. Skeel explained a substage, made for him at his sug-
gestion by the Bausch &: Lomb Optical Company, consisting of a
plain circular stage with clips, to be inserted at pleasure in the
substage ring of the microscope, of great usefulness in operations
with low powers, avoiding the extreme racking back of the body
and the risk of overturning the instrument.

PUBLICATIONS RECEIVED.

The American Monthly Microscopical Journal : Vol. XIII., Nos. 9, 10
(September, October, 1892).

The Microscope: Vol. XII., Nos. 9, 10 (September, October, 1892).

The Botanical Gazette : Vol. XVII., Nos. 5— 11 (May— November, 1892).

Natural Science Association of Stalen Island : Proceedings, Meetings of
September 10, October 15, 1892).

Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club: Vol. XIX., Nos. 9 — 11 (September —
November, 1892).

Insect Life: Vol. V., Nos i, 2 (September, November, 1892).

Psyche : Vol. VI., Nos. 198 — 200 (October — December, 1892).

The Observer: Vol. III., Nos. 10, 11 (October, November, 1892).

Anthony's Photographic Bulletin: Vol. XXIIL, Nos. 17 — 22 (September 10
- — November 26, 1892).

20 JOURNAL OF THE [January

Carnell University Agricultural Experiment Station : Bulletins Nos. 42 — 44
(September, October, i8g2).

Agricultural Experiment Station of Alabama; Bulletin No. •^S (July, 1892).

Agricultural Experiment Station of Michigan : Bulletin No. 87 (September,
1892).

Agricultural Experiment Station of Iowa : Bulletin No. 17 (May, 1892).

Agricultural Experiment Station of Texas : Bulletin No. 21 (June, 1892).

Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia : Proceedings , Part II,
(April— October, 1892).

Journal of the Franklin Institute ; Vol. CXXXIV., Nos. 803, 804 (Novem-
ber, December, 1892).

Bulletin of the Essex Institute : Vol. XXIV.. Nos. 4— 6(April — June, 1892).

Transactions of the Massachusetts Horticultural Society : Parts i, 2(1892).

The Post-1-aramie Beds of Middle Park, Colorado: by the author, Whitman
Cross (October, 1892).

Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society : 1S92, Part 5.

International Journal of Microscopy and Natural Science : Vol. II., Part
16 (October, 1892).

Grevillea : Vol. XXI., No. 97 (September, 1892).

Proceedings of the Natural History Society of Glasgow : Vol. III., Part 2
(189:).

Penzmce Natural History and Antiquarian .Society : Report and Transac-
tions (1892).

North Staffordshire Naturalists' Field Club : Report and Transactions,
Vol. XXVI. (1892).

Bristol Naturalists' Society : Report and Proceedings, Vol. VII., Part i
(1892).

The Naturalist : Nos. 206, 207 (September, October, 1892).

Canadian Record of Science : Vol. V., Nos. 3, 4 (July, October, 1892).

Geological Survey of Canada : Annual Report, Parts D, N (1891).

The Ottawa Naturalist: Vol. VI., Nos. 5 — 7 (September — November, 1892).

Le Diatomiste : No 10 (September, 1892).

The Victorian Naturalist : Vol. IX., Nos. 4 — 6 (August — October, 1892).

Australian Museum : Records, Vol. II., Nos. 2, 3 (August, 1892) ; Report
(1892).

Naturhistorische Gesellschaft zu Nurnberg : Proceedings, Vol. IX. (1892).

Sociele Beige de Microscopie : Bulletin, Vol. XVI [I., Nos. 8 — 10 (June —
October. 1892;; Annals, Vol. XVI. (1892).

Le Botaniste : Vol. III., Nos. 2, 3 (August. 1892).

La Notarisia ; Vol. VII., No. 31 (June, 1892).

Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano : Vol. XXIV., No. 4 (October, 1892).

Bulletino deila Societa Botanica Italiana : No. 7 (1892).

Revus Internationale de Bibliographic Medicale : Vol. XIII., Nos. 15 — 21
(August 10 — November 10, 1892).

Wissenschaftlicher Club in Wien : Monatsblatter, Vol. XIII., No. 11 —

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 21

Vol. XIV., No. I (August — October, 1892) ; Ausserordentliche Beilage, Vol.
XIV., No. I (1892).

L' Academic d'Hippone : Bulletin No. 24 (1888 — 1890); Comptes rendus
(March 30, 1892).

Sociedad Cientifica "Antonio Alzate " : Memorias, Vol. VI., Nos. i, 2
(1892).

I'euille des Jeunes Naturalistes : Vol. XXII., Nos. 253 — 263 (November,
1891 — September, 1892).

The Satellite: Vol. VI., Nos. i — 3 (September — November, 1S92).

Indiana Medical Journal : Vol. XI., Nos. 3 — 5 (September — November,
1892).

The Hahnemannian Monthly: Vol. XXVII., Nos. 10 — 12 (October — De-
cember, 1892).

The Brooklyn Medical Journal : Vol. VI., Nos. 10 — 12 (October — Decem-
ber. 1892).

Johns Hopkins University Circulars: Vol. XII., No. loi (November, 1892).

The American Lancet : Vol. XVI., Nos. 9 — ir (September — November,
1892).

National Druggist : Vol. XXI., Nos. 5 — 10 (September i — November 15,
1S92).

Mining and Scientific Review : Vol. XXIX , Nos. 9 — 21 (September i —
November 24, 1892).

The Weekly Bulletin : Vol. II., Nos. 59 — 71 (September 3 — November 25,
1892).

J OURN AL

OF THE

NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY

Vol. IX. APEIL, 1893. No. 2.

SUGGESTIONS IN MICROSCOPICAL TECHNIQUE.

BY ALEXIS A. JULIEN, PH.D.
iRead January 20ih, 1893.)

In microscopical investigation of organic structures, success
largely depends, sometimes entirely, on their approximately perfect
preservation in the form of mounted preparations. In the living or-
ganism or a freshly cut slice of tissue, details of the utmost impor-
tance may be entirely invisible, which could, however, be clearly
brought out only by skilful staining, by patient experiment in
search of the most suitable medium for mounting, or by long-con-
tinued study under varied methods of illumination or with per-
sistent efforts at resolution, to which only a suitably and perma-
nently mounted object could be subjected. The main object,
then, in perfection of permanent mounts, must be, not beauty,
nor even the permanent preservation of an interesting object, but,
above all, the retention and revelation of its true structure. Un-
fortunately this has not been the prevailing opinion in all labora-
tories of investigation ; students are often found to have been
encouraged or permitted to content themselves, and save time, with
some hurried and careless method or step, at a point short of
a perfectly completed mount.

The way in which a microscopist finishes, or even merely labels a
mount, may often indicate his degree of care and skill in the preced-

24 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

ing preparation of the object, and its real value. It is from the
point of view, therefore, that no pains can be taken too great for
the proper completion of a mount, that the following suggestions
are offered on methods devised and mostly in use, for several
years past, in the Laboratory of Microbiology of Columbia
College, New York. Some of these have been carried over the
country by our graduates and so made known to a certain de-
gree, but, to my knowledge, have not been otherwise published.

I. Carrier of Cover-Impressions.

In the collection of cover-impressions of various organisms, in
the field, such as films of diatoms just spread upon thin covers,
desmids, blood corpuscles, pollen, etc., it is sometimes impos-

FlG. I.

sible, while travelling rapidly, to dry the covers and safely pack
them up at once for conveyance in small boxes, in the usual way.
On one occasion, five years ago, while collecting upon covers the
mycoderm-films of certain bacteria and fungi in the hilly country
of Western Massachusetts, I felt the need of some convenient
apparatus for immediate storage of the covers, while still moist,
so that they might be carried with safety, without adherence,
abrasion of the film, or breakage. A hint of a convenient method
came from a note by F. L. James' on a simple cover-glass
holder, consisting of a coil of brass spiral spring wire, bent
around a groove in a cork, the whole being mounted upon a little
wooden stand for laboratory use. This suggested the little car-
rier here presented (Fig. i ), in which the cork (C), encircled by the
~~~~~ 1 Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. (1887), 693.

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 25

spring (S), is wired to the bottom of a small, round pasteboard
box. A thin, loose roll of soft Japanese paper against the inner
side of the box prevents the dislodgment of any covers inserted
in the coils of the spring ; and the box, when closed, can be easily
carried in the pocket.

II. Gas Mounting- Stand.

In place of the small mounting-table with alcohol lamp, ordina-
rily used by themicroscopist, the little adjustable mounting-stand
with gas attachment, here exhibited, has been in use for several
years in our laboratory, having been somewhat modified from
time to time until it has reached this form. It has the advantage
of economy, especially in laboratory use with young students, on
account of its tiny gas-jet ; it is portable, adjustable, and easily
taken apart ; convenient in the long retention of heat by the sand-
box attached beneath the mounting-plate ; and affords support on
the ring for small evaporations, or for gentle warming or diges-
tion, when the ring is adjusted over the mounting-plate. A
thumb-screw attachment to the arm of the burner, for clamping
it to the upright rod, might be convenient, but is easily dispensed
with. In the form here shown, the stand has been made for us
for some time, both in New York and Philadelphia, and has
■probably been elsewhere supplied by the manufacturers.

The improvement I have now to present consists in the conver-
sion of the burner, which is often objectionable on account of its
smoky flame, into a minute Bunsen burner an inch in length.
This is easily accomplished by slipping over the nipple a little
tube of brass foil, easily made by any one in a couple of minutes,
or, better, of brass tubing, of about six millimetres in diameter,
with two small air-holes, on opposite sides, near the bottom, as
in a Bunsen burner.

The blue, hot, and clean flame thus obtained is not only best
fitted for ordinary heating in microscopical processes, as for burn-
ing off the soiled point of a mounting-needle, without soot, but is
particularly useful in bacteriological manipulations. Thus, the
drying of bacteria-films upon covers is commonly done by passing
the thin cover back and forth, three times, through the compara-
tively huge flame of an ordinary Bunsen burner, at the speed of
"a knife cutting bread." In place of this rough method, the

26 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

covers are laid by us a certain time, say five seconds, on the
mounting-plate, heated at the height of five centimetres above the
miniature Bunsen burner with a flame one centimetre in height ;
or directly over this flame, at a certain height for a iew seconds.
The heating in this way is far more uniform than by the common
method, the films are well dried but not roasted, and more satis-
factory results maybe expected in the subsequent staining. What
could be a more disproportionate, wasteful, and absurd process
than the common one of warming a tiny thin cover, of the size
of one's little finger nail, over a rush of flame six or seven inches
in height !

III. Staining- Flask.

The staining of films which have been dried upon covers,
such as bacteria or blood corpuscles, especially when heat is re-
quired, often leads, by the common methods, to imperfect or
erroneous results in inexperienced hands. Sometimes the stain,
after having been heated up in a test-tube, is thrown in a watch-
glass, and the cover floated upon it, film downward (Gibbes'
method).

The usual method is to hold the cover, with the film uppermost,
between the fingers or in a forceps, add a drop or two of the
stain, and heat over a low flame until steaming vapors rise from
the stain. Though simple, this is troublesome where many films
need staining at one time or in succession. There is also a ten-
dency of the stain to dry in an overheated ring around the edge
of the cover as well as to deposit granules of color, which, in
some cases, adhere firmly to the film and cannot be removed by
washing. This is more likely to occur when long heating is needed
to stain the object to sufficient depth of color ; the little drop
evaporates rapidly, and constant attention is needed to keep it
supplied with fresh additions of stain.

In place of these methods, the following simple apparatus has
been in satisfactory use in our laboratory for many years. It
consists of the following parts :

I . A tight coiled spring (Fig. 2, A), as a cover-holder, in which
a large number of thin covers may be clamped by insertion be-
tween successive coils. It is made from a spring of fine brass,
copper, or steel wire, not coarser than No. 26 gauge, wound on a
one quarter inch mandrel. It is best made from fine platinum

'893.]

NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

27

wire, of the usual gauge for blowpipe-work, its temper having
been removed before the winding, and restored afterward by
quick annealing, plunging while red-hot into cold water. The
wire at one end of the coil is bent into a little loop for suspen-
sion. After long continued use, the platinum wire has the special
advantage of being easily purified and retempered by heating to
red heat and again plunging in cold water.

2. A small, wide mouthed flask (Fig. 2, B) to hold the staining-
solution. This may have a capacity of about forty cubic centi-

0/

Fig. 2.

metres, with an aperture at the mouth of at least two centimetres.
To this a wide cork (Fig. 2, C) is somewhat loosely fitted, on the
under side of which is stuck a pin bent into hook-form, from
which the coil A may be hung. This flask, when in use, is kept
about two-thirds filled with the desired staining-solution.

3. A wide mouthed, glass-stoppered bottle (Fig. 2, D), of the
same aperture as the flask, to hold the second solution, which is
often required, as a mordant.

For example, in the staining of bacteria-films dried upon
covers, the flask B will receive the solution of campechian or
other stain, and the bottle D the mordant solution of sodium

28 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

chromate or tannin ; or, in Luffler's method, B the hot mordant,
and D the colorant. The covers are to be first firmly inserted in the
coil with the help of a knife-blade, with the films downward, and
so suspended from the cork. In the campechian staining method,
the stain in the flask is previously brought up to the boiling point
by holding it a few minutes over a flame. The cork is then in-
serted, making sure that the covers remain entirely immersed in
the hot stain. The apparatus is left upon a mounting-table, so
heated as to keep the liquid very near or just below the boiling
point, and there allowed to remain for the length of time desired
in any particular case, which may even be an hour or more. A
large number of covers may be thus stained at one time, with little
needed attention. The cork is finally lifted out of the flask, and
the coil, without removal of the covers, is plunged into successive
beakers of distilled water until the covers are thoroughly washed
from excess of stain. Then the glass stopper is removed from
the bottle and replaced by the cork, so that the coil with its
burden of covers now remains plunged in the mordant for the
requisite time.

It may be added that the staining-flask is useful as well in many
cases where there is call for long and slow staining of films on
covers in a cold solution. The handling of thin covers in mass,
by this method, rather than individually, is found to diminish
greatly their liability to breakage.

IV. Condensed Air- Film.

We have next to consider a long neglected source of the air-
bubbles which form a constant annoyance to the working micro-
scopist. At times they may only indicate the content of air
originally dissolved in the cold preservative, expelled by warming
it. and likely to be entirely reabsorbed in the course of time, after
the cooling of the mount. Frequent instances of this occur, espe-
cially in the use of warmed glycerin jelly, melted Canada balsam,
and dammar. More commonly they may be derived from entan-
glement with the fibres of a filamentous object, enclosure in the
pores or empty cells of a cellular object, or simply from mechan-
ical attachment to the cell-wall or to the cover, overlooked in hasty
mounting without sufficient use of the pocket lens. Their neglect
in such instances may injure the appearance of a mount and inter-

1S93.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 29

fere with observation, by the coalescence of several minute fixed
bubbles into a large movable one. This may lead to harm by
weakening the mount, disturbing the object as the bubble rolls
about, and tending to foster germ-life for its destruction.

In cases, however, of extreme care toward their avoidance,
the experienced microscopist has been repeatedly surprised and
disgusted by the mysterious appearance of minute air-bubbles, in a
hermetically sealed mount, from some unknown source. To that
source I would call attention, in the film of condensed air
and moisture which has been shown to be firmly attached, under
ordinary conditions, to the surface of all solid bodies, and which
has been best studied on the surface of metal and glass.

The following precautions are taken in our laboratory against
this invisible enemy :

1. As the air-film can be removed by friction, all plain slides
and the interior of cells are briskly rubbed just before using. The
microscopist unfamiliar with the difficulty would content himself
by merely dusting an apparently clean slide.

2. The stock of glass covers is thoroughly cleaned at one
time by immersion in Seller's solution (one part saturated solution
of potassium dichromate in three parts of concentrated sulphuric
acid) for about an hour, thorough washing successively in common
and then in distilled water, and immersion in strong alcohol.
In the latter the covers are allowed to remain, in a wide mouthed
glass-stoppered bottle of about thirty cubic centimetres capacity.
Just before use each cover is taken out and well rubbed, dried,
and placed on a warm mounting-table, so that it may be applied
to the mount chemically and microscopically clean and entirely
devoid of the air-film, which ordinarily soon becomes condensed
upon a cold glass cover.

3. All preservatives are kept slightly warmed just before use,
and the object is soaked in distilled water recently boiled and
cooled, and therefore strongly absorbent of air.

The insertion of a mount in a vacuum, under the bell-jar of a
convenient air-pump, for a short time just before it is to be cov-
ered, isauseful precaution, especially with an object consisting of
more or less tangled fibres, or of a cellular character with partially
empty cavities. But I have not found that the condensed air-
film can be removed in that way.

30

JOURNAL OF THE

[April,

V. Supply Can for Sterilized Non-aerated Water.

A little flask, fitted as a wash-bottle, will usually suffice to
supply a small quantity of water, recently boiled, cooled, and free
from dissolved air.

But when there is need of a less fragile apparatus for more con-
stant or larger supply, and, especially in bacteriological research,
it is desirable to have at hand a reservoir of sterilized water, the
following apparatus will be of service. A cylindrical can (Fig. 3),
made of copper or tin, and of any desired capacity, is covered
with a tightly fitting cap, which can be removed for cleaning the

Fig. 3.

interior. In the centre of the cap an automatic escape-valve (V)
for steam is inserted. From the side of the can, at the bottom,
a supply-pipe runs out a few inches horizontally, ending in a fau-
cet. The can, thoroughly cleaned and scalded out, is nearly filled
with distilled water and heated over a burner to boiling, for a
couple of hours. While the steam is actively escaping from the
valve, a wad of sterilized cotton (W) is quickly wrapped about
the valve, and the burner removed. The wad is fastened with a
turn of a piece of wire, and a cone of filter paper thrust over the
end of the supply-pipe, to protect it from dust. When sterilized
water is needed, the paper cone is removed, the end of the pipe
flamed, and the faucet turned.

VI. Mountino^ Medium for A/gce and Fungi.
The microscopic objects and structures which receive the at-

1893.] NEW- YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 21

tention of the naturalist are constituted, in by far the largest
number of cases, of formed, non-contractile material. Even deli-
cate tissues consist, in large part, of sacs, sheaths, or other enve-
lopes enclosing protoplasm or sarcode, but themselves constituted
of formed material, such as cellulose, chitin, etc., able to resist
heat or partial desiccation or dehydration without much distor-
tion. For the numerous objects of this vastly predominant class-
many good mounting media have been found. Their sheaths,
carapaces, and skeletons being tough and stout enough to resist
most of the tendency to distortion produced by the contraction
of the minutely divided protoplasm they contain, the processes
and the preservatives employed answer a useful purpose. By
selective absorption of stains, or by exceedingly delicate contrac-
tions or expansions effected by treatment with acids, absorbents
of water, etc., particular details of organic structure become pe-
culiarly colored, swollen, or shrunk, and so rendered prominent
by contrast and more easily distinguishable. Most histological
preparations, for example, by their vari-colored tissues, intensified
nuclei, etc., serve to convey supposed or established facts from'
one observer to others. For such purpose, these methods are
legitimate and most useful, but may be, and generally are, just as
artificial as those of drawing and photography for the true repre-
sentation of structure.

But, on the other hand, for the permanent preservation of liv-
ing contractile matter, without immediate or ultimate contraction
and distortion, such as the protoplasmic contents of thin walled
cells of fresh-water algse, water fungi, bacteria, rhizopods, infu-
sorians, etc., no satisfactory medium has yet been found. This
is an entirely different problem from that above considered, and
for its solution the elements of the higher tissues, with their mi-
nute subdivision of contractile matter in granules and cylinders
often less than ten microns in diameter, afford too diminutive a
field for exact microscopic discrimination of effects produced by
various processes and reagents.

But he who attempts to preserve an object like amoeba, the
cell contents of a desmid or spirogyra, bacteria in zoogloea, etc.,
cannot deceive himself in regard to his limited degree of success,,
as he notices the contracting contour of the comparatively huge
mass of protoplasm. Only an object of this class, however, cani

32 JOURNAL OF THE " [April,

serve for a sufificiently delicate test of minute movements in the
outline of the protoplasm itself, which, in ordinary objects and
in tissue sections, might entirely escape observation.

It is surely possible to predicate and classify the main causes
to which must be due the shrinking or swelling, distortion and
disintegration, which, sooner or later, are seen in progress within
the cells of most mounted preparations of organic material.
Thence we may deduce certain principles of selection or exclu-
sion, which we may apply toward the various reagents, mix-
tures, and solvents which claim fitness for this service. The care-
ful synthesis of formulae according to this system ought to clear
out of our way, once for all, a large number of unsuitable re-
agents; to put a stop to the concoction of merely experimental
formulae; and to bring us much sooner into possession of satis-
factory processes. It is now proposed to offer a brief statement
of the chief causes of alteration of organic structures, when im-
mersed in so-called fixing and hardening solutions and preserva-
tives.

I. Alteration by Chafige of Natural Conditions or by Death. —
When we attempt to watch and unravel the lovely phenomena
•of life thrilling and pulsating within the field of the microscope,
great care and skill are needed to preserve those natural condi-
tions, within which it is possible, even in the living organism, to
recognize the normal forms and relationships of its structure. By
any change of temperature, produced by the heat of the room or
lamp, or the coldness of the metal of the stand; by lack or excess
of moisture, oxygen, or light ; by vibration or jar ; by offensive
vapors in the atmosphere, carbon dioxide gas from the observer's
breath, or the volatile solvents that are kept or used in the labora-
tory ; and perhaps by still more subtle but efficient causes of dis-
turbance, morbid and unnatural changes in the contractile mat-
ter may be produced which are difficult or impossible to avoid.

But artificial trial by means of chemicals, as fixatives and
stains, by dissection and vivisection, however useful or indispen-
•sable for study of special elements, tends to be still more fatal to
accurate discrimination of protoplasmic forms in general mor-
phology.

And, for this purpose, death ends all ; instantaneous coagula-
tion and alteration ensue ; our slow recognition of cadaveric

J893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 33

ichanges is due only to the imperfection of our apparatus and
methods. Even the special absorption of certain stains by the
living protoplasm of plants and animals is almost always attended
with extreme irritation and then their death by poisoning ; it is
not yet safe to assume that such a death is not accompanied by
morbid change, however imperceptible hitherto, in many cases,
by our best skill in observation.

Partial success, it is true, has been obtained by the use of
■paralyzing reagents, such as cocain ; but in general, as Hofer
observes, " a simultaneous swelling of the protoplasm occurs, so
that, although the topographical conditions are retained, the his-
■tological details are in many cases destroyed."

A general acknowledgment of the fact, therefore, that a mount-
ed preparation, however useful as an accessory source or illustra-
tion of special facts, can only be a mummy, or a slice of a mum-
my, never a satisfactory substitute for the living protoplasm of the
original tissue or organism, would have a tendency to clear the
air of much controversial vapor, our literature of interminable
'discussion, and our life work of a vast amount of wasted labor.
It seems at first discouraging, but I think it is true.

The partial success in the past, however, leads us to hope that,
■by more systematically devised processes and formulse. We may
succeed in arresting protoplasmic change so speedily and thor-
oughly, as to cause the organisms embalmed in our cells to re-
tain a far more life-like approximation to their original structure.
To this end, precaution must be taken to guard against the causes
of distortion yet to be considered.

2. Contraction by Chemical Reaction. — The jelly-like contents
of the cells may be diminished by slow solution or by chemical
reactions gradually produced through some constituent of the
surrounding medium. Alcohol, in any proportion, should there-
fore be omitted, on account of its known solvent action upon
chlorophyll and other coloring matters ; its dilution signifies only
delay in solvent attack. Any acid, moreover, especially if inor-
ganic (with a few exceptions, like carbon dioxide), has a ten-
dency to produce contraction ; this apparently consists of actual
disintegration and destruction of sarcode in time, particularly
rapid in that of protozoa, amoeba, and the coelenterata. This
■tendency may be very u-seful in bringing out certain structures

34 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

by development of contrast. Of this common examples are
found in the use of acetic or chromic acid in differentiation of
nuclear structure ; of picric acid in direct staining of tissues ; of
osmic acid in fixation of tissues, and in coloration of fat through
deoxidation. But there is every reason to believe that the j^roto-
plasmic elements, in the tissues or organisms so accentuated or
colored, no more remain in their original condition than, for
example, the threads of muscular fibre teased out with needles
by a laboratory student for the purpose of more easy distinction.
In this connection we may remark the significant change of
opinion ' of such authorities as Berthold, Schwartz, Kolliker, and
others, on the subject of the true structure of protoplasm, who
now look upon the reticulum and fibrils, recognized by From-
mann, Arnold, and others in sections of tissues so treated, as
being only artificial products.

All these acids, then, together with their salts, such as ammo-
nium and potassium dichromates, and mixtures like Miiller's fluid^
Erlicki's fluid, Lang's solution, etc., need to be rejected for our
present purpose. The only ones likely to be found useful, in
high dilution, are such organic acids as exist in living tissues,
possibly such as oxalic, malic, citric, etc., in plants, and sarcodic,
lactic, butyric, etc., in animals. As a rule, the mounting medium
for which we are now searching should probably be neutral in its
reaction, for most objects.

This conclusion condemns at once and altogether, for preserva-
tion of protoplasmic forms, the use of the resinous media, so
excellent for general purposes of mounting — Canada balsam (so
often the refuge of the lazy microscopist, wishing to avoid the
construction of a cell), gum dammar, copaiba, copal, and styrax.
The objection to these is founded not only on their slight content
of organic acids, as well as of turpentine or similar solvent, but
also on the complicated series of processes required for the pre-
liminary dehydration and subsequent clearing. A glance at the
evidences of tedious torture of protoplasm in these long-drawn-
out processes ought to be sufficient to account easily for their
failure in the permanent preservation, without distortion, of the
natural forms of contractile matter within the interior of cells.

We have also to guard against the shrinking of living proto-

1 O. Blitschli, Sep. Abd. Verb. Deutsch. Zool. Gesell., 1891, 14-20.

l893-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 35

plasm in the presence of corrosive agents (in some cases, perhaps,
this shrinking inside of a cell-wall being the only movement it
has shown in life), as well as that due to " irritability," even after
"death. The irritating properties of the gold and platinum chlo-
rides, and the strong astringent properties of the alums, on which
is founded their usefulness in media for other purposes, are par-
ticularly objectionable, in my opinion, on account of the corre-
fsponding contraction they produce upon protoplasm. Therefore,
for this purpose, I am inclined to reject King's fluid for marine
algae (alum, mercuric chloride, and sea water) ; Wickersheimer's
preservative for algae, lichens, fungi, etc. (alum, common salt,
potassium nitrate, potassium carbonate, arsenious acid, distilled
water, glycerin, and methyl alcohol); an alga preservative (chloro-
form, glacial acetic acid, and distilled water) ; Pacini's preservative
for blood corpuscles (mercuric chloride, common salt, glycerin,
and distilled water) ; Morehouse's preservative for algce, desmids,
volvox, etc. (copper acetate, camphor water, distilled water,
glacial acetic acid, and glycerin) ; Meckel's, for protozoa
(chromic acid, acetic acid, platinum chloride, and water) ; pre-
servative for algae, characeee, and infusoria (salicylic acid, wood
vinegar, glycerin, and water) ; preservative for confervae (chloro-
form, glacial acetic acid, and water) ; Ripart's preservative for
^pirogyra and other algae (glacial acetic acid, camphor water, and
distilled water) ; preservative for algae, desmids, etc. (Deane's
•compound, Ralf's liquid, glycerin jelly, and solution of aluminum
acetate) ; preservative for entomostraca (carbolic acid, alcohol,
and water) ; Goadby's preservative ; boroglyceride (boracic acid
in glycerin) ; and a large number of others.

3. Contraciion by Absorption of Water. — This cuts off at once,
it seems to me, the use of all the dehydrating fixatives, hardening
solutions and preservatives, e.g.^ those in whose composition
either alcohol or glycerin has been used in any proportion what-
ever. The fact that some such mixtures have seemed at least
comparatively satisfactory to investigators probably shows only
that contraction has progressed more slowly and distortion been
longer deferred. With half the percentage of the ingredient that
is greedy for water, the mounted object is ruined in two years
instead of one.

Notwithstanding the recent recommendation of Klein' for the

1 Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. (188^), 140, from Hedwigia.

36 JOURNAL OF THE [April^

preservation of the fresh-water algae, this is the main objection to
the use of pure or diluted glycerin, glycerin and camphor water,
camphor water and alcohol, glycerin jelly, Farrant's and Bul-
loch's media [i.e., mixtures of gum arabic and glycerin), etc.
The same objection may probably hold to the more complicated
mixtures, such as Heintzch's preservative for desmids, algse, etc.
(alcohol, glycerin, and distilled water), Hervey's preservative for
marine algae (glycerin and sea-water), etc

4. Contraction, or, it may be. Irregular Expansion, produced by
Osmotic Actiofi through the Cell Wall. — A most efficient cause of
alteration in shape of the colloidal masses inside of the wall must
probably lie in this interchange of liquid and soluble matters
with the medium outside. The greater the difference in density
(commonly aimed at for the sake of contrast in refractive index,
with corresponding improvement in definition), as when the ex-
ternal preservative is nearly pure water {c-g., camphor water), or
in solubility, as when the preservative is a strong saline solution,
the more active the osmosis and the more speedy the deforma-
tion. We may consequently expect that solutions of common
salt, potassium acetate, aluminum acetate, calcium chloride, etc.,
and the large number of preservatives made up of complex com-
binations of sundry salts, must be specially objectionable in this
way, where protoplasm forms are concerned; so also, perhaps,
even syrup, honey, dextrin, and solutions of gums, to some degree.

5. Contraction by Heat. — The more delicate forms of proto-
plasm, even after death, are commonly sensitive to very slight
elevations of temperature. This presents one serious objection
to the use of hot glycerin jelly, aside from that founded on the
absorption of water by its content of glycerin.

It is, of course, still more efficient for harm in the resinous
media, like balsam and dammir, and many others of higher re-
fractive index in which heat is used, such as sulphur and arse-
nious acid, realgar, etc.

We may, therefore, conclude that any medium requiring a
temperature much above 30° C. (say 85° F.) for sufficient fluidity is
unfitted for the preservation of protoplasm.

6. Disintegration by Bacteria and Minute Infusorians. — In
many or most cases a living object, plant or animal, when about
to be immersed in the fixing or hardening solution and the pre-

I893-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 37

servative, is already covered with myriads of these destructive
agents, either mature or in the condition of gonidia, spores, or
eggs. In mounts from hands inexperienced in regard to this
danger, one can find, long after the preparation was made, an
abundance of living forms, particularly bacteria, which must be
preying upon the mounted object. To 'meet this attack some
suitable and permanent germicide should be added in proper
quantity as a constituent of the preservative.

Mercuric chloride (corrosive sublimate), often used for this
purpose, should be avoided, in my opinion, on account of its un-
stable character, as it gradually loses chlorine and separates from
solution in the form of particles of calomel, feebly antiseptic if at
all; also on account of its corrosive nature, which tends to disin-
tegrate most forms of sarcode.

Most acids, like carbolic (phenol and thymol), salicylic, picric,
boracic, arsenious, chromic, etc., are equally unsuitable, on account
of their corrosive nature and acid reaction. Camphor may be of
little permanent value, on account of its slight solubility in water
solution — ^•^., in the form of " camphor water " — and also its ready
absorption by organic matter of the walls of the mounting cells.

As to chloral hydrate, there is increasing evidence as to its
possession of antiseptic power, as well as tendency to preserva-
tion of chlorophyll and coloring matters; while the satisfaction of
its affinity for water by a single molecule insures the absence of
farther dehydrating power.

There are also several copper salts which seem to possess the
same desirable qualities as chloral, especially the chloride and
nitrate, and the principal objection to the acetate appears to be
its instability.

In our own Laboratory experience, after trial of a large variety
of the preservatives in common use, we have found Petit^s solu-
tion apparently the most satisfactory for the preservation of fresh-
water algae and even colored fungi, with longest retention of both
form and color in the protoplasmic contents of their cells. This
conclusion is founded on an examination of several hundred
mounted preparations of these objects during a period of about
fifteen years past. The following is the well known modification '
of Ripart's published formula :

^ Internal. Jour. Micr. and Nat. Sci., 3 sen, ii. (1891), 177.

$8 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

Copper chloride (crystallized) 0.2 gm.

Copper nitrate " 0.2 "

Glacial acetic acid , 0.5 '•

Camphor water 50 c c.

Distilled water 50 c.c.

Shake up until solution, and filter.

After some time, however, we found it advisable not to use this
■solution in its full strength, but with the addition of an equal bulk
of boiled distilled water. More recently two further modifica-
tions of the formula have suggested themselves. First, the glacial
acetic acid should be omitted. Secondly, as the two copper
salts, even in the chemically pure form supplied in commerce,
have ordinarily an acid reaction, the free acids should be neutral-
ized in some way.

It should also be remarked that the nature of protoplasm itself
varies so greatly, as to constitution, density, color, transparency,
contractility, and other properties, that it is not at all probable
that a single preservative of universal application can ever be
devised, even for the forms of vegetable protoplasm.

The desirable qualities, in a mounting medium suited to pre-
serve aggregates of protoplasm in their original form, size, and
color, as seen within the organic cell, are the following :

Neutral reaction ; absence of dehydrating power ; density ap-
proaching that of protoplasm; fluidity below 30° C. ; content of
■efficient germicide ; and very low or very high refractive index.
Where, then, can we find this ideal preservative medium for
protoplasm? Only hitherto, 1 think, in the dreams of the hope-
ful naturalist.

In my own Laboratory our attention has been largely given to
the preservation of the fresh-water algae and water fungi. From
former experience we have hopes of success from the following
preservatives, now on trial.

A. Organisms with delicate walls and rather thin and watery en-
doplasm {e.g., desmids, beggiatoa, etc.). — A tiny grain of naptha-
lin is inserted, part way but firmly, into the inner side of the
cell-wall (paraffin or wax), and only the filtered native or mother
water of the organism (or boiled and cooled distilled water) is
used to fill the cell. In this we hope to have a substitute for
camphor water, with a more efficient and permanent germicide.

1893.] NEW-VORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY, 39

B. Organisms with endoplasm of oj-dinary density {e.g., most of
the filamentous algse). — This is a solution founded on experience
with Petit's preservative :

Copper chloride o.i gm.

Copper nitrate o. i "

Cliloral hydrate o. 5 "

Distilled water, just boiled 100 c.c.

From this solution, however, the trace of acidity must be
removed in this way: Another solution is prepared of a few
grammes of any soluble copper salt ; to this a weak solution of caus-
tic potassa is added in slight excess ; the precipitate of hydrated
copper oxide (CuH^Oj) thus obtained is washed thoroughly, first
by decantation and then upon a filter. This purified residue is then
thrown into the one hundred cubic centimetres of preservative
first prepared, and the whole frequently shaken at intervals un-
til a neutral reaction is shown by test papers, and then filtered.

C. Organisms ivith Apparently Dense Endoplasm. — To one
hundred cubic centimetres of Solution B add ten grammes of
gum arabic, in selected white grains, shake until solution, and
filter. Possibly gelatin may be found preferable to gum arabic.
The object of thickening the solution is to prevent any ten-
dency to osmosis ; though, of course, the approximation of
refractive index within and without the organism may tend to
decrease the definition.

VI [. Balsam- Paraffin for Cells.

The materials commonly used for cell construction, though of
excellent application, particularly shellac varnish, gold size.
Bell's cement, copal varnish, and zinc cement, are open to two
objections.

1. The freshly spun cells can only be used after baking or dry-
ing, which may require considerable length of time. This some-
times stretches into weeks or months in the case of gold size,
where the process of ripening is mainly one of oxidation.

2. The material, even after thorough drying, is gradually solu-
ble or liable to softening under the action of some of the con-
stituents of common preservatives, ]3articularly alcohol and inor-
ganic acids.

Id 1880 we began the use of paraffin for spun cells, and it has

40 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

been used continuously ever since in our laboratories. Its-
decided neutral reaction or indifference toward most chemical
reagents renders this a unique material for a cell-wall, from a
chemical point of view. It is but slightly soluble in alcohol,
though freely in ether, benzol, xylol, and turpentine. It is.
miscible with fixed or volatile oils when melted, and, I believe,
slowly when cold. Fortunately its strong solvents are rarely or
never employed in the constitution of preservatives.

The fitness of paraffin for cell-making has repeatedly occurred
to microscopists at home and abroad. A few years ago a sug-
gestion of its use for cells was published in a German scientific-
journal ; and more recently it has been recommended by F. N.
Pease' simply for ringing balsam mounts.

Nevertheless its use appears still to be limited, if not unknown,
in many laboratories, and no reference is made to it in the last
edition, by Dallmger, of Carpenter's work on "The Microscope.""
This has been caused, I think, by its insufficient adherence to glass.
Early in its use we 'found this defect indicated,fat times, by the
inability of a liquid mount in a paraffin cell to bear moderate
pressure without easy rupture, generally at the bottom of the
cell, next the slide. Paraffin, in cooling, does not form a homo-
geneous solid, but a congeries of crystals, often comparatively
coarse. Its deficiency seemed to call for the addition of some
substance of greater adhesive power, whose diffused particles
would also serve as nuclei to induce the consolidation of the
paraffin in a more minutely crystallized mass. This was easily
accomplished by previously saturating the parafifin with one of
the strongest cements, balsam-cement ; the result has proved
entirely satisfactory after use for nearly ten years. The follow-
ing are the details of the simple method. A supply of balsam-
cement is first prepared by slow evaporation of commercial
Canada balsam, in a shallow tin pan, over a low flame, until the
point is reached of wax-like consistence on cooling, as tested on-
drops removed and cooled from time to time.

For the parafifin the hardest variety in commerce is used, with
highest melting point, above 45° C (113° F.). After the stock
of this (say one-quarter of a pound) has been heated over a low

' Micr. Bull., vii. C1890), i.

. 1893] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 41

flame to the melting point, a small lump (say nut size) of the
balsam-cement is added, and the whole digested at gentle heat,
with frequent stirring, for about an hour, until the saturation of
the paraffin by balsam is shown by a slight yellowish tinge.
This colored paraffin contains less than five per cent, of balsam
and is now ready for use; a supply is poured into a shallow porce-
lain capsule with broad bottom, of about thirty cubic centimetres
capacity. When needed, this is heated upon the mounting-table
over a very low flame and kept just at the melting point. Over-
heating should be avoided, indicated by the escape of vapors, as
it tends to break up the paraffin into softer forms and also to
volatilize the diffused balsam-cement. At long intervals it may
be desirable to add a little more of the original hard stock to
the capsule, and a very small lump of balsam-cement. A com-
mon camel's-hair brush (extra sup. No. 2) is used to transfer
the paraffin, and, on account of the low melting point (63° C),
the brush needs no cleaning after use, and, if not allowed to re-
main too often in contact with the hot bottom of the capsule, it
lasts almost indefinitely. In use, the turn table should be placed
as near as possible to the cai)sule, and, if convenient, on the same
level. The glass slides on which the cells are to be spun should
also be kept warmed upon the mounting-table. If very shallow
cells are needed, mere films, suitable for mounting bacteria in
potassium acetate, the slides should be hot, and even a slight
warming of the turn-table may be of advantage if the room
should be cold. Cells may be thus spun at a single twirl of the
brush, shallow or deep, in proportion to the load of paraffin on
the brush and the mode of its application.

A paraffin cell is immediately ready for use after it is spun ;
this is one great advantage of the material overall others. Paraf-
fin cells spun in this way are well suited for dry mounts, as they
are free from moisture and do not give off the oily vapors whose
condensation, in cells made from sheet wax, has been found in
time to obscure the under surface of covers.

In using a paraffin cell for a mount with a liquid preserva-
tive, the first step is to flatten the top of the cell, which, if
the cell is deep, is apt to be convex. This can be done with a
stroke of a fine flat file, taking care to remove any loose particles
which might be thrown into the cell. This flattened surface

42 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

should be then moistened with a mere film of liquid marine glue;
the object and preservative then introduced ; the cover applied
and pressed down into contact with the sticky film of glue; the
excess of preservative which has exuded cleaned away with rolled
bits of absorbent paper; and a thin seal of paraffin then spun around
the joint between the cover and the cell. Both to strengthen the
seal, to protect the paraffin with a hard coat, and for appearance,
a thin coat of some finish is then spun over the whole surface of
the paraffin. This may be colored according to taste, such as
red sealing-wax varnish or black asphalt ; but in our labora-
tory a colorless finish is preferred, imparting a porcelain glaze
to the cell, such as gold size, liquid marine glue. King's colorless
■cement, rubber cement, etc. With a paraffin cell one may thus
finish the entire mount at once, without the necessity of waiting
.at any point for cell or seal to dry.

A limitation of the use of paraffin cells lies in the necessary
avoidance of oils as preservatives, as in the case of mounting
■crystals in kerosene or castor oil ; for this a cell of shellac varnish
or King's cement is best suited. Nor can liquid Canada balsam
or gum dammar be used with safety in a paraffin cell, on account
-of the attack of the turpentine, as a ready solvent of the paraffin
wall.

Colored varieties of balsam-paraffin are also of use, especially
black, white, and blue, made, respectively, by intermixture with
lampblack, with zinc oxide, and with Prussian blue, each thor-
oughly dried and carefully sifted through a fine lawn sieve. Heavy
powders, like white lead and vermillion, cannot be well used, on
account of rapid settling to the bottom of the melted paraffin.
Even with the three colors above mentioned, the mixture in the
capsule must be rapidly stirred just before the brush is loaded.

Only cells of some thickness can thus be made from colored
paraffin ; but, when the mount has been finally varnished with
one of the finishes already stated, the black paraffin assumes a
jet-like glaze, and the zinc paraffin a white enamel of great
beauty. The latter seems preferable to zinc cement, on account
of its uniformity, constant insolubility and impermeability toward
most preservatives.

Of course, in the use of paraffin mounts with a projection mi-
croscope, the insertion of the alum-cell is desirable, to prevent ele-

1893 ] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 43

vation of the temperature of the slide to a degree near the low
melting-point of paraffin.

The balsam-paraffin is well suited for making deep cells by
means of the Chapman mould, either in the simple form or col-
ored, ie., the black or the white zinc paraffin. Two precautions
need attention :

1. The mould should be kept well cleaned, and its inner surface
rubbed over with a very slight film of vaselin previous to use.
This prevents the adherence of the paraffin cell, which comes out
readily in perfect form.

2. On account of the low melting point of paraffin, it is difficult,
in the ordinary way, to cause the moulded cell to adhere perfectly
to the warmed slide, without partial fusion and injury. A paraffin
film should be first spun upon the slide, carefully warmed just to
the point of fusion, the moulded cell applied, and the whole quickly
cooled.

INAUGURAL ADDRESS

BY THE PRESIDENT, MR. CHARLES S. SHULTZ.
{Delivered January 20th, 1893.)

It is with much misgiving that I now assume the duties and
the honor of the Presidency of this Society. Do not expect me
to reach the high scientific standard of the gentleman whose suc-
cessor I have become, nor the standard of those who have pre-
ceded him in the office. I desire, however, that faithfulness
and energy may make partial amends for possible lack of talent.

May I then, at the outset, trouble you with a few suggestions
which, if heeded, may be of some service to the Society ?

Let us be punctual, so that the meetings may be opened at the
appointed hour. Let. exertion be made to attend all meetings,
whether papers are announced or not. Meetings with unan-
nounced p.ipers or addresses have usually afforded the attendants
much pleasure and instruction. Also, a numerous representation
infuses a spirit of emulation on the part of those in attendance,
and greater results are consequently obtained. Encourage the

44 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

attendance of ladies, and thereby increase the social features of
our gatherings. To most of you now present the request to
attend is superfluous, as you have appeared here with regularity
and may be expected to do so in the future. We have, however,
numerous members, and among them some of our ablest thinkers,
who seldom grace these rooms with their presence, although they
occasionally make amends by an excellent paper or address.
Should the last-mentioned class appear more frequently, the So-
ciety's work would be greatly enhanced, while it would be the
means of bringing others here, who would discuss the papers and .
participate in extending the desirable work now sustained by the
faithful few.

Exhibitions of apparatus and demonstrations of manipulation
are exceedingly desirable. Even if there is not anything ab-
solutely novel in such presentations, there are doubtless many,
not yet adepts, who would thankfully receive the instruction.
The expected address this evening by Dr. Julien on " Micro-
scopical Technique," together with the novel apparatus now dis-
played before us, gives hopes that the influence of this session will
be a valuable incentive to the holding of many future ''working
sessions " Work of this nature was frequently accomplished at
the earlier meetings of this Society, the incidents of which our
older members will recall with delight.

Let more objects be brought for exhibition. Announcement
of these on the programmes is urgently requested. But let not
inability to make timely announcement prevent the desired ex-
hibition. In this manner we have frequently received valuable
instruction from those engaged in special research, and in the
preparation and mounting of special classes of objects.

There are those, whose time is not entirely taken up by their
regular avocations, who might derive much pleasure themselves,
and be of great service to others, if they would undertake the ex-
amination of foods, food products, drugs, textile and other fab-
rics, with the view of the detection of adulterations and admix-
tures. In conjunction with a friend, who is an analytical chemist,
I have recently had occasion to critically examine white writing
papers. In the course of our investigation we have discovered?
among other things, that much of the fine paper, water-marked
" pure linen paper," is more or less mixed with cotton and other

l893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 45

materials. Upon this subject I may in future give you some par-
ticulars.

Let us remember that photomicrography, and the various re-
sults, in the form of prints and lantern slides, are always wel-
come themes that may be demonstrated at the meetings, and that
would be received with pleasure by the members generally. I
also request that those engaged in the lines of histology, patho-
logy, and bacteriology bring before us from time to time, as Dr.
Heitzmann proposes to do at the next meeting, notice of their
work in papers on these subjects, which we guarantee will be
received with deep attention.

I will not burden you with further suggestions at present. If
I shall accomplish nothing more, in the future I will endeavor to
infuse enthusiasm in some of our friends who are able to pre-
sent their good works before you. If each of us will at least
add a little toward the general interest, much usefulness and en-
joyment will doubtless result, to the benefit of the Society, whose
prosperity we all have at heart.

PROCEEDINGS.

Meeting of November i8th, 1892.

The President, Mr. J. D. Hyatt, in the chair.

Eleven persons present.

A communication was received from the New York Camera
Club inviting the Society to attend an exhibition of the Helio-
chromoscope, by Mr. Frederick E. Ives, of Philadelphia, to be
given at the rooms of the Club on the evening of the 21st instant.

On motion the thanks of the Society were tendered the New
York Camera Club for this invitation.

objects exhibited.

1. Living Spider, held in a lace cage, showing circulation of the
blood in the legs : by F. W. Devoe.

2. Crystals of Platinocyanide of Yttrium : by E. G. Love.

3. Cyclosis in Chara, showing'remarkably good circulation : by
J. D. Hyatt.

46 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

4. Spherometer, made by the Geneva Optical Company, of
Chicago : by F. D. Skeel.

5. Musical Rasps of the grasshopper, Conocephalus ensiger Har-
ris : by J. L. Zabriskie.

Mr. Devoe explained the construction of his lace cage for hold-
ing small living insects while under observation. The top and bot-
tom are removed from an ordinary paper pill box. The rings,
forming the body and the lid of the box, are each covered with a
piece of fine lace, kept tightly stretched by having the edges glued
down on the outside, and in such manner that, when the lid is
placed in its natural position on the body of the box, the two
pieces of lace are brought into contact. A small insect placed
between the two pieces of lace can be held firmly and yet without
injury in any position, and can be examined on the stage of the
microscope by either transmitted or reflected light.

Mr. Zabriskie exhibited a female, and the green and brown
forms respectively of the male of Conocephalus ensiger, and stated,
concerning the musical rasps, that in this species, as is common
in the green grasshoppers and katydids, the rasp of the left wing
cover is much more prominently developed than that of the right.
In the slide exhibited the left rasp has eighty teeth, while the right
rasp has only fifty-seven. A brown male kept in captivity sang vig-
orously on the evening of September 30th last. The wing covers
were raised very slightly, but were shuffled with extreme rapidity,
causing one long note. One such song, timed by the watch, was
sustained loudly and continuously, without the slightest break,
for the space of four minutes and twenty-five seconds.

Dr. Skeel explained the mechanism and operation of the sphe-
rometer exhibited by him.

Meeting of December 2D, 1892.

The President, Mr. J. D. Hyatt, in the chair.

Twenty-two persons present.

The President delivered an address on " The Origin and For-
mation of the New York Microscopical Society." He read from
the original copy of the call for the first meeting of the Society,
dated November 12th, 1877 ; from the original copy of the consti-
tution and by-laws, adopted December 21st, 1877 ; and from the
minutes of the first six meetings. These papers were lately de-

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 47'

livered by the first Secretary, Dr. Romyn Hitchcock, to Mr.
Hyatt, who was the first President, being elected on December
nth, 1877, and they were now transmitted by the latter to the
Society. Mr. Hyatt in most interesting manner referred to the
enthusiasm and work of the early years of the Society, and espe-
cially to the efforts made in 1878, finally crowned with success
through the good offices of Hon. J. D. Cox, then Congressman
from Ohio, to induce the Government to rescind the postal regu-
lations excluding glass slides from the mails.

Mr. William Wales followed this address with reminiscences:
of the American Microscopical Society of New York City ; of the
report of the committee on the examination of the vertical illu-
minator invented by Prof. Hamilton L. Smith ; of the persistent
search by Dr. Rufus King Brown for the lines of Amphipleura
pellucida ; and of the manufacture by himself, in 1868, of the -gV
objective for the Army Medical Museum, which lens lay for ten
years in the table draw of Surgeon-General Woodward, but which
finally produced the photograph which first showed the resolution,
of the famous diatom.

The following Committee on Nominations of Officers was ap-
pointed by the chair : J, L. Zabriskie, William Wales, F. W.
Devoe.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Fragment of brown wrapping paper bleached by carbolic
acid: by F. W. Leggett.

2. Musical Rasps of the Round-winged Katydid, Aviblycorypha.
rotundifolia Scudder: by F. W. Devoe.

3. Section of Lapis-lazuli: by J. D. Hyatt.

4. Section of milky Quartz: by J. D. Hyatt.

Mr. Leggett explained that the paper exhibited by him was
originally of a deep, dirty yellow color, but by the action of the
acid it bleached entirely white. This was followed by a discus-
sion on the action of carbolic acid and of peroxide of hydrogen,
participated in by Messrs. Ashby, Skeel, Riederer, and Zabriskie.

Mr. Hyatt remarked that the difference between milky and
transparent quartz was mainly like the difference between con-
solidated snow and clear ice, depending upon the preponderance
of the inclusions of air, giving the white appearance.

48 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

Meeting of December i6th, 1892.

The President, Mr. J. D, Hyatt, in the chair.

Twenty-two persons present.

The Committee on Nominations, appointed at the last meet-
ing, reported their nominations of officers for the coming year,
and the report was adopted.

The Corresponding Secretary read a communication addressed
to Mr. Charles F. Cox, by Mr. Frank B. Carter, of Montclair,
N. J., offering to the Society the rare opportunity of purchasing
sets of slides of the Radiolaria obtained from the material col-
lected by the "Challenger Expedition," prepared and now for
sale by Prof. Haeckel, of Germany.

Dr. F. D. Skeel read an article in the Medical Record^ issued
this day on Photomicrography by Dr. Robert M. Fuller, and
exhibited numerous photomicrographs, and also photographic
views of the apparatus by which they were taken.

objects exhibited.

1. Section of tabular Quartz from Thomaston, Georgia : by
James Walker.

2. Section of rock-mass, formed by the pressure of the ex-
plosive in the bottom of a drill hole: by James Walker.

3. Transverse section of the stem of Helianthus annuiis: by
F. D. Skeel.

4. Transverse section of the stem of Sassafras officinale: by
F. D. Skeel.

5. Satin leaf from Cape Town, Africa: by F. W. Devoe.

6. Section of oolitic Chert from England: by J. D. Hyatt.

7. Tulip wood, in natural condition, showing tracheids and
medullary rays : by T. B. Briggs.

Meeting of January 6th, 1893.

The President, Mr. J. D. Hyatt, in the chair.

Twenty-two persons present.

The Treasurer and the Librarian presented their annual re-
ports, and the reports were adopted.

The President appointed Messrs. William E. Damon and F.
W. Leggett tellers of the election. At the closing of the polls

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 49

the following persons were declared elected officers of the So-
ciety for the year 1893:

President, Charles S. Shultz.

Vice-President, Edw. G. Love.

Recording Secretary, George E. Ashby.

Corresponding Secretary, J. L. Zabiiskie.

Treasurer, James Walker.

Librarian, Ludwig Riederer.

(Curator, George E, Ashby.
( F. W. Devoe.

Auditors } w. E. Damon.
( F. W. Leggett.
The retiring President, Mr. J. D. Hyatt, delivered the Annual
Address, entitled "Hints of Intelligence in the Movements of
Plants." The address was discussed by Messrs. C. Van Brunt,
W. J. Lloyd, Rev. G. E. F. Haas, and Drs. Carl Heitzmann and
N. L. Britton.

Dr. Carl Heitzmann exhibited a photomicrograph of the
endosperm of the Ivory Nut, and remarked upon it as follows :

" It is a curious coincidence that, while the President dwells
on the puzzle of the movements of plants, I hold the solution
of the puzzle in my hand. It is a photomicrograph made by
Mr. Maximilian Toch. The object is a section through the
ivory nut, or vegetable ivory, prepared by a method peculiar to
Mr. Toch, and to be published by him in due time.

" In an address last May I showed in this Society a photo-
micrograph by S. Strieker, of Vienna, illustrating the reticular
structure of living protoplasm, discovered by myself twenty years
ago, and now accepted even by French histologists, as proven
by a letter published by Dr. Alfred C. Stokes in the last number
of Science. What the French term ' hyaloplasma ' I have de-
signated as the living or contractile matter, and their * paraplasma '
with me is a lifeless liquid filling the meshes of the reticulum.
The same features, in a meeting of last October, I demonstrated
to be present in the protoplasm of plants, and I showed the
delicate, thread-like connections piercing the cement or cellulose,
which I have claimed to be formations of living matter, uniting
the reticulum in the protoplasm of our so-called ' cell ' with that
of all neighbors, thus rendering the plant an uninterrupted con-

50 JOURNAL OF THE [April,,

tinuity of living matter — one individual — and not made up of
millions of individuals, as the cell theory had suggested.

" My present photograph demonstrates the interconnection of
the protoplasm by threads of living matter traversing the bulky
layers of the so-called ' sclerotic cells ' of the ivory plant, to per-
fection, with a power not exceeding five hundred and twenty-five
diameters. Even the hardest wood, therefore, is not only sup-
plied with protoplasm, but is rendered a continuous mass of living,
or contractile matter.

** A peripheral irritation of this substance in certain plants will
suffice to produce its contraction, either locally in the leaves or
petals, or throughout the whole plant. What we call nervous
action is probably based altogether on the contraction of the liv-
ing matter which, running centripetally, is termed 'neuration,'
and running centrifugally leads to motion in the apparatus
termed 'muscles.' Motion is again nothing but contraction of
the heavy masses of living matter stored up in the muscles.

" The contraction of the living matter is all that is needed for the
understanding of the peculiar ' intellectual ' movements of plants,
which are destitute of both nerves and muscles. The voluntary
actions, even in the highly-developed animals, are only automa-
tic."

Meeting of January 2oth, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Twenty-eight persons present.

Dr. H. G. Piffard was elected a resident member of the So-
ciety.

The following were appointed by the chair as Committee on
Admissions: F. W. Devoe, William E. Damon, George F. Kunz,
William Wales, F. D. Skeel.

The following were appointed Committee on Publications:
J. L. Zabriskie, William G. De Witt, Waller H. Mead, John L.
Wall, Charles F. Cox.

Dr. Alexis A. Julien read the announced paper, entitled " Sug-
gestions in Microscopical Technique." This paper was illus-
trated by the exhibition of many pieces of apparatus, and is pub-
lished in this number of the Journal, page 23.

il893-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 51

Dr, Carl Heitzmann replied to certain statements of Dr. Julien,
on the uses of acid preservatives, as follows:

" The essayist has spoken rather slightingly of certain acids
and their dilute solutions as preservative fluids. Still there is
nothing better for the preservation of both animal and vegetable
tissues than a half of one per cent solution of chromic acid.
Sections through any portion of the pldnts will be preserved, with-
out noticeable change, by being dipped into the named solution
for one or two hours. The most delicate animal tissues, such as
chick embryos, from the very beginning of development, can be
preserved by being kept first in a one-tenth of one per cent so-
lution of chromic acid, gradually being transferred to stronger
solutions, never exceeding one-half of one per cent.

" The brain, spinal cord, the eyeball, and especially the retina
are best preserved in Miiller's fluid, consisting of one per cent bi
chromate of potash, two per cent sulphate of soda, and ninety-
seven per cent distilled water. This fluid preserves admirably,
though it hardens but slowly. Alcohol may be in turn resorted to
for the latter purpose. The preservation in alcohol alone is ob-
jectionable for microscopical purposes, on account of pronounced
shrinkage and abstraction of color.

" Another excellent preservative fluid is a one to two per cent so-
lution of osmic acid, which keeps the minutest structural features
unchanged, even in the most delicate (nerve) tissues of animal
organisms. Theo. Eimer, of Tubingen, has succeeded in preserv-
ing, by means of osmic acid solutions, evcn the most minute
structures of jelly-fish, transferred directly from sea water to the
solution. I have specimens of the retina and the spinal cord of
man and rabbit, perfectly preserved by osmic acid solution for a
number of years.

*■ As regards mounting media, I concur with the essayist in the
statement that we are lacking perfection. The worst used is Can-
ada balsam, strictly objectionable because clearing up the spe-
cimens far too much. For the last twenty years I have used
nothing but chemically pure glycerin of Merck in Darmstadt, Ger-
many, which, though expensive, yields excellent results. Of course
great skill is needed for finding the proper amount of glycerin to
fill the space between slide and cover glass. The slightest sur-
plus, oozing forth at the borders of the cover glass, must be re-

52 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

moved carefully with moist filtering paper, lest the varnish used
for sealing together the glasses peel off after a few years. Gly-
cerin jelly has not answered our expectations, since it renders the
specimens blurred.

" For sealing I use nothing but asphalt dissolved in spirits of
turpentine. Although black and not looking handsome, this dries
within twenty-four hours, and keeps unchanged for a number of
years, provided that even the slightest film of glycerin has been
carefully removed "around the edges of the covering glass. Pretty
sealing, although very pleasant to the eye, I consider superflu-
ous.'^

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Many pieces of apparatus explained in the paper as above :
by A. A. JuLiEN.

2. Insect in amber : by F. D. Skeel.

3. Sections of antenna of the Wasp, Vespa macidata L. : by L.
Riederer.

4. Zentmayer Centennial Stand, with large aluminum stage
and certain improvements : by William Wales.

PUBLICATIONS RECEIVED.

The American Monthly Microscopical Journal : Vol. XIII., No. Ii — Vol.
XIV., No. I (November, 1892 — January, 1893).

The Microscope : Vol. XII., No. 11— Vol. I., No. i (November, 1892 —
January, 1893).

The Observer: Vol. III., No. 12— Vol. IV., No. 2 (December, 1S92— Feb-
ruary, 1893).

The Botanical Gazette : Vol. XVII., No. 12 (December, 1892).

Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club: Vol. XIX., No. 12 — Vol. XX.,
No. I (December, 1892 — February, 1893).

Insect Life : Vol. V., No. 3 (January, 1893).

Psyche : Vol. VI., Nos. 201 — 203 (January — March, 1893).

Anthony's Photographic Bulletin : Vol. XXIII., No. 23— Vol. XXIV., No.
4 (December 10, 1892 — February 25, 1893).

Natural Science Association of Staten Island : Proceedings (November 12,
1892— February 18, 1893).

School of Mines Quarterly : Vol. XIV., No. i (November, 1892).

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. SS.

Cornell University Experiment Station : Bulletins Nos. 39— 49 (November^
1892— January, 1893).

Michigan Agricultural Experiment Station : Bulletins Nos. 87—89 (Sep-
tember— December, 1892).

Texas Agricultural^Experiment Station : Bulletins Nos. 22—24 (Septem-
ber— December, 1892).

Iowa Agricultural Experiment Station: Bulletins Nos. 18,19 (August,
November, 1892).

American Museum of Natural History : Bulletin, Vol. IV. (1892).

Boston Society of Natural History: Proceedings, Vol. XXV., Parts 3, 4
(November, 1891 — May, 1892).

Rochester Academy of_^Science : Proceedings, Vol. II., No. i (1892).

Museum of Comparative Zoology: Animal Report (1891 — 1892).

Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society : Journal, Vol. IX,, No. i (1892).

Journal of the Franklin Institute : Vol. CXXXV., Nos. 805, 806 (January,.
February, 1893).

Colorado Scientific Society : Proceedings (January, 1893).

Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society ; 1892, Part 6; 1893, Part i.

International Journal of Microscopy and Natural Science : Vol. III., Part
17 (January, 1893).

The Naturalist : Nos. 20g — 211 (December, 1892 — February, 1893).

Transactions of the Canadian Institute : Vol. III., Part i (December, 1892).

The Ottawa Naturalist : Vol. VI., Nos. 8 — 10 (December, 1892 — Febru-
ary, 1893).

Natural History Society of New Brunswick : Bulletin No. 10 (1892).

The Victorian Naturalist : Vol. IX., Nos, 7 — 9 (November, 1892 — January,.

1893)-

Johns Hopkins University Circulars : Vol. XII., No. 103 (February, 1893).

Brooklyn Medical Journal : Vol. VII., Nos. i — 3 (January — March, 1893).

Indiana Medical Journal : Vol. XI., Nos. 6 — 8 (December, 1892 — Febru-
ary, 1893).

Universal Medical Journal : Vol. I., No. i (January, 1893).

National Druggist : Vol, XXI., No. 11— Vol. XXII., No, 5 (December i,
1892 — March i, 1893).

American Lancet : Vol. XVI., No. 12 — Vol. XVII., No. 2 (December, 1892
— February, 1893).

Weekly Review: Vol, III., Nos. 76—85 (December, 1892 — March, 1893).

Mining and Scientific Review : Vol. XXIX., No. 22— Vol, XXX., No. 9
(December, 1892 — March, 1893).

Wissenschaftlicher Club : Monatsblatter, Vol. XIV., Nos. 2 — 4 (November,
1892 — January, 1893) ; Ausserordentliche Beilage, Vol. XIV., No. 3 (No-
vember, 1892).

Societe Beige de Microscopie ; Bolletin, Vol, XIX., Nos. i — 3 (November,
1892 — January, 1893).

Societa Botanica Italiana : BuUettino, 1892, Nos. 8, 9 — 1893, No. I.

La Nuova Notarisia : Vol. IV. (January, 1893).

54 JOURNAL OF THE N.-Y. MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. [April, 1893.]

Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano : Vol. XXV., No. i (January, 1893).

Societa Africana d'ltalia: BoUettino, Vol. XI., Nos. 7— jo (July — Octo-
.■her, 1892).

Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein, Frankfurt-aOder : Helios, Vol. IX., No.
7 — Vol. X., No. 9 (October, 1891 — December, 1892) ; Societatum Litterse,
Vol. v., No. 9 — Vol. VI., No. 129 (September, 1891 — December, 1892).

Bericht des Vereins fur Naturkunde zu Kassel: Vol. XXXVIII. (1891 — 1892).

Naturforschende Gesellschaft des Osterlands : Proceedings, Vol. V. (1892).

Societe des Naturalistes de Kiew : Bulletin, 1892, No. 2 ; Memoires, Vol.
XII., No. I (1892).

Sociedad Cientifica "Antonio Alzate '': Memorias, Vol. VI., Nos. 3 — 6
(1892 — 1893).

Actes de la Societe Scientifique du Chili : Vol. II., Nos. i, 2 (July, Octo-
Iber. 1892).

Revue Internationale de Bibliographic Medicale : Vol. III., No. 22 — Vol.
rV., No. 3 (November, 1892 — February, 1893).

Journal

OF THE

NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY

Vol, IX. JULY, 1893. No. 3.

SOME PHENOMENA IN EXUVIATION BY THE
REPTILES.

BY SAMUEL LOCKWOOD, PH.D.
(Read May iqth, 1893.)

In a run through Europe I saw upon a peasant boy clothing
that had come down from an ancestor. The garment seemed
■defiant of wear, but it was painfully malodorous. In nature it
is a law for every living thing that the old covering shall give
place, at some pretty regular period, to a new raiment. It is sim-
ilar in principle, whether it be the shedding of the bark of a tree,
or the moulting of the feathers of a bird, or the casting of the
hard encasement of a crab, or the soft skin of a snake. For this,
if the condition is normal, each has its period for laying aside the
old and appearing in the new. In the human subject the opera-
tion is continuous. I have been surprised, by actual test, at the
amount of dermal epithelia floating in the air of a school room,
due to the friction from the natural activity of childhood.

Some animals have periodic castings, when the entire outer
skin is shed, and the creature then appears in brighter attire.
When this process is entire, science, through Huxley, I believe,
has given to it the term exuviation.

In what will be said on this subject, in the term Reptilia I

56 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

shall follow the older meaning, as when it included the Amphibia
or Batrachia, simply, however, for convenience.

I recall with what interest, then a young man, the late distin-
guished palaeontologist, B. F. Meek, told me of his witnessing near
Albany an old toad taking off his shirt and then swallowing it.
He narrated the fact to James Hall, the geologist, who seemed
almost incredulous. Since then the spectacle has been seen by a
number of naturalists. The sight is truly comical. Bufo, when
the time for undressing comes, has his own difficulties, suggest-
ing his need of a valet. The batrachian head is a very immobile
thing, much as if it were soldered to the shoulders ; for one can
hardly say that a frog or a toad has any neck at all. By certain
contortions of the creature the skin is caused to crack. The
limbs aje brought, one at a time, to the mouth, and so the denud-
ing is at last accomplished. The old garment is now badly torn.
As the funniest part of the play should come last, so it is now,
for Bufo begins a quasi rolling-up process with his cast-off linen,
literally tucking it into the mouth, alternately with his right and
his left hand. It is at last got into the chest, with as much regard
for order as when the husband does the packing of the wife's
trunk.

The toad loves the land, but the frog gives much of its life
to the still waters ; hence the former affords better opportunities
for observation when shedding. Like the toad, the frog divests
its cuticle in tatters, and devours it, although a contrary statement
may be found in the books.

It is a puzzle to divine what may be the significance of this
eating its own skin by the reptile. If a stalk of corn be returned
to the ground the cuticle gives up a silicate and a phosphate for
vegetable alimentation. Is there in the toad's case some conser-
vation of alimentary chemistry ? In a day when exact science
was not yet born there seems to have been a belief that an extra-
ordinary virtue resided in a cast-off, dirty shirt ; for, said a Dr.
Van Helmont, "if you put into a vessel a few grains of corn, and
stuff into it a dirty shirt, after about twenty-one days the ferment
from the dirty shirt, modified by the odor of the corn, effects the
transformation of the wheat into full-grown mice." Of course,
whatever the marines may do, sailors won't believe that yarn.
'But the skin of the toad has in it a virtue of a different nature —

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 57

the ability to exude an acrid liquid for its defence. It is amusing
to note the experience of a dog on his first acquaintance with the
creature. If rash enough to seize it in his mouth, the animal will
drop it with grotesque expressions of surprise. Perhaps this
acrid liquid is a condiment to the cast-off skin, so that what is
pungent to Ponto's nose may be piquant to Bufo's tongue. The
frog, which is more aquatic, utilizes its skin to aid the lungs in
respiration. Thus its cuticle plays an important role in the ab-
sorption of oxygen from the water, and perhaps the air, and in
the evolution of carbonic acid gas.

The true frogs and toads are called Anourians, meaning the
tailless frogs ; for they dispense with this appendage soon after
leaving the larval life. They do not, however, drop it or cast it
off, but literally take it in. They begin their adult career as se-
vere economists. Sitting on the shore, having for the first time
ventured from their watery home, they enter on a veritable new-
ness of life. Each now is a lung-breather. His tail, otherwise
useless, is his pabulum for the nonce. This appendage is ab-
sorbed— that is, taken into the assimilation, literally eaten, as
truly as in his coming days his cast-off cuticle will be taken in.'

But there is another branch of this Batrachian gens — the Uro-
delia, the tailed frogs. Such are the efts, the newts, and the sala-
manders, which retain their tails through life. Thanks to that
little eft, the crimson-?potted Triton, which takes so kindly to the
aquarium, the act of exuviation may be often witnessed. This
Triton, the Die?nyctiliis vindescens,a.'s, it seems to me, sheds its skin
with an irregular periodicity, doubtless due to food and tempera-
ture. Living in the water, it is much easier for these creatures
to doff their old clothes than for those animals which do it on
the land. When the cuticle has become effete, which in the Tri-
tons is very thin, a little muscular exertion will cause it to stretch,,
and so admit the water between it and the body, when some
wriggling movements will cast it off. It will leave the limbs like
tiny gloves, the very toes being preserved in form. Thus this
filmy thing floats in mid-water, expanded even to the toes. If
we could suppose the tiniest efts doing laundry work, we might
liken it to a garment on a clothes line and inflated with the wind.

It must be a canon of Urodelian propriety, for the little Triton

' See rote at end.

58 JOURNAL OF THE [JubS

proceeds to tuck the cast-off vestment into his chest. Ikit this is
not allowed by his two companions, so each one seizes a limb.
And now all three are pulling on the filmy thing, which in conse-
quence gets put away into three chests instead of one.

It is noticeable how much brighter the colors are after exuvia-
tion. The crimson spots are very pronounced and the bronzy
green has more of a living hue.

In some stained mounts of the Tiger Triton, Amblystoma tigri-
nu//i, kindly lent me by Rev. J. E. Peters, the cells generally
showed distinct nuclei. Although feeling my ignorance of their
significance, I would venture to remark : the Urodelce shed their
skin quite often, at least several times in the season. A person
told me that he had seen the Red Triton {Spelerpes ruber) in an
aquarium shed every month. He may possibly have exaggerated.
But would not the known frequency indicate a high-growing or
vegetative activity in the cuticle ? And has not the nucleated
cell a higher vital energy than that one whose protoplasm is all
simple or homogeneous ? Hence this earlier maturing of the
Triton's epiderm. So it is here as with the plants — the more
rapid the growth the sooner the effete stage is reached.

Leaving these Batrachians, we now come to the Lacertilians,
or true lizards, the highest in rank of the Reptilia. Here, too, we
find this shedding of the skin, from the great Monitor of the
Nile to the little pine lizard that runs on the fence.

I will first instance the so-called Horned Toad, the Phrynoso-
ina, which is a true lizard and no toad at all. The sharp-
pointed and spike-like projecting scales, which give to the inno-
cent little thing so formidable an aspect, make exuviation of the
cuticle in anything like large patches impossible. And so, ex-
cepting from the abdomen, which has none of these sharp pro-
jections, the cuticle is divested in small pieces and deliberately
stowed away.

I wish here to narrate what was witnessed by a friend in the
Great Plains. The incident has a psychological interest, and,
as will appear, a physiological bearing on our subject. Owing
to its sluggishness in captivity the Phrynosoma is generally re-
garded as an utterly stupid creature. My friend saw a female
with her young, for which she manifested a striking maternal
regard. Alarmed by his presence, she put forth persistent efforts

iSqS-J NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 59

to get her little ones out of clanger by sidling first against one,
then against another, until she had them all pushed into a rut of
the road. Here the little mother with her young squatted so that
they were nearly flat. Had it been a sand bed they would have
burrowed out of sight. In this instance the effort was to get out
of observation — a quite different thing. In color like the soil,
with the tint a little intensified by emotion, they were apparently
mere excrescences of the ground.

As the chromic mimicry of the Phrynosoma is confined chiefly
to one color, I shall speak of it as a monochrome, in distinction
from the chameleon, whose mimic power of color is very marked
and so is to be called a polychrome. We know that soils in some
regions maintain a preponderating color over a large area. It is
an interesting fact that Phrynosomas of the same species have the
one fixed color corresponding to that of their natal soil. As I
understand it, the pigment cells, or, literally, color tubes, of the
chameleon are of several kinds and deeply seated in the true
derm or nether skin. I have under the microscope a mount of
the cast skin of the horned toad, P. cornutum. It is composed
of semi-transparent spaces, erroneously called scales, which, how-
ever, is a convenient term. Each of these spaces is bordered by a
very much thicker cuticle. The whole is suggestive of a window
sash, the transparent parts being the panes and their thick bor-
ders the lattice-work. In this thin tissue, more or less crowded
to one side of each pane, may be seen the brown pigment gran-
ules. They are of one predominating hue and of great quan-
tity, being in the cuticle, while the specimen of cast cuticle of
Anolis now under the microscope shows no pigment grains what-
ever. In Anolis principalis the panes, as I have called the thin
parts of the scales, are much thinner and more transparent, serv-
ing, as I conceive, their function for a window through which the
color changes can appear when the pigment of the under derm is
brought up against them.

I think we may regard the true or under skin of Anolis func-
tionally as a palette, in which the different colors are like collapsi-
ble tubes set side by side, the tints being produced by pushing
the colors against this window of almost membranous tissue, for
to such I have likened the transparent vestment. Suppose a
mosaic of microscopic discs or hexagons of more colors than one

60 JOURNAL OF THE [luly,

set side by side, say yellow and blue. The effect would be green,
and as perfect to the eye as if these two pigments were mingled
on a painter's palette. Thus 1 think we find a constitvition in
these two specimens of exuviated lizard skin which stands in phy-
siological relation to the animal's mimetic functions, in Phrynoso-
ma as a monochrome and the superficial situation of the pigment,
and in Anolis as a polychrome with the deeper location of the
color cells.

One of my Anoles long outlived the others, getting to know
us, and even to take flies from our fingers. We called him No-
lie, When awake, especially if he were active, the color was a
sombre gray or brown ; but if taking a siesta he would put on a
suit of green. In his night sleep this would be often a frosted
pea-green, very rich, having a sort of bloom not unlike that of
oxidized bronze. The Anoles belong to the family Iguanida,
and, like the large Iguanas, they have a fold under the throat,
which, though imperceptible for the most part, can be suddenly
developed into a dewlap of large size and of flaming color. I
have seen Nolie wake from sleep, perhaps from an amatory dream,
for he would assume his gayest courting suit, a vivid green, with
here and there a tint of orange, and in some places the green
would be nearly blue, and that improvised dewlap in blazing
scarlet — a cravat perfectly stunning for color and dimensions.
Indeed, the suddenness of the development and the intensity of
the color were simply remarkable. One day he got out of his
cage, and a prolonged search failed to find him. But when the
night set in that whitish-green gave him away, it was in such
marked contrast with the rung of the black-walnut chair to which,
almost flattened out, he was adhering sound asleep. Here cer-
tainly mimicry was all at fault. As my hand seized him the green
flashed out and the normal brown took its place.

It was well no worse thing happened to our pet, for in the shock
of sudden fright these little lizards sometimes dislocate their tails.
" This is owing to a thin, unossified, transverse septum which
traverses each vertebra," the vertebra breaking easily through
this brittle plane. A very near cousin to Anolis is our New Jer-
sey Pine Lizard.' This pretty little thing will sometimes get on
the door sill in the pines, and should the good housewife take the

'^ SceU^arus undulatus (Harlan), one ol the "Tree Swifts."

l893-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 61

broom the little swift darts off, occasionally leaving its tail. I
have been assured by an old woman " that it does this so it can
run faster, but that if the tail is let alone it will come back
at night and put it on again/' I once had an Anolis get out of a
box containing several when I was travelling in a rail car. As it
was on the floor of the car, my movements in its capture had to
be quick and almost violent. This entailed disaster, for the run-
away was returned to his companions minus his tail. In about
three months the lost member was replaced by a new one. This
curious condition ensued. While all the rest of the body was
polychromatic, the tail was a simple monochrome. It could not
take on any hue other than its one normal brown. Nature
had restored the tail, but she could not duplicate "the true in-
wardness " of the lost member. The palette of living colors and
the muscular system for the collapsible tubes were wanting. The
little fellow would go to sleep in his night robe of green, but that
tail was always the one sober brown.

The cast-off skin of the Ajiolis is a pure, gauzy white, and to
the unaided eye not unlike lace in structure, but in fineness far
beyond the possibility of any human fabric. But under the micro-
scope this delicate tissue displays a beautiful complexity of struc-
ture. The lattice-work is not so coarse as in Phrynosoma^ and
each window pane seems to be made up of irregular lesser panes,
and these with extremely delicate lattices. The panes, too, are
very thin and clear, with no pigment granules.

Exuviation is started at the head generally, although T have
seen instances where the skin began cracking first in other parts.
Having got broken at the head, which presents the appearance of
a very ragged and highly starched night cap, the rent proceeds
along the neck and back. As the Anolis is a lithe and extremely
agile creature, it can undress with facility, for its mouth can reach
any part of the body and detach the loose skin. It doffs the old
suit in a very leisurely way, stopping to swallow each piece as
soon as it is detached. Nor does it gulp down the cuticular
morsel, but eats it slowly, not unlike the refined epicure who gives
his food the sauce of gustatory contemplation. Strange, too —
exuviation of the new tail is less facile than was that of the
old one.

We have left the Ophidia, or serpents, for the last. From the

Q2 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

huge Boas and Pythons down to the little snake met with in a
rural walk, each and all without exception shed the skin, and, as
a rule, cast it whole if the animal is in a healthy condition. It
is observable, too, that these reptiles have no polychrome power
whatever. The green snake while in the grass finds its color pro-
tective, but the reverse when upon the naked soil or crossing
the white lichen patches in the pines. The scales of fishes
are distinctly different from the true skin, as our nails differ
from our skin. Let us repeat that, as with the reptiles already
considered, the scales of serpents are simply thickened dermal
tissue, over which is spread the true epiderm or thin scarf skin.

Now, having found in the woods just where its owner left it a
good specimen of a cast snake skin, four interesting facts may be
observed : (a) It is shed entire and in one piece, (d) It is untorn,
except about the head, (c) It is turned inside out, as a long
stocking might be. (d) And fourthly, even the very eyes have
moulted, the thin scarf even in shedding preserving their form per-
fectly in inverted relief.

As to the way in which serpent exuviation is accomplished, the
popular idea, and generally even that of the books, is simply this:
'Svhen the moulting time has come the animal draws itself be-
tween two objects, anything that will suffice for a purchase, such
as sticks and stones, and thus manages to rub off its skin."

To such a notion the simplest reasoning upon common observa-
tion must demur. At time of shedding the scarf is very moist,
and as frail almost as tissue paper. If a lady could have full-
length arm gloves of as thin and frail a tissue, it would be impos-
sible for her maid to remove one by any process of friction or
rubbing down without tearing them into fragments. And even if
the tissue could resist such treatment, would it be possible that
they would thus come off turned completely inside out? Then, as
to the serpent's eyes, since they must be moulted too, could such
friction do less than injure them ? Moreover, the places in which
these exuviffi are found are not consonant with this friction
hypothesis. For they are quite often found on the plain soil,
where there are no objects that could be used for friction ; and
even the ground where the moult is left hardly shows signs of
movement.

Having witnessed the operation in very favorable circum-

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 63

stances, I gave an account of it to the American Naturalist, Janu-
ary, 1875, and also in Nature, November, 1879. The serpent, in
fact, is the only creature that can denude itself with the peculiar
results which have just been mentioned. The anatomy and phy-
siology of the animal are singularly fitted for the operation. The
ophidian eye is immobile. Though the books speak of the ser-
pent's eyelids, it is simply accommodating language, for it has no
true eyelid. Citing P. Martin Duncan in substance, the so-called
eyelid of the serpent is an immovable covering of three superposed
layers. First, there is the outer one, the epiderm, which is moulted;
this is elastic, and is the thickest over the middle of the eye,
manifestly for protection. Under this is the second or middle
membrane, which is very delicate and soft, and at the centre
perfectly transparent. Under this is the third layer, a mucous
lining. This is functionally the palpebral lubricant. Thus the
outer covering of the eye is really a part of the scarf, extending
from the snout to the end of the tail.

In an old Boa or Python are over two hundred pairs of ribs.
These begin immediately back of the atlas or first vertebra and
extend to the beginning of the tail — that is, where ihe dorsal
vertebras end and the caudal series begins. The abdomen of a
snake is covered with transverse parallel scales, or scutes. These,
when set on edge and acted upon by the ribs, become a vast
mechanism of motor propulsion. For this purpose the ribs are
all functional. A pair of serpent's ribs form almost a circle, and
can perform a fore and aft movement, and can be operative
through the circumference of the body except immediately in the
dorsal region. We shall see that the ribs have all to do with the
act of exuviation. It is hardly a figure of speech to say, as will
be shown, that with his ribs the serpent creeps out of his old
clothes.

In the pines of New Jersey is a fine colubrine serpent, the Pity-
ophis melanoleticiis. I have kept these for years in my study, and
will give substantially a paragraph from my article already re-
ferred to as in the American Naturalist. It describes the exuvi-
ation of the Pine Snake as I witnessed it on the floor of my library:
When I first saw it I noticed that the skin at the snout was torn,
and that denudation had proceeded from the head to some two
inches of the neck. The divesting at first glance had a sort of

64 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

rolling aspect. What surprised me was the fact that there was not
the least friction in the process — that is, there was no rubbing
against any object. As the old skin at this time is moist and a
little elastic, any swelling of the body stretches and loosens it.
So soon as the exuviating reaches the body, where are the larger
ribs, the process goes on rapidly and with a singular system. It
is done in this way : Exactly at the place where the skin seems to
be moving backward a pair of ribs expands. This action swells
or enlarges the body at that place, and thus by slightly stretching
loosens the skin there. In this movement both ribs in the pair
engaged act together — that is, they expand at the same time.
This action is instantly followed by a second movement, very
different from the first. One rib of the pair, say the one at the
right side, slips out of and forward of the constriction just made
by the swelling. The advanced rib is then drawn backward with
a jerk against the neck of the old skin. The rib then rests, hold-
ing this side of the skin backward. The left rib advances, and
repeats for its side the action which has taken place on the right
side. Thus the action of the ribs, which at first is together, is
now alternate. The next hinder pair of ribs now takes up these
movements. So close are these consecutive actions, and so rapid,
that, while the entire body does not make any perceptible advance
on the ground, it seems, at the places where the ribs are acting,
to be crawling tremulously out of a double tube.

It is noteworthy that unless the philosophy of the process be
considered, whether it be the eating or the undressing of the ser-
pent, the eyes of the observer will be deceived. One smiles at
the man who said " he never felt so good as when he had got
himself outside a beefsteak." Now, this ''getting outside" is a
literal fact as respects the serpent with its prey. By a hitching
on and pulling upon its victim with each side of the mouth alter-
nately, the body is actually drawn over the prey. So is it with
this action of the ribs in exuviation. Apparently it is a pushing
the old garment backward, while really it is a pushing or advanc-
ing of the body forward. The old hose evolves from itself for-
ward, though it seems to be rolling on itself backward.

Herein is revealed how it is that a serpent is at the finish of an
exuviation practically where it was at the beginning of the process.
The ribs forward of the pair which is acting on the skin are oc-

l893-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY, 65

cupied, each pair with its own abdominal scute, which has a pur-
chase or hold on the ground; hence the curious fact that, however
long a serpent may be, it comes out of its skin without much
forward movement of its body. When the tail is reached this
peculiar play of the ribs is wanting to act upon the skin. But
the caudal tapering makes the shedding easier, as, in fact, the
skin can then be shaken off. As the end of the tail of the Pine
Snake is a hollow spike, this, for obvious reasons, cannot be
turned inside out, so it is left turned inside of the skin, all else
being turned inside out.

Truly my Pityophis, in its new attire, seemed transformed in
beauty, such was the contrast between the old coat and the new
in the freshness of color. The white ground had a rich creamy
hue, not unlike that which the ladies so admire in antique lace.
There was, too, a soft warmth in the brown, the chocolate, and
the chestnut. With some serpents the new skin shows a fine
iridescence in the light. But this soon gives out, the old skin
getting dull and lustreless, for the serpents have no power of color
mimicry.

With many others I have not been able to see " the wisdom of
the serpent." Still, I think we may claim for it better manners
than are found among its reptilian cousins of higher rank, for
in the disposition of its cast-off linen no serpent ever mistook the
bread-bin for the laundry basket.

A certain eloquence has of late descanted upon ''the mis-
takes of Moses." Might it not be pleasanter to look into the
wisdom of this great leader of his race ? I can only accept evo-
lution as a method'in which the Creator works His will, as when
He makes one vessel to honor and another to dishonor. Appear-
ing almost the last of the vertebrates, the serpent comes a limb-
less, a degraded creature. Hence this Moses struck upon a vast
cosmic law which only the biology of to-day could formulate —
the evolution of progression and the evolution of retrogression —
that in the Creative purpose there is a differentiating backward
and a differentiating forward. It surely, then, was retrospective
wisdom Avhich said of the serpent : " Doomed above every beast
of the field, upon thy belly shalt thou go."

Note.— Up to within a few years the physiologies taught that the tadpole's tail, just be-
fore the transformation into the frog, was dropped or lost by atrophy. Even yet thisidea
appears in some natural histories. During the last year I read a description, by a well-

66 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

known and elegant writer, of a great number of little toads leaving the water and drop-
ping their tails on the ground ! He drewupon his imagination, not his observation. In
April, 1861, I contributed to The Rutgers College Quarterly a paper, under the title
" Crangasides : A Batrachian Biograpby." In that paper was shown the use of the tail
as pabulum to the frog during a few days at the beginning of a critical change in life,
this appendage being absorbed into the animal as condensed alimentation.

NERVES AND NERVE ACTION.

BY CARL HEITZMANN, M.D.
iRend February ■^d, 1893.)

'When, twenty years ago, I made the discovery that so-called
protoplasm, at that time considered as the living matter', was of
a highly complex structure, being traversed by a delicate reti-
culum, the points of intersection of which were the nucleus and
the granules, my assertion met with incredulity and scorn. By
and by histologists satisfied themselves that I was right.
Even the French now admit the presence of such a reticu-
lum, dubbing it "hyaloplasma." All doubts must vanish upon
looking at the photomicrograph published by S. Strieker, of
Vienna, in 1890, taken by means of electric light with a
power of 2,500 diameters. The photograph, which I here
exhibit, is that of a living, or fresh, colorless blood corpuscle
of a newt, Proteus, from the Adelsberg grotto in Austria.
The reticulum is exactly of the appearance which I described
and illustrated in 1873. Since I saw the reticulum in con-
tinuous movement during the life of a protoplasmic lump, my
conclusion was that the reticulum is made up of the living or
contractile matter proper ; whereas the meshes contained a liquid,
as such destitute of properties of life, filling the meshes of the
sponge-like structure, and permitting the contraction of the solid
portions — /.^., the living matter. The contractions consisted in
a narrowing of the meshes, an increase of the size of the points of
intersection, the so-called granules, and a shortening of the con-
necting threads. The extension, on the contrary, proved to be a
widening of the meshes, a decrease in the size of the granules, and
an elongation of the threads. The protoplasmic lump being en-
sheathed by an extremely thin layer of the same substance that
builds up the reticulum and the meshes, the fluid filling the

l893-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 67

meshes could nowhere escape from the protoplasmic lump, but
was simply pressed from one portion, when contraction took
place, to another portion at rest, causing the distention of the
reticulum in the latter part. Should such an extremely thin, ex-
panded flap or pseudopodium find attachment to the slide, a
point of fixation is given, toward which the lump is dragged as
soon as the contraction ceases and rest is established. On this
principle is obtained an easy understanding of the form-changes
and locomotions of the amaba, as well as of any other living
protoplasmic lump.

The question, what living matter really is, no one can answer.
Neither can we enter the discussion of the query. What causes its
contraction ? It is the innate property of the living matter in the
lowest plant, as well as in the highly organized human form, that
it contracts, thereby causing change of shape and locomotion.
'The second essential property is that it is able to produce its own
kind by taking in food and by generation. The latter feature
will not be considered in my address.

When we analyze, with high powers of the microscope, the
structures termed " nervous," we come to the conviction that all
these structures are made up of living matter in an extremely
delicate reticular arrangement. Usually the nervous system is
divided into a central portion, the brain, spinal cord, and the
sympathetic ganglia ; a conducting portion, the nerves proper ;
and a terminal portion, often consisting of knob- or bud-like for-
mations in the peripheral organs and tissues. Undoubtedly the
nervous system is continuous throughout the whole animal organ-
ism— in other words, the brain and spinal cord are continuous
with all the nerves traversing the body, and these again with the
terminal apparatus. Long since the nervous system had been
compared with the telegraph, the central stations of which were
considered to be the brain and spinal cord, whereas the wires
were represented by the nerves. So close is indeed the resem-
blance that some physiologists have claimed that the nerve action
is an electric one — an hypothesis, however, never proven

The brain and spinal cord consist of a gray and a white sub-
stance. The white substance is composed altogether of so-called
medullated nerves, and is merely a conductive apparatus. The
gray substance, on the contrary, is the only central apparatus of

68 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

the nerve system. In the gray substance, again, we meet with
innumerable protoplasmic bodies, the so-called "ganglion cells,"
or ganglionic elements, from which, as is to-day generally con-
ceded, arise the nerves proper in the shape of so-called axis
cylinders. All these bodies, therefore, are unquestionably cen-
tral organs. In analyzing the ganglionic bodies we see them
composed of a dense, delicate reticulum, first recognized by C.
Frommann, of Jena, in 1867. Each ganglionic body sends out a
thread-like prolongation, the axis cylinder, and a varying number
of branching offshoots, termed, in honor of their discoverer, Die-
ters' offshoots. All the latter run into the gray substance at large,
and only the axis-cylinder offshoot is a nerve, running from the
central ganglion uninterruptedly to the periphery of the body. I
exhibit such a body with a power of 500 diameters, fully sufficient
to recognize the offshoot, though not the central reticulum.

Again, the gray substance is made up of a tiny reticulum of liv-
ing matter, not quite as dense as that of the ganglionic elements.
I was the first to discover this reticulum in perfectly fresh sec-
tions of the brain of just killed rabbits, twenty years ago ; but
this is an assertion of mine that has not as yet met with the con-
firmation of other microscopists. The reticulum is easily made
visible by a stain with osmic acid, as shown here, with a power
not exceeding 300 diameters. This reticulum is connected with
all the Dieters' offshoots of the ganglionic elements, and again
sends out axis cylinders, the same as do the ganglionic elements.
This my assertion has recently found corroboration by Edinger,
of Germany.

It is plain that contraction, originating in the ganglionic ele-
ments, will be conducted partly to the gray substance by the off-
shoots of Dieters, and partly to the periphery through the axis-
cylinder offshoot, the nerve proper ; for the structure of the
latter is reticulated the same as is that of the ganglionic bodies
and the gray substance in general.

Many facts, obtained either by experiments on animals or by
observations in morbid changes of the brain, have led us to the
conviction that the ganglionic elements are the seat of all our
knowledge, called positive, brought into our brain from without
by the organs of sense. Such a positive knowledge is, for in-
stance, the a, b, c by means of which we read and write, the

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 69

I, 2, 3 by means of which we calculate and heap up dollars.
Should the ganglion of a, in the so-called claustrum, be destroyed
by a blood effusion, the capacity of pronouncing or writing an a
is lost. Should the ganglion of number 3 be destroyed, the
idea of number 3, or the capacity of writing it, will be lost.
From these facts the inference can be made that the ganglionic
bodies are central organs for concrete or positive facts ; whereas
the gray substance is central for diffuse nerve action, such as
fancy, religion, dreaming, fears, hopes, etc. The gray matter of
the frontal lobe is the seat of intelligence, as first maintained by
Th. Meynert, the regulation of our acts by judgment and adapta-
tion. Hence all mental diseases — disturbances of the intellect —
are located in the frontal portion of the brain.

In all nerves running from the central organs to the periphery
of the body the most essential and only conducting thread is the
central axis cylinder, which is either bare, such as in non-
medullated nerves, or supplied with a sheath of nerve fat, or
myelin — an insulating substance seen in the medullated nerves,
furnishing them with a whitish tint, due to the opacity of the
myelin in surface illumination. The axis cylinders, I said, have
a delicate reticular structure. Any nerve, though originally
medullated, will, upon approaching the surface, lose its myelin
coat and split up into a number of extremely delicate so-called
axis fibrillae, best rendered conspicuous by a stain of chloride of
gold, introduced into histological technique by the late Jul.
Cohnheim, of Germany. All we can recognize on such axis
fibrillae, with the highest powers of the microscope, is a beaded
or rosary-like appearance, a series of minute dots, interconnected
by the most delicate threads. Evidently this feature is a reti-
culum transformed into a linear projection of threads and gran-
ules, eminently fit for contraction. I exhibit here the cornea of
a cat, stained with chloride of gold, showing the axis fibrillae
as they inosculate with the protoplasmic formations, termed
cornea corpuscles.

With these facts at hand we may reasonably assert that what
we call nerve is a complex reticulum of living matter, either ar-
ranged diffusely, as in the gray substance ; or condensed into a
bulky formation, termed ganglionic element ; or arranged in rows,
as in the axis cylindeis ; or in a linear projection, as the axis

70 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

fibrillge. Since contractility is one of the main properties of the
living matter, we again must come to the conclusion that the
nerve action is altogether due to contraction of living matter.
Should the contraction start in the periphery, as, for instance, by
a prick with the needle, or a burning match, the contraction is
carried centrifugally and results in the sensation of pain. By
complex systems of association through the gray substance, the
motor centres, which are the largest ganglionic formations, are
brought to contraction, which they convey toward the periphery,
especially to the muscles, and the result of this centrifugal con-
traction is motion, either involuntary or reflex motion, or a motion
controlled by the gray matter of the brain, mainly its frontal
lobes.

While I was publishing my works on protoplasm in 1873 in the
Vienna Academy of Sciences, where these views were laid down
for the first time. Prof. Th. Eimer, in Germany, published his re-
searches on jelly-fish of the Mediterranean Sea. He succeeded
in fixing the minute tissue relations by means of osmic acid. As
you see in his illustrations, he claims that in these animals nerves
and muscles are continuous formations to such an extent that
the beaded axis fibrilla directly changes into striped muscle.
This goes far to prove the correctness of my own view. Both
nerve and muscle work upon one and the same principle of con-
traction of the living matter. I have demonstrated the con-
tinuity of motor nerves with the sarcous elements of the striped
muscle fibres ; but the majority of histologists do not as yet ad-
mit such a continuity.

In a previous meeting Mr. Hyatt claimed that plants exhibit a
certain amount of intelligence and voluntary movement, though
they lack both nerve and muscle. My views will easily explain
the phenomena. The protoplasm of the plant has a reticular
structure exactly the same as that of animals. The reticulum is
the living or contractile matter in plants as well as in animals.
A contraction, being induced at some peripheral point of the
plant, is conducted by the threads of living matter, piercing all
cement substances throughout the whole organism, and the
motion, so striking in some plants, will result. No intelligence
and no voluntary action are needed to perform what the plants
do. What we call voluntary action in animals, especially also in

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 71

men, is to a great extent only automatic or reflex action. What
we do we must do, owing to the contraction of our brain, and
so-called will plays a trifling part in controlling our actions,
mainly under the guidance of the frontal lobes of the brain.

THE OCCURRENCE OF MARINE DIATOMS IN FRESH

WATER.

BY ARTHUR M. EDWARDS, M.D.
(Read February iiik, 1893.)

Even the amoeba, that formless mass of jelly, begins somewhere
and somehow. The diatomacese have a beginning, but what that
beginning is, and when, and how, is uncertain. But when they
began, was it as inhabitants of fresh water, in ponds and rivers,
or of salt water, in the ocean ? This can be determined with a
certain degree of assurance by examining the strata where their
silicious loricas are preserved.

Since I began studying the diatomacese, now some forty years
ago, their beginning was a subject of constant inquiry, and I
think I can now determine with positive certainty that their
origin was in fresh-water strata.

The sea, that formed from the falling rain, was fresh, of course,
and became salt by the solution of hydrochloric acid and sul-
phurous acid, and Ihen, further, by the solution of certain salts
from the earth. After a time the rain which collected fell as
fresh water on the earth and formed ponds, lakes, and rivers.
But whether they or the salt sea were formed first is undecided.
Fresh-water diatomacese formed in some places first, and were
carried downward and became brackish and at last salt, as can
be proved by examining the strata, as I shall show. At least, such
is the inference.

The gathering of which I speak now is from Hatfield Swamp,
on the Passaic River, New Jersey. It is about thirty miles above
Newark, following the tortuous course of the stream, but only
nine miles distant across the country, the Hatchung Mountains,
in two ranges, intervening. At Paterson are situated the Passaic
Falls, seventy feet in height, and at Little Falls, four and one-half

72 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

miles up the stream, an additional fall of fifty feet occurs. Hat-
field Swamp is about three and one-half miles long by one and
one-half miles broad, and the deposit is clay, about three feet and
eight inches deep, where I took the 'specimens. At Columbia
Bridge, four miles further, is a small patch of similar clay, per-
haps one hundred feet broad.

Besides the ordinary fresh-water forms, Navicicla {Fmnularia)
viridis and similar species, there are found two salt-water forms
of Actinocycliis Ralfsii and Campylodiscus echeneis. These are
both common in the Hatfield Swamp clay, the Actinocycliis as
brilliantly colored discs, and the Campylodiscus as large, white,
saddle-shaped forms.' These are also both common on the coast
in salt water. And the first is further well known in the guano
at Ichaboe, at the Cape of Good Hope. 'Ihese diatoms cannot
be carried up the stream by the tide, as that does not reach
higher than ten miles above Newark, some distance below Pater-
son, and there intervene between the tide and the swamp more
than one hundred feet of falls, seventy feet of which are perpen-
dicular at Paterson.

I present some of the clay, and a slide mounted to show the
mixture of fresh-water and salt-water forms. Diatoms having
originated in fresh water, they may present the same character-
istics when transferred to salt water, or they may change totally.
How this change goes on has not been determined, but the Hat-
field Swamp clay shows that recognized marine forms may live in
fresh water, and fresh-water forms have been seen living in the
ocean.

PROCEEDINGS.

Meeting of February 3D, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Forty four persons present.

The Corresponding Secretary presented a donation of dia-
tomaceous material from Mr. K. M. Cunningham, of Mobile,
Alabama, with an explanatory communication, dated January
30th, 1893, as follows :

" I forward specimens of a new fossil marine diatomaceous de-
posit, with the object of putting the find upon record, and of

l893-J NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 73

providing such members as are interested in diatomology with
the means of verifying my own study of the same.

" As far back as the year 1878 my attention had been called to
the statement made by Prof. J. W. Bailey, in his microscopical
observations made in the year 1852, and recorded in the Smith-
sonian ' Contributions to Knowledge,' that he had detected evi-
dence of marine diatoms in an indurated clay found by him on
the shores of Hillsborough Bay, in the vicinity of Tampa, Florida,
but from which he had been unable to isolate the diatoms on ac-
count of the stony character of the material. Through the inter-
vening years I, from time to time, tried to secure specimens of the
material as noted by him, but such specimens as I secured failed
to corroborate the fact of diatom contents.

" As a consequence, however, of faith in his statement, I per-
sisted in the hope, and my hopes were realized very recently, as
the casual outcome of finding a schooner discharging here a
cargo of Florida River pebble phosphates. Examining the com-
position of the pebble aggregations, I noted the recurrence of
flattened, water-worn, and rounded nodules of a clay-like sub-
stance, which I found could be easily split into thin layers in-
definitely. Applying a hand lens, the clay yielded its secret, as
each fractured surface showed innumerable diatomaceous bodies,
indicating its marine origin as well as fossil nature.

" The interest in this find is emphasized, as it possibly throws
new light on a geological question — i.e., as to whether fossil
marine, diatomaceous strata of miocene age could be found on
the United States Gulf coast of the same character as those on
the Atlantic coast. While the generic assemblage of species
does not agree with the Maryland and Virginia miocene diato-
maceous clays, the geological horizon may be the same, as the
phosphate deposits of the Florida peninsula were laid down upon
eocene limestone strata. It is known that the valuable phos-
phate rock nodules and organic vertebrate remains are embedded
in a clay that must be removed by washing, and the presumption
is that the clay, whenever this is the case, is of the infusorial or
diatomaceous kind.

" The clay material, as sent to the Society, maybe conveniently
studied in various ways. Split into thin layers and examined by
condensed light, analogy will suggest a resemblance to the dia-

74 JOURNAL OF THE [.Iuly>

tomaceous clays of Richmond, Virginia, in the profusion of dis-
coidal forms covering the surface. These forms, however, are
but spectral, as they vanish on wetting. The nodule, rubbed
down in water with a brush, will leave a sandy sediment contain-
ing sponge spicules, polished sand grains, ovoid amber-like grains,
and species of disc forms of the following genera : Coscinodiscus,
Actinopktychus, Actinocydits, Triceratiitm^ and minute plates show-
ing a plexus of Me/osira and Rap/ioiieis, the diatoms having been
metamorphosed in such manner as to be soluble in nitiic or
other acids, the same as the organic phosphatized remains of the
vertebrates associated with the clay. Finally, the clay may be
thoroughly disintegrated by boiling in strong soap solution, and
after standing for ten hours it will be reduced to a homogeneous
sediment, readily washed and cleaned for examination.

'' Concentration of the diatoms from the sand is very difficult,
on account of the similarity of the specific gravity of the diatoms
and of the sand and other grains associated therewith. Acid
treatment, being in this case impracticable, must be avoided.
The material is adapted for selected or for strewn mounts. In
the latter method a few of the prevailing species may be studied
with interest and satisfaction, thereby affording something novel
in the marine fossil diatomaceous line of research apparently not
heretofore recorded."

Dr. Carl Heitzmann addressed the Society on " Nerves and
Nerve Action." This address was illustrated by exhibits, as
noted below, and an abstract of the address is published in this
number of the Journal, page 66.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Diatomacien genus-platte. Trice7-atii(m trhmcria, 280
forms, prepared by E. Thum, Germany : by Henry C. Ben-
nett.

2. Mouth-parts of Tapeworm : by L. Schoney.

3. Photomicrograph of Navicula crassinervis (Spencer ^) : by

H. G. PiFFARD.

4. Motor ganglion of spinal cord of child.

5. Transverse section of gray substance of spinal cord of rab-
bit.

1893] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIEl'Y. 75

6. Transverse section of white substance of spinal cord of
bear.

7. Cornea of cat, stained with chloride of gold.
Exhibits Nos. 4-7 all by Carl Heitzmann.

Meeting of February 17TH, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Nineteen persons present.

Mr. George H. Blake was elected a resident member of the
Society.

The Corresponding Secretary read a communication from Mr.
K. M. Cunningham, of Mobile, Alabama, dated February 8th,
1893, and accompanying the donation of a slide of selected dia-
toms from the Florida diatomaceous clay, as follows :

'"With the view of placing upon record in a more definite man-
ner the recent find of a fossil marine diatomaceous deposit de-
rived from the phosphate area in the vicinity of Tampa, Florida,
and of which I duly forwarded specimens to your Society, I have
made a further study of the same by microscopical preparations,
one of which is sent you herewith, and I would offer as a result
of that study the following observations as illustrative of the
character of the deposit.

" From a portion of the cleaned material I selected free-hand
about seventy perfect and fractional discs, and, upon studying
the same in detail with a |- Zeiss objective, I can state that the
surface ornamentation on the various species of Coscinodiscus
found in the deposit prove to be hexagonal scales, which may be
partially or wholly detached from their discoidal bodies, thus
leaving smooth surfaces, with or without traces of the striate-
punctate places of union of the scales with the frustules. In
many cases where the reticulated ornamentation is wanting and
the surface of the disc is left smooth, innumerable minute diatoms
of various species may be seen, overlying the surface, or pos-
sibly forming a part of the internal or histological structure of the
shell, during the secretion or growth of the silicious layers of the
frustrule during its living state. Were this view to be enter-
tained, it would introduce an element of doubt in the present view

76 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

of the diatom being a plant instead of belonging to the infusorial
group, as Ehrenberg had at first placed it.

"As tending to prove that the minute diatoms, visible through,
or upon, or in the body of the disc, are not casual surface debris
of the deposit in which the discs grew, I would mention the fol-
lowing as a very delicate test. In one of the discs on the slide
there is a minute Dictyocha partly overlapped by a minute
diatom of the Naviciila didyma shape. To view either of these
small diatoms distinctly, a material movement of the fine ad-
justment must be made ; for while one is in focus the other is out
of focus, thus showing that they are not on the same superficial
plane. Again, many of the minute diatoms offer a strong con-
trast with the transparent disc, as would be the case where dia-
toms are seen in such a refractive medium as liquid sulphur, in
which the diatoms look black by contrast with the enclosing
medium ; or where mediums are compounded with phosphorus,
giving the highest refractive value. If a lens of high power, say
a j'g or a y^g-, is used, these minute diatoms will prove of greater
interest than the larger discs with which they are associated.
My experience with the new diatom material has given me an en-
tirely novel field of interest and study, which is within the reach
of all whose forte is to unravel new truths and evolve new lines
of thought in relation to the histology of the diatom.

" In having placed this new source of diatoms on record with
the New- York Microscopical Society, we have types of diato-
maceous deposits from the three principal geological eras of the
tertiary period : the eocene, by the diatoms from St. Stephens,
Alabama (tripoli); themiocene, from the Florida phosphate clay;
and the pliocene, from the clays encountered at a depth of seven
hundred feet in the Mobile artesian wells ; not to mention the
recent, or living, species surviving through these long periods of
sedimentary deposition. In summing up the result of a limited
amount of study of this miocene fossil diatomaceous clay, I find
the following genera represented : Craspedodiscus, Coscinodiscus,
Actinopti'cus, Inceratiu/n, Biddulp/iia, Afelosira, Navicula^ Ra-
p/ioueis, Pleurosigma, Synedra, etc."

Dr. Arthur Mead Edwards, of Newark, New Jersey, being
introduced by the President, addressed the Society on "The
Occurrence of Marine Diatoms in Fresh Water." This address

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 77

was illustrated by preparations exhibited, as noted below, and is
published in this number of the Journal, page 71.

Dr. Edwards also donated to the Cabinet of the Society a
packet of the clay of Hatfield Swamp and a prepared slide of
diatoms from the same. Dr. Edwards further gave an account
of his experience with the use of Gum Thus, from Pinus tceda L.,
as a mounting medium in place of Canada balsam.

On motion the thanks of the Society were tendered Dr. Ed-
wards.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Seven slides, containing 1,021 diatoms, prepared by E.
Thum, of Germany : by Henry C. Bennett.

2. Holler's Probe Platte, 80 diatoms, arranged in lines with
names photographed beneath : by Charles S. Shultz,

3. Diatoms from California : by Frank D. Skeel.

4. Bacillaria paradoxa, living in aquarium since October, 1892 :
by Stephen Helm.

5. Fossil diatoms from Manatee River, Florida, prepared by
K. M. Cunningham : by J. L. Zabriskie.

6. Diatoms from Hatfield Swamp, N. J.

7. " " Nutley, N. J.

8. " " South Plainfield, N. J.

9. " '* '^ Kettle Hole," near Plainfield, N. J.

10. " '• Columbia Bridge, N. J.

Exhibits Nos. 6-1 1, all mounted in Gum Thus, prepared and
exhibited by Dr. Arthur Mead Edwards.

Meeting of March 30, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Thirty-eight persons present.

The Corresponding Secretary read a communication from Mr.
Charles S. Fellows, of Minneapolis, Minnesota, accompanying
the donation of a slide of Terpsinoe musica to the Cabinet of the
Society, and dated February 19th, 1893, as follows :

"I noticed in the Journal a letter, read October 21st, 1892,
from Mr. Cunningham, regarding Terpsinoe musica Ehr.

'' In 1883 I found this form in Florida. A spring took its rise

78 . JOURNAL OF THE [July,

in a limestone ledge, and on the edge of the crevice, where the
water ran through, I scraped off the dark sHme and examined it
when 1 arrived home.

"In looking over my slides I found one put up by J. D.
Moller, marked ' Terpsinoe nmsica Ehr. A. dulce, Porto Rico,'
showing that at that date it was known as a fresh-water diatom.

''I find only one slide in my collection, a very poor one, put
up by me in 1883, which I forward with this. Your members
can compare it with the Cunningham mount. I would like to
know if it differs from his."

The Corresponding Secretary also read a communication from
Mr. K. M. Cunningham, dated Mobile, x\labama, February 24th,
1893, as follows :

" The information in your favor of the 20th instant suggests,
the propriety of my stating upon what ground I reported the
diatomaceous clay of miocene age.

" In effect, possibly eight years ago, and also at a later period,
Mr. Lewis Woolman. of Overbrook, Pa., member of the Phila-
delphia Academy of Sciences, opened a correspondence with me
to secure my assistance in collecting material to aid his geological
inquiries. He intimated that he had a theory which he desired
to verify — namely, that the great diatomaceous stratum of 300
feet, more or less, in thickness, studied by him as underlying
New Jersey, Maryland, and Virginia, would possibly be found
existing on the Gulf coast — and that he had special reasons for
holding this theory. After several years nothing confirmed his
hopes until I communicated to your Society and to him the
occurrence of the polycystinous, diatom, and foraminiferal clay
stratum at St. Stephens, Alabama. This fact renewed his hopes,
and, while the clay was associated with undoubted eocene strata,
it was not what he desired to corroborate his hypothesis. He
wanted a clay of miocene age, which the former was not.

"Next I followed the subject through the boring of several
artesian wells at Mobile, and sent him the micro-fossil organic
evidence of the strata encountered at 700 feet — the foraminifera,
and a special minute bivalve whose specific name is still in con-
troversy— indicating that the pyritized marine diatoms found in
the clay were of pliocene age. So to this point we had not
reached a miocene clay.

1S93J NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 79

'* But when I made my last find of Tampa fossil diatomaceous
clay, I communicated with Mr. Woolman, and told him that an
illustrated article in the Engineering Magazine noted that geolo-
gists had stated that the productive phosphate area had been 'laid
down upon eocene limestone strata, which had not been sub-
merged after the upheaval.' I do not know what construc-
tion Mr. Woolman put upon this, but he replied that, if the peb-
ble phosphate was dredged from the Manatee River, Dr. Dall had
found distinct miocene fossil shells at Manatee. After he had an
actual inspection of the clay, he replied that it struck him as
equivalent in age to the Virginia outcrop of miocene clay strata,
the same as that which he had studied at Atlantic City and else-
where, and that he had also consulted Dr. W. H. Dall's latest
map of the geology of the Florida peninsula, in which the Fer-
nandina and St. Augustine coast was designated as 'newer mio-
cene,' and the Tampa coast as 'older miocene,' and he proposed
making a communication touching the new clay, based on these
recently collected data, to the Philadelphia Academy of Sciences
as promptly as possible.

''Mr. Woolman had in preparation a paper on a diatom de-
posit encountered at depths between 90 and 150 feet, in artesian
borings at Ponce de Leon Hotel, St. Augustine, Florida, but
said that he had not fully settled upon the age of the foramin-
iferal forms found in his boring samples, and this is why his work
has not been put upon record.

" Mr. Woolman was highly gratified at my discovery, as he said
that geologists, for two years past, had tried to trace the diato-
maceous clay or rock near Tampa on Hillsboro Bay, mentioned
by Prof. J. W. Bailey in his microscopical researches about 1852,
but without success. He said that he would defer to me, and if I
would inform him when my find was put upon record with the
New- York Microscopical Society, he would then make his com-
munication to the Philadelphia Academy, giving me full credit
for the discovery. So far as he could ascertain, this fossil marine
deposit had not been announced by any one previous to myself,
although he had been studying diatomaceous and foraminiferal
forms from St. Augustine, secured more than a year ago.

" Dr. Edwards wrote me that he thought the clay of eocene
tertiary age, and I wrote in reply the material points contained

80 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

herein in reference to its being of miocene age. However, if the
clay is not of miocene age, it can be so put provisionally until
other proof is adduced to the contrary."

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. A substitute for the camera lucida: by H. G. Piffard.

2. A microscopical electric illuminator : by H. G. Piffard.

3. Arranged spines of Echiims: by H. G. Piffard.

4. A Zentmayer portable microscope : by Walter H. Mead.

5. A simple form of compressor : by Walter H. Mead

6. A Tolles micrometer ruling: by George S. Woolman.

7. A Rogers micrometer ruling ; by George S. Woolman.

8. A home-made dissecting microscope : by F. W. Leggett.

9. A Beck microscope lamp : by Charles S. Shultz.

10. An enlarged model of Smith's vertical illuminator : by
Charles S. Shultz.

11. A metric scale, ruled by Prof. W. A. Rogers on speculum
metal, shown by means of the Beck lamp and the vertical illumi-
nator : by Charles S. Shultz.

12. Aselhis aquaticiis.Xw'vsx'g-.hy Yi^^'sci C. Bennett.

13. Sections of spines of Echinus: by James Walker.

14. Automatic revolving stage : by James Walker.

15. Automatic revolving polariscope: by James Walker.

Dr. Piffard explained his substitute for the camera lucida — a
right-angled prism fitted in place of the eyepiece of the micro-
scope, through which the image is projected downward perpendic-
ularly upon the drawing paper lying upon the table; also his
electric illuminator — a cylindrical glass bulb, three inches in
length by one inch in diameter, the illuminating filament, of the
ordinary horseshoe form, being composed of copper wire, with
the exception of three-quarters of an inch in-length of the middle
portion of one limb of the horseshoe, which portion consists of
carbon. This carbon, when incandescent, gives a streak of
light of intense brilliance about three-quarters of an inch long
and apparently about one-eighth of an inch wide. The magnified
image of this, focussedupon the object, gives '^ critical" illumina-
tion. Diffuse illumination is obtained by racking the condenser
a little out of focus.

Mr. Mead described his exhibits — a Zentmayer portable micro-

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 81

scope, made twenty years ago, of exquisite workmanship, having
no fine adjustment, but an excellent coarse adjustment ; also a
stage compressor of unusually easy operation.

Mr. Leggett described his home-made dissecting microscope,
comprising adjustment for the lens, swinging mirror, and firm,
ample stage.

President Shultz explained his greatly enlarged model of
Smith's vertical illuminator, which he had constructed for the
occasion, exhibiting plainly, at one view, to the entire audience
the operation of the apparatus.

Mr. William Wales said that, in conjunction with Prof. Hamil-
ton L. Smith and Mr. George Wale, he was engaged during two
years in carrying out Prof. Smith's ideas of the vertical illumina-
tor. They made both forms — glass and metal reflectors. The
apparatus was patented by Prof. Smith and the patent was
assigned to Mr. Wales.

Mr. George S. Woolman corroborated the statement of Mr.
Wales, and said the credit of the invention was due our country.

Mr. Shultz stated concerning his exhibited metric scale that'
Prof. Rogers worked for a year over this admirable scale. It
was soon found that speculum metal afforded the best lines, and
the most uniform power for actuating the ruling machine was
obtained from a weight elevated high in the building contain-
ing the machine.

Mr. Walker explained the method of cutting his sections of
spines of Echinus — the spines were thrust firmly into the holes of
ordinary pearl buttons, cemented in place with balsam, cut off
close to the buttons with a saw, and then spines and buttons
together were ground down to proper thinaess on successive
stones. Mr. Walker also described his automatic revolving stage
and polarizer, actuated by clockwork.

Dr. F. D. Skeel explained with blackboard drawings his im-
proved attachment for moving the fine adjustment of the micro-
scope in photography ; the main point of which improvement
consisted in carrying the long, endless cord, at the side of the
camera, to a grooved pulley on the stand below the fine adjust-
ment, and then coupling this pulley with the grooved milled head
of the fine adjustment by means of an additional short, endless

82 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

cord. This arrangement gives very easy, uniform motion, and
avoids all unequal strain upon the fine adjustment.

Meeting of March 17TH, 1893.

The Vice-President, Dr. Edw. G. Love, in the chair.

Twenty-six persons present.

Mr. Frederick Kato was elected a resident member of the
Society.

Dr. Arthur Mead Edwards read a paper entitled "On Mount-
ing Objects in Substances of High Refractive Index." Dr.
Edwards also donated specimens of Gum Thus to the Cabinet
and for distribution.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Brass slips for diffusing heat in mounting : by Arthur
Mead Edwards.

2. A super-stage for elevating the object above the stage of
the microscope, allowing very oblique light from beneath : by
Arthur Mead Edwards.

3. Inexpensive slides of diatoms, prepared by P. Klavsen : by
Arthur Mead Edwards.

4. Samples of purified Gum Thus, Styrax extracted by xylol,
and of Iodide of Methyl : by H. G. Piffard.

5. Diatoms mounted in Styrax : by H. G. Piffard.

6. Human skin undergoing calcification : by H. G. Piffard.

7. Pleurosigma Genus Platte, 70 forms, mounted in mono-
bromide of naphthalin : by Henry C. Bennett.

In reply to the question by Dr. F. D. Skeel, "Can diatoms be
stained ? " Dr. H. G. Piffard replied in the affirmative, referring
to the accounts by M. Tempere, of Paris. Dr. Skeel stated that
agate can be stained by successive immersions in honey and
sulphuric acid> and that many carnelians and agates are thus
stained.

Rev. J. L. Zabriskie gave some points of his experience on
the ease and rapidity of mounting in glycerin. In case of ob-
jects coot of an inch or less in thickness, permanent glycerin

1893] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 83

niounts can be made without the employment of any cell. Spin
with the turn-table a guide ring of India ink, about one-sixteenth
of an inch larger in diameter than the intended cover, upon
either the upper or lower surface of the glass slip ; place a mi-
nute portion of the glycerin — the proper quantity for different
sized covers being soon found under a little practice — in the
centre of this ring with a rubber bulb " dropper " to avoid
bubbles ; insert the object in this glycerin by means of needles ;
lower the cover glass upon the object very slowly ; avoid
squeezing out the glycerin beyond the cover, using only deli-
cate pressure with the needles, sufficient to cause the fluid to
spread to the entire periphery of the cover ; seal the mount at
once with a solution of brown shellac in alcohol, used as thick
as will flow easily, which shellac will form a jelly by union with
the glycerin at the edge of the cover, thus preventing the run-
ning in of cement subsequently applied ; set the mount aside
for twelve or twenty-four hours ; and then finish with a cement
consisting of equal parts of Japan gold size and ordinary asphalt
varnish. One coat of this cement will hold for a long time, but
it is belter to use successive coats, laid on at intervals of twelve
or twenty-four hours, until a smooth, bevelled ring covers the
edge of the mount.

In the use of a cell of any considerable depth, where it is not
so easy to avoid excess of glycerin, after the cover is gently pressed
down, apply a spring clip of very moderate force, only sufficient
to maintain its own position when the slide is handled ; wash
away the excess of glycerin by holding the mount slightly in-
clined under a gentle stream of water, about the diameter of a
lead pencil ; avoid drawing out the glycerin by attempting to
wipe the cover or its joints, but blow away the adhering water
with smart puffs of breath ; place the mount on the turn-table,
with the spring clip still in its position, and seal at once with the
shellac solution, and after twelve or twenty-four hours cement
with the black mixture as before.

Journal

OF THE

NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY

Vol. IX. OCTOBER, 1893. No. 4.

NOTES ON SOME RESEARCHES AMONG THE
DIATOMACE^.

BY K. M. CUNNINGHAM.
(^Read November i-jth^ 1893.)

By a peculiar trend of events my attention had recently been
called to the question of the plant or animal nature of the dia-
toms. This question had hitherto been of little interest to me,
very nearly all of my interest having been directed merely to an
accumulation of specimens of fossil or recent deposits and the
study of their distribution. But certain favorable opportunities
have enabled me recsntly to devote some attention to the study
of living diatoms. With this object in view I have prepared, and,
after due study of the same, I send herewith the series of slides
illustrating this paper as a donation to the Society.

It may be of historic interest to recall the fact that in the
" Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge " there is a publica-
tion, bearing the date of 1850, and entitled " Microscopical Obser-
vations made by J. W. Bailey, of West Point, N. Y., during a
tour through the States of South Carolina, Georgia, and Florida,"
in which work were listed and tabulated all infusorial and other
microscopic forms of life encountered in his travels through the
said territory, including the diatoms and the desmids, with fig-
ures of the new species found by himself. Since the year 1878,

86 JOURNAL OF THE [October^

when I became aware of the existence of the publication, its sub-
ject has lain as a dream in my mind. Years after, when I had
become quite familiar with the diatoms of both the South and the
North, I recalled that in his tabulation from all sources he had
listed about ninety-four species, including both marine and fresh-
water, and never exceeding more than twenty-five species from a
given locality. It has also been a matter of curious interest to
me as to the methods of preparation for study in vogue in or
about 1850. In the present day, as proved by my slides, I have
been able to get eighty species in a single mount from Mobile
Bay marine muds, and nearly seventy-five species from the brack-
ish material from the shore of Mobile Bay — the same material as
apparently examined by him from Mobile Bay. In alluding to
this, I do so with full respect for the eminence of the most prom-
inent investigator, in his day, of the diatoms of North America,
and not with any desire to detract from the honor of his laborious
researches ; but the thought calls up the question as to whether
the methods of to-day are in advance of those of nearly a half-
century ago. In the preparation of this paper I could not well
omit the name of Prof. J. W. Bailey, as its interest turns largely
upon a diatom described and figured by himself from material
derived from Mobile Bay, and shown in the plates to his work
referred to above ; and likewise shown in Wolle's " Diatomacese
of North America."

The opening during the present summer of a resort on Mobile
Bay, known locally as Monroe Park, by the Electric Railway
Company, enabled me to visit a strip of the shore of Mobile Bay
a few miles south of the city. While there, and looking around
for something of interest microscopically, I came upon a stratum
of lignite exposed on the beach at low tide. I repeated my
visits to this place to study it geologically. With a desire to
trace its extension, I made short excursions somewhat further
down the shore line from the Park, especially on occasions when
the tide was out in the evening. In this area the bay bottom was
covered, so far as the surface was free from the tide, with a species
of a moss-like water plant, which condition induced me to test
whether this moss-like growth would prove a source of diatoms.
I therefore gathered a portion of a plant, and by pressure forced
the fluid to fall on a spectacle glass used for such tests in the

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 87

iield. On dr3'ing the glass I examined it, and was rewarded by
finding an abundance of diatoms, including a species which I
had nearly despaired of ever finding or seeing. This proved to
be Bailey's Amphiprora or/iata, as figured in his " Microscopical
Observations, etc., in 1850." During all the previous years of
my diatom researches I had desired to find Amphiprora of any
kind whatever, but apparently in vain. Having my " treasure
trove," I secured one full plant with its complement of mud, and
it is from this, and a second supply of the clean plants, that I
have prepared the series of six slides typical of the original mate-
rial that Bailey must certainly have examined, as he referred to
material often gathered from bogs or on shores where the diatom
ooze abounded.

On the very same evening that I secured this moist water plant
I spent some hours in its examination, applying myself more
particularly to the character of the motion of the living diatoms.
It took me but a moment to find on the slide specimens of
living Amphiprora and Navicula. Confining my attention closely
to the appearance and structure of Amphiprora ornata, I was
enabled to observe that, if a bacterium drifted toward it and
made contact, it would be held as a prisoner in the full power
of the protoplasm covering the diatom externally. As is
well known through mounted specimens, as well as figures,
Amph'prora has delicate, hyaline, and rather broad alate lateral
processes. Bacteria and rotifers, once in contact with the
peripheral edges of the alae of the Amphiprora, are kept in a
■constant state of alternate or reciprocal motion from either
diametrical extremity. That is to say, the bacterium or oher
organism is rapidly transported from the middle constriction to
one or other of the extremities of the diatom, all the way, or
part of the way, in an alternating manner ; when it may, after
an interval of detention, be rejected by what appears to be a
voluntary impulse of the Amphiprora itself. Having seen this
phenomenon, I at once became aware of its importance in any
discussion involving the plant or animal nature of the diatom,
and more particularly as all my previous acquaintance with the
Diatomaceae had permitted me to remain content with the gene-
rally accepted opinion that the diatom was " a lowly unicellular
plant."

88 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

This accidental discovery of the motility of the protoplasmic
covering of the Afuphiprora induced me to see what was already
of record in relation to the cause of the directive motion of many
genera of the Diatomaceae, but more particularly the Naviculse.
I forthwith consulted all the available references to the life history
of the Diatomaceae within reach. Neither the " Encyclopaedia
Britannica," latest (ninth) edition, " The Columbian Cyclopaedia "
(1892), "Micrographic Dictionary" (1856), " Carpenter on the
Microscope" (1856), Rev. Francis Wolle's "Diatomaceae of
North America" (1890), " Generalities, on the Diatomaceae," of
Count Abbe Francesco Castracane (1884), nor the address of
ex-President Charles F. Cox before this Society, entitled " What
is a Diatom ?" and published in full in the Journal (January,
1892), contained the slightest reference to, or a suggestion of the
phenomena partially described in the preceding introduction, but
most or all of the authorities confined their notice to the distinct
and evident motion of translation of the diatom trustule in a simple
direct or retrograde motion. The mystery of its motion was left
involved in hypotheses, and no satisfactory solution was offered
by the various observers. That any diatom had a dual or a sub-
sidiary motion was everywhere regarded in the negative or not
entertained at all. The Amphiprora, which clearly exhibits this
dual power, is not mentioned at all. The fact that Amphiprora
has some of the attributes of protozoan life, rather than that of
plant life, had been hitherto overlooked, or at least seems to not
have been specifically alluded to, especially as appears in Wolle's
"Diatomaceae of North America," which presumably should give
the highest reach of experimental research obtaining on this sub-
ject to the year 1890. In the opinions submitted therein the
cause of the motion of diatoms remains a mere hypothesis re-
quiring elucidation. And no authors so far have touched upon
the subject of the dual or compound motion exhibited by Amphi-
prora ornata or any other species of Amphiprora.

After my initial experience related above, I made a second visit
to the bay shore, and carried along a collecting bottle, into which^
from a new supply of the peculiar moss-like water plant, I ex-
pressed as much fluid from it as I deemed necessary, and at night
proceeded to study it de novo. By the most delicate manipulation
known to me I freed the material from sand, and by repeated

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 89

washings in water and by a special form of concentration I secured
a dip to examine on an uncovered slide. For a period of three
hours I watched the various living and moving diatoms, noticing
closely every condition presented by such as appeared, but seek-
ing especially to keep in the field an Amphiprora ornata, which is
one of the smallest of its genus, but sufficiently large to study
clearly. The same phenomena were presented as in the first
experiment, but with this variation: after observing a bacterium
that had touched the edge of the ala on the left side, it was oscil-
lated a few times alternately, and was then transferred along the
edge of the ala to the constriction, and then continuously across
the broad central portion of the frustule to the ala on the right
side, always along the periphery, and on to the opposite extremity
of the diatom, where it disappeared. Immediately after this a
good-sized, motionless rotifer drifted into contact with the left ala
and was rapidly rotated along the edge of the ala on the left side,
and was then carried to the middle constriction, where it was
retained some time, when it was rejected by the diatom. While
the rotifer was being manipulated on the left side a bacterium
was performing its oscillations on the right periphery, and what
appeared to be a cluster of bacteria were held prisoners above
and around the middle portion near the constriction of the alae.

Another feature of interest attaching to the motion of Amphi-
prora is that in the event of its being capsized by striking some
obstacle in its path of motion, if thrown on its narrowest edge —
front view — it at once struggles to regain the position, which dis-
plays its side view, and then its motion continues direct and
rapid. This action intimates an intelligence akin almost to that
of a beetle on its back exerting itself to regain its natural position
on its feet.

While shifting the field in order to observe some other indi-
cations of the life motions, I observed a simple, small Navicula
having in contact at one of its sublanceolate ends a Nitzschia
closteriiim — closely agreeing with Wolle's figure. The Navicula
seemed to be rapidly driving the Nitzschia, in the manner that a
violin bow is rapidly drawn by rising and falling strokes, or in a
see-sawing motion, while the Navicula was quiescent. This pro-
duced the illusion of the source of motion being situated at the
prow or apex of the Navicula. But a moment later the illusion

90 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

was explained by seeing another Nitzschia closter!um, having
attached to its exoplasmic layer foreign particles that were being
rapidly transported around its entire periphery, from the right
side around to the left, sometimes direct, sometimes alternating.
At another time I saw a small rotifer held a prisoner by a small
Navicula. At times the rotifer moved away a space equal to its
diameter, but was drawn back each time into a fresh contact with
the edge of the diatom, as if by some invisible force. While still
in contact with the Navicula, it drifted or was drawn between the
Navicula and an Amphiprora into a sort of cul-de-sac. I saw
also that under this mysterious fore? it vibrated rapidly between
the two diatoms — the rotifer, being inert, had not an independent
power of motion to release itself from its captors. In the drop
of water on the slide there were numerous and very active small
Naviculce, whose motions presented nothing of special interest,
except possibly that they often came in contact with larger Navi-
culce and passed by in contact with the protoplasmic sheath of the
larger diatoms, and soon parted company with them, as their
motion was swifter and not retarded by the sliding contact. This
will suffice to record such observations as were derived from a
painstaking study of material taken from the shore of Mobile
Bay and examined within an interval of six hours.

Desiring to gather additional data bearing upon the behavior
of the living diatom under the lens, I had, about a week pre-
viously, secured some fresh-water diatoms directly from a natural
spring at the village of Whistler, Ala., five miles north of Mobile.
On a visit to the same locality in March last I casually found a
beautiful, clear spring flowing from a grassy, sloping hillside
into a barrel sunk flush with the grassy surface of the adjacent
ground. Selecting a small sample of the algge through which the
spring flowed away, I expressed the fluid therefrom on a spec-
tacle glass, and examined it with a pocket lens. I was surprised
to find the glass surface covered with a pure gathering of Navi-
cula viridis, all united in fours, or what I would call " tetradel-
phia." I then collected in a bottle a portion of the material and
took it to Mobile for examination as to the number and associ-
ation of species. But too much extraneous matter prevented a
suitable slide from being prepared, and the beautiful phenome-
non of the spectacle glass could not be repeated. On a recent

l893-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 91

visit to the same spring, in the early part of September, I took
with me a one-ounce bottle with parallel sides and semi-cylindri-
cal ends, which form was useful in the subsequent observations.
Having in mind the subject of the motility of the brackish-water
diatoms of iMobile Bay, I desired to pursue the subject further
with a distinctly fresh-water variety of diatoms. The material
expressed from the algje of this spring I studied for five consecu-
tive days.

On the evening of the day that I secured the Whistler material
I prepared a portion for examination, by repeated washings,
settlings, and changes of water, and then placed a drop on a slide,
when I found an abundance of living Navicula viridis — single
large individuals, and shorter ones grouped in fours and adherent
to each other. The first fact verified was that during the interval
between March and September the diatoms were still largely rep-
resented by the fourfold combination seen on my first visit to the
spring in March.

The following is a resume of what I observed during a close
study of the living material. On the first night of my study I
sought to detect, if possible, the presence of the protoplasmic
mantle or sheath as demonstrated and observed by Cornelius
Onderdonk, and recounted by him in Ilie Micr>. scope (1890).
Having the living diatoms at hand, I made a concentration and
removed as much water as possible, in order not to weaken the
dye. I also had convenient a bottle of aniline violet ink. to use in
the attempt to differentiate the protoplasmic mantle as indicated
by Onderdonk. On adding a few drops of the aniline dye to the
living frustules, I quickly placed a drop of the diatoms on the
slide and covered the same with a three-quarter inch cover glass.
My surprise was great when I observed that the diatoms had
been instantly killed by the liquid. All that portion of the field
not occupied by the diatoms or debris gave no color indication.
After a fruitless search for any indication of an evident proto-
plasmic layer, I came to the conclusion that it was of such
exceeding tenuity that it did not extend sufficiently far from the
silicious frustule to indicate its presence at all. But the dye
took at once on the diatoms, and on every other particle of
matter, vegetable or otherwise. The only inference I drew from
this experiment was that the aniline paralyzed instantaneously the

92 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

life function of whatever protoplasmic coating that might have
previously given rise to the power of locomotion in the frustules.
It then occurred to me to test the effect of the aniline as a means
of differentiating the diatoms, the strong and robust, as well as
the hyaline forms, which are sometimes nearly lost to view in
balsam mounts. For this purpose I allowed a liberal amount of
the material to remain in a concentrated solution of aniline for a
period of five hours, when I washed them repeatedly in changes
of water until no more color was evident in the fluid removed.
The result of this staining has furnished me with a wide range
of interesting data, fairly recorded in a mount forming a part
of the whole series of slides made to accompany these notes.
Notably among the phenomena presented may be mentioned
that on the slide may be seen numerous large, solitary specimens
of Navicula viridis, and specimens of a smaller size of the same
grouped mostly in fours, adherent together, and others by twos
alone. In addition to these there are many specimens of Eunotia,
Fragillaria, Navicula radiosa, and other smaller forms, all showing
an elegant amethystine color by daylight and a reddish violet
by student's-lamp light, and demonstrating that the stain had
taken satisfactorily. This staining with aniline violet differenti-
ated certain structures that would not have been modified in
balsam mounts. The living diatoms, dried on the slide and
covered with balsam, present the endochrome in a uniform layer
of color, filling the whole internal part of the frustule, in the
various shades of green, olive green, or brownish hues. AVhereas,
with the aniline stain, the endoplasm has been rent asunder and
driven to the side walls of the frustule, and is there densely
stained and banked up against the separating walls of the quad-
ruple-grouped diatoms, there being a distinct hyaline or clear
line of silex separating the frustules where in contact, thus differ-
entiating separately the collapsed endoplasm of each separate
frustule. This action of the aniline on the larger frustules was
identical for all. But on the smaller forms the endochrome is
merely indicated by two central patches highly stained, with a
clear bisecting line of silica separating the two masses of endo-
chrome, the sides of the frustules also showing hyaline borders
internally. I said above that there was no appreciable thickness
of the layer of exoplasm on the frustules, yet it is evident, by the

l893-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 93

frustules taking the stain in such a dense and beautiful manner,
that there must have been an infinitely thin layer of protoplasm,
which appropriated the dye. My reason for this conception is,
that in the two slides of the Montgomery, Ala., fossil fresh-water
earth, which also form a part of the series of slides, the silica, no
longer having any plasmic coating, refused to take the aniline dye,
except in a manner to be referred to further on, the plain surfaces
separating the lines of ribs being almost devoid of any show of
stain. The above is about all of interest that I could determine
as to the effect of an aniline dye on the living frustules.

The bottles containing the living diatoms from Whistler, as
well as the fresh brackish-water material from Mobile Bay, were
allowed to remain over-night on the mantel near the window.
On the next morning I observed the contents of the two bottles
with a band lens, and noted that hundreds of the Whistler dia-
toms had left the sediment and algae at the bottom, and were
travelling around near the line of the surface of the water in the
bottle in preference to any other part of the sides. At this mo-
ment I recalled the common statement that diatoms, as well as
desmids, will congregate at the lighted side of the vessel holding
the mud with which they are mingled. To verify this I success-
fully used the following expedient: Thrusting the bottle previously
described tightly down into a parlor match-box, I cut a hole in
the paper of the box, a quarter of an inch in diameter, at a point
about the middle height of the fluid, and on the reverse side I cut
a similar hole, taking care not to detach the pieces of paper, so
that they might be opened and shut as little windows, so as to
admit transmitted light through the fluid on subsequent examina-
tions. Having done this, I excluded all light from every part
of the bottle, except from the central quarter of an inch hole.
When this was done I exposed the bottle to the diffused light of
the day, toward the south, and at convenient intervals during the
daylight, for the balance of the day, I observed such changes as
went on at the orifice admitting daylight.

The first phenomenon of interest, after about one hour's ex-
posure, at about 9:30 a.m., was that the diatoms had already
congregated at the spot of clear glass in fair numbers and were
travelling across the field in all directions, with an easy, steady,
direct motion. There were also groups of the " tetradelphia"

94 JOURNAL OF THE fOctobcr,

JV. viridis, and the single larger N. viridis was seen. But the
most unexpected thing noted was that seven Cyclops and Cypris,
and the young of the former, had gathered at the light spot. In
a moment the Cyclops scattered, but the Cypris kept on its lively
feeding and remained constantly within the spot admitting the
light. At other intervals during the day the Cyclops could always
be seen playing around or darting across the light spot, and early
in the day a few desmids appeared attached to little strands of
algge, and also a few large desmids — Micrasterias rotata and
Closterimn mottiliforme.

At a time when the diatoms were noted as being quite abun-
dant, I arranged the microscope by bringing the tube to a hori-
zontal position, and placed the bottle upright between the thin
metal stage and the substage. I then was enabled to observe
the travelling motion of all the diatoms congregated within the
radius of the quarter of an inch circular opening admitting the
light directly through the centre of the liquid. A Beck &
Smith half-inch lens gave a sufficient magnification, of, say, two
hundred diameters, enabling me to view all of the diatoms, large
or small, while in active motion. This method of examination
has the advantage that the diatom is in actual contact with, and
is adherent to, a smooth glass surface, and, as its movement pro-
gresses in a straight line for the whole distance of a quarter of an
inch, the rate of movement can be timed by a watch. As this
was relatively slow, it will be needless to state how many seconds
were consumed in traversing the width of the opening. And as
there were quite a number simultaneously crossing, there seemed
to be no interruption to a continuous direct motion, as would
happen when a slide is examined in a horizontal position and
the field littered with particles of debris. When such is the
case the direct motion is usually interrupted. An obstacle inter-
cepting the path of the diatom causes it to reverse its propelling
power, whatever that may be. But in the bottle there was no
debris adhering to the sides, and the only obstacles to be en-
coun'ered were other diatoms travelling at will in the general
field. The desmids were never adherent to the glass, for if the
bottle was held in the hand on any occasion they were always in
a tremulous state, chiefly attached to minute threads of algae,
while the diatoms kept up a constant motion, always in contact

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 95

with the glass, while being examined with a moderately high-
power hand lens.

This movement of the diatoms in contact with the smooth inte-
rior surface of the glass bottle will, I think, not yield to any other
interpretation, except that the gelatinous character of the envel-
oping protoplasm permitted them to adhere safely to the glass
without impeding their motion at pleasure ; and this is probably
why there was little or no evidence of the jerky or retrograde
motion often seen in a restricted field, as would appear under a
one-sixth lens.

The facts developed here, and in the preceding account of the
motility of Amphiprora ornata, I propose to utilize in the closing
portion of these notes, when I will present my argument in favor
of the plea that the diatom has as much right to be regarded as
a protozoan as any of the other already acknowledged rhizo-
pods. I return for the moment to note additional studies of the
character of the motion of the large N. viridis. While contem-
plating the movements of a large specimen, I kept the diatom
constantly in the field to test even a suspicion of any sheath or
protoplasm covering. Noting very closely its perimeter, I was
able to distinctly make out that the diatom was surrounded by
a barely perceptible aureole, its outline being indicated by a row
of three or four minute particles of debris — not bacteria. These
remained continually at a permanent line close to one edge of
the frustule, leaving a hyaline space separating them from actual
contact with what would be regarded as the silicious edge of the
frustule. While still keeping my attention fixed steadily on this
line of minute debris, additional particles were gathered and took
their position in line with the others. But for this phenomenon
it would have been practically impossible to differentiate the ex-
tension of the gelatinous and pellucid covering from the surround-
ing water.

On another occasion I watched the action of drifting bacteria
and other particles passed during the transit of the diatom.
These were constantly drifting by, either above or under the
frustule. Eventually the progress of the diatom was stopped for
a few moments by collision with a mat of debris, when a large,
motionless, gelatinous globule was arrested at its free extremity.
At the moment I recognized that the globule was under and in

96 JOURNAL OF THE [Octobcr,

contact with the diatom, and about half-way freed from its end.
Now, while the diatom was at rest, the globule, without any
motion of its own, was transported back to a point under the
central nodule of the diatom. After resting there a moment it
was carried back to the free end of the diatom. Meanwhile the
diatom freed itself from the obstruction, and the globule was
liberated, and I then again saw that the globule was inert and
incapable of motion of its own. Therefore it is reasonable to
suppose that its motion was due to a propelling influence exerted
over it by the exoplasm of the Navicula viridis.

With regard to the momentum of the diatom in motion, I saw
a rapid traveller, a small Navicula radiosa, forge along and strike
a large, quiet JV. viridis about the middle, with such an impetus
as to throw the IV. viridis through an arc of more than forty-five
degrees to the left of the point of impact It immediately re-
gressed after the shock. The mathematical physicist could tell
the nature of the impact — as impact is a resultant of weight and
velocity, and motion is the opposite of inertia, one indicates life
and action, the other inability to change position without some '
extraneous force.

Still drawing upon my study of the Whistler fresh-water gath-
ering, I examined closely the behavior of the " tetradelphia "
groups of Naviculae. I observed that the quadruple brotherhood
of so-called single cells could turn around in their own length,
that they could also travel in straight lines, and that if capsized
or thrown on their " beam ends " they struggled to bring them-
selves to the normal position of bodies swimming horizontally.
While they were struggling to regain the plane of flotation I was
enabled to study them in every aspect. In these frustules the
characteristic endoplasm, endochrome, oil globules, vacuoles,
etc., were clearly seen, more particularly through the cingula, or
connecting band, as this is less lined than the frustular faces.
This combination of four frustules would seem to suggest that
the directive force of the quadruple frustules is controlled largely
by the two external frustules, and for the four to move in a
direct line the protoplasmic, propelling force (?) must be syn-
chronous in all four; and when it is not so, or when the quadruple
frustules are moving in a circle of their own length, the rapid,
undulatory vibrations of the protoplasmic sheath of the two

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 97

outer frustules must certainly operate inversely to each other,
or are not, at least, synchronous and impulsing in the same
direction. This is merely suggested as an hypothesis of cause of
motion.

As expanding further the subject of motion in the diatom, I
will offer another phase that may have a useful bearing on cer-
tain of such hypotheses long in print and subject to revision. At
another tifne, while seeking clues to the presence of the proto-
plasmic covering, I followed a large Navicida viridis in its move-
ments through the water, as seen in the field of the microscope,
the slide being uncovered. In the wake of the retreating end of
the diatom there appeared to be a form of attractive suction over
minute particles along its line of transit. A train of minute par-
ticles lagged along after the passage of the diatom, at a distance
to the rear of about the width of the diatom, until the attracting
power had ceased to act, when they would become still. The
particles vvere drawn in semicircular arcs from either side of the
axial line of the diatom's passing range, the axial line being tan-
gential to the opposing arcs of motion of the particles following
in the wake of the diatom. It would have been impossible for
this movement of particles to have taken place if the motion of
the diatom was caused by the expulsion, at any time, of infini-
tesimal jets of water. Likewise it offers an insuperable objection
to the theory of motion accredited to Prof. Hamilton L. Smith
and quoted from Wolle's " Diatomacese of North America " :
'^that the motion of the Naviculae is due to injection and expul-
sion of water, and that those currents are caused by different ten-
sion of the membranous sac in the two halves of the frustule,"
etc. Wolle also quotes Cornelius Onderdonk as ascribing the
movements of diatoms to "a thin fluid mass in rhythmical mo-
tion," which Onderdonk had elsewhere proved to his own mind
by experimental dyeing tests : " The fluid rhythmical mass cov-
ered the surface of the diatoms.'' I looked up the original com-
munication of Onderdonk and read it. While his experiments
were very interesting, he had made no reference whatever to the
power of the protoplasmic layer to capture and tenaciously hold
and transport, at its own volition, appreciable masses of living
particles.

It may not be inappropriate to introduce herein a transcript of

98 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Rev. W. Smith's views in regard to the motion of diatoms, quoted
in Carpenter, edition of 1856: "Among the hundreds of spe-
cies which I have examined in every stage of growth and phase of
movement, aided by glasses which have never been surpassed for
clearness and definition, I have never been able to detect any
semblance of a motile organ, nor have I, by coloring the fluid by
carmine or indigo, been able to detect in the colored particles sur-
rounding the diatom those rotary movements which indicate in
the various species of animalcules the presence of cilia " ('' Syn-
opsis of British Diatomaceae," Introduction, p. xxiv.). This quo-
tation would also seem to indicate that the Rev. W. Smith was
not acquainted with the peripheral motion of the protoplasmic
\z.y^x oi Amphiprora, for if he had been acquainted with this he
would have had to modify the above opinion and substitute a
form of motility independent of any easily seen ciliary processes.

The theory which the sum total of my experience so far sug-
gests is that the motion is probably caused by an infinitely rapid
undulatory motion of the protoplasmic sheath, which I assume to
exist, covering the diatom on all sides, which vibratory pulsations
are too minute to be seen under any degree of magnification, and
whose reactionary beats against the water cause the forward or
retrograde movements at the instinctive will of the diatom.

Returning to the theory of propulsion advanced by Prof. H. L.
Smith, and with all due regard for his long and signal experi-
ence in the study of living and other diatoms, I would respect-
fully call attention to some points calculated to weaken, or even
vitiate, the claims of any expulsive action connected with a me-
dian diaphragm separating any two frustules that are united and
in motion. The quadruple frustules are fairly quick in their pro-
gression. Were the hypothesis actually true for a single indi-
vidual, we would, in the quadruple instance, have four frustules
propelled by tv/o exterior sides, and eight opposing prows, leaving
the three central enclosed walls in "innocuous desuetude" until
each frustule was allowed to shift for itself.

Before finally disposing of the question of motion of diatoms,
I would like to advance two more points of interest bearing
strongly upon the subject. In the brackish material containing
Amphiprora ornata there were numerous specimens of Nuviciila
Smithii. I gave some attention to one of these, and if the rela-

l893-J NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 99

tively slow motion of a iV^. viridis can interest and hold the at-
tention, this interesting form must in a higher degree give cause
for admiration. Conceive a beautiful, strongly lined, golden-
hued oval rushing through the water with a speed outdistancing
all other forms that I have ever seen in motion. When this is seen
it is almost impossible to disassociate the idea of a strongly pulsat-
ing life and animal energy from this little creature. To call it a
"simple lowly plant " would be to treat it with a presumptive in-
dignity. If one were permitted to speculate as to the character
of its motion, the mind might conceive of vibratile pulsations
as swift as the undulatory waves of light, or as the rapid alterna-
tions of the electric arc current in producing its light, if we take
into consideration the diatom's minute size and its energetic prog-
ress through the water by the imagined pulsations of its invisi-
ble protoplasmic sheath.

Lastly, in relation to another character of motion — that of the
Bacillaria paradoxa. When we have seen that the ribbon of con-
jugate frustules is brought to a straight line with terminal frus-
tules, taking the order of "right dress, '^ and that suddenly the
end file leader darts off at a rapid stroke to the end of its neigh-
bor, and that the others do the same in quick succession, until
the whole line or group have passed each other, and then repeat
the same movements in a retrograde manner, we have viewed a
life movement of the most curious interest and truly paradoxical
in its nature. If we carefully analyze the consequences of these
successive phases of motion, we are forced to admit that each
frustule has a sheath of a colloid or gelatinous character (some-
what like the coleoderma of De Brebisson) that allows the con-
tiguous sides of each frustule to coalesce or anastomose and sep-
arate with equal facility. If this were not the case they could
not live in collective communities. These facts substantiate,
without staining or other experimental expedients, the truth that
this diatom, and possibly all diatoms, are invested with a proto-
plasmic mantle imbued with life, and capable of being paralyzed
or killed instantaneously by staining agents, and that this proto-
plasm has some of the characteristics of the protoplasni of the
protozoa.

In the brackish material I witnessed a small Amphora, quiet and
motionless, upon the flat surface of which a bacterium seemed to

100 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

be struggling to cross its body, being apparently held by the
resistance offered by the protoplasmic layer of the Amphora. It
is well known by those who have made a study of the simple
Bacillus leptoihrix buccalis of the teeth, that if these are taken
directly from the teeth and put in a small drop of violet ink, and
a cover glass placed over them, their power to travel will be evi-
dent. They move along in a kind of scintillating way, and
change their position moderately fast while being observed, so
that there is no need of mistaking a bacterial movement for what
is known as the Brownian movement of powdered or finely
divided inert or mineral particles. The bacterial movement has
a distinct and peculiar character. The bacterial form alluded
to as traversing the surface of the little Ajnphora was evidently
under the restraining influence of a power lodged in the external
covering of the Amphora. I did not, however, follow it until it
freed itself from the Amphora. I may remark that this closes an
interesting variety of experimental and ocular evidence bearing
on the character of motion in the diatom, and also of its proto-
plasmic surface.

Resuming the thread of my study of the diatoms in the bottle
of material from Whistler, Ala., late in the evening of the fifth
day of my experimental studies, giving the final examination to
the condition of the diatoms at the spot admitting daylight, I
was surprised to find that during the interval since I had last
■examined it exactly fifty desmids had come up and fixed them-
selves in the illuminated area of one-quarter inch diameter.
These were all of one species — Micrasterias rotata. The diatoms
still had life. But on the next morning — the sixth day — I found
that all of the desmids had dropped back into the sediment and
were no longer visible, and that the diatoms were all dead and
glued to the sides of the bottle by what I took to be colonies of
bacteria or some fungoid matter. A new class of life had
usurped the territory in continuing the struggle for existence.
Collaterally with the living Whistler diatoms, I studied occasion-
ally the bottle containing the Mobile Bay brackish-water diatoms,
and I incidentally observed that the rhizopod, Arcella vulgaris^
was quite common on the sides of the bottle. From the same
source I studied the movement of the living pseudopodia of Dif-
Jlugiapyriformis. I was previously familiar with Amoeba proteus,

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 101

but what struck me with most interest durin'g a portion of the time
was the presence of beautiful vorlicellae in the sediment at the
bottom angles of the bottle. Above the sediment there appeared
to be a silvery cloud of monad-like infusoria; and while viewing
the vorticellse with a powerful compound hand lens, the bottle
being vertical, I observed that the coronal cilia of the vorticellae,
when expanded and revolving, produced a sort of whirlpool, into
which poured a funnel-shaped stream of the minute infusoria.
The vorticellae were attached to debris, and were constantly whirl-
ing their cilia and retracting their soft, elongated body. The
exuviae of dying infusoria or bacteria, even from the first day
of securing the brackish-water specimens, were rapidly covering
everything with a flocculent, ochreous pellicle, which accumulated
so rapidly that on the fifth day all the vorticellce were dead.

The cause of motion in the Diatomaceae has eluded, so far, a
direct and positive solution, and the endosmotic and exosmotic
theory seems to be the most favorable hypothesis in the case.
The idea of exosmose and endosmose action would occur spon-
taneously to any one studying the biological functions of the
diatom. That there is, and can be, endosmotic action is demon-
strated by mounting the dried frustules with thin balsam. The
larger Pmnularice. of the Mobile Bay brackish source have the
major part of the air within the frustules replaced in a few min-
utes with the balsim; and this action of displacement of air
continues for days after the slide is prepared. This is proved by
the so-called canaliculi showing very clearly aid distinctly the
rib-like markings filled with air bubbles (That these spaces
are not canaliculi, but rather corrugations or flutings, I will
endeavor to sustain when I reach the subject of my experiments
in charging the markings of the diatoms with coloring matter.)
Gradually, after days, there is a full and complete expulsion of
all air from the frustules, provided the balsam is thin when first
used. If the balsam is quite thick, and dries readily, the air
will remain permanently.

In regard to the substances designated as endochrome, chloro-
phyll, and a substance, derived from the chlorophyllaceous matter
of the diatom, known as phycozantina, I have thought it proper
to suggest that the contents of diatoms are not identical with
the chlorophyll of the desmids or of the leaves of plants, but

102 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

are characteristic products of the feeding of the living diatoms
among the water plants, or other sources of food supply peculiar
to their habitat. I would advance the following, bearing upon
the subject, viz.: If the diatoms are expressed from the common
green algae of springs, or slimy confervae of ditches where the
plants are exclusively green, the endochrome is mostly of a dull
or bright green, and even emerald gieen. But the student of
the Diatomaceae is also, almost always, taught to seek for them
wherever moist surfaces are covered with a rusty or ochreous
color. It is certain that a brown or ochreous color is not indi-
cative of chlorophyll, as the name itself means the "green of a
leaf." On the contrary, the contents of the living diatoms de-
rived from brackish mud are mostly brown, or possibly olive
brown. While one is contemplating diatoms containing brownish
contents, he will also note that the associated vegetable debris in
various stages of decay is also brown and matches with the color
of the endochrome. So, then, the color of the endochrome is
probably a result of the character of the food supply found in
the local habitat of the diatom, and it may be a product of
morphological assimilation and digestion. On examining certain
species of Surirella on the Mobile Bay slides, emerald-green
stains may be seen at the wedge-shaped end of the frustule, while
the balance of the frustule is colorless ; but the slides also illus-
trate brown- or green-colored contents of various shades in ex-
treme profusion.

Having, to my own personal satisfaction, witnessed the indispu-
table evidence of an intelligence in three representative species
of three genera of the Diatomaceae, and having stated in plain
terms the manner in which the proof was adduced, and which is
duly capable of verification by any one who will take the trouble
to review and corroborate the facts and phases established by
my experiments, I will now endeavor to make an expansion of
these biological phenomena, to draw attention to the fact that
any diatomist, expert or amateur, who sees fit to regard the dia-
toms as belonging to the protozoa rather than to the unicellular
plants, can feel some satisfaction in his own mind, notwithstand-
ing all that is upon record excluding the diatoms from the lowest
order of the animal kingdom. This inclination with me has been
the outcome of accumulated experience in the study of the

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 103

Diatomaceae, as a purely scientific pursuit or pastime, for the
past fifteen years. If the aggregate result of one's efforts in any
line of study is of any value, it certainly entitles him to enter the
field of generalization, if he finds a reasonable or substantial
basis to induce such action.

To within about a year ago I felt satisfied with the common-
ly conceded position of the Diatomaceae among the unicellular
algae, and assigned them to the vegetable kingdom in prefer-
ence to the animal kingdom. Less than a year ago Dr. Arthur
Mead Edwards, in a letter to me, propounded the query, *' What
is a diatom ?" and also answered his own question by saying, " I
believe that the Diatomaceae are the Protista." Through an im-
politic impulse I replied that it would scarcely be possible to ad-
mit that the diatoms were other than " unicellular plants." When,
in order to substantiate his conception of their animal characters,
he announced in a microscopical journal that he had actually
seen the animal occupant of a frustule of Coletonema eximium
leave and re-enter its shell on several occasions, I wrote him that
the species of that name were so small that it would seem hope-
less to take that view of one of the smallest among the genus
Pleurosigma. When we mention the name of this eminent phy-
sician, who has devoted forty years of his life to the study of the
Diatomaceae, and who might justly be styled the Nestor of Ameri-
can diatomists, he must be credited with valid reasons for refus-
ing to accept the diatoms as single-celled plants, and for using his
abilities in opposition to the continuance of such a view.

I would feel better satisfied to have the station of the Diatoma-
ceae removed from the domain of doubt which surrounds their
position, by irrefragable proof. I would be more contented in re-
alizing that this special class of animated matter was ranged
with animal life rather than with' plant life. It would tone down
and remove from the realm of triviality the enthusiasm of those
whose mind has become captivated with the beauty and mystery
attached by the Creator to this mystical unit of the universe. If
genius could demonstrate beyond cavil the ajiimal nature of the
Diatomaceae, then one would find the objects of his favorite
study placed a scale higher than the simple Amoeba and in near
relation to the beautiful Radiolaria. Who will undertake to ex-
plain why the Diatomaceae so strongly appeal to intellectual

104 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

minds? Upon what common grounds of interest have clergymen
of all denominations, soldiers, physicians of the cultured races,
and many others who were gifted with the naturalistic instinct,
been incited to connect their names and fame with a perpetuation
of the study of this department of invisible nature, if not through
that natural bent which impels the intellectual faculty in certain
individuals to an eternal expansion of the philosophical spirit or
the conquest of abstraction over matter, space, and time ?

Passing to the staining of living diatoms, I will refer to some
results accomplished by a few experiments. Having already
tried the diatoms derived from a fresh-water spring, I thought
proper to extend the process to some fossil fresh-water deposits,
on account of their richness and the large size of the contained
species. I selected for trial an ounce or two of the fossil fresh-
water deposit, discovered by myself two years ago, occurring at
Montgomery, Ala., being the most conspicuous deposit of fresh-
water forms found in the Southern States.

This deposit contains the largest and most beautiful variety of
Pinnularia nobilis, whose form was not yet known up to the date
of publication of Rev. Francis Wolle's " Diatomaceae of North
America," and, therefore, is not shown in that volume. While
employed as draughtsman of the machine shops of the Mobile
& Ohio Railroad Company at Whistler, Ala., five miles distant
from Mobile, I daily made an extensive use of chemicals in pre-
paring paper for the " blue copying process." I was prompted
to use the bath of this process for staining the diatoms. The
proportions are these: To an ounce each of red ferriprussiate of
potassium and ferrocitrate of ammonia add four ounces of water.
The two ounces of diatomaceous earth were boiled in a strong
soap solution for an hour or more. Then the boiled diatoms
were washed in repeated changes of water to remove objec-
tionable debris and traces of alkali — as the alkalies discharge the
blue color of the stain. The diatoms were then freed of water,
and decanted on a piece of common blotting paper to remove
the remaining water. In this state they were transferred to the
"blue process" liquid. The material, in small quantities, was
poured on common china plates, and constantly moved about
until the liquid and diatoms were spread as a thin layer over the
whole surface of the plates, and then exposed to the direct rays

l893-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 105

of the bright sunlight for a quarter of an hour or longer. When
the rays of the sun had acted sufficiently upon and had thor-
oughly dried the diatoms, the next step was to recover them by
washing the material in pure water and collecting the residuum
together again. The experiment proved successful, and the
diatoms were seen to be duly stained a beautiful light shade of
blue.

I next mounted a slide in balsam and viewed it under the
microscope, and was well pleased with the result. The internal
corrugations held the stain, differentiating the various markings
in a moderately satisfactory manner, and gave the frustules a
far better appearance than when unstained. But, not being fully
satisfied with the effects of the blue stain, it occurred to me to
restain a portion of the material already stained blue. Before
having accomplished the blue staining I feared that it would be
a failure, and thought to substitute aniline violet for the blue
liquid. Taking a pipette, I deposited a quantity of aniline into
the blue liquid containing the diatoms, when I observed that the
liquids would not mix, but the aniline at once gathered in round
drops. Failing in this, I drew off all the blue staining fluid
from the diatoms and removed the moisture by decanting again
on blotting paper. I next put the diatomaceous mass into pure
aniline, and allowed it to be immersed for about five minutes or
more. I then removed the excess of aniline dye, and washed the
diatoms in repeated changes of pure water until no more stain
came off in the water. I then dried the stained material and
mounted a slide in balsam. When I submitted the violet-stained
diatom slide to microscopic inspection I was pleased at my suc-
cess, as there was in many frustules a perfect differentiation of
all markings of every character; the punctate striae o{ Cymde/ia, the
pinnulse of all the Pi?inulari(B, and the ribs of Surirella, were, in
many cases, so perfect that every individual rib could be easily
counted, the markings called canaliculi, or costge, having the
appearance of a dark, short line with distinct semicircular ends,
each perfectly differentiated from its neighboring rib by a deli-
cate, clear line of silex showing no stain ; nor was the median
smooth surface, divided by the raphe, stained, but the lines of the
raphe and its terminal dots were filled with color.

I offer this as my view of the staining : The internal chemi-

106 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

cal deposit of the blue stain had thrown down or coagulated the
aniline wherever the blue stain had taken effect. Otherwise,
where there were no markings visible on the frustules, as on the
smooth median surface divided by the lines of the raphe,
there was no stain worth noticing. The raphe was in many
cases well differentiated, as well as the two central nodular and
two terminal dots of the larger Pinnularice. These two stained
slides were the only ones made to test the possibilities and ad-
vantages to be derived from staining. As they have given ad-
mirable results, it adds another kind of interest in the study of
diatoms. Had the material in the slides containing Amphiprora
ornata been stained either blue or violet, the Amphiprora therein
could have been readily located on the slides, but in the un-
dyed state they are extremely hyaline and somewhat difficult
to locate in balsam mounts under high powers.

The two stained slides were prepared for the series illustrat-
ing these notes. In connection with these two slides it may be
noted that there is little affinity on the superficial surface of the
fossil diatoms for the dye, but the external surface of living dia-
toms, after drying and mounting, indicates that such surfaces ab-
sorb and retain a perceptible amount of dye, which fact suggests
that the external layer of protoplasm must have retained it. On
an examination of the frustules in the slide stained by the com-
pound process, it will be noted that there is an indication of
coagula of the dye adherent to the frustules, while this appear-
ance is entirely wanting in the Whistler fresh-water living dia-
toms as stained with aniline alone, and in the blue-stained fossil
diatoms from Montgomery, Ala.

If my language has been clear, it will be understood that the
salient feature of this article is that the diatom is endowed (pos-
sibly all diatoms) with two non-interfering motions, qualities in-
dicative of life — namely, the direct and retrograde, which is the
generally known and universally acknowledged motion of the
whole frustule, single, double, or quadruple, and also the sub-
jective motility of the exoplasm or protoplasmic covering. The
principal characteristics of this latter motion have already been
given. This claim is, however, not advanced in the case of the
discoidal forms, found adherent by countless thousands to ma-
rine algse and the leaves of Valisneria, such as Arachnoidiscus,

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 107

Actinocychis, Coscinodiscus, and Biddulphia Icevis, which appear
to pass their life cycle attached to water plants. But we also
know that millions of the travelling frustules are removed from
water plants which, when dried, exhibit the frustules in illimit-
able numbers, as may readily be determined from the mass of
moss-like water plants sent herewith to the Society for distribution
to such members as may desire to study them in the dry state.

Now, I would suggest that the character of the subjective
motion of the protoplasm of the diatom possibly has its homo-
logue in the cilia, pseudopodia, and other admitted protoplasmic
appendages of the true Infusoria, and the Rhizopoda, and, in fact,
the Protozoa generally; that is to say, in a contractile and ex-
tensile power common to the lowest forms of microscopic ani-
mal life. Since the activity of the protoplasmic sheath of the
Amphiprora ornata is now clearly pointed out, it is within the
range of verification by the simplest means. One is certain of
witnessing a phenomenon that has for many years been of mys-
terious interest to observers. But there are two kinds of proto-
plasm, that of plants and that of animals. And the simplest in
structure of the animal protoplasms is that associated with the
Rhizopoda, which, barring the nucleus, are structureless, gelatinous
masses, having an inherent extensile and retractile power, and
presenting various modifications of outline. When employed in
seeking their food, then their characteristics are best shown and
appreciated.

Amosba proteiis offers us protoplasm in one of its simplest con-
ditions, that is, where it is devoid of the power of secreting a
mineral covering, or even the rudiments of an internal skeleton.
From this simple stage protoplasm passes through rising grades
of complexity, ending in its power sometimes to secrete a chitin-
ous covering, and sometimes a silicious shell or a shell built up
of grains of silex. There is also the simple, structureless proto-
plasm of the Foraminifera, which is endowed with the power of
secreting a shell from calcareous sources, and that of the sponge,
which exercises the power of assimilating the molecules of car-
bonate of calcium or silica disseminated in the fluids of its
habitat.

To further expand the relation between animal protoplasm and
its peculiar power to secrete silica, I will offer my illustrations

108 JOURNAL OF THE [October^

from the domain of the Protozoa. I have consulted as many
sources of information as the limited literary resources of my
surroundings would admit.

First of all, possessing a copy of Joseph Leidy's " Rhizopods
of North America," I consulted that for a portion of my data. In
the said monograph is a general account of the classification of
the Protozoa and their characteristics, as adapted from the greaf
work of Prof. Haeckel. In this I find that, of the true Rhizopoda
alone, the following species are characterized as having a proto-
plasm capable of secreting silicious shells, skeletal coverings, or
external appendages — \\z., Euglypha alveolata and Euglypha olex;
Clathuralina elegansj Acafithocystis (minute silicious spicules);
Challengeria (single-celled silicious organisms); Acanthometrina
(having its spicules arranged in geometrical patterns, such as
might be developed in a space of three dimensions, or on the sur-
face of a sphere, and, owing to their extreme delicacy, collapsing
or falling apart on drying and handling, and which were appa-
rently only found in the material dredged by the C/ialletiger); and
also the Thallasicola, together with the numerous genera of the
Radiolaria.

In connection with these I would refer to the fact that the
peculiar open-meshed and stellate silicious skeletons known as
Dictyocha, hitherto classed with the diatoms, likewise the forms
called Eucainpia, are stated in WoUe's " Diatomaceae of North
America" to be no longer regarded as diatoms, but are excluded
therefrom. This dictum would relegate them to the Protozoa. But
they are nearly always present in recent as well as fossil diatoma-
ceous earths, as I have put upon record in the Journal of the
Society in some remarks upon a small Navicula didyma overlap-
ping a Dictyocha fibula in the body of a Coscinodiscus from the
Tampa fossil earth slide, filed with and donated to the Society.
What expert diatomist will undertake to clear up the puzzle pre-
sented by the fifty or more discoidal forms on the same selected
slide, exhibiting, either upon or through the internal structure of
the diatom, hundreds of minute diatoms of many distinct species
held therein ? How did they get there, and why was the selec-
tion limited exclusively to the minutest of forms ? Has any one, up
to the noting of this peculiar characteristic of the discs of the
Tampa marine fossil earth, made any observation of a similar con-

1893.J NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 109

dition in the fossil deposits of any other known region of the
globe ? Notice also the power of the Foraminifera to secrete cal-
careous shells, and of the Spongidge to secrete calcareous spicules,
and we can infer that the animal protoplasm of the Protozoa has
the power to elaborate out of their surrounding fluids the neces-
sary shields or frames best adapted to their vicissitudes.

Against all of these positive and convincing data we can con-
trast nothing of an analogous kind in plant life. It would be
useless to refer to the power of certain plants that flourish in
ditches and marshes, and in tropical and semi-tropical regions, as
the Eqiiisetacece, or the canes, bamboos, and cereals, whose cuti-
cular surface is a layer of vegetable silica. I believe that there is
not any analogy between the power of the protoplasm of the
Diatomacese to assimilate oxide of silicon as an integral part of
its life, and the power of the plants named above to secrete what-
ever silica there may be in their woody structure; while there is
abundant evidence of the animal protoplasm having in an eminent
degree, and almost exclusively so, the power to appropriate from
fresh or salt water the requisite silica needed in its life cycle.

But what has already been adduced does not reach the inferen-
tial bounds of the subject. Convictions often arise from fortui-
tous sources to round up a final conclusion. And as the diatomist
accumulates fresh experiences year by year, he may group his facts
in aiding him to some final conclusion or to reinforce some spe-
cial view.

It is at this stage of the inquiry that the question comes up,
Why is it that in nearly every known marine fossil diatomaceous
deposit the silicious skeletons of the Diatomaceae form the major
part of the deposit, with few exceptions ? The main exception
is where the proportion of the diatoms in the deposit is less than
the other fossil organic remains derived from the recognized rhi-
zopods. What construction and interpretation are we justified
in putting upon the fact that when we analyze any given fossil
marine deposit we invariably find the following derivatives of the
Rhizopods, viz., silicious Polycystinse, or more properly Radio-
laria, silicious sponge spicules, and silicious Diatomaceae, to-
gether with calcareous foraminifera, invariably, or at least with
few exceptions, associated in deposits of extraordinary thickness ?
Of two of these typical deposits I can justly claim that, at the

110 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

date of writing these notes, I am more familiar with two marine
fossil deposits, discovered by myself, than any one else who has
made the study of the diatoms a specialty. In one of these the
Polycystinae predominate above the Diatomaceae, sponge spicules,
and Foraminifera. This is the St. Stephens, Ala., eocene de-
posit, of which this Society possesses selected slides. Yet the
diatoms are very abundant therein, and of many species. The
other is the marine fossil deposit existing in the Florida phosphate
rock area around Tampa, Fla., wherein the Diatomaceae pre-
dominate above the Polycystinae and silicious sponge spicules,
and where calcareous Foraminifera seem to be entirely absent.
The egg-shaped or ovoid silicious gemmules of sponges (?) are also
very abundant therein. Taking an example right at hand, the
world has been supplied with cleaned diatoms from the harbor
clays and muds of Mobile Bay, in which are always associated
diatoms, a few species of Polycystinge, silicious sponge spicules,
and rhizopods of several species, and more particularly the sili-
cious shell-building ones known as Difflugia pyrifor7nis^ Arcella,
and others. The silicious bodies called Dictyocha also abound,
and the marine Foraminifera which secrete calcareous or chitin-
ous shells. The mineralized calcareous cementstein of Sendai,
Japan, and of the islands of Mor and Fur, situated off the northern
coast line of Europe, when dissolved in acid, yield masses of Dia-
tomaceae, sponge spicules, and Polycystinse, the diatom in the
several cases predominating. The fossil diatomaceous clays of
the Atlantic seaboard, from Southern New Jersey to Charleston,
S. C, at Richmond and other points, always yield a small pro-
portion of Polycystinae in combination with a tenfold percentage
of the Diatomaceae. The fossil deposits of the Californian coast
line yield diatoms in combination with Polycystinae and sponge
spicules, and so on ad infinitum.

Passing from the fossil marine deposits which I have put upon
record, I will mention two extensive and rich deposits of fresh-
water origin. First, the lacustrine fossil deposit at Montgom-
ery, Ala., where billions of sponge spicules are associated with a
stratum of diatom frustules over twenty feet in thickness and of
extraordinary extension. Second, the marine marsh fluviatile
deposit found by myself a year or so ago about a mile north of
Mobile, on the western bank of Mobile River, which deposit is

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. Ill

characterized by the extraordinary richness of its diatoms, si-
licious sponge spicules, and billions of silicious rhizopod shells,
Difflugia and other species.

At this point it might be appropriate to allude to a deposit
situated at Montgomery, Ala. — the great artesian basin, about fifty
feet in diameter and at least fifteen feet in depth. During a
visit to Montgomery I observed that the basin was being cleaned
out and that laborers wearing rubber boots were bailing out the
ooze that had accumulated at the bottom, which ooze was at that
time about eighteen inches deep and of about the consistence of
gruel. Desiring to ascertain whether the ooze was a diatom ooze,
I secured a quantity of the material and sent it to Mr. C. L.
Peticolas, who sent me back beautiful slides of a pure gathering
of Epethemia gibba. He remarked that it was the prettiest gath-
ering he had ever seen of that species, and likewise the hardest to
clean. Associated with the Epethemia gibba were a few species
of smaller diatoms. This basin has been a feature of Montgom-
ery, Ala., for over fifty years, and it is a remarkable fact that the
basin held but one conspicuous species of diatoms through so
many years.

As a last resort to defend the thesis that the Diatomaceae ought
to be regarded as belonging among the lower orders of animal
life rather than among plant life, we can bring to our aid the es-
tablished rules of the logician and of the mathematician ; the
former granting the use of the syllogism, and the latter that of the
" theory of probabilities," either of which I believe would force
the solution of the question in favor of an animal status. The
fact that the earliest algologists had classed certain genera of the
filamentous diatomaceous groups among the Confervoideee, such
as Melosira, Schizonema, Homeocladia, Masiogloia, etc., on ac-
count of their algaceous habit, does not necessarily compel those
to fall into line with their views who choose to regard all dia-
toms having a distinctive motive power and a motile protoplas-
mic sheath as belonging to the Protozoa.

Besides Leidy's excellent work, " Rhizopods of North Ame-
rica," I have consulted the able articles of various specialists
in well-known encyclopaedias, and I am under especial obliga-
tions to the paper of the eminent diatomist, Count-Abate Fran-
cesco Castracane, entitled " Generalita su le Diatomee^' (1884).

112 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

I have also consulted the article by Prof. H. L. Osborn, entitled
"The Protozoa — a Phyllum of the Animal Kingdom considered
Biologically " {American A'lonthly Alicroscopical 'yoitrnal, October,
1892), and the presidential address by Mr. Charles F. Cox, pub-
lished in the Journal of this Society, January, 1892. I have
not had access to the recently published work of Messrs. Frede-
rick W. Mills and Julien Deby, "An Introduction to the Study
of the Diatomacese " (London and Washington, 1893), so that to
this fact must be attributed any lack of acquaintance with the
theories which may have been lately proposed.

Before closing I fain would refer to the use made by certain
animals of the Diatomaceas as a part of their food supply, with
the view of determining whether the nourishment adapted to car-
nivorous animals is made up of microscopic plant protoplasm,
either of what is called the ectosarc or endosarc of the Dia-
tomacese. The most striking example within my own experience
is that source of the Diatomaceae derived from the gizzard or
craw-like organ of the mullet of the Gulf bays From such
gullets I have secured hundreds of pear-shaped pellets which
were literally masses of pure diatoms, and of which I sent many
in exchanges, both to foreign countries and also to Mr. C. L.
Peticolas, of Richmond, Va., who returned to me at times beau-
tiful preparations of the same. I have never found anything else
but diatoms and sand grains in these fish gizzards, so this, as far
as my experience goes, was the only food supply preyed upon by
the mullet. I have also demonstrated that the desiccated ex-
crementitious matter left by sea gulls on clusters of pilings in
Mobile Bay has been a rich source of marine diatoms, after the
undigested particles of fish bones, etc., are dissolved away with
acid. As the diet of the sea gulls is principally fish, we can
readily account for the presence of diatoms in such a recent
source as the living sea gull. The stomach of the oyster some-
times yields diatoms, but the green masses found in the stomach
are preferably marine algae. The digestive tracts of the sea
cucumbers — Holuthurige — have been justlv celebrated for yield-
ing immense numbers of marine diatoms. The trepang of the
China Sea (which is dried abroad and sold in Mott street, New
York, as a Chinese delicacy) is a sun-dried sea cucumber. From
several sources we learn that in the Arctic and Antarctic regions

1893.J NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY, 113

the Diatomaceae float on the surface of the seas as a dense
foamy sheet and are the sole food of some kinds of fish. The
Abbe Castracane, already referred to, has written a special paper
on the presence of the Diatomaceae as the sole and exclusive
food of Echinus and Echinodermata and Holothurite, dredged
by the Challenger from depths of 2,000 and 5>740 metres. His
abject was to prove, contrary to common belief at that period,
that plant life vegetated at a depth where the rays of the sun
never penetrated. The fact of his finding rich masses of Synedra
thallassiotrix Cleve. and Coscinodiscus in the Holothuriae and
Echini taken from these depths confirmed his belief. As the
Abbe was a firm believer in the plant nature of the Diatomaceae,
he could not well do otherwise than regard this kind of food as
plant life. He proved that the diatoms passed their life cycle at
the bottom of the ocean, at 5.740 metres, on the feeding ground
of the Echini and Holothuriae, as the endochrome had not been
removed by the digestive juices of the Echini or Holothurise
after their removal by the dredge from their habitat at the bot-
tom of the ocean, thus drawing another illustration of the use of
the Diatomaceae as a food supply.

I would note that at least four of the slides prepared from
Mobile Bay brackish-water material, and sent herewith, show a
number of rhizopods, Euglypha alveolata, within whose transpa-
rent and glass-like shells may be seen several varieties of very
minute diatoms — viz., Cocconeis pediculus and Naviailce. Also in
a more pronounced manner, in the beautiful plates of Leidy's
*' Rhizopods of North America," various amoebae are depicted at
the moment of enveloping within their fluent protoplasmic layers
large Pinnularice and other diatoms. And I have put upon rec-
ord with this Society a selected slide of Difflugia pyriformis and
other species, in which minute diatoms are seen to form a part of
the solid shell covering the soft pseudopodial parts of the animal
protoplasm when in its living state.

In the slides referred to above a pair of shells of Euglypha
alveolata are mounted, showing the mouths of the shells in contact,
or in the position usually regarded as that of conjugation. In
the same slides will be noted an extraneous class of minute ani-
mals found in Mobile Bay — viz., minute shrimp, whose chitinous

114 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

cases have been turned a light hue of pink through immersion in
balsam.

Before quitting the rhizopods I would make one more reference
to an interesting feature that will have its application in summing
up the consequences of these notes. I quote certain paragraphs
in the article by Prof. Osborn, noticed above: " In its chemical
nature the covering of Hyalosphenia is interesting, being a\bu?nin-
oid and less unlike the chemical nature of compounds in the
protoplasm than are the skeletons of lime or silica found in
Ratalia (foraminifera) actinospherium and many other specialized
rhizopods. // is, therefore, a less specialized act of the secretory
power to produce a c hit i no us than a calcareous or silicious skeleton."
And again: " Liberkuhnia is a naked body of rather definite out-
line, with one end prolonged into pseudopodia. Thepseudopodia
are never strictly radial, but are branching, the branches leading
out into finer and finer divisions which often anastomose or join
together. The food is caught upon the network of pseudopodia and
digested there.'' Or, in other words, we may put this interpreta-
tion on the concluding sentence, that an infinitesimal thread of
protoplasm has a digestive, and as a consequence an assimilative,
power. Can we not then inquire whether the living and moving
protoplasmic layer of Amphiprora ornata has not an identical
power, and is it not performing this digestive and assimilative
function when it carries from point to point on its perimeter such
particles as a motionless rotifer or a bacterium ?

From the preceding restricted reference to animal life depend-
ent on the Diatomacege, we are led to inquire whether an animal
protoplasm would not be better associated with the idea of the
sustenance of carnivorous animals, rather than that they should
seek the sustenance of a purely plant protoplasm to build up and
sustain their own changes of growth or waste.

This problem of the true nature of the sarcode of the Diato-
macege is now respectfully submitted to those observers who care
to take the pains to strive for a solution through observation, until
no doubt shall remain as to what it is, whether absolutely plant
or absolutely animal in its nature.

I would offer a few words explanatory of the contents of the
six slides exhibiting the diatoms from the edge of Mobile Bay
shore. They are prepared in duplicate, two of a kind, to show the

l893-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 115

smallest species, the intermediate, and the largest discs. And the
following genera are represented by from two to ten or more
species each : Ac/inanthes, Amphora, Amphiprora, Actinocydus,
Actinoptychus , Cocconeis, Cyclotella, Coscinodtscus, Campylodiscus,
Cymbella, Epethemta, Eunotia, Gomphonema^ Melostra, Nitzschiay
Navicula, Odontidium, Pleurosigtna, Steuroneis, Surirella, Synedra,
Terpsinoe, Tabeilaria, the Naviculae, however, being in the major-
ity. In the observations of the living diatoms detailed herein I
used a Zeiss D lens and at a magnification of about 600 diameters.

PROCEEDINGS.
Meeting of April 7TH, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Twelve persons present.

Mr. Noah Palmer was elected a Resident Member of the So-
ciety.

Dr. Samuel Lockwood, who was expected to deliver the ad-
dress announced on the programme, was by illness prevented
from attendance. An informal session was held.

Annual Exhibition, April 19TH, 1893.

The Fourteenth Annual Exhibition of the Society was held
at the American Museum of Natural History, Central Park,
New York City, on the evening of April 19th, 1893.

Objects and apparatus, as noted in the programme below,
were displayed in the large hall on the first floor of the Mu-
seum. At 9 o'clock Rev. E. C. Bolles, D.D., in the Lecture
Room adjoining, gave an explanation of the projection of nu-
merous microscopic objects on the screen.

PROGRAMME.

1. Water Wood-louse, ^j^//«j aquattcus, showing the circula-
tion of the colorless blood: by H. C. Bennett.

2. Section of Human Scalp, showing hair follicles, sebaceous
glands, and ducts : by H. C. Bennett.

3. Transverse Section of a Cat's Tongue : by Wm. Wales.

116 JOURNAL OF THE [October^

4. Section of Soap Bark, Quillaya saponaria^ showing long
prismatic crystals : by G. H. Blake.

5. Sulphate of Copper, shown by polarized light : by N, Pal-
mer.

6. Coal. Vascular Cylinder of a Young Stigmaria: by F.
W. Leggett.

7. Head of Tape-worm, Tcefiia solium, showing the Rostel-
lum and Suckers, with drawings of the same. Also specimens
of the Head in alcohol : by L. Schoney.

8. Butterfly Scales and Diatoms arranged in the form of a
Vase of Flowers : by G. S. Woolman.

9. Transverse Section of the Head of a Moth, Utetheisa
bella : by L. Riederer.

10. Longitudinal Section of the Antenna of a Wasp, Vespa
maculata : by L. Riederer,

11. Transverse Section of the Head of a Fish, Ai/ierina : by
L. Riederer.

12. Transverse Section of the Body of a Fish, Aiherina: by
L. Riederer.

13. Microtome, manufactured by Aug. Becker, Gottingen^
Germany : by L. Riederer.

14. Selection of Serial Sections : by L. Riederer.

15. Young of Marine Crustaceans : by E. J. Riederer.
16-18. Bacilli of Asiatic Cholera : by J. A. Gottlieb.

16. From a Culture in Bouillon, x 1,550.

17. From a Gelatin Culture, x 1,200.

18. Cultures in Nutrient Gelatin in Various Stages

of Development.

19. Human Blood, x 590 : by J. A. Gottlieb.

20. Blood of Seventeen-day Embryo Chick, x 480 : by J. A.
Gottlieb.

21. Frog's Blood (stained), X 330 : by J. A. Gottlieb.

22. The LeitzPhotomicrographic Apparatus : by J. A.Gott-
lieb.

23. Projection Apparatus, after Edinger : by J. A. Gott-
lieb.

24. Large Dissecting Microscope with Abbe's Camera Lu-
cida: by J. A. Gottlieb.

25. Six Sections of Building Stones, shown on Automatic Re-

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 117

volving Stage by polarized light. Also specimens of the stones
from which the sections were cut : by J. Walker.

26. Polycystina: by J. Walker.

27. Section of the Human Tongue : by C. S. Shultz.

28. Eggs of Various Insects, arranged : by C. S. Shultz.

29. Type Slide of Diatoms, arranged by D. B. Ward : by
A. M. Edwards.

30. Circulation of Protoplasm (Cyclosis) in Nitella : by M.
M. Le Brun.

31. Young Codfish, one to three days old : by H. W. Calef.

32. Transverse Section of the Leaf of the East India Rubber
Tree, Ficus elastica, showing fibres, ducts, stomata, and cell
tissue : by Frederick Kato.

2,Z-2>^. Living and Pictorial Illustrations of Several of the
Lower Forms of Animal and Vegetable Life : by Stephen
Helm.

37. Pond Life : by A. D. Balen.

38. Cinchonidine, shown by polarized light: by Miss M. V.

WORSTELL.

39. Circulation of Protoplasm (Cyclosis) in Chara : by J. D.
Hyatt.

40. Ciliary Motion on the Gills of the Mussel : by J. D.
Hyatt.

41. Tongue of a Cricket : by W. D. Macdonald.

42. 43. Pond Life : by H. C. Wells.

44. The Curious Aquatic Insect, Rheu7natobates Rileyi Berg-
roth, captured at Flatbush, L. I. ; named by E. Bergroth, M.D.,
Tammerfors, Finland ; and until recently the only re-
ported specimen in the world : by J. L. Zabriskie.

45. Arranged Group of Diatoms, illuminated by parabola :
by C. F. Cox.

46. Crystals of .Sugar, shown by polarized light : by C. F.
Cox.

47. Leaf of Deutzia scabra, showing stellate hairs : by W.
E. Damon,

48. Spines of Echinus: by H. G. Piffard.

49. Circulation of Blood in Tail of Tadpole : by F. W. De-

VOE.

118 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

50. Circulation of Protoplasm in Vallisneria spiralis : by F.
W. Devoe.

51. File-tongue {Odontophore) of the New Jersey Conch,
Sycotypus canaliculatus, with the shell : by Samuel Lockwood.

52. File-tongue {Odontophore) of California Trochus, Calli-
osfotna canaliculatum, with the shell : by Samuel Lockwood.

53. File-tongue {Odontophore) of Patella, or Limpet Shell,
Acmcea ieshidinalisy New England coast, with the shell : by Sam-
uel Lockwood.

54. Photomicrographic Apparatus : by F. D. Skeel.
55-59. Star-fish and Sea-urchins, illustrated by living forms,

microscopic specimens, and drawings: by G. W. Kosmak.

60-66. Etchings of Steel Rails, showing Structure : by P.
H. Dudley.

60. A .60^ carbon Rail, with broad, shallow head.

Dense structure.

61. A .45^ carbon Rail, with deep head. Porous

structure.

62. A good wearing Rail, made in 1863.
6t,. a rapid wearing Rail, made in 1880.

64. Nickel Armor Plate.

65. Specimens of Tests of Armor Plate, Ordnance,

and Rail Steel.

66. Photographs of Drop Tests of a .60^ Carbon

Rail, etc.
67, 68. Sections of Silicified Wood, Araucaria Briggsii, from
Arizona : by T. B. Briggs.

67. Transverse Section.

68. Radial Section.

69. Section of Wood, Araucaria excelsa, from Norfolk Isl-
and : by T. B. Briggs.

70. Platino-cyanide of Yttrium, shown by polarized light:
by E. G. Love.

71. Seeds of Orthocarpus purpurascens : by E. G. Love.

72. Pollen of Mallow, Malva rotundifolia : by E. G. Love.

73. Foot of Spider: by E. G. Love.

74. Photomicrographs : by E. G. Love.

75. Pond Life : by W. C. Kerr.

76. A^Living Diatom, Bacillaria paradoxa: by T. Craig.

l893-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 119

77. Hydra viridis : by J. C. Thompson.

78. Circulation in Frog's Foot : by J. C. Thompson.

79. Pond Life : by O. H. Wilson.

80. Circulation of Protoplasm in the Skin of the Onion : by
M. DupuY.

81. Colored Drawings of Microscopic Objects: by M. Du-

PUY.

82-86. Microphotographs, selected : by S. N. Ayres.

87. Fossil Vegetable Structure in Coal Shale : by Geo. E.

ASHBY,

88. Section of Stalactitic Chalcedony, shown by polarized
light : by J. W, Freckelton.

89. Desmids : by E. J. Wright.

90. Quartz Inclusions in Mica, shown by polarized light :
by A. H. Ehrman.

gi. Microphotograph of Niagara Falls: by H. Fincke.

92. California Gold Sand : by H. Fincke.

93. Arranged Diatoms : by H. Fincke.

94. Nitroprusside of Sodium, shown by polarized light : by
H. Fincke.

95. Section of Malacca Cane from Malay Peninsula: by A,
Woodward,

96. Ash Block containing Living Termites, Calotermes flavi-
collis, taken at the Isthmus of Panama, August, 1890 : by J.
Beaumont.

97. Specimen of Termite Tree Nest, Termes minimus Beau-
mont, with alcoholic specimens of queen, soldiers, and work-
ers : by J. Beaumont.

9B, Cultivation, Staining, and Mounting of Bacteria : by P.
H. Lyon.

99. Circulation in the Tail of a Gold-fish : by W. H. Mead.

100. Tooth of Fossil Fish in Coal: by The Society.

Meeting of April 2ist, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.
Fourteen persons present.

Dr. Frank Abbott. Jr., was elected a Resident Member of
the Society.

130 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

On motion the thanks of the Society were tendered Mr. Mor-
ris K. Jesup, President of the Board of Trustees, and the Offi-
cers of the American Museum of Natural History, for their
kindness in granting the use of the Halls of the Museum, and
for their generous assistance in the matter of the late Annual
Exhibition of the Society.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Gas carbon filaments, deposited on the edge of a burner:
by E. G. Love.

2. Diatoms from the Bay of Bengal: by H. C. Bennett.

3. Section of Cementstein from Sendai, Japan : by H. C.
Bennett.

4. Living diatoms : by C. S. Shultz.

Meeting of May 5TH, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Sixty persons present.

Dr. George M. Sternberg delivered the address announced
on the programme, entitled "Bacteria." This address was
most admirable for its comprehensiveness and its perspicuity,
and was beautifully illustrated by a most remarkable series of
lantern projections.

On motion the hearty thanks of the Society were tendered
Dr. Sternberg.

Meeting of May 19TH, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Twenty-four persons present.

Dr. Samuel Lockwood addressed the Society on *' Some
Phenomena in Exuviation by the Reptiles." This address was
illustrated by specimens and objects under microscopes, as
noted in the programme below, and is published in this volume
of the Journal, page 55.

objects EXHIBITED.

I. Bronze, life-size representations of Snake, Lizard, and
Frog.

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 121

2. " Scarf " of Anaconda.

3. Skin of the Lizard, A noils principalis, under a \ objective,
showing "the windows."

4. Skin of the Horned Toad, Phrynosoma cornuta, under a \
objective, showing pigment grains.

Exhibits Nos. 1-4, inclusive, were by Samuel Lockwood.

5. Photomicrograph, half-tone print, of scale of Podura,
Lepidocyrtis curvicollis, x 3,000 : by H. G. Piffard.

6. Photomicrograph of pygidium of Flea, taken by Dr. Henri
Van Heurck, who regards this object as a test, second in value
only to the Podura scale : by H. G. Piffard.

7. Various Diatoms : by Noah Palmer.

Some points on the changeability in color of the skin of the
Chameleon, in Dr. Lockwood's address, were discussed by
Messrs. J. D. Hyatt, L. Riederer, and W. J. Lloyd. Mr.
Riederer suggested that the changeableness may be somewhat
on the principle of " Newton's rings," since there are two films
in the skin of the chameleon.

Meeting of June 2D, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Twenty-four persons present.

Dr. H. G. Piffard read a paper entitled *' An Improvement
in the Correction of Lenses for Photomicrography, Photogra-
phy, and Photoastronomics." This paper was illustrated by
many photomicrographs, as cited below.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Watson's Van Heurck Stand : by H. G. Piffard.

2. Navicula rhomboides, under a William Wales -^^, made
eighteen years ago : by H. G. Piffard.

3. The same ; resolution of " beads," with parabola : by H.
G. Piffard.

4. Podura scale : by H. G. Piffard.

5. Photomicrographs : blood of Amphiutna, Echinus spine,
probe platte, histological section, Podura scale, Amphipleura

pellucida, Limulus, copy of a painting, street scene, interior
view : by H. G. Piffard.

122 JOURNAL OF THE [Octobcr,

6. Amphipleura pellucida : by Henry C. Bennett.

7. Probe platte by MoUer : by Henry C. Bennett.

8. Photomicrographs : Amphipleura x 1,500, Pleurosigma
angulatum x 6,000, section of human eye : by F. D. Skeel.

9. Frustula saxonica, yL homogeneous immersion lens and ver-
tical illuminator : by Charles S. Shultz.

Meeting of June i6th, 1893.

The Vice-President, Dr. E. G. Love, in the chair.

Dr. F. D. Skeel was elected Secretary /r^ tem.

Surgeon. General George M. Sternberg, U. S. A., was elected
an Honorary Member of the Society.

Dr. E. G. Love, chairman of the Committee on Annual Ex-
hibition, reported for the Committee, and the Committee was
discharged with thanks.

objects exhibited.

1. According to previous appointment, the entire collection
of "Jackson Slides," recently purchased by the Society, were
exhibited in succession.

2. Photomicrographs of Triceratium favus X 1,500, and of
Pleurosigma angulatum x 750 and 6,000 : by Frank D. Skeel.

The Society adjourned to the first Friday of October, 1893.

PUBLICATIONS RECEIVED.

American Monthly Microscopical Journal: Vol. XIV., Nos. 2 — q (Febru-
ary— September, 1893).

The Microscope: Vol. I., Nos. 2 — 10 (^February — October, 1893).

San Francisco Microscopical Society: Proceedings (April 9 — March i, 1893) ;
Transactions, Part I. (1893).

Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club: Vol. XX., Nos. 3 — 10 (March —
October, 1893).

Insect Life: Vol. V., Nos. 4, 5 (April, July, 1893).

Psyche: Vol. VI., Nos. 204 — 211 (April — November, 1893).

The Observer: Vol. IV., Nos. i — 10 (January — October, 1893).

Proceedings of the Natural Science Association of Staten Island: Index of
Vol. II. (November 10, 1888 — October 10, 1891); Meetings (March 18 —
October 14, 1893).

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 123

Anthony's Photographic Bulletin : Vol. XXIV., Nos. 5 — 21 (March 11 —
November 11, 1893),

School of Mines Quarterly: Vol. XIV., Nos. 2 — 4 (January — July, 1893).

American Museum of Natural History: Annual Report (1892).

New York Academy of Sciences: Index of Vol. XI. (1892); Transactions,
Vol. XII. (1892, 1893).

Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences : Vol. XXVII.
(1892).

Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History: Vol. XXVI., Part
I, (November, 1892 — May, 1893).

Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia : 1893,
Parts I. and II.

Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College : Vol.
XXIV., Nos. 6, 7— Vol. XXV., No. i (July— September, 1893).

Journal of the Franklin Institute: Vol. CXXXV., No. 807— Vol. CXXXVI.,
No. 815 (March — November, 1893).

Transactions of the Massachusetts Horticultural Society: Part II., 1892;
Part I., 1893.

Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society : Vol. IX., Part II. (1892).

Transactions of the Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences: Vol. VIII.,
Part II.; Vol. IX., Part I. (1893).

Report of the Missouri Botanical Garden (1893).

United States Geological Survey: Eleventh Annual Report, Parts I. and II.
(1889-90).

Proceedings of the Rochester Academy of Science: Vol. II., No. 2 (1893).

Bulletin of the Essex Institute: Vol. XXIV., No. 7— Vol. XXV., Nos. 1—6
(July, 1892— June, 1893).

Journal of the Cincinnati Society of Natural History: Vol, XV., No. 3-—
Vol. XVI., No. 3 (October, 1892— October, 1893).

Cornell University Agricultural Experiment Station, Bulletins : Nos. 50 —
57 (March — September, 1893).

Bulletin of the Michigan Agricultural Experiment Station: Nos. go — 99
(February — July, 1893).

Bulletin of the Iowa Agricultural Experiment Station: Nos. 20, 21 (1893).

Bulletin of the Alabama Agricultural Experiment Station: Nos. 41 — 47
(December, 1892 — July, 1893),

Bulletin of the Texas Agricultural Experiment Station: No. 26 (March,
1893).

Bulletin of the Division of Entomology, U. S. Department of Agriculture:
Nos. 29, 30(1893).

Colorado Scientific Society: Six pamphlets (1893).

Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society: Parts II. — V. (1893).

International Journal of Microscopy and Natural Science: Vol. III., Nos.
18 — 20 (April — October, 1893).

Journal of the Quekett Microscopical Club: Vol. V., No. 32 (July, 1893).

Manchester Microscopical Society: Transactions and Report (1892).

124 JOURNAL OF THE [Ociober,

The Naturalist: Nos. 212 — 220 (1893).

Penzance Natural History and Antiquarian Society: Report and Transac-
tions (1893).

Proceedings of the Bristol Naturalists Society: Vol. VII., Part II. (1893).

Canadian Record of Science : Vol. V., Nos. 5-7 (1893).

Geological Survey of Canada : Catalogue of Rocks prepared for Columbian
Exposition (1893); Catalogue of Minerals in the Museum (1893).

Transactions of the Canadian Institute: Vol. III., Part 2 (1893).

Historical and Scientific Society of Manitoba : Annual Report (1892);
Transactions, No. 44 (January, 1893).

The Ottawa Naturalist: Vol. VI., No. 11— Vol. VII., No. 8 (March-
November, 1893).

Nova Scotian Institute of Science: Vol. I., Part II. (1892).

Royal Society of New South Wales: Journal and Proceedings, Vol. XXVI.
(1892).

The Victorian Naturalist: Vol. IX., No. 10— Vol. X., No. 5 (February —
September, 1893).

Australian Museum: Annual Report (1892); Records, VII., No. 4
{February, 1893).

Actes de la Societe Scientifique du Chili : Vol. II., No. 3 (February, 1893).

Revista del Museo de la Plata: Vol. III. (1892).

Brooklyn Medical Journal: Vol. VII., Nos. 4— 11 (April — November, 1893).

American Lancet : Vol. XVII., Nos. 3— 11 (March — November, 1893).

Indiana Medical Journal: Vol. XL, No. 9— Vol. XII., No. 5 (March-
November, 1893).

Le Diatomiste: Vol. I., No. 12 — Vol. IL, No. 2 (March— September, 1893).

Johns Hopkins University: Studies from the Biological Laboratory, Vol.
v., Nos. 2— 4 (March — October, 1893); University Circulars, Vol. XII., Nos.
104 — 107 (March — June, 1893).

National Druggist: Vol. XXII., No. 6— Vol. XXIII., No. 11 (Maich—
November, 1893).

The Mining Review: Vol. XXX., No. 10— Vol. XXXI. , No. 19 (March
9 — November 9, 1893).

Revue Internationale de Bibliographic Medicale : Vol. IV., Nos. 4 — 20
{February — Ociober, 1893).

Annual of the Universal Medical Sciences: Vols. I. — V. (1893).

Universal Medical Journal: Vol. I. (February — October, 1893).

Societe Beige de Microscopic : Bulletin, Vol. XIX., Nos. 4—7 (March —
May, 1893); Annales, Vol. XVII., No. 1(1893).

La Notarisia : 1892, Nos. 33, 34; 1893, Nos, i — 4.

La Nuovo Notarisia: Vol. IV. (May, 1893).

La Botaniste: Vol. III., Nos. 4, 5 (June, September, 1893).

Societe Royale de Botanique de Belgique : Bulletin, Vol. III., No. 12
{December, 1892).

Societa Botanica Italiana: BuUetino, 1893, Nos. 2 — 7.

1893.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 125

Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano: Vol. XXV., Nos. 2,3 (April, July,

1893).

Societa Africana d'ltalia : BuUetino, Vol. XL, No. 12— Vol. XII., No. 6
(December, 1892 — June, 1893).

Wissenschaftlicher Club in Wien: Monatsblatter, Vol. XIV., No. 6— Vol.
XV., No. I (March— October, 1893); Ausserordentliche Beilage, Vol. XIV.,
No. 6— Vol. XV., No. I (i8q3); Jahresbericht (1893).

Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes : Vol. XXIII., Nos. 269 — 277 (March —
November, 1893).

Societe Nationale des Sciences Naturelles de Cherbourg: Memoires, Vol.
XXVIII. (1892).

Societe des Sciences Naturelles de la Creuse: Memoires, Vol. VII. (1892).

Societe des Sciences Naturelles de Beziers: Bulletin, Vol. XIV. (1891).

Societe d'Etudes Scientifiques d' Angers: Bulletin, Vol. XXI. (1891).

Societe les Amis des Sciences et Arts: Bulletin, Vol. III., Nos. 2, 3 (1893).

Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein des Reg.-Bez. Frankfurt- a-Oder: Helios,
Vol. X., No. 10— Vol. XI., No. 5 (January — August, 1893); Societatum
Litterse, Vol. VII., Nos. i — 7 (January — July, 1893).

Gesellschaft zur Beford. der gesammten Naturwissenschaften zu Marburg :
Sitzungsberichte (1892).

Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein zu Osnabriick : Jahresbericht (1892).

L'Academie Royale des Sciences, Stockholm: Transactions, Vol. XIV., No.
3— Vol. XVII., No. 4(1889—1892).

Societe Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscou: Bulletin, 1892, Nos. 3, 4.

Societe des Naturalistes, Kiew: Memoires, Vol. XII., No. 2 (1892).
Naturhistorische Gesellschaft u. Nurnberg : Abhandlungen, Vol. X., No. i
(1892).

Nassauischer Verein fur Naturkunde, Wiesbaden : Jahresbericht (1892).

Sociedad Cientifica "Antonio Alzate"; Memorias, Vol. VI., No. 7 — Vol.
VII., No. 2 (1893).

L'Academie d'Hippone, Bone; Bulletin, No. 25 (1892).

Journal of the Hamilton Association : No. 9 (1893).

Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia: Vol. XVI., Part II.,
Vol. XVII., Part I. (1893).

Berichte der Naturforschenden Gesellschaft zu Freiburg; Vol. VI., Nos. i
—4 (1892).

Davenport Academy of Natural Sciences; Proceedings, Vol. V., Part II.
(1889).

Vassar Brothers' Institute : Transactions, Vol. VI. (1893).

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters; Transactions, Vol. IX.,
Part I. (1893).

California Academy of Sciences; Proceedings, Vol. III., Part II. (July,
1893); Occasional Papers, IV. (1893).

IJSIDEX TO VOLUME -IX.

PAGE

Acid preservatives 51

Adjustment in photography, Move-
ment of fine 81

Agate and diatoms, Staining of 82

Amphioxus, Germinal cells of 11

Annual Exhibition 115

Bacteria, Address on 120

Bleaching of paper by carbolic acid. . . 47
BoLLHS, E. C, Explanation of projec-
tions 115

Britton, N. L., Hoy a carnosa 10

Cage, Lace, for living animals 46

Camera Club, Invitation from the New

York 45

lucida. Substitute for 80

Carbolic acid. Paper bleached by 47

Cholera, Causes of Asiatic 7

Clay, Miocene, of Tampa 78

Committee on Annual Exhibition. ..17, 122

on Admissions 5o

on Nominations 47, 48

on Publications , 50

Concretionary gravel of Leadbetter. . . 15

Conocephalus ewsigfer, Musical rasps of 46

Cordylophora lacustris. Notes on 1

Correction of lenses. Improvement in. 121
CoNNiNGHAM, K. M., Diatoms from

Galveston 8

from San Antonio and Hous-
ton 12

from Tampa 72, 75

Researches among the Diatoma-

cea8 85

Silicifled wood, oolitic flint, and

concretionary gravel from Leadbet-
ter 14

Tampa miocene clay 78

Tripoli from Navasota 17

Dean, Bashford, Paradise flsh 10

Dbvoe, F. W., Statoblasts of Lopho-

pus crystallinus 19

Lace cage for living insects 46

Diatomacese, Researches among the . . 85

PAGE

Diatoms from Galveston 8

from San Antonio 12

from Houston 13

Marine, in fresh water 71

from Tampa 72, 75

and agate, Staining of 82

Dissecting microscope, A home-made, 81
Donations to the.Cabinet ;

K.M.Cunningham, 8, 12, 14, 17, 72, 75

Cornelius Van Brunt 9

Arthur Mead Edwards 77, 82

Charles S. Fellows 77

Echinus spines. Sections of 81

Edwards, Arthur Mead, Marine dia-
toms in fresh water 71

Mounting objects in highly re-
fractive media 82

Election of Officers 48

Electric illuminator 80

Endosperm of ivory nut 49

Exhibition, The Annual 115

Exuviation by reptiles 55

Fellows, Charles S., Terpsinoe mu-

sica... , 77

Filter, Pipette 10

Fine adjustment. Movement of ,in pho-
tography 81

Fuller, Dr. Robert M., Article by,

read 48

Galveston, Diatoms from 8

Geranium, Epiderm of 10

Glycerin, Mounting in 51, 82

Heitzmann, Louis, Cause of Asiatic

cholera 7

Heitzmann, Carl, Epiderm of gera-
nium 10

Endosperm of ivory nut 49

Acid preservatives 51

Mounting in glycerin 51

Nerves and nerve action 66

Helm, Stephen, Cordylophora lacus-
tris and Melicerta ringens 1

128

INDEX.

PAGE

Hitchcock, Romyn, ReminisceDces by, 19

Houston, Diatoms from 13

Hoya carnosa 10

Hyatt, J. D., Origin of New- York Mi-
croscopical Society 46

Milky quartz 47

Annual address . . 49

Illuminator, Electric 80

Model of Smith's vertical 81

Improvement in correction of lenses . . 131

Intelligence, Hints of, in plants 49

Ivory nut. Endosperm of 49

Jackson slides 9, 122

JuLiEN, Alexis A., Suggestions in mi-
croscopical technique 23

Lace cage for living insects 46

Leadbetter, Specimens from . . 14

Leggett, F. W., Paradise fish ... 10

Paper bleached by carbolic acid . . 47

Home-made dissecting micro-
scope 81

Lenses, Improvement in correction of . 121

Librarian's report 48

LocKwooD, Samuel, Exuviation by

reptiles 55

Lophopus crystaUinus, Statoblasts of. 19

Mead, Walter H., A Zentmayer mi-
croscope 80

Melicerta ringens. Notes on 1

Microscope, A Zentmayer 80

Home-made dissecting 81

Microscopical technique. Suggestions

in S3

Society, Origin of the New-York. . 46

Miocene clay of Tampa 78

Mounting in glycerin 51,82

in highly refractive media 82

Navasota, Tripoli from 17

Nerves and nerve action 66

New York Camera Club, Invitation

from 45

OflBcers, Election of 48

Oolitic flint of Leadbetter 15

Paradise fish 10

Photography, Movement of fine ad-
justment in 81

Photomicrography 48

PiFPARD, H. G., Substitute for camera

lucida, and electric illuminator 80

PAQK

PiFFARD, H. G., staining of diatoms.. 82

Improvement in correction of

lenses 121

Plants, Hints of intelligence in 49

Preservatives, Acid 51

Proceedings:

Meeting of October 7th, 1892. ... 8

21st 12

November 4th 17

18th

. 45

December

2d

. 46

16th

. 48

January

6th. 1893. .

. 48

20th

50

February

3d

. 72

17th

7T

March

3d.......

. 75

17th

.. 82

April

7th

. 115

21st

119

May

5th

. 120

19th

.. 120

June

2d

.. 121

16th

.. 122

Publications received 19, 52, 122

Quartz, Milky 47

Rasps, Musical, of Conocephalus

ensiger 46

Refractive media, Moimting in highly, 82

Reports of Treasurer and Librarian.. 48

Reptiles, Exuviation by 55

Researches among the Diatomaceae.. 85
RiEDERER, L., Color changes in cha-
meleon 121

Rogers, A, metric scale 81

San Antonio, Diatoms from 12

Scale, A Rogers metric 81

Sections of echinus spines 81

Shultz, Charles S., Model of Smith's

vertical illuminator 81

Rogers metric scale 81

Silicifled wood of Leadbetter 14

Skeel, Frank D. , Hoya carnosa 10

Pipette filter 10

Improved substage. , 19

A spherometer 46

Photomicrography 48

Movement of fine adjustment in

photography 81

Staining of agate 82

Smith's vertical illuminator. Model of, 81

Spherometer, A 46

INDEX.

129

PAGE

Spines, Sections of echinus 81

Staining of diatoms and agate 82

Statoblasts of Lophopus crystallinus .. 19
Sternberg, George M., Action and

prevention of cholera , 16

Address on bacteria 120

Tampa, Diatoms from.. 72, 76

Miocene clay 78

Technique, Suggestions in microscopi-
cal 23

Terpsinoe musica, — 77

Treasurer's report 48

Tripoli from Navasota 17

PAGE

Vertical illuminator. Model of Smith's 81

Wales, William, Reminiscences of

the New-York Microscopical Society, 47

Walker, James, Sections of echinus

spines 81

Wilson, Edmund B., Germinal cells of

Amphioxus 11

Zabriskie, J. L., Musical rasps of

Conocephalus ensiger 46

Mounting in glycerin 82

Zentmayer microscope 80

JOURNAL

OF THE

NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY

Vol. X. JANUARY, 1894. No. 1.

ON UNIFORMLY STAINED COVER-PREPARATIONS
OF MICRO-ORGANISMS, FREE FROM DISTORTION.

BY ALEXIS A. JULIEN, PH.D.
{Read November -^d, 1893.)

The morphological differences between the kinds of bacteria
will be probably found as distinct as in all other micro-organ-
isms. Recent investigations have begun to emphasize their spe-
■cific peculiarities in internal structure and enclosures and in their
outer organs of motion, and the value of these in diagnosis of
-species. A common impression to the contrary, long and often
expressed among bacteriologists, is certainly based, I think, on
unsatisfactory results which have been naturally derived from
some present easy methods of preparation of material, the use of
lenses of easy- working distance but narrow aperture, and easy
but ineffective methods of manipulation. The higher needs of
modern bacteriology surely call for methods of patient and pains-
taking treatment analogous to those long used on histological
preparations. There are serious objections to the process, now
in almost universal use, for the mounting of pure growths of bac-
teria and micro-organisms, and enjoined in most text books' —
the smearing of covers with droplets of the growth under the edge
of a slide drawn across the surface, or by rubbing the droplet

IE. M. Crookshank, " Manual of Bacteriology," 3d Ed. (1890), 65. G. M. Sternberg,
" Mmual of Bacteriology " C'Sgz), 26, 27.

2 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

between two covers, afterward drawn apart ; the completion of
the drying of the fihn on the cover by passing it to and fro
through a flame ; and the staining in simple solutions of anilin
colors in water, anilin-water, or alcohol. No worker should any
longer waste his time and labor on such a process, with its known
miserable results in imperfect mounts and the unsatisfactory con-
clusions they must yield.

1. The material is spread irregularly. On account of its ordi-
nary glutinous character and excessive richness in forms, the film
on most bacteria mounts is either rendered too dense, crowded,
and opaque, or, at the other extreme, is represented by a few
scanty wisps or streaks, for which a tedious search must be made
all over the cover.

2. The true structure and grouping of the bacteria are dis-
turbed or destroyed. In the rough process of smearing, the deli-
cate attachment of the elements of bacterial filaments and of
groups of cocci, often loosely aggregated, is rudely broken up.
In place of bacterial chains, the student often obtains a film,
partly or wholly consisting of desiccated and widely scattered
bacilli ; in place of streptococci, groups of four, grape-like
bunches and cubical packets, he finds solitary cocci and perhaps^
a few lonely diplococci ; and, very likely, his original spirilla and
even vibrios have been nearly all rent apart into isolated curved
bacilli ; there is now a question whether some of the so-called
spirochaete may not be but the paddles torn away from the bodies
of roughly handled hsematozoa.

As the discrimination of bacterial species, still very difficult,
depends partly, often largely, on recognition of original forms and
grouping, the present destructive and clumsy process of smearing
has often long delayed the detection of important facts {e.g., the
spirillum form of the organism connected with Asiatic cholera)
and ought to be entirely rejected. For these reasons several
writers have recently recommended the previous dilution of the
original bacterial growth with sterilized water upon the cover, or
before its application to the cover. In fact, we have had one
truthful process, in preservation of bacterial forms, that of
cover-impressions from the surface of solid and liquid media ; but
these have been of limited and often difficult application.

3. Further distortions of form occur during the processes of

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 3

drying of the film. The elements of groups are falsely disturbed,
even with those lucky organisms which have escaped injury dur-
ing the preceding rough treatment. These may be due to con-
traction during drying, and it may affect even forms and groups
whose shapes allow them to be pressed down upon a plane sur-
face without distortion, such as rods, cocci, chains, and merismo-
pedia. The bacteriologist is familiar with the faulted lines and
short offsets which signify irregular shrinking during overhasty
drying of these delicate watery organisms, and with ghostly
lines and spots showing where they have drawn aside or often
split entirely away from the cover. But with those forms which
must obviously become distorted when flattened upon a plane
surface, such as many vibrios and all spirilla, spirochete, staphy-
lococcus bunches, and sarcina packets, any process of drying
upon covers must be objectionable on account of this distor-
tion. Still further, during the drying of ciliated forms in active
motion, even at the natural temperature of the laboratory, a seri-
ous cause of deformation arises from the writhing toward the end
of the drying, especially in forms which become cemented at one
end to the cover, while the remainder continues twisting and
wriggling into strange, often fractured shapes. These contortions
and dislocations can be actually watched during the struggles of
the entrapped micro-organisms, and are abundantly displayed on
any film of dried spiral bacteria and in numerous published pho-
tomicrographs ; spirilla are shown twisted into a curve, spiro-
chsete actually bent at right angles, etc. A recent example of
such distortion is shown in the photomicrograph of Sp. volulans
by Dr. R. L. Maddox, accompanying his interesting paper in the
Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society for December, 1893 ;
he had already shown the true form in his previous paper in
the International Journal of Microscopy and Natural Scietice, iii,
(1893), page 233.

The needed precautions, in my opinion, are, first, that all
micro-organisms, including bacteria, should be suddenly killed
and fixed before evaporation of the film or any other process of
mounting, especially those of active movement ; secondly, that
such evaporation should be carried on very slowly and at a low
temperature, especially with curved and thick organisms. One
purpose of the evaporation, especially the later heating in or over

4 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

a flame, has been the coagulation of albuminoids in the liquid of
the drop, to prevent general coloration of the field during stain-
ing. But this is the common cause of resistance to staining by
delicate inner details and the cilia, while it can be well effected
by immersion in a proper fixative. A second purpose of this
excessive drying has been the supposed necessity to insure
adherence of the film to the cover. But I have found that when
a film is well dried at low temperature, as explained beyond, no
peeling away or loss afterward occurs.

4. The staining is irregular and unsatisfactory. In most bac-
teria mounts, as met everywhere on exhibition, these forms are
greatly overstained and look all alike, presenting mere silhouettes
of the contours, with few or no traces of inner structure and with
cilia entirely invisible. For a long time it has seemed to be the
acme of effort to render tliese microbes visible at all. This has
been followed by special efforts to effect satisfactory staining of
spores or of cilia, in separate preparations. Nor is it strange that
many bacteriologists have concluded that these silhouettes show
the prevalence of such a sameness of form among the kinds of
bacteria that the main dependence, for discrimination, must be
placed on other characteristics of a physiological nature, modes
of growth on different media, etc.

But these opaque caricatures of the bacteria are as unworthy of
modern science and as unnecessary as similar misrepresentations
of the infusoria or other micro-organisms would be considered.
The improvement of modern lenses of wide aperture, and increas-
ing facility in their manipulation, are gradually leading as well to
more successful approach toward the i)reparation of an ideal bac-
teria mount. This should of course present the groups or chains
dispersed over the whole cover, with natural arrangement undis-
torted and unbroken, with normal mode of interconnection, and
with constituent rods or cocci just sufificiently stained to display
both inner structure and external organs. To this end the anilin
stains are commonly misused, being greedily and excessively ab-
sorbed by the plasm within the cells, while cellulose, callose, etc.,
remain unaffected. With a dried bacteria film, therefore, the
preliminary use of some mordant is indispensable for staining, to
restore the absorbence in all parts of the organism.

However, it is probable that the drying and heating of the bac-

1894. J NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 5

teria nlm, perhaps to any degree, must cause such contraction of
the sensitive plasm within the cells and of that connected with
the cilia as to involve just this known resistance to coloration.
In several recent investigations there has been a return to simple
processes by which, without drying or heating, the living bacteria
have been successfully stained throughout, including the cilia ;
for example, that of N. Sjobring,' who, in studies of their structure
and nuclei, used nitric acid as fixative, stained with carbol-meth-
ylen-blue or carbol-magenta-red, decolorized with nitric acid,
and examined in glycerin and water ; that of Straus,^ who merely
added diluted Ziehl's solution to a loopful of bouillon culture of
several kinds of spirilla ; that of Klein,' who used, on the living
spirillum of Asiatic cholera, a mixture of equal parts of absolute
alcohol and a solution of gentian-violet in anilin water, during
five to ten minutes ; and that of R. L. Maddox,* who used satu-
rated solution of tannic acid as fixative, and then added a satu-
rated solution of iron sulphate, containing about two per cent of
citric acid, for the staining of spirilla. Not only, therefore, is it
certain that the process of drying and overheating bacteria on
thin covers long delayed the discovery of cilia and other details
and is yet impeding their investigation, but it is probably responsi-
ble for some of the varying conclusions of modern workers con-
cerning distribution of chromatin, septa, nuclei, spores, and cilia
through artificial and false structures developed by contraction.

To recapitulate, the new steps suggested by these considera-
tions, when it is thought desirable to prepare a dried bacteria film,
are as follows : preliminary dilution of a droplet of the bacterial
growth in sterilized distilled water ; killing and fixation of the
bacteria, in a drop upon a thin cover, by addition of suitable fixa-
tive ; slow evaporation at a low temperature ; and immersion in
a mordant before staining.

As to the selection of fixative, I have tried weak aqueous solu-
tions of the following reagents, in succession or in comparative
series, during the recent preparation of two hundred and thirty
mounts of several species of ciliated bacteria, spirilla of Beggiatoa,
spirilla undula, etc. As the fixative cannot be removed from

1 Centralbl. f. Bikt. u. Par., xi. C189O1 65- ' Idem, xiv. (1893), 257.

^ Idem, xiv. (189O. 618. < Jour. Roy. Mic. Soc. (1893), 718.

6 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

such minute bodies as the bacteria, before evaporation, but must
be evaporated with the drop on the cover, the results of such con-
centration of each fixative must be considered in determining its
value. The following were found to be efficient in killing instan-
taneously and as fixatives, but were all objectionable in that their
intermixture with the bacteria in the form of crystalline tufts or
flakes, by concentration during the evaporation of the drop,
seemed to lessen the adherence of the film, which separated in
spots during subsequent processes of the preparation : viz., so-
dium chloride, iron sulphate, iodine in solution of potassium
iodide, chloral hydrate, quinine sulphate, morphia sulphate, hy-
droxylamin, Loefifler's mordant, and fuchsin solution. Of these
sodium chloride was the simplest, and often quite efficient. Os-
mic acid, picric acid, ether, and chloroform were more satisfac-
tory, but especially absolute alcohol, though this last reagent was
objectionable on account of the violent currents produced on its
addition in a droplet. The best results were obtained with hot
water, tannin, chromic acid (in water solution, diluted until color-
less by daylight), and hydrogen peroxide.

As to the staining process, that of Loeffler, with two solutions,
mordant and colorant, though specially devised for the staining
of cilia, appears well adapted for the staining of the entire bac-
terium. However, in place of the unstable salt, iron sulphate,
recommended in his formula, it seems better to use, as suggested
by L. Luksch,' a cold saturated solution of ferric acetate, with
addition of a few drops of acetic acid. The further addition to
the mordant — on which Loeffler lays so much stress — of a few
drops of solution of sodium hydrate or of hydrochloric acid, ac-
cording to the alkaline or acid reactions of the natural products
of growth of the bacterium which is to be stained, has been found
unnecessary by M. Nicolle and V. Morax.^ With this my own
experience coincides ; no actual change of reaction is produced
in the mordant, nor any improvement in the results ; the variable
and uncertain staining of cilia, often observed, seems to be
dependent on quite other conditions, probably connected with
the anterior drying of the film. The two solutions as simplified

1 Ceitralbl. f. Bakt. u. Par., xii. (i8g2\ 430.

2 Ann. de I'lnst. Past., vii. (1893), 554.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY, 7

by Loeffler in his second method,' and modified as already sug-
gested, are now made in the laboratory of Micro-Biology at Co-
lumbia College as follows :

Mordant. — To lo c.c. of solution of tannin (20 per cent in
water) add commercial solution of iron acetate, drop by drop
(about 5 cc), until a violet-black is produced without precipi-
tate. Then add 5 to lo drops of acetic acid and 4 c.c. of solution
of carbolic acid (12 per cent in water), and filter. With ordinary
protection from the air, the solution is stable for a long time.

Loeffler also adds i c.c. of fuchsin solution to the mordant,
and so also NicoUe and Morax, with the special purpose to insure
staining of the cilia. As my own object is the more general one
of effecting a uniform and harmonious coloration of the enfire
bacterium, I find the results under better control by confining
the anilin color to the colorant proper.

Colorant. — To 100 c.c. of anilin water add solution of sodium
hydrate (i per cent in water), drop by drop (about 5 c.c), until
a neutral reaction is obtained with test papers. Then add \
gramme of fuchsin and shake until solution; but filter every time
just before using. From time to time, as the solution loses color
by decomposition, add a little more fuchsin and shake up before
filtering.

In the original process, with exclusive object of staining cilia,
Loeffler uses 4 grammes of fuchsin, and Nicolle and Morax,
Zielil's fuchsin — both solutions being saturated with stain and
opaque. On films prepared by my method, fixed and dried with
little or no heat, the results appear more satisfactory with an
alkaline solution like that of Loeffler, though containing but
one-eighth of the amount of stain he prescribes, brightly colored
but transparent.

A supposed improvement of Loeffler's process has been ad-
vanced by A. P. Brown, ^ who substitutes as mordant a cold
alcohol solution of tannin and anilin oil, in which- the dried
bacteria film is to be immersed for two to five hours or over night.
This method also I have tried for about a month, and, although
it often yields excellent results, it has appeared to be less certain
and uniform than the hot mordant recommended by Loeffler.

1 Joar. de Micrographie, xv. (1891), 269.

2 The Observer, iii. (1892), 29s, and Jour. Roy. Mx. Soc. (1893), 268.

8 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

The latter has also the great advantage of speed, as the mordant-
ing is effected in less than a minute.

Both Loefider, and Nicolle and Morax, have advised the repeti-
tion of application of the mordant two or three times in some
cases. In this I have found no apparent gain ; the entire action
of the hot mordant on these minute bodies seems to be completed
during a single brief immersion.

In all these methods much loss of time would be incurred from
treating the covers, as advised, one by one, with drops of mor-
dant and of colorant over a flame. I have elsevvhere' already
indicated the far easier, quicker, and more convenient staining
carried on in a wire spring holding a dozen or more covers,
with film downward, in the hot mordant or hot stain in a small
flask. The dried coloring and overstaining may be thus obvi-
ated, for which Loefiler prescribes washing in absolute alcohol.

We may now consider the application of these methods to
various micro-organisms, availing ourselves of useful suggestions
from the writers referred to.

Preparatmis of Bacteria. — In making mounts from pure cul-
tures the following process is now used in our laboratory. After
drying of the film it ordinarily requires only ten to fifteen min-
utes for the staining and complete mounting of the preparation.
In three or four drops of sterilized water, in a flamed watchglass,
stir very gently a particle or droplet of the pure bacteria culture
(taken preferably from the surface of a growth on potato or
agar) on a platinum wire loop or use until a slight cloudiness is
produced ; then take it all up at once within a sterilized drop-
tube with rubber bulb. Lay a series of thoroughly cleaned thin
covers (treated in Seiler's solution and washed in distilled water
and pure alcohol) on the bottom of a shallow two-inch Petri dish.
Apply to each, and spread very gently, a drop of the diluted
culture, and immediately add to the centre of the drop a drop-
let of the selected fixative (say, tannic acid or chromic acid solu-
tion). If a sparser distribution of the bacteria is desired, allow
the drop to settle a few minutes, take up and incline each cover,
and remove excess from lower edge. Allow to dry, with pro-
tection from dust, at the natural temperature of the room, or

' "Suggestions In Microsc-ipical Technique," this Journal, ix. C1893). 26.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 9^

over concentrated sulphuric acid within a desiccator, or, still
better, in vacuo over sulphuric acid, under an air-pump.

When thoroughly dry, insert all the covers in the brass wire
coil, with film surfaces all directed toward its lower end, and with
arranged and noted succession for identification, if different
kinds of bacteria are included in the series. With some species
it appears desirable to hold the coil a few seconds in a current of
warm air to complete the drying.

Dip the coil for a moment in sterilized water, to dissolve away
excess of fixative, remove the water drops by touching absorbent
paper, and again dry the covers.

Hang the coil for one-half to one minute in the flask of
mordant, heated nearly to boiling. Remove the co'l and take up
excess of mordant by touching absorbent paper ; wash by swing-
ing gently, for about five seconds, in a vessel of distilled water,
then in solution of acetic acid (20 per cent), again in water, and
remove water drops by touching absorbent paper.

Without drying, hang the coil in the flask of hot colorant for
five to sixty seconds, according to depth of staining desired and
the readiness of absorbence of the species, determined by trial.
Remove the coil, take up excess of stain by touching absorbent
paper, and wash as before in another vessel of distilled water.

Remove the covers from the coil, and lay, film downward, on
a soft filter paper. Dry by pressing gently under another filter.
Clean the upper face of each cover by rubbing with corner of
rag moistened with alcohol, keeping the cover stationary to
avoid rubbing away the underlying film. Lay upon a glass slide,
remove to stage of microscope, and examine and select the covers
preferable for mounting.

Mount in hardened balsam, or in a saturated solution of potas-
sium acetate within a very shallow spun cell of balsam-paraffin,
King's cement, or Hollis glue. In cases, delicate details of struc-
ture may be best shown by mounting in air — e.g., over a filmy
ring of paraffin.

The fugitive character of staining effected by anilin colors has
recently led E. Van Ermengem to devise the following process'
of staining the cilia of bacteria, founded on the reduction of
silver from a solution of its nitrate.

1 Ann. de Micrographie, v. (1893), 394-

10 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

The well-dried bacteria films are immersed half an hour (or, if
need be, five minutes at 60° C.) in the

Fixing Bath.

Osmic acid (2 percent solution) i part.

Tannin (10- to 25-per-cent solution) 2 parts.

They are then washed with utmost care in water and in alcohol,
and placed a few seconds in the

Sensitizing Bath.
Silver nitrate, a very weak solution (0.5 to 0.25 percent).
Without washing, they are next subjected to the action of the

Reducing Bath.

Gallic acid 5 parts.

Tannin 3 "

Melted sodium acetate 10 "

Distilled water 350 ' '

After a few moments they are returned to the silver bath, re-
;moved when the bath begins to blacken, washed thoroughly,
dried, and mounted in balsam.

I have made trial, with some success, of this promising method,
in reference to the more general object of the present paper. So
far I find an objectionable tendency to blackening and over-
staining of the whole preparation, which I think may be obviated
by reducing the strength of the baths.

The successful results already obtained in direct staining of
living bacteria by simple processes, like those of Sjobring, Straus,
Klein, and Maddox, warrant the prophecy that some such pro-
cess, with or without application of mordant, as tested on each
kind, will yet come into general use when the utmost perfection
is desired in a preparation. In other cases such staining of
living bacteria may well precede their drying on covers in the
ordinary way, when the containing liquid is sufficiently free from
substances inclined to absorb the stain.

Preparations of Spirilla. — In regard to spirochgete, spirillum,
and vibrio forms, the preliminary process of killing with a fixa-
tive, before evaporation of the film, was found to have materially

'l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 11

a-educed the number of distorted spirals, apparently all that would
have been produced by writhing movements of organisms par-
-tially adhering to the cover. Only those remained that were
inseparably connected with the process of flattening down spiral
forms upon a plane surface. To eliminate this last source of
deformation the following process has been devised, which requires
some care and patient manipulation, but yields the spirilla in
perfect preservation. There is, of course, greater difficulty of
studying a spiral under a high magnifying power, and a trouble-
some tendency of these spiral forms to intertwist in bunches dur-
ing concentration.

Put a sufficient quantity, say 20 c.c, of the liquid containing
the living bacteria in a conical sherry glass or in a urinary
deposit tube. Add a little fixative, say 5 c.c. of tannic acid
or chromic acid solution, mix by shaking gently, and allow to
settle for at least half an hour. Draw off the supernatant liquid,
with utmost care not to disturb the light invisible deposit, and
wash by a change of sterilized water, allowing to settle as before.
Draw off the liquid and transfer the deposit to a number of slides
with very shallow cells. Add to each a drop of cold colorant,
remove excess by slips of absorbent paper, and wash by changes
of sterilized water, removing each by absorbent paper. Then
add saturated solution of potassium acetate, cover, and seal.

Preparations of Amoeboid Organisms. — The difficulty of pre-
paring permanent mounts of amoebse, foraminifera, etc., is shown
by the rarity of such preparations in all collections and exhibi-
tions. The long-accepted but unfounded conviction as to the
constitution of such forms of but slightly differentiated and there-
fore unstable protoplasm has probably led to discouragement of
much effort'in this direction.

Certes has advised the following process' for preparation of
mounts of amcebse. To 30 c.c. of the water containing the liv-
ing amoebse about i c.c. of osmic acid solution (i per cent) is
added. After settling a few hours, the deposit is washed, con-
centrated, stained, and mounted in distilled water containing a
trace of osmic acid.

I have not succeeded by thismethod, partly perhaps on account
of the loss of amoebee in the confusedly heaped-up mass of asso-

1 R. G6rard, Trait6 pratique de Micrographie (1887), 383.

12 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

dated alg^e and infusorians, the bending and distortion of the
flexible pseudopods, and the obscuring effect of the common
black deposit of reduced osmic oxide. My discovery, on exami-
nation of preparations of bacteria by the method already ex-
plained, that accidentally I had also successfully mounted some
associated amoeboid forms, has resulted in the following process.
It has so far been found satisfactory with Amoeba radiosa, small
forms of A. princeps, Arcella acuminata, Actinophrys sol, and some
amoeboid forms. From present want of proper material I have
been unable to determine what modifications may be needed with
the larger forms of amoebae, and of other rhizopods with bulky
gelatinous material, to prevent distortion by contraction during
the drying of the film.

The thoroughly cleaned thin covers are laid on the bottom of
a small Petri dish or similar shallow tray ; to each a large drop
of the water containing the living organisms is added, and then
set aside in a '' moist chamber," in a quiet, dark, but warm place,
for fifteen to sixty minutes. The object is to allow sufficient
time for the rhizopods to recover from alarm and to creep about,
projecting their pseudopods in a natural way, and yet to prevent
any evaporation of the drops. A simple method is to fill a com-
mon finger bowl half full of warm water (at 30° to 35° C), to
set the shallow dish or tray floating upon the surface of the
water, and to cover the whole from the light with a large wet
towel folded several times. The vessel is then gently uncovered,
without jar, and to each drop a droplet of fixative is added
quickly by touching from a drop-tube, but not by dropping, as
that would tend to cause tremor in the drop. As fixatives, hydro-
gen peroxide, absolute alcohol, chromic acid solution, and, per-
haps best of all, osmic acid solution (i per cent), were" used. The
tray is then removed from the "moist chamber," the drops are
allowed to evaporate, as in the process for preparations of bac-
teria, and the films treated as before explained.

Also, to a drop of water containing rhizopods under observa-
tion, on the stage of a microscope (an inverted stand is prefer-
able), under a half-inch objective, the droplet of fixative may be
directly applied at the proper moment of the projection of the
pseudopods, and the evaporation, etc., then carried on as already
described.

1894J NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 13

Preparations of Jnfiisorians. — Excellent methods have been
devised for preparations of these organisms by Certes, Kiinstler/
Fabre-Domergne/ and others. My method, by evaporation, is
perhaps only applicable to the smaller forms. With the larger,
hitherto, in my experiments, the dried organisms become injured
by bursting and outflow, or by irregular contraction, the contour
of the sac even parting often from the cilia. With smaller forms
the process specified for bacteria may be followed, with use of
the special fixative found by trial best suited to each species —
e.g., concentrated solution of osmic acid (Kiinstler), boiling solu-
tion of tannic acid, 3 per cent (C. O. Sonntag),^ equal parts of
osmic acid solution (i per cent) and acetic acid (20 per cent),
Kleinenberg's solution, alcohol, chromic acid, picric acid, etc.
The dried minute infusorians, like the smaller rhizopods thus
prepared, seem as well adapted for study as the bacteria in a
dried film, as they display the cilia, sac, vacuoles, nuclei, enclosed
food particles, etc., in a satisfactory state of preservation, with
no visible distortion.

In place of drying the larger infusorians, the following method
has been found useful. They are first narcotized in the drop of
water, under observation with a low power, after the method of
E. A. Schultze,* by addition of a neutralized solution of hydroxyl-
amin hydrochloride (0.25 to i per cent), or by Rousselet's
method '" for rotifers, by addition of a weak solution of cocain
hydrochloride. At the moment the cilia cease to move the
organisms are suddenly killed, after Schultze's method, by add-
ing a drop of alcohol, picric acid, or acetic acid ; or, after Rousse-
lefs method, by a drop of osmic acid solution (i per cent), or
by a drop of Flemming's mixture (15 parts of chromic acid, i-per-
cent solution ; 4 parts of osmic acid, 2-per-cent solution ; and i
part of glacial acetic acid). The organisms are then washed and
stained, as described in preparations of spirilla. The use of
Loeffler's mordant on the infusorians is found of the highest
advantage, as the cilia become readily absorbent of stain to any
depth of coloration desired. A serious difficulty is found in the

1 Jour, de Micrographie, x. (1886), 59.

2'' Notes techniques sur I'etude des Protozoaires," Ann. de Micrographie, ii. C1889), 545.

3 Internal. Jour, of Mic. and Nat. Sci., iii. (1893), 306.

* This Journal, viii. (1892), 28.

6 Jour. Quek. Micr. Club, 2, v. (1893), 205.

14 JOURNAL OF THE [January,.

greedy absorbence of the anilin dye by the protoplasmic sarcode ;
but the overcoloration may be controlled by proper dilution of
the stain. The infusorians are then mounted in balsam, Wickers-
heimer's fluid, or other preservative, in the usual way.

NOTE ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE ENDOSPERM

OF PHYTELEPHAS MACROCARPA RUIZ AND

PAVON, AND OF SMILACINA RACEMOSA

DESF.

BY J. L. ZABRISKIE.
(^Presented December 15//;, i?930

I. Fhytelephas macrocarpa. — The seed of this plant, popularly-
known as the ivory nut, is an irregular ovate body about one and.
one-half inches iYi diameter by two inches in length. When it is-
cut through the middle transversely and longitudinally the endo-
sperm discloses a ''grain," easily seen with a hand lens, resem-
bling in miniature the "grain" of the wood of an exogenous tiee.
The transverse section shows concentric circles sweeping around
the longitudinal axis of the nut. The longitudinal section, through
the middle portion of the nut excluding the poles, shows minute
longitudinal bands nearly parallel with the axis. Close inspection
shows why the poles must be excluded in referring to the bands as.
parallel with the axis. Rings and bands are found to conform
quite accurately with the dark outer surface of the nut, so that
when the poles are approached the bands sweep around the latter.
It is as if the entire substance of the endosperm were composed of
tenuous films or shells of " vegetable ivory," these shells conform-
ing to the outer surface, closely fitting one within the other, and
therefore gradually decreasing in size as they approach the axis.

The ''grain" is caused by a remarkably uniform arrangement
of similar, lengthened cells composing the entire endosperm. But
the arrangement is diametrically opposite that which causes the
"grain" in the tree. In the tree the cells of the fibre generally
overlap each other, and all lie parallel with the axis, and of course
parallel with the bark. And a ring or band is caused by the
assembling of some of these cells, which are comparatively smalL

JOURN. N.-Y. MIC. SOC. Jan., 1894.

PLATE 38,

w

PHYTELEPHAS AND SMILACINA.

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY, 15

in diameter, nearly consolidated by internal deposit, giving a
darker hue and firmer texture to that portion of the structure
and marking the cessation of the periodical growth of the organ-
ism; and so standing strongly contrasted with the immediately
superimposed layer of thin-walled, larger cells which mark the
periodically resumed activity of growth. In the ivory nut the
cells are also somewhat lengthened, but, instead of lying parallel
with the axis, they radiate from the axis, and all extend outward
toward the dark outer surface and normal to its curve. The cells
do not usually overlap each other, but with remarkable uniformity
they lie side by side, and meet each other end to end. And the
appearance of rings and bands is caused by dense clusters of
tubules at the ends of these cells, the members of one cluster
accurately meeting the members of another cluster from the ends
of adjoining cells, the extremities of the approaching tubules,
however, always being separated from each other by the middle
lamella between two adjoining cells. These clusters are so dense
and are so regularly arranged, on account of the usually regular
position of the cells side by side, as well as end to end, that, by
contrast with the portion of the cell intermediate between the
ends — which intermediate portion, however, is also well furnished
with tubules — the transverse section shows attenuated but un-
broken, daikened circles sweeping around the axis.

Description of Plate 38.

Fig. 1.— Longitudinal section of two entire cells of the endosperm of Phytelephas,
with four extremities of adjoining cells, meeting end to end. The cells are split longi-
tudinally and cleared of cell contents. The darker shaded, portions represent the upper
surface of the section, showing the thickness of the cell walls. The lighter portions rep-
resent the semi-cylindrical cavity of the cell, like a minute trough, and also many of
the tubules, which lie near the upper surface of the section and pass outwardly to the
lamella or boundary of each cell. The small circles represent the openings of such
tubules as are passing downward at various angles through the remaining thickness
of the section. Many of the tubules at the ends of the cells are cut off at various lengths
by the plane of the section.

Fig. 3.— Transverse section of a number of cells of the endosperm of Phytelephas,
cleared of cell contents and showing the polygonal outlines. The plane of the section
passes through the clusters of tubules at one end of the cells. The shaded portions
represent the thickened cell walls, and the clear spaces the contracted lumen of this
region of the cells.

Fig. 3.— Section of the endosperm of Smilacina, with its irregularly globular or ellip-
soidal cells, cleared of cell contents. The darkest shaded portions represent those
portions of the cell walls which rise directly upward to the upper surface of the section,,
and which, therefore, exhibit at best advantage the thickening of the cell walls and the
abundance of tubules.

The three sketches are all of the same magnification— 250 diameters.

16 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

Of course in multitudes of instances the end of one cell must
meet the ends of two or more cells, to allow for the interposition
of radii, as the view advances from axis to periphery — from one
ring or film to the next outlying ring or film; but these instances
are rare compared with the abounding number of regularly dis-
posed cells in any one section when magnified.

These cells will average about .004 of an inch in diameter by
.014 of an inch in length. The cell walls are so thickened by
internal deposit that frequently the lumen, or cavity, is left of a
diameter of only about one-third of the entire diameter of the cell.
It is this deposit which causes the bone-like density of this remark-
able vegetable product. The tubules, resulting from the avoid-
ance of this deposit at certain points, are frequently curved and
branched, and the clusters of these tubules at the ends of the cells
are especially branched and tortuous, as they meet the members
of similar clusters not only from the cell which lies directly in
advance, but also from those which lie surrounding its polygonal
periphery. It is not easy to count them, but the tubules of the
cluster at one end of one cell undoubtedly often reach the number
of twenty or more.

2. Smilacina racemosa. — This plant, of the lily family, and one
of the common woodland herbs of our region, reaches a height
of one to three feet, with a slender, simple stem, well furnished
with oval leaves, and bears small white flowers in a terminal
racemose panicle. The berries are pale red, speckled with pur-
ple, containing one or two seeds.

A section of these seeds discloses a very homogeneous but
confused mass of irregularly globular or ellipsoidal cells, about
.003 by .005 of an inch in dimensions, with greatly thickened cell
walls, abundantly furnished with tubules, which latter are of large
diameter compared with their length. The deposit averages not
quite one-half of the thickness of that found in the ivory nut, but
it is sufficient to make a near approach to the density of "vege-
table ivory." The endosperm of this seed of Smilacina is prob-
ably the hardest of any recorded instance among the indigenous
plants of our region. The seed is so hard that it can be easily
driven with one blow of a hammer, and without fracture, flush
into the substance of pine wood.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 17

PROCEEDINGS.
Meeting of October 6th, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Twenty-one persons present.

The Recording Secretary read a communication from Prof. W.
Goold Levison, requesting the appointment of a committee by
this Society to meet with committees of allied societies for the
purpose of conference on the adoption of a uniform size for
boxes, cases, and cabinets for the display and preservation of
microscopical and mineralogical specimens,

Mr. James Walker was appointed as such committee.

objects exhibited.

1. Capsules of Canada balsam, m situ, in the bark of Abies
balsamea Miller: by Alfred M. Mayer.

2. Acineta tuber osa.

3. Bacillaria paradoxa.

4. Megalotrocha albo-flavicans.

5. Octocella liber tas.

6. Urnatella walker ii.

7. Cordylophora coronata.

8. The form, No. i, of Plate 29 (see Journal, viii., 43).
Exhibits Nos. 2-8 from the water of the Morris and Essex

Canal, New Jersey, and all by Stephen Helm.

9. Melicerta ringens, living, and in the act of building its
tube: by James Walker.

10. Flumatella s^.: by James Walker.

11. Conochilus volvox : by James Walker.

12. Pollen of Mallow : by Henry C. Bennett.

13. Photomicrograph of statoblasts of Lophopus crystallinus :
by E. G. Love.

14. Mexican ''Jumping Beans," Sebastiania palmeri |lose
("Insect Life," iii., 431), or S. pavoniana Mull. Arg. (Bull.
Torr. Club, xx., 25), showing active motion : by F. D. Skeel.

Mr. Helm remarked that specimens of his exhibit No. 7 had
been very scarce in the canal during the present year. They
had multiplied in one of his tanks during that time, but had

18 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

suddenly died. On the 4th of this month a few specimens
were found in the same tank/ Also, the exhibit No. 7 showed
a peculiarity of this form " No. i " — twice the usual length,
having twice as many processes, with small processes inter-
spersed among the larger ones.

Mr. Walker said that he took his exhibits Nos. 9, 10, and 11
at Glendale, Long Island ; and also that he had taken Bacil-
laria paradoxa in abundance in an undoubted fresh-water pool
of the tunnel of the Northern Railroad of New Jersey, near
Fairview.

Mr. F, W. Leggett stated that he had kept sea water pure in
an aquarium for two years.

Mr. William E. Damon stated that he had kept sea water
pure in an aquarium, without changing, for fifteen years, by
means of floating specimens of Ulva.

Prof. Alfred M. Mayer donated specimens of the bark of
Abies balsamea with capsules of balsam for distribution.

Meeting of October 2oth, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Fourteen persons present.

Dr. F. D. Skeel having offered to temporarily store at his
residence the exchanges of the Society now being received, and
for which there was no shelving now provided at the rooms of
the Society, it was resolved that the kind offer of Dr. Skeel be
accepted with thanks.

OBJECTS exhibited.

1. Peristome of Moss, Funaria hygrometrica.

2. Peristome of Moss, Mniu??i undulatum,

3. Spores and antherozoids of Chara.

4. Podura, entire insect.

5. Embryo Oysters.

6. Section of fresh-water Pearl from Norway.
Exhibits Nos. 1-6 from the Cabinet of the Society.

7. Sections of cast skin of Chameleon, Iguana, showing two
principal layers of the same : by L. Riederer.

8. Photomicrographs : Gonococci in leucocytes of human

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 19

blood, X 500 ; Tubercles of tuberculosis in masses attached
to walls of human veins ; Head of Tapeworm, Tania serrate,
showing double row of hooks ; Section of bud of Tiger Lily ;
Transverse section of petiole of Aspidestris ; Sclerotic cells in
pith of stem of Hoya carnosa ; Transverse section of stem of
Helianthus ; Longitudinal section of stem of Lima Bean : by
F. D. Skeel.

9. Pond-life : by A. D, Balen.

10. Glass slips with engraved monogram : by H. G. Piffard.
Dr. Piffard explained the engraving of his glass slips as

accomplished by a loop of platinum wire heated to incandes-
cence by electricity, and used as a pen in writing.

Dr. E. G. Love stated that he marks glass slips by means
of a rubber stamp charged with diamond ink — hydrofluor-
silicic acid.

Meeting of November 3D, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Twenty-five persons present.

Messrs. Thomas S. Nedham and Chas. W. Plyer were elected
Resident Members of the Society.

The following were appointed by the chair as Committee on
Annual Exhibition : Messrs. Henry C. Bennett, Thomas B.
Briggs, and L. Riederer.

Dr. Alexis A. Julien read a paper entitled " On Uniformly
Stained Cover-Preparations of Micro-organisms free from Dis-
tortion." This paper was illustrated by exhibits, as noted in
the programme below, and by a demonstration of the method
of mounting, and is published in this number of the Journal,
p. I.

The paper was discussed by Mr. Henry C. Bennett and by
Drs. H. G. Piffard and F. D. Skeel.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Amoeboid decorated with a garland of cladothrix.

2. Flagellated vibrios (n. sp.) with stained flagella.

3. Living spirilla of Beggiatoa — the largest known.

4. Amoeboid resembling Difflugia.

20

JOURNAL OF THE

[January^

5. Spirillum of Beggiatoa, sliowing stained flagella,

6. Arcella. with pseudopodia projecting.
Exhibits 1-6 by A. A. Julien.

7. Living Volvox globator : by C. S. Shultz.

8. Photomicrographs : Podiira, entire ; Navicula rhomboide^,
X 2,000, taken with a lens of extreme under-correction. The
same, taken with a Spencer J^-, N. A. 1.35 : by H. G. Piffard.

9. Home-made, convenient trays for bottles containing
microscopical specimens 1 by J. L. Zabriskie.

Mr. Zabriskie explained his trays as follows : Four trays of
a set are here exhibited, each tray being eleven and one-quar-
ter inches long, one inch wide, and two and one-half inches
high, all being intended to stand upright, closely adjoining
each other, on the shelves of a cabinet twelve inches in depth

Tray for small bottles.

inside. The bottom and the one side of each tray are made of
white wood one-eighth of an inch thick ; the rear end of white
wood one-quarter of an inch thick ; and the front of walnut
three-eighths of an inch thick. This thin wood may be pur-
chased of hardware dealers who supply scroll-saw material; the
white wood at about four cents a square foot, and the walnut at
about twelve cents. The entire inner surface of each tray is
pasted with white paper, the reflected light from which allows
the easy and rapid examination of an entire set of bottles while
in position, by means of a hand lens.

These trays each contain seventeen one-drachm homoeopathic
bottles. Each bottle is held in place by a brass spring clip
clasping the bottle near the middle. The clips are made from
soft, thin sheet brass, cut in oblong strips about one-quarter of
an inch wide and one and one-quarter inches long, of such size

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 21

that, when they are bent round, they enclose about two-thirds
of the circumference of a bottle. Each brass strip has a hole
punched in the centre, through which is passed a screw, one-
quarter of an inch long, for holding the clip in position in the
tray. These spring clips hold the bottles with sufficient firm-
ness to prevent the bottles from falling out, and still to allow
any one bottle to be extracted and replaced easily without dis-
turbing any of the others.

An additional piece of white wood is inserted behind the bot-
tles, one-eighth of an inch thick, and as long as the long side
of the tray, but of such width that it reaches from the bottom
of the tray only up to the necks of the bottles. Wood more
than.one-eighth of an inch thick would appear clumsy for such
small trays. This additional piece of wood, which is scarcely
noticeable behind the bottles, together with the thickness of the
brass, prevents the screws, one-quarter of an inch long, from
passing entirely through the wood and projecting at the outer
side of the tray. Screws less than one-quarter of an inch long
would be too small to handle with convenience.

If larger bottles are needed, larger trays and larger clips
must be employed. Some of the specimens exhibited are pre-
served in dilute alcohol and others in dilute glycerin. But the
arrangement is equally convenient for dry specimens in bottles,
as diatomaceous material, etc.

An easily interchangeable label is very desirable for such a
collection. The method here exhibited can be recommended
for ease of construction and satisfaction in use. A slight cir-
cular cavity is bored in the face of the front piece of each tray
with a centre bit, seven-eighths of an inch in diameter ; a disc
of white paper is dropped into the cavity ; and the paper is re-
tained in position by a single coil of brass wire, which has suffi-
cient spring to resist falling out from any accidental jar, and
yet will allow of easy extraction by means of the finger nail, in
order to insert another label.

A convenient draw pull, to extract any tray from the cabinet,
is made with a three-eighths inch brass screw ring, the screw of
which is passed through a small washer, and inserted in the
front of the tray below the label.

22 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

When all are arranged in a cabinet, any one of a thousand
bottles can be quickly selected and extracted.

Meeting of November 17TH, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Twenty-seven persons present.

The Corresponding Secretary read a paper by Mr. K. M.
Cunningham, of Mobile, Alabama, entitled " Notes on some
Researches among the DiatomaceEe.'^ This paper is published
in the Journal, vol. ix., p. 85.

Mr. Cunningham donated to the cabinet and for distribution
dry diatoms stained blue, and a packet of the " moss-like
plant " referred to in the paper.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Section of foot of human embryo: by Henry C. Bennett.

2. Photomicrographs: Gonococcus, x 900 ; Spirillum of
Beggiatoa, x 2,000, showing hyaline membrane surrounding
the spirillum : by H. G. Piffard.

3. Photomicrograph of group of Pleurosigma, by Powell and
Lealand's -^ dry objective, supposed to show great diffraction :
by F. D. Skeel.

4. Living Volvox globaior : by Charles S. Shultz.

5. Mounted specimens of the same : by Charles S. Shultz.

6. Circulation in Nitella : by A. D. Balen.

Dr. Piffard donated to the cabinet the photomicrograph of
Spirillum of Beggiatoa, and twelve slides prepared by Thum.

Mr. Shultz distributed living specimens of Volvox among the
members.

Meeting of December ist, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Sixteen persons present.

Dr. John A. Fordyce was elected a Resident Member of the
Society.

The following Committee on Nominations of Officers was ap-
pointed by the chair : F. W. Devoe, William E. Damon, F. D.
Skeel, A. Woodward, William G. De Witt.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 23

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Diatoms from Croton water in November, 40 forms: by

H. G. PiFFARD.

2. Living specimens of Ophryolegna sp., from human urinary
tract : by H. G. Piffard.

3. Tv/o photomicrographs of the same : by H. G. Piffard.

4. Diatoms from '' Queen Silver Polish": by H. G. Piffard.

5. Amphiprora conspicua, var. pulchra Van Heurck, and other
forms, from Harlem River : by J. D. Hyatt.

6. Diatoms from Honey Meadow Brook, Dutchess Co., N. Y.:
by J. D. Hyatt.

7. Diatoms from ** Silver Polish,^^ under a William Wales -^-^ :
by J. D. Hyatt.

8. A fruiting fungus on a photographic film : by J. L.
Zabriskie.

9. Section of lung of dog, injected : by Frank Abbott, Jr.

10. Section of kidney of cat, injected : by Frank Abbott, Jr.

11. Spirillujn undzila : by Frank Abbott, Jr.

12. Anthrax bacillus in liver of rabbit : by Frank Abbott,

Jr.

Of his exhibit Ophryolegna, Dr. Piffard said that these ciliated
infusoria had been preserved alive for ten days in distilled water,
and were now exhibited in the same medium ; they were fur-
nished by Dr. F. Tilden Brown, of this city, who obtained them
from the discharges of the urinary passages of one of his
patients ; that they had been submitted to Dr. Alfred C. Stokes,
who determined them as an undescribed species of the genus
Ophryolegna Ehrb. ; and with regard to the photomicrographs of
these organisms, that they illustrate the remarks of Dr. Julien
at the last meeting respecting the difficulty of mounting deli-
cate organisms without distortion. These photomicrographs
show distortion of two kinds — after slow and rapid death.

Dr. Brown, present at the meeting, said that these organisms
are found when shreds are cast in pus-laden urine ; the shreds
come probably from a more remote source than the urethra ;
the organisms resist the action of slightly acid urine ; and that
he and Dr. Piffard both saw what they took to be conjugation
in some of these organisms.

Mr. Hyatt said of his exhibits of diatoms that this Amphi-

34 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

prora was common in tide pools of Harlem River ; that Dr.
Van Heurck gives a figure of the diatom, and the locality
as "Harlem River, New York" ; that the diatoms of Honey
Meadow Brook arise in warm weather as a scum, consisting
quite purely of diatoms, one field, as then under the micro-
scope, showing fifty species of the following genera : Navicula^
Cyclotella, Cymbella, Surirella, Gomphonetna, Cocconeis, Synedra,
Achnanthes, and Fragilaria ; and also that the " Silver Polish "
in question affords multitudes of diatoms, some of them very
fine test objects.

Mr. Zabriskie explained his exhibit of fungus as follows :
This photograph is a dry-plate lantern slide, one of a set of
about one hundred made from negatives by Mr. Leffert Lef-
ferts, taken by him on a trip to Mexico in the fall of 1889.
These slides were neatly mounted with mat and cover, and
were securely bound with gummed strips around the edges.
They were at first frequently used in the lantern, but have been
left undisturbed for about one year and one-half, stored in a
velvet-lined box on the second floor of the maker's residence.
Having occasion to examine them recently, he observed on the
film of many of them white, radiating, dendroid patches, one-
half of an inch in diameter or less, like some form of crystal-
lization.

On examination with the microscope it was at once seen that
each patch was a matured fungus, consisting of white hyphas,
radiating with more or less regularity from a centre, and fur-
nished with numerous branchings, gradually decreasing in size
to the attenuated tips. With a magnification of 250 diameters
numerous clusters of elliptical, light-brownish spores were
found, lying detached upon the film in the neighborhood of
the delicate extremities of the branches.

This slide was submitted to Mr, J. B. Ellis, of Newfield,
N. J., and from his reply this is probably an undescribed spe-
cies of fungus. He says it is near Botrytis reptans.

Meeting of December 15TH, 1893.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.
Twenty-three persons present.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 25

The President announced the death of Dr. Paul Hoffman, a
Resident Member of the Society, which event occurred on the
ist inst., and appointed the following committee to formulate
action of the Society : Dr. F. D. Skeel, Mr. J. D. Hyatt, and
Rev. J. L. Zabriskie.

Mr. William E. Damon, of the Committee on Nominations of
Officers, reported for said committee, nominating the present
Officers of the Society for re-election to their respective offices
in 1894.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. A simple centrifuge for separating urinary sediment, dia-
toms, etc. : by H. G. Piffard.

2. A Leitz loup, of excellent definition and unusually large
field, recently manufactured by Craft on Steinheil's plan : by
H. G. Piffard.

3. Section of oolitic chert from Dutchess County, New York :
by J. D. Hyatt.

4. Section of a variety of the same, from the same locality :
by J. D. Hyatt.

5. Section of oolitic chert from Pennsylvania : by J. D,
Hyatt.

6. Micrococci in canaliculi of human tooth : by Frank
Abbott, Jr.

7. Spirillum in canajiculi of human tooth : by Frank Ab-

'BOTT, Jr.

8. Transverse and longitudinal sections of the seed of PJiy-
telephas macrocarpa Ruiz and Pavon, Ivory nut : by J. L. Zabris-
kie.

9. Transverse section of the seed of Smilacina ra^emosaDesL,
False Solomon's Seal : by J. L. Zabriskie.

10. The fungus y^cidium adoxce, on the leaf of Adoxa tnos-
chatellina : by Henry C. Bennett.

11. Q,y(^\o€\s\'s\ Anacharis : by A. D. Balen.

12. Circulation in Daphnia : by A. D. Balen.

13. Helices of fine wire for supporting cover-glass prepara-
tions : by F. D. Skeel.

Dr. Frank Abbott explained that the centrifuge exhibited
was manufactured by Ernest Leitz, of Wetzlar, Germany, and
he demonstrated its action by rotating the instrument for about

26 JOURNAL OF THE [January^

one minute, after having inserted a test tube containing urine,
and then exhibiting the deposit in the bottom of the test tube.

Mr. J. D. Hyatt remarked on his exhibits that the material
belonged to the silurian age, and was formed in shallow
seas by the grinding of calcareous matter, acquiring the
oolitic form from the concretions of varying colors depositing
around a nucleus, and being rolled upon beaches ; that in ex-
hibit No. 3 the nuclei are usually minute grains of sand, with
the spheres of generally uniform size, and the structure be-
tween the spheres like chalcedony ; in exhibit No. 4 the nuclei
are minute particles of organic matter, with the crystallization
radiating from the nuclei, giving the appearance of hornstone ;
and that the specimen No. 5, from Pennsylvania, has its nuclei
of carbonaceous matter with remarkably uniform spheres.

Mr. Bennett explained his exhibit as follows : The slide con-
tains two preparations, opaque and transparent, of the fungus
yEcidium adoxce. The opaque preparation shows the peridia in
various stages of growth, and the transparent preparation
shows a perpendicular section through a burst peridium. The
fungus is found in the spring and summer on the under side of
the leaf of Adoxa moschatellina — Hollow-root — a little, incon-
spicuous plant, 4 or 5 inches high, growing in woods and
moist, shady places in cooler regions. The pale, green flowers
have a musky smell, whence its common name, Moschatel.

Dr. Skeel donated for distribution samples of wire helices, of
his own construction, for supporting cover-glass preparations.

PUBLICATIONS RECEIVED.

American Monthly Microscopical Journal: Vol. XIV., No. 10 — Vol. XV.,,
No. I (October, 1893 — January, 1894).

The Microscope: Vol. I., No. 11 — Vol. II., No. i (November, 1S93 — Janu-
ary, 1894).

The Observer: Vol. IV., No. 11 — Vol. V., No. i (November, 1893 — Janu-
ary, 1894).

Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club: Vol. XX., No. 11— Vol. XXI., No.
I (November, 1893 — January, 1894).

Natural Science Association of Staten Island: Proceedings (November 11,.
1893 — January 13, 1894).

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 2

Anthony's Photographic Bulletin: Vol. XXIV., No. 22— Vol. XXV., No. 2.
(November, 1893 — February, 1894).

Insect Life: Vol. VI., Nos. i, 2 (November, December, 1893).

Psyche: Vol. VI., No. 212— Vol. VII., No. 214 (December, 1893— Febru-
ary, 1894).

Museum of Comparative Zoology : Bulletins, Vol. XXV., Nos. 2 — 4
(December, 1893 — January, 1894) ; Annual Report (1892 — 93).

American Museum of Natural History; Bulletin, Vol. V. (1893).

Kansas Academy of Science: Transactions, Vol. XIII. (1891 — 92).

Wisconsin Academy of^Sciences: Transactions, Vol. IX., Part 2 (1893).

Essex Institute: Bulletin, Vol. XXV., Nos. 7—9 (July— September, 1893).

Academy of Science of St. Louis: Transactions, Vol. VI., Nos. 9 — 11
(November — December, 1893).

Franklin Institute: Journal, Vol. CXXXVI., No. 816— Vol. CXXXVIL,
No. 818 (December, 1893 — February, 1894).

Cornell University Experiment Station: Bulletin, Nos. 58 — 61 (October —
December, 1893).

Alabama Experiment Station: Bulletin, Nos. 49 — 52 (October, 1893 — Janu-
ary, 1894).

Michigan Experiment Station: Bulletin, Nos. 100 — 102 (August — Decem-
ber, 1893).

Iowa Experiment Station: Bulletin, No. 22 (1893).

State University of Iowa: Bulletin of Laboratory of Natural History, VoL
II., No. 4 (November, 1893).

Texas Experiment Station: Bulletin, Nos. 27, 28 (June — December, 1893).

" Thoracic Legs of Triarthrus": from the author, C. E. Beecher (December,

1893).

Colorado Scientific Society: Proceedings (December 4 — 18, 1893).

Johns Hopkins University Circulars: Vol. XIII., No, 109 (February,.
1894).

Pacific Medical Journal: Vol. XXXVIL, Nos. i, 2 (January — February^
1894).

American Lancet: Vol. XVII., No. 12 — Vol. XVIII., No. 2 (December,
1893 — February, 1894).

Brooklyn Medical Journal: Vol. VII., No. 12 — Vol. VIII., No. 2 (Decem-
ber, 1893 — February, 1894).

Indiana Medical Journal: Vol. XII., Nos. 6, 7 (December, 1893 — January,
1894).

National Druggist: Vol. XXIII. , No. 12— Vol. XXVI., No. 2 (December,
1893 -February, 1894).

Universal Medical Journal; Vol. I., No. 12 — Vol. II., No. I (December,.
1893 — January, 1894).

Mining Review; Vol. XXXI., No. 20— Vol. XXXII., No. 7 (November,.
1893 — February, 1894).

Royal Microscopical Society: Journal, 1893, Part 6.

Quekett Microscopical Club: Journal, Vol. V., No. 33 (October, 1893,).

^8 JOURNAL OF THE [January,

International Journal of Microscopy and Natural Science: Vol. IV., Part
20 (January, 1894).

Scottish Microscopical Society: Proceedings (1891-93).

The Naturalist: Nos. 221—223 (December, 1893 — February, 1894).

Natural History Society of Glasgow: Proceedings: Vol. III., Part 3
(18.92).

North Staffordshire Naturalists' Field Club: Annual Report and Transac-
tions (1893).

Records of the Australian Museum: Vol. II., No. 5 (September, 1893).

Geological Survey of Canada: Report, Vol. V., Parts i, 2 (1S93).

Ottawa Naturalist: Vol. VII., No. 9 (December, 1893).

Natural History Society of New Brunswick: Bulletin, No. 11 (1893).

Victorian Naturalist: Vol. X., Nos. 6—9 (October — December, 1893).

Bulletin de la Societe Beige de Microscopie: Vol. XIX., No. 10 — Vol. XX.,
No. 3 (1893-94).

LeBotaniste: Vol. III., No. 6 (January, 1894).

Societe Royale de Botanique de Belgique: Vol. XXXII., No. i (1893).

Societe d'Etude des Sciences Naturelles de Beziers: Bulletin, Vol. XV.

(1893).

Societe les Amis des Sciences et Arts de Rochechouort: Bulletin, Vol. III.,

No. 4 (1893).

La Notarisia: 1893, Nos. 5, 6.

Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes: Vol. XXIV., Nos. 278—280 (December,
1893 — February, 1894).

Societe Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscou: Bulletin, 1893, Nos. i — 3.

Le Diatomiste: No. 15 (December, 1893).

Revue Internationale de Bibliographic Medicale: Vol. IV., No. 22 — Vol.
v., No. 2 (November 25, 1893 — January 25, 1894).

Actes de la Societe Scientifique du Chili: Vol. III., Nos. i, 2 (October,

1893).
Wissenschaftlicher Club in Wien: Monatsblatter, Vol. XV., Nos. 2—4

-(November, 1893 — January, 1894).

Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein, Frankfurt-a-Oder: Societatum Litteroe, Vol.
VII., Nos. 8—12 (August— December, 1893); Helios, Vol. XL, Nos. 6 — 9
(September — December, 1893).

Siebenblirgischer Verein fiir Naturvvissenschaften in Hermannstadt: Mit-
theilungen. Vol. XLII. (1892).

Verein filr Naturwissenschaft zu Braunschweig: Jahresbericht, Vol. VII.
<i889-i89i).

Nassauischer Verein fiir Naturkunde: Jahrbiicher, Vol. XLVL (1893).

Kais. Leop. -Carol. Akademie der Naturforscher: Nova Acta, Vol. XLVIIL,
No. 2; Vol. LVIL, No. 6; Vol. LVIIL, Nos. 5, 6; Vol. LX., No. 3; Vol.
LXL, No. I (1886-1893).

Societa Botanica Italiana: Bulletino, 1S93, Nos. 8 — 10.

Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano: Vol. I., No. I (January, 1894).

Archives do Museu Nacional do Rio de Janeiro: Vol. VIII. (1892).

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY, 29'

Sociedad Cientifica "Antonio Alzate": Memorias, Vol. VII., Nos. 3 — 6-
(1893-94).

L'Academie Royale Suedoise des Sciences de Stockholm: Memoires, Vol.
XVIII., Sections 3, 4 (1893).

L'Academie d'Hippone, Bone: Bulletin (June, 1893).

Correction. — It is due Mr. K. M. Cunningham to state that, in
his article, '* Notes on some Researches among the Diatomacese,"
published in this Journal, vol. ix., p. 85, by the omission of cer-
tain matter contained in his manuscript he is caused to appear as
contradicting his own claim of making the first record of " the
motility of the protoplasmic covering of the Amphiprora." The
omission occurs on page 107, immediately preceding the sen-
tence, " One is certain of witnessing a phenomenon that has for
many years been of mysterious interest to observers." In this
sentence he refers to the cyclosis in NHella and similar organ-
isms, and not to " the activity of the protoplasmic sheath of the
Amphiprora ornata" of the preceding sentence, as published. —
Ed.

(I)

am:erican

^MANUFACTURED BY

BAUSGH & LOMB OPTICAL GO

STUDENT MICROTOME, $18.00.

Do not fail to procure tlie 13tli edition catalogue (120
pages), entirely revised, issue June, 1892, comprising Variety
of new Apparatus for the Microscopist. It will be mailed
free to any address upon application.

FACTORY AND MAIN OFFICE :

BRANCH OFFICE :

515-543 North St. Paul St., ISO Fulton Street,

ROCHESTER, N. Y.

p. O. Drawer 1033.

NEW YORK CITY,

p. O. Box 432.

JOURN. N.-Y. MIC. SOC. April, 1894.

PLATE 39.

^1:5 '^^^

PAPER FIBRES.

JOURN. N.-Y. MIC. SOC. April, 1894

PLATE 40.

|||^P|i.,4^l|.fr,

V^

:\ •

<^

N

V ^ JwH

^y^"^

"f

y

— -

\^"V

. 0

^

■^r

f/^

\

•

i

PAPER FIBRES.

Journal

OF THE

NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY

Vol. X. APRIL, 1894. No. 2.

A MICROSCOPICAL AND CHEMICAL EXAMINATION

OF THE ADMIXTURES AND ADULTERATIONS

IN PAPERS USED FOR AVRITING

AND ENGRAVING.

ANNUAL ADDRESS BY THE PRESIDENT, CHARLES S. SHULTZ.
(^Delivered January ^tA, 1894.)

In my brief inaugural before the Society last January I spoke
of the importance of the microscope as a means of detecting
adulterations in food products, fabrics, etc. At that time I in-
cidentally mentioned that a friend and myself had begun the
examination of fine papers for a certain purpose.

Explanation of Plate 39.

Fig. 1.— Flax. From a fine example which was used in spinning at Flatbush, Long-
Island, in 1821.

Fig. 3.— Linen fibre. Ready for paper-making.

Fig. 3.— Linen paper. Extracted from a Michigan Central R. R. bond dated ISrS.

Fig. 4.— Letter paper. Water-marked " Royal Irish Linen." Proves to be a mixture
of some linen and much cotton.

Fig. 5.— Sea Island cotton. Shows twist in the fibres, but is not sufficiently enlarged
to show any diagonal plaid structure.

Fig. 6.— The "Suspected Paper." Purported to be linen, but it proves to be a mixture
of some linen, much cotton, some poplar-wood fibre, etc.
Explanation of Plate 40.

Fig. 7.— Longitudinal-radial section of the wood of Popuhis monilifera Ait., exhibit-
ing the peculiar screen-like blocks of the medullary rays noticed in specimens of paper
made from the pulp of this wood.

Fig. 8.— Poplar-wood fibre pulp. Made by "soda process."

Fig. 9.— Longitudinal-radial section of spruce wood.

Fig. 10.— Spruce-wood fibre, pulped. "Sulphite jirocess."

Fig. 11.— Reputed " cottonseed-hull pulp." Proves to be fibre of coniferous wood.

All the figures are enlarged about 250 diameters.

33 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

The reason of this examination was that my friend, Dr. T. B.
Stillman, professor of analytical and applied chemistry at the
Stevens Institute of Technology, in Hoboken, received from a
firm of engravers a specimen of paper which had been offered
to them as *' linen paper," suitable lor some of their purposes.
They wished Dr. Stillman to make a hasty determination of the
paper and report as to its constituents. He undertook to do this
by chemical means, but, on account of a similar reaction by nearly
all vegetable fibres composed of cellulose, his analysis proved
unsatisfactory to himself. He looked over many written author-
ities upon the investigation and manufacture of fine paper, and
concluded that chemistry alone would not solve his difficulty,
and that, if the constituents were to be fully determined, the
microscope must be brought in to complete the analysis.

He asked me to assist him in the case, as he was not an expert
in the handling of the microscope. I, who had never undertaken
the systematic examination of paper, however, consented to aid
him in the analysis of this, which we shall call our " suspected
paper." Like many microscopists, I had casually examined
fibres of linen, cotton, silk, etc., and had in a general way run
through sections of various woods ; but when at this time I
undertook to examine various papers and paper pulps, I, for want
of experience, found myself entirely "at sea." This "suspected
paper" seemed to more particularly puzzle us. It had in its
appearance much of the straight-fibred characteristics of linen,
but it also showed cotton, and in the tangled mass upon the
slide other matter cropped out with which I was unacquainted.
In short, after making numerous examinations and comparisons
with several woods and a variety of papers and pulps, we arrived
at the conclusion that this " suspected paper" was composed of
a little linen, much cotton, and some wood, mainly poplar ; it
having probably been largely made up of old or repulped paper,
heavily sized and nicely finished. I have but a small piece of
this paper here, which I offer for examination.

Up to this period I was not aware of the use of so large an
amount and variety of woods in the manufacture of writing and
other of the finer papers, supposing that merely newspapers,
books, and printers' common stock were made from wood pulps.
Much less did I know of the various misrepresentations of the

I894-J NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 33

paper trade until later, when, to my surprise, we found high-
class paper manufacturers, both in this country and in Great
Britain, who water-mark their products as '' Pure linen stock,"
"Royal Irish linen," "Pure parchment, one hundred per cent
chemical fibre," and other high-sounding names, employed ad-
mixtures of cotton and various woods, more particularly spruce,
some varieties of poplar, fir, white pine, etc., as may be seen by
slides Nos. 4-6 and several which are not numbered (Plate 39,.
Figs, 4 and 6).

Having made this discovery, and now being upon our guard,
in order to ascertain what was published upon this topic we
looked up some of the literature upon the proper means of de-
tecting admixtures in paper.

We could find but little that was very definite or of much
value in the English or American works, but found much in
German concerning investigations in progress, although these
investigations were usually conducted by intricate and tedious
processes.

The work in this line performed and in progress in the German
Kais. Konigl. Versuchstation at Berlin appears to be the most
valuable that came to our notice. Of these I have made a few
extracts, which I will give further on if time permits.

The various modern processes in pulping a variety of the vege-
table fibres, and the admirable texture and finish given to many
of the finer manufactured papers, make it very difficult to get a
qualitative, much more a proper quantitative, analysis of these
products.

It might be well at this stage to submit a brief outline of the
general manner in which paper is manufactured, in order to have
you comprehend why it is so difficult to distinguish, in this pro-
gressive age, the superior all-linen stock from the cheaper mix-
tures of cotton, woods, etc. At the head of the list stands the
ancient papyrus, of which the first was probably made in Egypt
from a species of reed belonging to the family of Cyperacese, or
sedges. A fine paper was also early made from the inner layers
of the cuticle of the mulberry and other trees, laid side by side,
and a second layer being placed at right angles; all were wet
ted, pressed together and dried in the sun, beaten smooth with a
mallet, and polished with a piece of ivory or shell.

34 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

The Aztecs made a kind of paper from the leaves of the ma-
guey plant, which plant is still grown extensively in portions of
Mexico; but the modern Mexican prefers to brew from this plant
his " pulque," the national beverage, and his paper is now made
from other substances, much like our own.

To the Chinese, however, has been attributed the manufacture
of the first paper made upon modern principles, viz., that of
pulping vegetable fibres.

My attention was called to a work in German and published
in 1887, entitled " Die mikroskopische Untersuchung des Papiers
mit besonderer Berichsichtung der altesten orientalischen und
europaischen Papiere," by Dr. Julius Wiesner, professor of bot-
any and vegetable physiology in the University of Vienna.

This book, a quarto of eighty-two pages, is mainly intended as
a history of paper-making, and gives the constituents of writing
papers manufactured from the ninth to the nineteenth century,
showing the earlier papers to consist of more or less wool mixed
with hemp and linen; and later, as made in the eleventh to the
fifteenth century, a mixture of wool, linen or hemp, and cotton,
heavily sized with glue or starch, prevailed; and in the fifteenth
century the use of wool in paper ceased.

After this, according to this author, the European papers were
made of linen and small quantities of cotton combined, but m the
early part of the present century cotton was used in larger quan-
tities as an adulterant of linen and hemp papers. Later on cot-
ton was used as the sole ingredient of the cheaper writing
papers.

This author gives the names of many letters and public docu-
ments from which paper has been taken and examined by him-
self and others, working together on these historical investigations
at this time. He also mentions the labors of Briquet and Caruel
in their microscopical researches on papers used from the eleventh
to the fourteenth century inclusive.

Among the older papers examined by Dr. Wiesner there are
some found in the tombs of Egypt; others from Arabia, Damas-
cus, and other portions of Syria; also many important documents,
in Italy and of various parts of Europe from one thousand years
ago to the present century. In each case he states from what
materials these papers are manufactured, gives the title of the

1894] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 35

writing or document and the date thereof, making a curious and
interesting history.

The usual processes of paper-making are well known, but I will
mention enough of them to indicate why it becomes so difficult to
detect adulterations and admixtures therein, either chemically or
microscopically. The chief reason why we cannot separate the
component substances of paper microscopically, is because the
linen or cotton rags, or both of these mixed, are placed in the
*' beating machines," equipped with long knives and flail-like
arms, which tear up and beat out all traces of their original textile
nature. With protracted maceration in strong alkalies the mass
is reduced to a jelly-like pulp. This mass is retained in hot water
for many hours, bleached with chloride of lime, sized with gela-
tin, or resin soap, and alum dissolved in soda. China clay is
sometimes added to improve its weight and surface rather than
its quality. One would think that these tearing, macerating, and
chemical pulping processes would be quite sufficient to obliterate
all traces of the original fibres ; but when to this is added old
paper to be reworked, then the difificulty of optically separating
the original fibres becomes extremely aggravated, so that while
one knows upon microscopical examination that he has not pure
linen paper before him, he nevertheless finds himself embarrassed
in determining what he sees in the broken-up and tangled mix-
ture, however carefully he may arrange it upon the slide. You
may demonstrate this for yourselves by looking at slide No. 6,
this being our " suspected paper " which was offered for linen
(Plate 39, Fig. 6).

When, however, a percentage of wood pulp ready for paper-
making is mixed with linen, or linen and cotton pulp, and espe-
cially if the wood is of the coniferous order, such as spruce or
white pine, etc., then the woody admixture is quite easily dis-
cerned, although it may have been cut to pieces and pulped.

In slide No. 8 you will see a fair example of a spruce-pulp
paper by one of the chemical reductions, known as the " soda
process " (Plate 40, Fig. 8).

Now as to the modes of manufacturing wood pulps for paper-
making.

There are two general methods, one known as the " mechani-
cal " or "ground wood," and the other as the " chemical " pulp

36 JOURNAL OF THE [April^

process. These are again subdivided into "sulphite," "soda
pulps," etc. By the " mechanical" or ground-wood method any
suitable wood is taken, usually, on account of cheapness, the edg-
ings, slabs from sawmills, small cordwood, and other waste stock.
In the " Voelter " process, which is German, the defiberer, or
mill, consists of a coarse cylindrical stone revolving rapidly,,
against which the pieces of wood are held by springs. The water
which flows through assists in reducing the fibre so finely that the
subsequent chemical treatment is simple. The "mechanical^'
processes, however, breakup the fibres into short particles, thereby
reducing the strength of the pulp and permitting less of this pulp
to be mixed with linen or cotton, on account of the consequently-
greater friability of this woody matter.

Among the various " chemical " wood-pulp processes is one in
which the wood is not disintegrated, as by the "mechanical " or
ground-wood methods, but convenient-sized pieces are placed in
a steam-tight vessel and boiled with about twenty per cent of strong
caustic soda under a pressure of ten to fourteen atmospheres.
In another, by the popular " Mitscherlich " patent method, bisul-
phite of lime is used instead of soda ; and the best wood pulps,
are prepared by the several "sulphite " processes.

I show you here several examples of these methods in sheets
of dried pulp, and finished papers, Nos. 12 to 17, with the color
action of various reagents upon them, which were treated by Prof^
Stillman, and which I will explain after I shall have finished this
paper. The mounted slides of the corresponding numbers are on
the stands for your inspection.

Now, as if the several methods of paper-making, as briefly de-
scribed, were not sufficiently destructive, there is still another curi-
ous mode — that is, the converting of cane wood into pulp. By
this, the " Lyman " process, the disintegrated cane is placed in
strong iron cylinders, called " guns "; these are about twenty-two
feet long and twelve inches internal diameter, and are laid on
heavy frames. The heads are fastened on both ends, and steam is
admitted until a pressure of one hundred and eighty pounds to the
square inch is reached. This pressure is maintained for about
twelve minutes, when, by pulling a trigger, the covers are suddenly
released, and the steam, propelling the mass of disintegrated wood
before it, rushes out with an explosion equal to that of a large

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 37

cannon and may be heard many miles. The charges from these
" guns" are fired against an iron target about thirty feet distant,
leaving a spongy mass which is then converted by chemical treat-
ment into paper. Besides the mangling of paper stock by the
various pulp-making methods, there are still the several processes
of finishing, such as bleaching, sizing, and moulding the pulp by
means of wire gratings, upon which the setting or hardening pulp
rests ; a portion of these screens, with figures or names placed in
them by means of thinner wires, producing the "water-markings "
commonly seen on writing papers.

In addition to these we have the calendering, glazing, filling,
and numerous oiher finishing processes, with which I will not
further weary you.

Having now seen these several constituents of paper variously
torn, cut, beaten, mangled, shot out of " guns," ground up, dis-
solved by chemical means, and many of these substances com-
pletely transformed from their original condition and the ap-
pearances with which we are familiar, how are we to determine
what they are ? When we consider the great variety of materials
used in the manufacture of paper, and yet know that all of them
consist of cellulose, which gives a similar reaction chemically, we
find that the chemist is debarred from positively identifying any
admixture of pulps or finished paper, although he can detect
*' mechanical " wood pulp unmixed, as we shall see later, by the
color demonstrations on the papers, as heretofore mentioned and
here exhibited ; but beyond this stage chemical tests become un-
reliable.

We see, therefore, why almost the entire determination of ad-
mixtures in paper rests with the microscopist.

It is easy to recognize under the microscope the ordinary
materials from which paper is manufactured, such as linen, cot-
ton, various woods cut in thin sections, etc., when each of these
substances is in its natural condition and properly mounted for
microscopical observation.

Here are displayed before you under magnification not only
preparations of the actual materials — flax, cotton, etc. — but also
a number of photomicrographs of the same preparations dis-
tinctly exhibiting the details (Plate 39, Figs, i, 2,5 ; Plate 40,
Figs. 7, 9). In addition to these examples of the simple fibres

38 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

you will also see here illustrated in the same manner the more
intricate specimens of various pulps for paper-making, composed
of linen, cotton, mechanical and chemical wood processes, besides
one slide purporting to be *' cottonseed-hull pulp," but which
instead proves to be of coniferous wood, as you will readily see
from its well-known characteristics (Plate 40, Fig. 11).

Let us go a little further and examine the finished papers,
portions of which we have here upon our slides. Previous to
mounting these Dr. Stillman prepared them for the purpose of
eliminating the sizing, rosin, filling, etc., with which they were
finished. This is accomplished in this manner : Cut the finished
paper in small pieces, and place them in a beaker, adding a suf-
ficient quantity of a solution of caustic soda (caustic soda one
part, water thirty parts). Digest the paper just below the boiling
point for about fifteen minutes. Pour off the liquid and replace
with double the quantity of distilled water. Pour off this water and
wash once again in the same manner. Add the same quantity of
a solution composed of fifteen parts of distilled water to one of
hydrochloric acid. Digest ten minutes with a gentle heat. Pour
off this liquid and wash in warm distilled water about three
times, then dry the paper for mounting in glycerin or balsam.
In order to get some contrast in the fibres for photographing,
stain them lightly with hgematoxylin.

As an example of pure linen paper shown here, and which is
becoming somewhat scarce in the market, I have extracted a
specimen from a railroad bond now twenty-two years old (Plate
39, Fig. 3). We have here also a specimen of a sheet which is
water-marked "Royal Irish Linen." a letter paper sold at a good
price. Inspect this under a microscope, and you will have no
difficulty in finding a fair proportion of cotton mixed therein
(Plate 39, Fig. 4). In the slide (No. 6) already mentioned as
from our "suspected paper" you will see scattered through it but
little linen, and will see some woody indications, with plenty of
cotton ; but, on account of the tearing-up. pulping, and repulping
process it has undergone, it will be found very difficult to elimi-
nate the various disintegrated fibres therein contained. The
sheet from which the specimen on slide No. 13 was taken is
called by the manufacturer "parchment paper." I regret to
have mislaid this sheet. This was a strong, nicely glazed, and

1894.] NEW-V'ORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 39

highly finished paper. From its name and general appearance
one would think it might be pure linen paper, but you will find
nothing but cotton in the specimen under the microscope. We
have not known any attempt of the manufacturer to palm off
papers made wholly of wood for linen, but the several kinds of
wood pulps are frequently mixed with linen and cotton-rag pulps,
and when finished are sold for high-class paper, while the cheaper
grades are made almost entirely from wood pulps.

Both in the " mechanical " and " chemical " wood paper systems
the woody markings maybe distinguished by the aid of the micro-
scope, and more particularly the coniferous fragments (Plate 40,
Figs. 10, 11).

Poplar-wood fibre, when torn up, somewhat resembles cotton,
but there is at least one distinguishing feature, even among the
disintegrated "mechanical" pulps — that is, the tangential frag-
ments have among them particles bearing a grate- or screen-like
appearance ; some of these evidences maybe seen in slide No. 7,
a section of the wood of Popiilus monilifeya (Plate 40, Fig. 7).
Slide No. 16, being paper of the Singerly Pulp and Paper Co.,
also exhibits this peculiar feature, indicating poplar wood
" ground '' up by the " mechanical" process. Slide No. 17 is of
Woolvvorth &: Graham's "ground wood pulp," which also shows
a little of the poplar character, but the mass is so full of short
fibre as to be practically unrecognizable, and is only fit for
printers' low-grade work. The chemical tests, however, show
plainly by their peculiar colors that this is " ground wood."

We have here a sheet of dried pulp from Norway, called
*' Eker,'* which is shown by the microscope to be composed of
spruce wood, and, as you will see by its bright-red color in its
chemical reaction, when I slightly touch it with para-phenylen-
diamine hydrochlorate, is proved to be " mechanical fibre."

I will not go into further detail regarding the varieties of paper
intended for the higher classes of work. It is patent that there
is much yet to be learned about the methods of detecting mixtures
in paper, even for the ordinary qualitative tests; and as for
quantitative analysis, we have found no better method than those
adopted at the German testing station at Berlin, where an eye-
piece micrometer, ruled in squares, is used to count, as best may
be, the several fibres or parts of fibres of each admixture con-

40 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

tained in any square or number of squares, and by this means
to arrive at the average proportions of each kind of material con-
tained in the mass.

A glance through the microscope at some of these paper com-
positions will, I think, satisfy you that, even after making many
measurements and taking the average of them, the final determi-
nation will be far from correct, on account of the thoroughly
intermingled condition of the various substances; the differences
in the dimensions of the divers kinds and shapes of the fibres; the
broken portions of many of these; as well as the impossibility of
discriminating between the ingredients in their disintegrated state.
For the reasons given I have not, up to this time, attempted a
quantitative determination in mixed or adulterated papers. For
similar reasons no fixed rule can be laid down for optically
separating the constituents in the finer papers, except by long
and diligent practice with the microscope, thereby training the
observer's eye and mind for the discrimination necessary in de-
tecting such matter as one finally becomes familiar with by certain
details he has previously recognized, and by comparison with the
elements which form the component parts of the usual admixtures
or adulterations named in the subject of this evening.

I am thankful to Prof. Stillman for bringing this matter to my
attention originally; for the valuable aid he has given me in his
chemical preparations; for collecting examples of paper stock;
and in pointing out much of the bibliography bearing upon this
class of investigation. You are also indebted to him for the
color reactions which he has so well shown, by means of the
numerous examples of ])ulps and paper treated by him which
I have laid before you, and which I will briefly explain when I
apply some of these reagents to show you their rapid action on
some papers.^

We are under obligations to Dr. E. G. Love for the photo-
micrographic illustrations of many of the slides upon the tables,
which enable us to more readily conceive the appearances of the

' On account of the chemical investigations by Prof. T. B. Stillman, now in progress
and relating to papers and their constituents, I do not mention at this time ary ol the
other chemical reagents shown here, but hope that he will in the near future give for
publication, in a chemical or other technical journal, a more complete means of chem cat
identilication than has hitherto been known.

1894J NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 41

several original substances here shown, and the results when these
are made into pulp and paper, as I have already described/

I regret that I am unable to throw more light upon what we
have discovered to be an intricate and vexatious subject; but if
no further advantage shall be attained from our earnest efforts at
this time, I hope, at least, that other members will be induced tO'
take up not only the further investigation of paper admixtures,
but also the analysis of many of the familiar products manu-
factured and in common use, with a view of making known to
the world what adulterations they severally contain.

Moreover, I have chosen a utilitarian theme on this occasion
whereby the microscope is applied to the economic arts; may I
be pardoned, therefore, for the lack of truly scientific work which
might be expected in an annual address before such an association
as ours ? If no other benefit shall result therefrom, we as micro-
scopists, when engaged in kindred lines of research where science
is applied to the practical arts, may perhaps disprove the imputa-
tion that we can claim no independent position in either the arts
or sciences.

1 Of the numerous photomicrographs made by Dr. Love, we have had portioriF, two
inches square, cut from eleven of them, and reproduced in half-tone by the photo-
engraving process, and inserted in this publication in two plaief.

42 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

THE COMPARATIVE ANATOMY OF THE
VERTEBRATE SKIN.

BY GEORGE WILLIAM KOSMAK.

(^Read January igtA, 1894.)

I. Introduction.

- The subject to which I ask your attention this evening presents
to both biologist and microscopist a varied and fascinating line
of work in original research and invesiigation. In its morphology
and physiology many points are still doubtful and obscure, await-
ing the biologist's explanation and elucidation ; while to the
working microscopist there is held forth an equal opportunity in
a field where little satisfactory work has yet been dowe — e.g., in
the technique and new methods of sectioning and staining.

The study of the skin, anatomically and physiologically, is a
subject vast and extensive, with an accompanying literature
equally so. The latter, however, consists of a mass of detail,
much of which is unimportant. The beginner must wade through

Explanation of Plate 41.

Fig. 1.— Diagram of Fish Skiu. Transverse section, illustrating general structure.
(After Wiedersheim.) S C. striated cuticular border of epidermis; A. slime cells; E,
epidermis; D, derma; K, goblet cell; L, granular cells of Petromyzon; B, blood vessels;
V, vertical connective-tissue bundles; H, horizontal connective-tissue bundles.

Explanntion of Plate 42.

Fig. 2.— (a) Diagrammatic cross-section of skiu of larval Salamander; (6) ditto, of
adult form. (After Wiedersheim.) E. epidermis; D, dermis; S C, striated cuticular
border of E; C. stratum corneum; M, stratum Malpighii; P, pigment; O, subcutane-
ous layers of muscle; B, blood vessels; N, epithelium of glands; X, Y, integumentary-
glands; T, muscles of glands.

Explanation of Plate 4 3.

Fig. 3.— Feather Development. Diagrammatic. (After Studer.} a, 6, c, d, e,/ de-
note successive stages. C, stratum corneum; M, stratum Malpighii; D, derma; F, F',
feather germ; P, pulp; Q, quill; B, bai-bs: B', barbules. c is a cross-section of the
feather germ in b, showing the ridges of Malpighiau cells covered by the horny layer of
epidermis.

Fig. 4.— Hair Development. Diagrammatic, a, ?>, c, d, e,/ denote successive stages.
C, stratum corneum; M, stratum Malpighii; D, derma; F, hair follicle; B, blood vessels;
K, hair knob: G, sebaceous gland; P, hair papilla— in e and / are indicated two stages
in its formation; in / it has become vascular.

JOURN. N.-Y. MIC. SOC. April, 1894.

PLATE 41.

Figj

VERTEBRATE SKIN.

JOURN, N.-Y. MIC. SOC, April, 1894.

PLATE 42

£

af^l'^'g^

VERTEBRATE SKIN.

JOURN. N.-Y. MIC. SOC Aprjl, 1894.

PLATE 43

VERTEBRATE SKIN.

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 43

it all, as there is no general work on the subject that I have yet
found — no manual which treats of the anatomy and physiology of
the skin in a comparative sense, with a section devoted to micro-
scopical methods. The need for such a work is evident.

Owing to this magnitude I can only speak of generalities. I
will first say a few words of the skin in general ; then take up the
several types of vertebrates, and speak of their most characteristic
structures as derived from the skin ; and finally make brief men-
tion of the theories of homologies and correlations that have been
noted in the higher types.

II. The Skin in General.

The vertebrate skin, as derived from the embryo, consists of
two layers, a superficial ectodermal and a deeper mesodermal
layer. The former is called the epidermis (scarf-skin), the latter
the dermis (corium or cutis). The skin, like a mucous mem-
brane, consists of an epithelium resting on a connective-tissue
basis, the epithelium forming the epidermis made up of a few
or many layers of cells. The surface of the dermis is thrown
up into a number of elevations, called papillae, which differ
in form, size, and complexity in different regions of the body
and with the position in the animal scale. I'he epidermal or
outer layer does not follow this papillary contour of the dermis,
and when the two layers are carefully pulled apart and examined
ie-g., in the human skin) the papillae appear to plunge into and
be covered by the more even epidermis, although the outer sur-
face is well marked by ridges and furrows, such as we can plainly
see in the palm of the hand. These papillae are the end organs
of that most important sense, touch, and in the lower forms may
also function as other sense organs, which will be spoken of
later on.

The outer or epidermic layers always consist of cells only,
while the derma is made up also of connective-tissue fibres, as
well as of elastic and contractile elements. In the epidermis two
layers can' always be distinguished — an outer, composed of horny
cells, and therefore called the stratum corneum j and an inner,
made up of soft protoplasmic cells, the stratum Malpighii. The
latter really serves as a matrix for the regeneration of the outer,
horny layer, the superficial part of which is continually scaling

44 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

off. Nerves, glands, pigment cells, bony structures, and blood
vessels occur principally in the dermis. So-called epidermic
structures, such as skin glands, hairs, feathers, nails, hoofs,
claws, bristles, etc., are formed from the epidermis or outer layer.
These will be treated of in those types in which they are most
•characteristic, and we can then also see how environment, both
natural and artificial, has brought about many changes both in
their form and function. This need not appear strange or won-
derful when we consider how accessible the outer surface of the
skin is to external modifying influences. Before beginning with
our types of animal life and illustrating the modifications that
occur, the two primary divisions of the skin must be borne in
mind — an outer layer, protective, and an inner layer, nutritive
in function.

A few words in regard to the general physiology. Broadly
speaking, the waste products of the body are urea, carbon di-
oxide, water, and various salts. These leave the body by one or
other of three main channels : the luugSy the kidneys, or the skin.
The lungs discharge most of the carbon dioxide and some water ;
the kidneys, the urea and allied bodies ; the skin, a small amount
of the salts and nearly all the jvater. The skin is therefore the
great evaporating agent, and the discharge of waste products by
this channel we know as perspiration or sweat.

It has been proven that death would ensue in an animal in
which this cutaneous evaporation was prevented by covering its
body with an impermeable varnish which retained the sweat in
the glands, which thus acted as a poison.

The skin in the lower forms can also take the place of lungs.
If the lungs of a frog be removed he will continue to live for
some time, consume oxygen, and produce carbon dioxide, as in
the ordinary mode of breathing, thus showing that respiration
can be carried on efficiently by means of the skin.

Having briefly noticed its main anatomical and physiological
features, we will now take up the skin comparatively in the five
great classes of the vertebrates, and examine its most prominent
characters in each.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 45

III. The Classes of Vertebrata.

A. Fishes.

In certain members of this class we find conditions which have
undoubtedly been inherited from invertebrate ancestors. Thus
in the outer epidermic layer of many Fishes {Aiiiphioxi/s, e.g.) we
find a striated border, which can be imagined to consist of
coalesced cilia, and in the larval condition we find the free-mov-
ing cilia themselves on the outer surface of the epidermis (Fig.
I, S C). Here, as in many other instances, we can see gradual
transitions from lower to higher forms.

Glands, such as we find in higher vertebrates, are usually not
present in Fishes. The skin secretions which we do find come
from single cells or canals (Fig. r. A). The fluids which they
contain probably protect the skin from the action of the water or
ward off the attacks of fungoid growth ; and it has lately been
determined that certain of them function also as sense organs.
Other secreting cells are also present, the so-called '"'' goblet cells''
(Fig. I, K), whose function has not been definitely determined.

The most marked characteristic of the integument of Fishes is
in the scales. These lie in connective-tissue pouches of the derma,
and are formed as ossifications of the latter. In the higher types
of Fishes they are covered by the epidermis throughout life,
but in Ganoids (Gar-pikes, etc.) and Elasinobranchs (Sharks and
Rays) this is only the case in the larva. In the adult they are
free and projecting. The primitive form of the common fish
scale, as we see it in the Perch, for example, was probably an
ossification in the derma, which we call the basal plate with
projecting processes, the derm denticles. The transitions which
these have undergone from one form to another constitute a very
interesting series. In many Fishes, especially fossil, they form
a complete protective armor by their fusion, as in the well-known
armored South American catfishes.

The next factor to consider is pigment. This always originates
in the derma, and to it is due coloration. In endeavoring to ac-
count for its presence in the epidermis it has been asserted and
observed that white blood corpuscles carry pigment granules to
the outer layer, where they take on amoeboid movements, and
then break up into many small pigment-containing particles,

46 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

which are taken up by the epithelial 'cells. The distribution of
pigment over the body varies with the species and individual. It
is also subject to changes in environment, and is under direct
control of the nervous system. That it changes in order that
the animal may adapt itself to its surroundings, has lately been
demonstrated in the case of the common English Sole. As is well
known, the color of its upper side approximates very closely the
tint of the muddy bottom upon which it lives. However, when
placed under conditions which permit the access of light to the
lower as well as the upper side of its body, pigment will also be
developed on that side which formerly showed no trace of it.

We now take up a very important derivation of the integument
— sense ori^afis. Their main function is probably the perception
of mechanical irritations of the surrounding water, but they may
also have to do with the perception of sound. As elements we
have two kinds of cells : rod-shaped sensory cells, connected by
nerve fibres with the central nervous system, and the supporting
cells, which lie between the others and serve as connecting and
isolating material. The surrounding medium is always kept moist
by various secreting cells In those animals which give up an
aquatic life in the course of their development and come to live
on land, the end organs of the nerves pass further inward, the
rod-shaped cells disappear, and we have two kinds of nerve end-
ings in the skin : terminal ganglion cells and free nerve endings.
With Fishes we must include Amphibia in the consideration of
these sense organs, as the two types are very closely related.
" They consist of a central mass of cells, arranged in the form
of a rounded and depressed pyramid, and of a peripheral mass
grouped around the former. The central cells are in connection
with nerve fibres, and each bears on its free end a stiff, cuticular
hair ; these are to be looked on as the proper sensory cells, and
the others merely as a supporting medium." Where these hairs
project freely from the epidermis they are surrounded by a deli-
cate, protective, hyaline tube, which opens into the surrounding
water, and into one end the sensory hairs project. These organs
are at times distributed over the whole body, but as a rule only
in certain well-defined tracts ; those along the sides from the
head to the tail form the so-called organs of the lateral line.
Others are found in depressions or canals formed by scales, and

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 47

then, of course, the protective hyaline tube disappears. Another
form of sensory organs are the end bulbs, which in Fishes serve
as tactile organs, but in higher forms develop into organs of taste.

B. Amphibia.

The skin of Amphibia, as in the Salamander, exemplifies a
transitionary stage from Fishes to Reptiles. Thus, in the aquatic
larval forms, two sharply differentiated layers of the epidermis can
be made out, the superficial one with that same striated cuticular
border which we find in Fishes (Fig. 2, S C). Later, with ad-
vancing development, the layers of the epidermis become more
numerous, involutions toward the derma take place to form a
great number of globular and tube-shaped glands (Fig. 2,
X, Y, N). This richness of glands is a marked feature of the
skin of Amphibia, and to it they owe their moist and slippery
nature. Their secretions serve a variety of purposes, from
merely supplying moisture, to a protective function in the form of
poison.

Pigment is deposited in great quantities, partly in and partly
between the cells of the derma. Here, as in other forms, we see
that wonderful adaptation to environment, as exemplified in the
well-known green tree-frog and the sandy-colored horned toad of
our Western deserts.

Calcifications may also occur in the derma, but they were more
abundant in fossil than in modern forms. Some of the integu-
mentary sense organs of this group have already been mentioned
in connection with those of Fishes. Another form, which is first
met with in the tailless Amphibia {Anura), is the tactile spot, con-
sisting of a group of cells in a typical form of papilla, which func-
tions as an organ of touch.

C. Reptiles.

In taking up this group for examination we notice two promi-
nent characters : the formation of scales and other horn-like
structures, and the almost total absence of integumentary glands.
Scales can here be dismissed with a few words. They are all
formed by a change in the epidermis, in which the derma takes
part later on. Many widely differing forms all originate in this
manner, and can be classed in general with the feathers of birds

48 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

and the hair of mammals. The scales and rattles of snakes, the
tortoise shell of chelonians, claws, prickles, and warts, are all
epidermal.

In this group pigment plays an important role. The chame-
leon is a time-honored and well-known example of the change of
color to agree with surroundings. In addition to pigment the
formation and structure of the scales in relation to the light-rays
may also have something to do wdth the general effect.

Integumentary sense organs are represented in Snakes, and also
in Birds, by tactile cells surrounded by connective-tissue pouches,
wuth septa separating the individual tactile cells and thus form-
ing a tactile corpuscle.

Dermal ossifications were more developed in ancient reptiles
than in those of the present day. Crocodiles, some lizards, and
principally the chelonia, still maintain dermal structures.

D. Birds.

When we come to examine this group the most characteristic
integumentary structures are the feathers, and these \v\\\ there-
fore require the greater part of our attention.

Ordinarily feathers appear to be inserted over the entire body
of a bird, but on closer view they will be found, with but few
exceptions, in certain regions only, called feather tracts, sepa-
rated from each other by naked stretches of skin. These tracts
vary in number and position with different genera, as do also the
shape and size of the individual feathers. In a general way
feathers develop as follows : At the point where one is destined
to be formed occurs a slight upheaval of the dermal tissue, fol-
lowed by the epidermal layer, and thus creating a papilla. As
this papilla grows outward and forms a bluntly-pointed cone
(Fig. 3, a), its base sinks gradually inward ; the epidermis imme-
diately surrounding follows and forms a pocket around the elon-
gated papilla. This papilla is \.h.t feather germ (Fig. 3, b, F), and
the pocket constitutes the feather follicle (Fig. 3, b). The papilla
is thus made up of the two layers of the epidermis on the outside,
acting as a covering for the mass of dermal cells in the interior,
Xhtptilp (Fig. 3, b).

As the feather germ grows the cells of the inner epidermal or
Malpighian layer increase rapidly in number, and grow toward

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 49

the centre of the germ in a series of ridges, thus forming folds
between them which run the length of the genu. Immediately
surrounding this is the outer, horny layer of the epidermis
(Fig. 3, c). Each separate ridge of these internal cells now
becomes horn-like, and the central pulp substance dries up. We
thus have a bundle of horny rays surrounded by an outer sheath,
and of these the pencil-like structures seen on the bodies of
newly-hatched birds consist. The outer, horny covering finally
breaks off, the rays or barbs become free, and a down-feather is
formed (Fig. 3, d). The lower portion remains in the skin as the
quill, and the entire structure may remain or be replaced by defi-
nite feathers. In such case a second germ forms at the base of
the first, the papilla grows rapidly, undergoes nearly the same
•changes as the other, the embryonic down-feather is pushed out
and may often be found attached to one of the barbs of the new
feather. At first the two kinds are much alike, but, in the second,
•one of the rays becomes rapidly thickened and forms a stem, to
which the barbs are attached on each side, with their barbules
(Fig. 3, /). This theory of feather development, as advanced,
with perhaps some slight differences of detail, by Studer (1873)
and Kerbert (1876), has been, and is to a great extent even to
this day, accepted as the simplest and most probable.

In Birds we have no trace of true dermal bones, and also a
marked deficiency in glands, the only ones being the uropygial
glands at the base of the tail, whose secretions serve to oil the
feathers. Many important epidermal structures, in addition to
feathers, are found in this group ; such are : claws, spurs, foot
scales, and beak sheaths.

E. Mammals. '

We now come to the highest class of the vertebrata, and, as in
Birds, we will consider first its most prominent feature — namely,
bair. Histologically this is quite distinct from the hair-like struc-
tures of Birds and Reptiles, which have no true hair. Its devel-
opment is very interesting.

At the spot where a hair is to be formed an increase in the
number of cells of the inner epidermal or Malpighian layer takes
place, forming a dome-like mass directed toward the interior
-(Fig. 4, a, b, c, M). The cells of the derma now arrange them-

50 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

selves in mantle form around this mass in a kind of pocket, des-
tined later to become the outer hair sheath. This proliferation
of Malpighian cells now assumes a bottle-shaped form, and a dif-
ferentiation of the constituent cells into central and peripheral
portions takes place (Fig. 4, e, F, K). The central part consists
of elongated cells and grows rapidly outward to form the hair
shaft ; the peripheral layer now becomes a sheath. The base of
the shaft will now be observed to have assumed a knob-like form;
an infolding of its base occurs to contain the nutrient blood ves-
sel (Fig. 4, <?, /, K, B, P). Sebaceous glands for oiling the hair
are also produced by proliferations of the Malpighian cells (Fig.
4, e,f, G). When a shedding of hair takes place a new papilla
may be formed at the base of the old one.

Hair plays a very important part in the life history of the Mam-
malia. It is their most distinguishing characteristic, and here, as
much as in any animal type, we can see the great protective value
of integumentary derivations, the very nature of the hair mass
retaining so large a quantity of the heat of the body.

When pigment is present in Mammals, it occurs in the cells of
the Malpighian layer, showing a marked difference from lower
forms where it is found principally in the derma.

Epidermic structures are worthy of note in this group. They
include many and varied forms : the baleen plates of whales, the
spines of the hedgehog and porcupine, the nasal horns of the
rhinoceros, the claws of cats and dogs, the bristles of the hog, and
many others all belong in this category.

The principal glands are sweat and sebaceous glands. These
make up two general classes, the former the simpler, the latter
more highly developed histologically. The mammary glands,
which characterize this group, can be also looked upon as modi-
fied sebaceous glands.

IV. Conclusion.

The five great types of back-boned animals having been ex-
amified, it remains for us to consider briefly a few of the relations
of the integumentary structures to general organic evolution and
to each other.

In the first place, as we have seen, they are divided into two
classes : those originating in the derma, in which the epidermis

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 51

may or may not take part, and those developing from a purely
epidermal source. Fish scales and derm denticles are examples
of the former ; in the lower types they forni a complete exo-
skeleton ; but as we ascend in the animal scale it is found that
as the endo-skeleton becomes more highly developed this exo- or
dermal skeleton grows of less and less importance, until finally
it disappears altogether. Epidermal structures (hairs, feathers,
e.g.) have now become of greater value. It seems that with the
higher development of the internal skeleton and the degenera-
tion of dermal structures the epidermal derivatives have grown
in importance.

Scales, feathers, and hairs are undoubtedly derived from a
more primitive, common condition, for in their individual devel-
opments they show many points of resemblance. The interme-
diate form between reptile-scale and bird-feather has not as yet
been found ; but feather and hair both point to one antecedent
type, found at the present day in the spurs of birds and the hair
of Monatremes. For in Echidna we find a hair without any
medullary substance, and then succeeding stages to typical hair.
The spur is very likely descended fronj a hair with a thickened
outer layer. This structure may break up into rays and form a
feather, or become flattened out to form a scale.

The relations of these structures to each other have furnished
material for many theories, but we still await the final and defi-
nite settlement of the question. This is but one of the many
problems which constitute such a fascinating field of research to
the modern biologist, who can accomplish wonders if he would
but attempt to elucidate and harmonize, or else disprove and
expunge, some of the many theories of his predecessors regarding
these questions.

IN MEMORIAM.

REV. SAMUEL LOCKWOOD, PH.D.

Dr. Lockwood died at his residence. Freehold, N. J., on Janu-
ary 9th, 1894, in the seventy-fifth year of his age.

He was born at Mansfield, England, on January 20th, 1819,
and was brought in his infancy to New York City, where he re-
ceived his education, graduating from the New York University

53 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

in 1847. During his university course he accepted the position
of assistant editor of the New York Sirn, offered him by the edi-
tor, Mr. Moses Y. Beach. Taking a theological course at the
Theological Seminary of the Reformed Dutch Church, at Nevv
Brunswick, N. J., he graduated from that institution in 1850 ;
received his ministerial license the same year from the Classis of
New York ; and immediately entered upon his nrst pastorate in
the Reformed Church at Cortlandtown, Westchester County, N. Y
which position he held until 1852. He then filled successive
pastorates in Reformed churches, at Gilboa, N. Y., from 1852 to
1854, and at Keyport, N. J., from 1S54 to 1869.

In 1867 he was appointed Superintendent of Instruction for
Monmouth County, N. J., and for a more central position in this
field of labor he moved his residence to Freehold in 1870. It
was in this office, which he held until the time of his death, that
he rendered service in behalf of public education which will long
be remembered for its faithfulness and efficiency.

An interested student of nature from his youngest days, he pos-
sessed the enthusiasm, patience, and assiduity which especially
succeed in exploring and interpreting the secrets of wonder and
beauty veiled from the careless crowd. He took delight in an-
nouncing to others what he had learned, as is evidenced by his
numerous publications during many years in scientific serials of
this and foreign lands, and by his numerous addresses before
scientific bodies of our own country.

During his pastorate at Gilboa, Schoharie County, N. Y., he
made a special study of the local geology, which resulted in dis-
coveries confirming opinions of the grandeur of the Devonian pe-
riod, and in a notable palseontological collection, now at Rutgers
College, New Jersey. It was of this collection that Prof. George H.
Cook, afterward State Geologist of New Jersey, is said to have
exclaimed, on displaying it before the students : '' If Hugh Miller
were living he would want to cross the Atlantic to see it."

At Keyport, N. J., he found a different but no less fascinating
field of nature spread out before him, which he enthusiastically
cultivated, and in relation to which he issued various noted publi-
cations on palaeontology and marine zoology. It was during this
period — 1867 — that the Nevv York University conferred on him
the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 53

Dr. Lockwood was an expert microscopist, using his knowledge
of the instrument especially in lines of public instruction and
benefit. He was one of the founders of the New Jersey State
Microscopical Society, and for some years its President. He was
elected an Honorary Member of the New York Microscopical So-
ciety in 1S84, and his interest and zeal in the welfare of this organ-
ization are evidenced by his many instructive and valuable ad-
dresses, and by his presentation of objects through these years
very nearly to the close of his course.

He was possessed of admirable traits of character. Integrity,
good-will, and firmness have left him an irreproachable record.
His extending knowledge and facile, accurate expression have
made him a desired leader and manager of affairs in his lines of
duty. Reverence guiding his enthusiastic unfoldings of nature
always tended to point the hearer to the Creator. And a kindly
disposition, pervaded by a vein of humor, made him a desirable
companion. His death will leave a void in the hearts of many
acquaintances and friends.

PROCEEDINGS.

Meeting of January 5th, 1894.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Thirty-one persons present.

Annual reports were presented by the Treasurer, Librarian,
Recording Secretary, Corresponding Secretary, and the Commit-
tee on Publications.

The committee appointed December 15th, 1893, to formulate
action on the death of Dr. Paul Hoffman, reported as follows :
" Since it has pleased Providence to take from us our friend and
fellow-member, Dr. Paul Hoffman, we desire in this manner to
express our deep sense of sorrow, and to extend to the bereaved
relatives our sympathy."

Mr. Arthur G. Elberg and Dr. Ferdinand G. Kneer were
elected Resident Members of the Society.

The President read his Annual Address, entitled "A Micro-
scopical and Chemical Examination of the Admixtures and Adul-

54 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

terations in Papers used for Writing and Engraving." This
address was illustrated by numerous objects and photomicro-
graphs, as noted below, and is published in this number of the
Journal, p. 31.

This being the stated meeting for the annual election of
officers, the President appointed Mr. William J. Lloyd and Dr.
Anthony Woodward tellers, and at the closing of the polls the
following persons were declared elected officers of the Society
for 1894 :

President, Charles S. Shultz.

Vice-President, Edw. G. Love.

Recording Secretary, George E. Ashby.

Corresponding Secretary, J. L. Zabriskie.

Treasurer, James Walker.

Librarian, Ludwig Riederer.

Curator, George E. Ashby.
( F. W. Devoe.

Auditors - w. E. Damon.
( F. W. Leggett.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Bacillus tuberculosis, under a one-quarter-inch objective of
his own construction : by F. D. Skeel.

2. A "Bulloch Stand" made by E. B. Meyrowitz : by F. D.
Skeel.

3. Flax, from a fine example used in spinning at Flatbush,
Long Island, in 182 1.

4. Linen fibre ready for paper-making.

5. Linen paper extracted from a Michigan Central Railroad
bond dated 1872.

6. " Royal Irish Linen " paper containing a large proportion of
cotton.

7. Sea Island cotton.

8. The " suspected paper," purported to be linen, but contain-
ing linen, cotton, and wood.

9. '' Eker" paper from Norway.

10. Sections of wood of Populus monilifera Ait.

11. Poplar- wood pulp, "soda process."

12. Sections of spruce wood.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 55

13. Spruce fibre pulped, "sulphite process."

14. " Cottonseed-hull pulp.'' Proves to be fibre of coniferous
wood.

15. Eleven photomicrographs of the above fibres, taken by Dr.
Edw. G. Love.

Exhibits Nos. 3-15 by Charles S. Shultz.

Meeting of January 19TH, 1894.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

'J'wenty-five persons present.

The following committees were appointed by the Chair :

Committee on Publications : J. L. Zabriskie, William G. De
Witt, Walter H. Mead, John L. Wall, Charles F. Cox.

Committee on Admissions : H. W. Calef, Anthony Woodward,
M. M. Le Brun, H. G. Piftard, W. J. Lloyd.

The President announced the death of Rev. Samuel Lock-
wood, Ph.D., Honorary Member of the Society, and appointed
the following committee to formulate suitable action under the
circumstances : F. W. Devoe, J. L. Zabriskie, H. G. Piffard.

The Recording Secretary read a letter from Mr. F. W. Devoe
referring to the death of Dr. Lockwood, and also an extract from
the Monmouth County Democrat on the same subject.

Mr, George William Kosmak read a paper entitled "The
Comparative Anatomy of the Vertebrate Skin." This paper was
illustrated by very fine enlarged colored diagrams, and by objects
under microscopes, as noted below, and is published in this issue
of the Journal, p. 42.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Human blood, eosin stain, under the one-quarter-inch ob-
jective exhibited at the last meeting : by Frank D. Skeel.

2. Section of leaf of Syrian Wheat, showing trichomes : by
Frank D. Skeel.

3. Transverse section of skin of Dog-fish with derm denticles
projecting.

4. Transverse section of skin of young Sturgeon with derm
denticles dropped.

56 JOURNAL OF THE [April^

5. Vertical section of Necturus, showing glandular develop-
ments.

6. Feather germ of Chick at nine days.

7. Vertical section of human scalp, showing roots of hairs.
Exhibits Nos. 3-7 by George William Kosmak.

Dr. Bashford Dean stated that one of the most important dis-
coveries in this line announced during the past year was that by
Miss Julia C. Piatt, professor at Mt. Holyoke Seminary, to the
effect that the head cartilage is derived from the ectoderm of the
embryo.

Meeting of February 20, 1894.

The meeting was held in Hamilton Hall, Columbia College.
The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Twenty-eight persons were present.

On motion the routine business of the Society was deferred
until the next meeting.

Dr. Alexis A. Julien read a paper entitled " A Silicified Form
of a New Species of Fungus in Wood from the Petrified Forest
near Cairo, Egypt." This paper was illustrated by numerous
excellent photographic lantern views, and by objects under five
microscopes, consisting of mineralogical sections, prepared with
remarkable carefulness and skill by Mr. T. B. Briggs to exhibit
the desired characteristics of the material referred to in the paper.

Meeting of February i6th, 1894.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Twenty-eight persons present

On motion it was resolved that the proposed amendment of the
By-Laws be laid on the table.

On motion it was resolved that a committee of five be appointed
by the Chair to report on amendment of the By-Laws. The fol-
lowing persons were so appointed: Messrs. William G. De Witt,
Walter H. Mead, Horace W. Calef, Dr. Frank D. Skeel, Dr.
Edw. G. Love.

On motion it was resolved that the above committee be in-
structed that, if the By-Laws are not explicit on this subject, they

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 57

arrange for the plain statement therein that ladies are eligible to
resident membership in the Society.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Blood of AmphiHma,^o\x\At stained: by Frank D. Skeel.

2. Crystals of monobromide of Naphthalin: by Charles S.
Shultz.

Meeting of March 2D, 1894.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.
Eighteen persons present.

Mr. Francis R. Wardle was elected a Resident Member of the
Society.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Transverse section of hair of Whale: by Charles S.
Shultz.

2. Transverse section of hair from tail of Elephant: by
Charles S. Shultz.

3. Hair of Horse with eggs and larva of Bot-fly /;/ situ : by
Charles S. Shultz.

4. Polyzoon, Fredericella, showing statoblasts in situ: by
Henry C. Bennett.

5. Cuticle of Equisetuin, polarized: by Frank D. Skeel.

6. Photomicrographs : Transverse section of stipe of Fern ;
Transverse section of petiole of Floating Heart, Liiunanthemum ;
"Brush and Comb "of Ant; ScaleofEel; " Tongue " of Cricket;
Section of Chalcedony; Crystals of Magnesium Sulphate in bal-
sam; Crystals of Morphia Sulphate in balsam.

Dr. Skeel stated, concerning his exhibit, that the Japanese use
the stems of Eguisetum for polishing wood, and also the cuticle of
the same, stripped off and inserted in pieces of bamboo, for nail-
files, from one of which his specimen was taken.

Dr. Skeel also referred to the late interesting article by Mr.
Wenham in the English Mechanic on measuring the aperture of
lenses, illustrating his remarks by blackboard diagrams.

Meeting of March i6th, 1894.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.
Thirty-one persons present.

58 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

Messrs. Charles Du Vivier, George R. Du Vivier, and Mrs.
Maria O. Le Brun were elected Resident Members of the Society.

The committee appointed with reference to the death of Dr.
Samuel Lockwood reported, and the report was accepted and
adopted.

Dr. Carlton C Curtis read a paper entitled " A Contribution
to the History of the Formation of the Lichen Thallus." This
paper was illustrated by excellent camera drawings, and by ob-
jects under microscopes, as noted below.

On motion the thanks of the Society were tendered Dr. Curtis
for the paper so presented.

The Corresponding Secretary presented donations to the Cabi-
net and for distribution among the members from Mr. K. M.
Cunningham, of Mobile, Alabama : i. Chalk, polished, from
Waco, Texas, bank of Brazos River ; ?. Polished section of lime-
stone from Austm, Texas ; 3. Lignite from Mobile Bay, Alabama;
4. Complex crystalline sand from Whistler, Alabama ; 5. Green
glass slips for examination of the sand ; 6. Silicious bodies,
designated " Fhytolitharia.''

The donations were accompanied by the following communica-
tion from Mr. Cunningham, dated March 13th, 1894 :

" I forward to the Society a few specimens illustrating some
studies in micro-geology, and which I believe possess some inte-
rest microscopically.

" I. A prepared specimen illustrative of a portion of the creta-
ceous area of Texas. It is an indurated form of chalk found by
myself outcropping on the eastern bank of the Brazos River, at
Waco, Texas, the stratum underlying the town of Waco.

"Chalk is an earthy carbonate of lime, consisting almost en-
tirely of microscopic shells of foraminifera. There are several
special forms of chalk — as the soft, friable, and very white chalk
of commerce, derived especially from the celebrated chalk cliffs
of England ; and, again, as comprised in a very extensive area of
the cretaceous belt of the Southern States, notably in Tennessee,
Mississippi, and Alabama. I have been deputized by the State
Geologist to investigate and report upon the chalk area of the
latter State. And the interesting results of an examination of
chalk strata from some thirty different points in Alabama, en-
abled me to record in the State Report on the Cretaceous Rocks-

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 59

the occurrence of forty species of foraminifera, representing nine-
teen genera of the foraminifera of the chalk deposits of the globe.
These species were identified through the kindness of Anthony
Woodward, Ph.D., of New York City. For this purpose I pre-
pared two slides containing, arranged in lines, some one hundred
and twenty-five shells each.

" One face of the specimen of Waco chalk is polished in such
manner as to exhibit the sections of the various shells and spicular
particles, all of which may be seen under a one-quarter-inch lens.
By abrading the chalk with a brush while moist, thousands of the
perfect crystalline shells may be isolated and studied in their
integrity.

" 2. A section of limestone, polished on both sides, showing an
exceedingly rich aggregation of microscopic Rotaline shells of
one species, which in their transverse sections are concave on
both faces, similar to the assumed cross-section of a blood cor-
puscle. This limestone occurs as a stratified formation, and is
quarried at Austin, Texas, for the manufacture of lime, and for
constructive and monumental purposes.

"3. A specimen of lignite from the shore of Mobile Bay, two
miles south of the city, which throws light on the genesis of the
coal formations of the carboniferous period. I have already
recorded a comprehensive study of this stratum, which will be
referred to in the Report on the Tertiary of Alabama.

**The main feature of interest is that when large slabs of the
lignite were removed from the water they were as plastic as pot-
ter's clay, but they would also readily split into layers, which
exhibit the films of ferns and other vegetable impressions. In
drying, this lignite shrinks at least fifty per cent in bulk, but pre-
serves the vegetable impressions, which may be readily seen with
a low power.

" This small specimen represents the last phase of coal plant
deposition, and belongs just under the superficial or pleistocene
strata of the tertiary of Alabama, The stratum from which the
specimen was derived was heavily impregnated with ferric sul-
phide, containing myriads of minute golden-hued spherules of
pyrite, isolated in quantity by gravity and solution in water.

"4. Packets of a complex crystalline sand derived from the
superficial stratum largely capping the argillaceous strata of

-60 JOURNAL OF THE [April,

Mobile County. A full analytical study of the same has been
made for the Alabama Report on the Tertiary.

" The sand has a greater specific gravity than common silicious
sands. By the passage of a small magnet, crystalline grains of
magnetite and magnetic spherules may be isolated, and when a
portion of the sand is spread on a glass slip, and gently tapped
to reject all grains which do not adhere, many perfect crystals of
silex will be found, showing minute crystalline inclusions, gase-
ous or other vacuoles, and the characteristic colors of the true
gems when examined by polarized light. The use of the green
glass slips accompanying these packets differentiates the angles,
edges, apices, gaseous vacuoles, and minute crystalline inclusions
of these grains, in beautiful pink or rose-colored hues against
an emerald-green ground.

"5. A packet of curious silicious bodies, designated by Dr.
Ehrenberg as ' Phytolitharia,' to each of which he gave a specific
name in his ' Micro-Geologie,' as if they possessed the same
interest as the diatoms and rhizopods usually associated with
them.

" These are examined by spreading a thin layer in a dried state
under condensed surface illumination, when the characteristic
features of each will be noted. If mounted in balsam the stereo-
scopic character is lost, as all the cylinders, etc., appear flat and
of little interest. The differentiating power of the polariscope is
well shown on a balsam-mounted slide of these ' Phytolitharise.'
A few scattering grains of silicious sand and micaceous scales
respond to the polarizing power, glowing with prismatic colors,
but not one of all the various forms of ' Phytolitharia.' These
* Phytolitharite ' are derived from a stratum of swamp clay at
Whistler, Alabama, and also from a stratum of bluish plastic clay
containing a long series of plant and animal remains, i.e., diatoms,
rhizopods, spongilla spicules, plant capsules, and spores in endless
profusion."

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. The Alga as scraped from trees : by Carlton C Curtis.

2. Longitudinal section of young thallus : by Carlton C.
Curtis.

3. Longitudinal section of sporocarp : by Carlton C. Curtis.

l894-] NEW-YORK MECROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 61

4. Longitudinal section of apothecium : by Carlton C. Cur-
tis.

5. Section of Agate from basalt, Paterson, N. J. : by J. D.
Hyatt.

6. Section of Pitch Stone, Isle of Arran, Scotland : by J. D.
Hyatt.

7. Cinnabarite, cinnabar in chalcedony with native gold : by
J. D. Hyatt.

8. Transverse section of stem of Poison Ivy, Rhus toxicoden-
dron: by J. D. Hyatt.

9. Sections through head and thorax of House-Fly : by L.

RiEDERER.

10. Hemlock joist, 2X4 inches X 2 feet, from lintel of door of
outbuilding thirty-five years old, almost entirely eaten away by
our native large black ant, probably Campcnotus herciilaneiis L. : by
Frank D. Skeel.

Mr. Hyatt explained his exhibit of Rhus toxicodendron by means
of blackboard drawings, showing that this stem, when growing
unattached, has the pith in the centre ; but when attached to a
tree or wall, always has an eccentric growth, the pith lying near
the bark on the outer side, and the enlarged rings of growth lying
on the inner side, next the object of support, thus indicating that
nourishment is derived through the rootlets which cling to the
support.

The Microscope and Microscopical Methods. Part I. of
The Microscope and Histology. By Simon Henry Gage,
Associate Professor of Anatomy, Histology, and Embryology
in Cornell University. Fifth edition, rewritten, greatly
enlarged, and illustrated by 103 figures in the text. Ithaca,
N. Y. : Comstock Publishing Co., 1894. Pp. 165. Price
$1.50.

This work had its origin in the necessities of the class room. As stated in
the preface, "the aim has been to produce a book for beginners in micro-
scopy, such as the author himself felt sorely the need of when he began the
study." How well this object has been accomplished, during the evolution of
fifteen years to this present edition, is demonstrated with great satisfaction- to

62 JOURNAL OF THE N.-Y. MICROSCOPICAL SOCIEIY. [April, 1894.

the reader, as he examines the successive chapters with their thorough, clear,
and masterly exposition of the necessary successive steps in the knowledge of
the microscope and its applications. The book is one of the best of its kind :
a labor-saving implement to the beginner, in the class room or out ; and to the
amateur, who perhaps for years has been feeling his way and attempting in
various directions to invent methods of his own, an unspeakable boon in
condensing the experience of a host of workers, and bringing this so conve-
niently at hand where it can be laid hold of at once, as occasion requires.
Prof. Gage is to be congratulated on the able manner in which he has im-
proved and augmented the instruction in this volume.

The Biology of Ferns by the Collodion Method. By
George F. Atkinson, Ph.B., Associate Professor of Crypto-
gamic Botany in Cornell University. Part I. — Descriptive,
with 163 illustrations in the text. Part 11. — Methods. New
York : Macmillan & Co., 1894. Pp. 134. Price, $2.00.
In seven chapters of Part I. of this work the author, in condensed but lucid
and satisfactory manner, conducts the reader through the subject of the
biology of ferns under two main subcHs-isions — the gametophytic phase, or
the prothallus, with its archegonia, antheridia, and resulting fertilization ;
and the sporophytic phase, or that of the popularly known fern proper, from
embryo through the examination of stem, root, and frond to the fructification,
and occasional sporophytic budding, or production of bulbs. In the eighth
and concluding chapter of the same part is a short exposition of the structure
of the Ophioglosseas, introduced, as the author says, because they "present
excellent subjects for comparative study." Part II. is an exposition of the
technique of the collodion method of infiltration and embedding employed in
securing the preparations demonstrating and illustrating the successive steps
of Part I. The highest commendation of this collodion method is the state-
ment that it has produced the beautiful and accurate illustrations here dis- ■
played. The one hundred and sixty-three illustrations are all original,
chiefly by the author ; but the delicate and encouraging compliment of
accrediting each pupil as the preparator and draughtsman, when he has so
furnished an occasional illustration, is exceedingly refreshing in these days of
ordinarily free-hand appropriation of everything within reach considered as
advantageous for the occasion. The paper, presswork, and beautiful figures
illustrating the logically arranged and instructive text of this publication
combine to render it in every respect most admirable. The work is intended
primarily as a text book, a guide, instructor, and incentive in the class room
for those who have before them the coveted prize — " Ph.D." But it also
gently and invitingly opens the door of access, in view of many an amateur
outside the class room, to a department of examination and discovery among
the most fascinating in all the domain of botany.

JOURN. N.-Y. MIC. SOC, JULY, 1894,

PLATE 44.

THE LICHEN THALLUS.

Journal

OF THE

NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY

Vol. X. JULY, 1894. No. 3.

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE HISTORY OF THE
FORMATION OF THE LICHEN THALLUS.

BY CARLTON C. CURTIS.
(Jiead March i6ih^ 1894.)

About five months ago some material was brought into our
laboratory that proved to be an exceedingly early stage in the
development of the lichen thallus. The observations on, and il-
lustrations of, this condition and subsequent development that
have extended down to the time of writing are here presented, not
as any considerable addition to the subject of lichenology, but
because the study awakened much interest among the students,
and some points were made clearer than could be gathered from
the literature of the subject, and, as far as known, there are no

Explanation of Plate 44.

Fig. 1.— Filament of the fungus attacking an algal cell.

Fig. 2. — The subsequent development of the form shown in Fig. 1. The algal cell has
divided several times, and the hyphae have extended themselves to form a bushy
cluster.

Fig. 3.— a still older growth. The clusters are becoming covered above and below
•with a mass of filaments.

Fig. 4.— a longitudinal section through the young thallus. a, Upper medulla; 6,
gonidial or algal zone; c, lower medulla; d, rhizoids.

Fig. 5.— a longitudinal section through a sporocarp. a, The dense tissue of the stipe
— the lines are not intended to represent the structure; 6, the gonidia largely confined
to the periphery of the sporophore; c, hymenium— the dotted portion representing the
paraphyses projecting beyond the asci.

Fig. 6.— a longitudinal section of the apothecium. a, Paraphyses; 6, ascus with
spores; c, hypothecium— the hyphae anastomose more than is indicated; d, a small
gonidial group.

64 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

records of this early condition occurring in a state of nature.
For, since the time when lichens were styled aerial algae, down to
the time when Schwendener termed them autonomous, so much
of error was published that there can be no fear of augment-
ing this dark but suggestive page of botanical history. On the
other hand, the histological work of De Bary' and Schwendener,'
the analytical researches of Famintzin and Baranetzki,' and the
brilliant and successful synthetic labors of Rees,^ Treub," Bor-
net,^ and Stahl," from their thoroughness and scientific methods,
preclude the addition of material truth either to theory or facts
of the subject. And in our own day the ingenious investigations
of M. G. Bonnier' on the protonema of several mosses should be
included as v/orthy of mention with these latter scholars. Per-
haps no department of scientific research can present such a flood
of false observation and theory ; certainly none can show such
dogged resistance to the truth or more brilliant and scientific
work in its establishment. These early lichenologists, confining
themselves narrowly to their subject and unacquainted with its
biological relationship, compiled volumes, tomes, and libraries
totally ignorant of the real nature of the subject under discus-
sion. And to them came the truth like the awakening from a
dream. They could not at first believe that their work was all a
myth, and later would not. And so not till comparatively very
recent times, though demonstrated beyond peradventure of a
doubt by the histologist and physicist, has the truth been
accepted.

When first gathered the material bore a close resemblance to
Protococcus viridis Ag. as it often appears growing on trees and
stones in damp places. But under the glass it aroused the won-
der of all who saw it, none the less from its strange and un-
expected appearance than from the beauty and elegance of its
form. Here could be seen the white, almost hyaline mycelium
becoming excessively branched and forming bushy, spherical
masses of hyphae, in whose ultimate ramifications were held the
round, emerald-green algal cells (Plate 44, Fig. 2). Not yet
were the gonidia obscured by the filaments, and the branching
and method of growth were easily followed. In nearly every
group could be found one or more algal cells, somewhat removed
from the cluster, and showing clearly how they are seized by the

I894-J NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 65

hyphae. With the formation of each new cell either a branch
from the filament encircling the mother cell or from the mycelium
is put out to get possession of it. At the moment of union an
unmistakable quickening is manifest both in host and parasite.
The latter puts out, at a short distance from the alga, from one to
several branches that follow the main fibril and encircle the alga
in various windings (Fig. i). The alga greatly increases in size,
and the early growth often suggests a strong resemblance to the
fingers of a hand closing about a ball. The gonidia often attain
a diameter of twenty yu, averaging about nine /<, thus exceeding
the size of Protococcus viridis Ag. by about two /<. In the more
mature thallus the crowding and subsequent distortion give them
a somewhat smaller appearance. The activity of the fungal hy-
phce was apparently due to the food furnished by the algge. The
increase of the algae, however, seemed due rather to some stimu-
lus or irritation of the hyphae than to any food supplied to them.
In this early stage it cannot be doubted that the algae are often
removed some distance from the parent cells and become the
centres of new clusters, which in fact could be found in all stages
of growth, showing from one to many gonidia. These clusters by
their increase finally anastomose, forming a more or less entire
surface from which the characteristic thallus develops. That this
was not the usual method of extension will be seen below, and it
was also manifest from the numerous germinating spores that
often appeared in the clusters, and also from the tendency of the
free mycelium to turn back toward its cluster soon after its exit.
While the spore (Fig. 6) was the prevalent one, there also appeared
two other forms, some of which had germinated. Owing, how-
ever, to the entanglement of the filaments it was impossible to see
how extensive was the growth of the odd spores. And the ques-
tion arises whether the hyphae of various spores may enter into
the structure of a lichen, and the dominant one characterize the
resulting thallus. In looking at these clusters of filaments and
algae the thought often occurred that could Crombie have seen
them he would not have made so spirited and bitter an attack
upon the theory of Schwendener, nor would the latter have ap-
peared so highly colored or poetical to him.*

After the young symbionts became accustomed to their new
surroundings in the laboratory there soon was manifest the

'66 JOURNAL OF THE [July.

■characteristic structure of the lichen. The groups became cov-
ered above with a very dense growth of hyphje ; below, the my-
celium kept pace and usually exceeded the growth above, but at
the sides rarely did any considerable thickening of the filaments
occur. So there was always room, not at the top, but at the sides
for the extension of the mycelium with its captured cells. This
new lateral extension would be woven over, almost as soon as
formed, by the dorsal and ventral hyphal layers. The divisions
and growth of the algae were very rapid in the early stages, and this
growth continued at the margins ; but as the hyphae, in the ex-
tension of the thallus, entangled them more and more in a dense
mass, their activity lessened and finally stopped through the crowd-
ing of the surrounding filaments. It was apparent that division
only ceased when all the space available to the algae had been
occupied. And so finally the form of the algae was concealed
by the mat of hyphae above, through whose semi-transparent
walls the color still shone. On the under side the thickened
mass shut out cells and color alike, thus presenting a whitened
surface. From this under side extended numerous strands of the
mycelium, rhizoids, into the substratum. These roots were con-
fined for the most part to the median and especially to the distal
portions of the thallus, and were of the nature of holdfasts. A
cross-section of the thallus (Fig. 4) now shows the hyphee so
closely woven together above as to render the form of the indi-
vidual fibrils almost indistinguishable. Beneath are the crowded
gonidia, forming a well-marked zone in which the original centres
of growth are still indicated by group-like masses of alga, though
this latter arrangement is often obliterated by the broadening of
the clusters and their consequent union. It will be noticed that
scattered algal cells frequently appear in the ventral medulla and
but very rarely in the dorsal. Thus again is it manifest that the
transportation of the gonidial cells attendant upon growth de-
pends upon their seizure by, and subsequent growth of, one of the
hyphae. The looseness of the subgonidial layer permits at many
places of such a limited growth, while above there is rarely op-
portunity for a fibril with its host to crowd through. Mention
should be made here of an exception to this rule. The gonidial
zone occasionally extends quite to the upper surface of the thal-
lus. At such places the unimpeded algae may be carried out by

1894] NEW-YORK ISIICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 67

the hyphse, forming an irregularity or projection upon the sur-
face, or a branch of the thallus may start from such a point. In
isome sections there appeared connected with this feature small
bundles of gonidia and hyphae not unlike soredes. These may
have been simply the beginnings of further growth. A somevvhat
similar growth appears on the sporophore referred to below. The
peculiar configuration of the thallus that characterizes both the
margin and surface of the mature lichen seems to be largely due to
the behavior of the mycelium in blocking the growth of the goni-
dia with mats of filaments. This interposition of dense felts at
various places on the margins results in a very irregular, almost
ragged, outline of the thallus. I could not always satisfy myself
that the lobing, particularly in the young thallus, was brought
about in this manner ; but its frequent observation leaves little
room for doubt that the cause of the peculiar form of growth is
as above stated.

The sporocarp appears to arise from a lifting up of the thallus,
which, growing into a tubular mass, forms the receptaculum.
Though diligent search was made for the archicarp in all these
early stages of growth, not the slightest evidence of it could be
found. Nor did any section show any trace of or give indication
of sexuality. 'I he hypothecium and paraphyses could be recog-
nized at an early age, especially the latter, which appeared about
as soon as there was any outward evidence of the sporocarp.
The asci appeared much later, and in fact could not be recog-
nized till the hymenium was developed and began to show its
characteristic color. In this state the ascogenous hyphse could
not be traced into the subhymenial layer, and, in truth, had the
same appearance as the filaments generating the paraphyses.
The growth of the asci extended over a considerable period,
new sacs appearing beside those apparently empty. The apo-
thecia are spherical, surmounting the stipe like a cape, and of a
brown color from the closely packed filaments of the hymenium.
The receptaculum shows a marked variance in its structure from
that of the thallus. As mentioned above, it is cylindrical, of
especially dense tissue, the hollow central portion being traversed
by irregular strands from the periphery. But, unlike the thallus,
the gonidial layer is largely developed upon the outside. As
soon as the filaments of the medulla begin to lift up to form the

68 JOURNAL OF THE [J uly,

Stipe, the algae are carried through to the outer surface and follow
in luxuriant growth its upward course. Only a comparatively
few scattering clusters occur in the discocarp and cavities and
tissue of the stipe. On the periphery of the receptaculum, how-
ever, there is an unusual growth of algae, loosely bound together,
and sparingly covered by the filaments. Not a little attention
was given to this peculiar development. The ease with which
they could be separated, and the simplicity of their growth, readily
suggested that they might be means of propagation, though the
significance of their position on the stipe rather than on the thal-
lus was not manifest. I can see only one explanation of this
distribution of the gonidia — namely, that the algae are massed
along the stipe, exposed directly to the atmosphere, unrestrained
in their growth by the pressure of a medulla, in order that they
may be able to meet with an adequate food supply the heavy
demands made upon their constructive metabolism by the asco-
genous hyphse. This appears to be an excellent illustration in
vegetable physiology of adaptation to economic ends. And this
seems the more probable as the rhizoids are the last stage in the
reduction of root forms. Although the algee are in a limited de-
gree histological factors of the thallus, being dependent upon the
fungi, it may be, for their ash constituents, nevertheless it is more
in keeping with the nature and behavior of lichens to look upon
the fungus simply as an obligate parasite and the alga as a host.
And then again it was often observed that on the old sporophores
the gonidial bundles began to grow after the manner first de-
scribed, and at times quite covered the stipe with small thalli. This
secondary growth on the receptaculum was not observed while
the asci were still developing.

The results of the consortism of these two plants is particularly
worthy of note. On the one hand, the fungus, delicate, a sapro-
phyte, fond of darkness and dampness, and the alga, dependent
upon shade and moisture, by their commensalism produce a plant
independent of surroundings and organic substratum, capable of
living upon crystalline rock or bark of tree or earth, enduring the
extremes of heat and cold, neither dependent upon rain nor de-
stroyed by drought. And this complete change of habit is not so
striking as the behavior of these two lowly plants as symbionts.
They at once catch the spirit that governs all higher vegetable

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 69

life, and whatever form they make take, whether foliaceous, fru-
ticose, or crustaceous, they are always actuated by a principle
new to their nature — the exposure of the chlorophyll to the light
and atmosphere as much as possible. How important a force,
then, is this commensalism ! What part may it not have taken,
fostered by natural selection, in the separation of forms? The
behavior of the protonema of mosses and fungi ; the transforma-
tion by algas of some of the simpler animals ' to forms widely differ-
ent and independent of organic food absorption; the easy passage
of the algae to purely histological factors in the anatomy of the
lichens — all suggest that this force of commensalism may have
played a more important role and been a more potent factor in
the determination of species than is ascribed to it. I am greatly
indebted to Mr. A. E. Anderson for the greater part of the draw-
ings. I also wish to acknowledge the valuable advice and assist-
ance of Prof. N. L. Britton in the prosecution of the research
work.

1. De Bary: Ueber die Erscheinung der Symbiose.

2. ScHWENDENER : Ueber den Bau und das Wachsthum des Flechten-
Thallus, etc.

3. Famintzin UND Baranetzki: Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte d. Gonidien
und Zoosporenbildung der Flechten.

4. Bornet : Recherches sur les Gonidies des Lichens.

5. Rees : Ueber die Natur der Flechten.

6. Stahl : Beitrage zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Flechten.

7. BOMNIER : Germination des Lichens sur les Protonemas des Mousses.

8. KoRBER : Zur Abwehr der Schwendener-Bornet'schen Flechtentheorie.
g. Brandt : Ueber das Zusammenleben von Thieren und Algen.

10. Treub : Lichencultur.

70 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

NOTES ON THE STAINING OF CELLULOSE.

BY E. G. LOVE, PH.D.
{_Read April loth, 1894.)

Cellulose forms the basis of vegetable tissues, and also occurs
to a slight extent in animal membranes. It is composed of car-
bon, hydrogen, and oxygen, and its composition is the same as
that of starch.

In chemistry the words cellulose and lignin are often used as
synonymous terms. It is preferable, however, to restrict the
word lignin, as is commonly done in microscopy, to those older
growths of the cell usually known as lignified or woody tissue, in
which the original cell has received secondary deposits, and has
as a whole been more or less changed in composition and reac-
tions from cellulose.

Cellulose as it occurs in plant structures presents considerable
variety in physical properties. Sometimes it is soft, as in the
young plant, and again it is quite dense. This fact accounts for
the varying results obtained when cellulose is subjected to the
action of staining liquids.

The staining of young and soft cellular tissue presents no
special difficulties, but when the cellulose increases in density the
difficulty is increased ; and this is true whether the cellulose is in
a nearly pure condition, as in the cotton fibre, or in the modified
condition of lignin or woody fibre. Stains which readily attack
young cellulose tissue have practically no effect upon it in its
maturer form.

Some time ago I had occasion to make a series of tests on the
comparative value of several stains in the staining of cellulose and
lignin as found in textile and woody fibres ; and as the informa-
tion on this subject in the books is very limited, it was thought
that the matter might be of sufficient interest to bring some of the
results before the Society.

It is of course important, in the staining of fibres for microscopic
examination, that they shall take the stain uniformly. In com-

1894] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 71

mercially dyed fabrics this will often be found to have been done
very imperfectly. Thus a piece of Turkey red appears in the
piece to be well dyed, and practically it is ; but when examined
microscopically it will be found that the individual fibres have
taken the dye very unevenly. This is often the case with fabrics,
especially cotton and linen, which have been dyed in the piece ;
whereas if the fibre is dyed before weaving, as in the ginghams,
the result on the individual fibres is more uniform.

A mordant is a substance which has an affinity for both organic
tissues and coloring matters, and which by virtue of this property
is employed in dyeing to fix the color upon the tissue.

The most common mordant in staining microscopic prepara-
tions is alum, a solution of which is usually mixed with the stain
previous to its application. Other substances, as dilute solutions
of organic and mineral acids, are sometimes used under the name
of "fixers." Their action is seldom that of a true mordant, their
efficiency, when they possess any, being confined to some decom-
position of the coloring matter or to some action upon the tissue
itself.

In staining animal and vegetable sections some stains require a
mordant, while others do not. Thus hasmatoxylin, or the stain-
ing principle of logwood, is often used without a mordant, while
most of the carmine stains require one.

The staining of tissues may be effected in four ways. First,
when the stain has sufficient affinity for the tissue to be retained
by it without the intervention of any outside agent. Second,,
when the stain and mordant are mixed and applied to the tis-
sue in one solution. These two are the simplest and easiest
methods of staining. Third, when the tissue is first immersed in
the staining liquid and then transferred to some other liquid which
shall fix the color upon the tissue. Fourth, when the tissue is
first impregnated with the mordant, or fixing agent, and then im-
mersed in the stain. The last method is the one usually followed
in commercial dyeing establishments, and is to be recommended
in the staining of microscopical preparations which do not readily
take the stain.

It is easy to see that, in substances which are difficult to stain,
there is less chance of effecting the object when the mordant and
stain are both presented to the object at the same time, than when

72 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

it is first impregnated with the mordant and then brought into con-
tact with the stain. The tests which I have made, and the speci-
mens which are here for examination, amply prove this. They in-
clude a large number of specimens illustrating the action of the
different stains upon cotton and linen fabrics, and in some cases
upon woody fibres also. Some specimens show the effect of the
stains when used alone, while others show the effect of the same
stains when used in connection with different mordants. The
mounted preparations placed under the several microscopes show
the microscopic appearance of some typical specimens of these
stained fibres.

Grenacher's Carmine is a solution of carmine in alum, which one
authority states will stain cellulose a fine red, but does not stain
lignified or suberized tissues. This clearly refers to cellulose as
it occurs in soft vegetable tissues, and the same doubtless applies
to the staining of cellulose as described in works on the subject.
Cotton and linen fibres which were immersed in this stain for
twelve hours and washed in water had only a slight reddish tint.
The fibres were then immersed in the stain for fifty-four hours
with no better result.

Thiersch's Carmine is a solution of carmine with oxalic acid.
Cotton fibre was immersed in this stain for eighteen hours and
washed. It had a dull rose color, which was very faint when seen
in individual fibres as in the mounted preparation.

Borax Carmine. — The rssult with this stain both upon cotton
and linen fibres was about the same as with Grenadier's carmine.
Oxalic acid was used as a "fixing" agent.

Logwood and Brazilwood. — In the tests which were made with
these dyes I used a tincture obtained by soaking the chips in
strong alcohol, and filtering when necessary.

As already stated, hrematoxylin, or logwood stain, can often be
used without a mordant in the staining of vegetable sections, but
when applied to cellulose fibres it is almost without action.

A common preparation of haematoxylin for staining purposes is
its solution with alum. This is claimed to stain both cellulose
and lignified tissue, but not suberin. When cotton fibre is
immersed in this solution for four hours it is very fairly stained,
and when mounted in balsam has a light blue color. If the fibre

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 73

is first mordanted and then stained, almost any depth of color can
be obtained.

The mordants tried were alum, acetate of alumina, sulphate of
copper, and acetate of copper. These were used in strong solutions.

'1 he solution of acetate of alumina is readily prepared by
adding a solution of acetate of lead to one of alum (leaving the
alum slightly in excess), and filtering.

The fibre was soaked in the mordant for about an hour, the
excess squeezed out, and the fibre then immersed in the alcoholic
solution of the dye-wood for an hour or longer as the case
required.

The uniform staining of the fibre is facilitated by moving it
about while in the mordanting and in the staining solutions.

As will be seen from the specimens, there is practically little
difference between the results obtained with the different mor-
dants and logwood. Alum and acetate of alumina give a purple
shade, while the copper mordants give a decided blue. With
brazilwood the fibres mordanted with alum are not so deeply
stained as when the other mordants are employed.

Of the four mordants tried the preference must be given to the
acetates of alumina and copper. This accords with the general
practice in dyeing establishments. The reason is that the ace-
tates are less stable compounds than the sulphates, and conse-
quently yield the bases, alumina and copper oxide, more readily
to the fibre.

The specimens of cotton fibre dyed with brazilwood illustrate
this very clearly, those mordanted with the acetates being of a
much deeper shade than those in which the sulphates were used.

For lignified fibres there is no better stain than logwood, with
the previous mordanting of the fibre. With the mordant and
stain combined in one solution the result was not satisfactory,
some fibres being fairly well stained while others were not stained
at all.

The mordants already mentioned were tried on a variety of
woody fibres with both logwood and brazilwood, but I submit for
your examination only those of spruce and poplar. It will be
seen from the specimens and slides that the fibres have taken the
stain very uniformly.

Anilm Stains. — Satisfactory results in staining cellulose and

74 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

lignified fibres can be obtained by means of the anilin colors.
In my experience, however, the staining of lignified fibres is not
in all cases as uniform as is desirable.

When applied without a mordant, the fibre is only slightly
stained, and a mordant is therefore necessary in order to obtain a
stain sufficiently deep and permanent.

In some cases this may be effected by staining first and then
mordanting, but, as already stated, it is better in the staining of
fibres to reverse this order and apply the mordant first. In this
way the staining may be effected in less time and the fibre be
more deeply stained.

The method of mordanting the fibre was as follows : It was
first immersed in a ten per cent solution of tannic acid for about
an hour, the excess squeezed out, then placed in a one per cent
solution of stannate of soda for about thirty minutes, transferred
to water acidulated with sulphuric acid for a moment, washed in
water, and placed in the stain for fifteen to thirty minutes, and
finally well washed. The times here given for the action of the
different solutions can be shortened in many cases.

A solution of tartar emetic, or tartrate of antimony and potash,
was substituted in some experiments for the stannate of soda, but
I think the latter is to be preferred for the reason that the tartrate
solution soon develops fungous growths.

The list of anilin colors available for staining purposes is quite
a long one. I have tried some six or eight of these, but will refer
to only four, all of which have given good results and furnish all
needed variety in c?olor.

These stains were tried with cotton, linen, and spruce fibres^
and the mixed fibre obtained from a sample of filter paper, and
the specimens and slides here show the results obtained.

Fuchsin. — This was used in an aqueous solution containing
0.25 gramme in 100 c.c. of water.

I may mention parenthetically that this stain when properly
applied is the best material I have found for staining wool fibres
so as to bring out distinctly the structure of the scales. A slide
containing some of these stained fibres will be found under one
of the microscopes.

Hofmanns Violet. — This was used in a strong alcoholic solu-
tion. Unmordanted cotton fibre is stained a very light blue,

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 75

which when mounted for the microscope appears quite colorless.
The fibre, when mordanted in the manner described, takes a deep
blue.

Methyl Green — This is a favorite stain, especially for vegetable
sections, and it is very effective in double staining. When
applied to fibres, whether of pure cellulose or of lignin, it produces
a deep green if the fibre has been mordanted before staining,
while a light green is produced when the order of stain and
mordant is reversed. It was applied in a strong aqueous solution.

Paris Violet. — This is a strong staining medium, readily im-
parting its color to almost all fibres, but requiring thorough mor-
danting to render it permanent.

It was used in a concentrated aqueous solution. As will be
seen from the specimens, the result is a decided violet, differing
in this respect from the bluer shade obtained with Hofmann's
violet.

LIST OF ILLUSTRATING SPECIMENS,
Where stain and mordant were applied separately, the former is italicized.

Cotton fibre, stained with Grenacher's carmine.

Linen " " " " "

Cotton " " " Thiersch's "

" " '■ " borax "

Linen " " " " "

Cotton " " " alum and logwood in one solution.

" " " " alum and /t7^W(7^a' in separate solutions.

" " " " acetate of alumina and logwood,

" " " " sulphate of copper and /iT^w^^t/.

" " " " acetate of copper and /c^K'^^'fl'.

Linen "

Cotton " " " alum and brazilwood,

" " " " acetate of alumina and (5;'«sz7wO(?flf.

" " " " sulphate of copper and brazilwood.

" " " " acetate of copper and 3razz7wc£'(/.

Spruce " " " alum and logwood.

" " " " acetate of alumina and logtvood,

" " " " acetate of copper and logxvood.

Poplar " " '■ alum and logwood.

" " " " acetate of alumina and logwood.

" " " " acetate of copper and logwood.

Spruce " " " alum and brazilwood.

" " " " acetate of alumina and brazilwood.

Poplar " " " alum and brazilwood.

76

JOURNAL OF THE

[July>

Poplar fibre,
Cotton

Linen
Cotton

Linen

Cotton

Linen
Spruce

Fibre of fil-
ter paper.

stained with acetate of alumina and brazihoood.

" " fuchsin and tannic acid and tartar emetic.

" " tannic acid and stannate of soda and ywir/^jiw.

" " fuchsin and tannic acid and tartar emetic.

" " tannic acid and stannate of soda and ywif/w/w.

" " HofmanrCs violet, no mordant.

" " tannic acid and stannate of soda and Hofmann' s

violet,

" *' methyl green, no mordant.

" " methyl green and tannic acid and tartar emetic.

" " tannic acid and stannate of soda and wf//y/^^^ri?^«.

" " /«^/'/i!j'/^;-^,?« and tannic acid and tartar emetic.

" " tannic acid and stannate of soda and methyl green.

" " tannic acid and tartar emetic and Paris violet.

" " tannic acid and stannate of soda and Paris violet.

" " " " " " " z.n6. fuchsin.

" " " " " " " SiXiA methyl green.

" " " " " " " and Paris violet.

" " " " " " " SinA fuchsin.

" " " " u " <« znd methylgreen.

" " " " " " " and Paris violet.

PROCEEDINGS.
Meeting of April 6th, 1894,

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Forty-six persons present.

A communication was presented from the Secretary of the
Scientific Alliance, asking the concurrence of the Society in an
application to the postal authorities to reduce the postage on
mailable scientific specimens, and also in requesting scientific
societies in foreign lands to act in the same matter at the ap-
proaching postal union.

The Board of Directors unanimously resolved on such concur-
rence.

Mr. Stephen Helm addressed the Society on '' Marine Life.'^
This address, being introductory to an intended series on this
subject, was illustrated by numerous enlarged diagrams and
dried specimens. •

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 77

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Section of chalcedony : by J. D. Hyatt.

2. Male and female Copepods from Wood^s Holl, Mass. : by
H. W. Calef.

3. Young of Limulns from Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y. : by
Mrs. M. O. Le Brun.

4. Hydroid form of Obelia coiiimisuralis from Cold Spring
Harbor, N. Y. : by Mrs. M. O. Le Brun.

5. Sertularian from Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y. : by Mrs, M.
0. Le Brun.

6. Globigerina from "Challenger Expedition'' soundings,
1,450 fathoms : by James Walker.

7. Male and female forms of pond life from Crotona Park,
N. Y. : by F. W. Leggett.

Annual Exhibition, April 17TH, 1894.

The Fifteenth Annual Exhibition of the Society was held at
the American Museum of Natural History, Central Park, New
York City, on the evening of April 17th, 1894.

Objects and apparatus, as noted in the programme bslow, were
displayed in the halls of the second floor of the Museum. At 9
o'clock Dr. Edw. G. Love, in the main lecture room, gave an ex-
planation of numerous projections of photomicrographs upon
the screen. It was estimated that about two thousand persons
were present at the exhibition.

EXHIBITS.

1. Volvox Globator, living ; these hollow vegetable spheres
seen in active rotary motion, caused by innumerable cilia
arranged upon the surface of the globe : by Charles S..
Shultz.

2. Fossil Coal, section from Bowling-on-the-Clyde, Scotland.
From its appearance it is undoubtedly a portion of a Stigmaria
plant retaining its original cell structure : by Charles S.
Shultz.

3. Arranged Group of Diatoms forming Pleurosigma Rosette,
130 forms : by E. A. Schultze.

4. Tongue, Odontophore, of Snail : by J. D. Hyatt.

78 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

5. Grappling-hook Spicules of Sponge, Hyalonema : by J. D.
Hyatt.

6. Atacamite {Chloride of Copper) : by J. W. Metcalf, M.D.

7. Ruby Copper from Morenci, Arizona, shown with an
aluminium microscope, weight two pounds. Stage can be
lowered to the base to allow use of low-power objectives in
searching over large mineral specimens : by Prof. Wallace
GooLD Levison.

8. Circulation of Protoplasm {Cyclosis) in the water plant Nitel-
la : by H. S. Woodman.

9. Section of Human Intestine from a Case of Arsenical
Poisoning : by J. A. Gottlieb, A.M., M.D.

10. Longitudinal Section of the Cells of the Endosperm of
Ivory Nut, Phytelephas viacrocarpa Ruiz and Pavon, shown with
polarized light, magnified 250 diameters : by Rev. J. L. Zabris-

KIE.

11. 12. Two Slides of Blood of Amphiuma stained by differ-
ent methods. In the Amphiuma, as in all amphibia, the blood
corpuscles are nucleated and of enormous size compared with
those of human blood : by F. D. Skeel, M.D.

13. Fresh Water Shrimp, Gammanis pulex, by polarized light :
by William Wales.

14. Tooth of Fossil Fish in Coal : by Frederick Kato.

15. Eggs of Umbre Moth : by C. H. Denison.

16. Skin of Sole, by polarized light : by F. Collingwood.

17. Calamine (zinc silicate) from Franklin Furnace, N. J.,
by polarized light : by J. W. Freckelton.

18. Arranged groups of Diatoms : by George H. Blake.

19. Head of Tapeworm, Tania Solium, showing the Rostel-
lum and Suckers : by L. Schoney, M.D.

20. Trichina Spiralis, encysted in human tissue : by Thomas
S. Nedham.

21. Pond Life : by W. J. Lloyd.

22. Six Sections of Serpentines' from different localities, shown
on automatic revolving stage by polarized light : by James
Walker.

23. Polycistina from Barbadoes Earth, illuminated by parabola:
by James Walker.

24. Section of Bud of Lily : by Horace W. Calef.

'l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 79

25. Opal from Australia: by George E. Ashby.

26. Tillandsia {Hanging Moss) : by F. W. Leggett.

27. Young Spiders : by W. D. Macdonald.

28. Transverse Section of Optic Nerve of Human Infant : by
William Beutenmuller.

29. Transverse Section of Stomach of Frog : by William
Beutenmuller.

30. Poison of Viperine Snakes : by Raymond Ditmars.

31. Vinegar Eels, living : by A. Beutenmuller.

32. Palm Leaf, transverse section : by Anthony Woodward,
Ph.D.

33. Advertisements, Travelling in Olden Time : by Anthony
Woodward, Ph.D.

34. Plasmodium of one of the Myxomycetes : by William
Craig.

35. A living Diatom, BacUlaria paradoxa : by Capt. O. H.
Wilson.

36. A New Pond Fishing Outfit for catching Pond Life : by
Capt. O. H. Wilson.

37-39. Etchings of Steel, showing structure : by P. H. Dud-
ley and Thomas B. Briggs.

37. Manganese Steel for Car Wheels.

38. A 0.60^ Carbon, with o.i8^ Silicon, for Steel Rails.

39. A 0.50^ Carbon, with 0.15^ Silicon, for Steel Rails.

40. Crystals of Silver precipitated on Copper from the Nitrate :
by Michel M. Le Brun.

41. Transverse Section of Yellow Water Lily, Niiphar advena :
by Maria O. Le Brun.

42. Crystals of Cinnabar in Chalcedony (opaque) : by Artis
H. Ehrman.

43. Young Sea Horse, Hippocainpus Hudsonius, born in the
Aquarium, ten days old : by W. E. Damon.

43A. Suction Cups from the Arms of the Devilfish {Archi-
teuthis princeps), showing the serrated, saw-like edge with which
the animal fastens itself to its prey : by W. E. Damon.

44. Butterfly's Wing, showing arrangement of Scales. Magni-
fied one hundred times : by Walter H. Mead.

45. Circulation of Blood in Tadpole of Newt : by A. D. Balen.

46. 47. Pond Life : by Stephen Helm.

80 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

48. Mounted Specimen of Larval Sea Urchin, Arbacia punctu-
lata, stained with haemacalcium : by Ernest V. Hubbard.

49. Older Larvae and Ova in Early Segmentation Stages,
preserved in Alcohol : by Ernest V. Hubbard.

50-53, Microphotographs, selected : by Sereno N. Ayres.
54-58. Animal and Vegetable Fibres, Wool, Silk, Linen, and
Cotton : by E. G. Love, Ph.D.

59-61. Studies of Utricularia : by C. L. Pollard.

59. Mature Plant.

60. Slide showing the modified leaf forming a bladder-

like trap for catching minute animals.

61. Slide showing the organs of digestion.

62-63. Anatomy of the Stem of Polygonum : by John K.
Small.

62. Longitudinal radial section of Polygonum Persicaria.

63. Transverse section of Polygonum aviculare.

64-65. Histological Features of Biitttieria fertilis : by T. H»
Kearney, Jr.

64. Section of pericarp of the seed.

65. Transverse section of the seed.
66-69. Study of Nitella : by A. E. Anderson.

66. Growing plant.

67. Slide showing antheridium and archegonium.

68. Slide showing manubrium, capitulum, antheridial fila-

ments, antherozoids, etc.

69. Slide showing oospore and pericarp.

70-71. I. Formative Stages of the Thallus of Cladonia mitrida :
by Carlton C. Curtis, Ph.D.

2. Phegopteris Phegopteris : illustration of the differ-
entiation of the elements of the leaf and the optical
penetration that may be secured in histological
work.

72. Cuprite (Oxide of Copper) : by H. Fincke.

73. Gold Ore : by H. Fincke.

74. Arranged Groups of Diatoms : by H. Fincke.

75. Microphotograph, the Descent from the Cross : by Hr
Fincke.

76. Diamond Beetle : by H. Fincke.

77. Human Retina : by H. Fincke.

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

78. Triceratium Trifoliatum. Diatom from Lloyd's Neck,
L. I. This diatom has never been found except at Wellington,
New Zealand : by Heinrich Ries.

79. Melosira Granulata. Diatom Ehr , Ralf's cretaceous clay,
from Glen Cove, L. I. : by Heinrich Ries.

80. Transverse Section of the Head of Embryo Garter Snake,
Eutania Sirtalis : by Ludwig Riederer.

81. Section of Head of Honey-Bee, Apis mellifica : by Lud-
wig Riederer.

82. Sagittal Section of Abdomen of an Ichneuman-Fly, Cryp-
tus Samice : by Ludwig Riederer.

83. Sagittal Section of Abdomen of a Dragon-Fly, Libellula
semifasciata : by Ludwig Riederer.

84. Microtome, manufactured by Aug. Becker, Gottingen^.
Germany : by Ludwig Riederer.

85. Selections of Serial Sections : by Ludwig Riederer.

86. Exuviated Cuticle from De Kay's Brown Snake, Storeria
Dekay j showing cornea, scales, etc. : by Henry C. Bennett,

87. Insect Scales, arranged in form of a Vase of Flowers : by
G. S. Woolman.

^^. Proboscis of Blow-Fly : by G. S. Wooi,man.

89. Crystals of Copper : by G. S. Woolman.

90. Head of Mosquito, male : by G. S. Woolman.

91. Saw of the Rose Saw-Fly : by G. S. Woolman.

92. Foot of Spider : by G. S. Woolman.

93. Circulation of Blood in a Frog's Foot : by Joseph C.
Thompson, F.R.M.S.

94. Pond Life : by Joseph C. Thompson, F.R.M.S.

Alcove A.

Six Photomicrographs, selected, taken by the late Gen. Wood-
Avard about twenty years ago : by George H. Blake.

Alcove Q.

1. Tongue of Butterfly : by William Krafft.

2. Hypopus Muscarum, parasitic on flies : by William
Krafft.

3. Calcareous Corpuscles, from Cucumaria pentactes, shown
with polarized light : by William Krafft.

82 journal' of the [July,

4. Asparagine, shown with polarized light : by William
Krafft.

5. Pond Life, consisting of Hydras, etc.: by G. Duruv.

6. Collection of Designs : by G. Dupuy.

Alcove R.

1. Spider's Foot, illustrated by an accompanying photograph:
by P. Lyons.

2. Specimens to be used for Microscopic Mounting (animal
and mineral) : by P. Lyons.

3. Sectioned Specimens ; after having been treated and sec-
tioned with microtome ; and minerals ground : by E. J. Rie-

DERER.

4. Specimens under Microscope, polarized light, and also top-
light for mineral and naked-eye drawing : by E. J. Riederer.

5. Drawings of Microscopic Objects by the use of Zeiss' Camera
Lucida : by G. W. Kosmak.

6. Camera illustrating Process of Photographing Microscopic
Objects with Use of the Microscope : by G. W. Kosmak.

7. Thyroid Gland, illustrated by charts and drawings : by W.
W. Boyd, Jr.

8. Human Lung, sectioned with Microtome : by E. Gold-

BACHER.

Alcove S.

The Frog and the Fern. Two types of animal and plant life, to
illustrate the similarities and differences between these two great
divisions or kingdoms of animated nature. The gross and minute
structure of each will be examined and explained by charts, mi-
croscopic preparations and dissections, with special attention to
nutritive and respiratory processes, and the general development
of both types : by George William Kosmak.

Meeting of April 2oth, 1894.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.
Twenty persons present.

Mrs. Virginia B. Gibbs was elected a Resident Member of the
Society.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY, 83

The Committee on Annual Exhibition presented its report, the
report was adopted, and the committee was discharged with
thanks.

On motion the thanks of the Society were tendered to those
who, although not members of the Society, exhibited specimens
and apparatus at the late Annual Exhibition.

On motion the thanks of the Society were tendered President
Morris K. Jesup and the members of the Board of Trustees of
the American Museum of Natural History for their kindness in
granting the use of the halls of the Museum, and to Mr. William
Wallace, superintendent of the buildings, and his assistants, for
their kind offices on the occasion of the late Annual Exhibition.

Dr. Edw. G. Love read a paper entitled " Notes on the Stain-
ing of Cellulose." This paper, published in this number of the
Journal, was illustrated by the exhibition of many bottles of
stains ; by many macroscopic samples of stained fibres (see con-
clusion of the published article) ; and by eight slides of mounted
''icuned fibres under microscopes, as noted below.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

r. Linen fibre ; stained, acetate of alumina and logwood.

2. Linen fibre ; stained ; mordant, tannic acid and stannate
of soda ; stains, fuchsin, Paris violet, and methyl green.

3. Cotton fibre ; stained, acetate of copper and logwood.

4. Cotton fibre ; stained, acetate of alumina and brazilwood.

5. Cotton fibre ; stained; mordant, tannic acid and stannate of
soda ; stains, fuchsin, Paris violet, and methyl green.

6. Cotton fabric, Turkey red.

7. Wool, silk, cotton and linen ; mordant, tannic acid and
stannate of soda ; stains, fuchsin, Paris violet, and methyl green,

8. Poplar fibre ; stained, acetate of copper and logwood. Ex-
hibits Nos. 1-8 by Edw. G. Love,

9. Living colony of Megalotrocha: by James Walker.

10. Living colony of Melicerta rlngens : by James Walker.
Mr, Walker stated that the water and mud supplying the colony

of Melicerta were collected six weeks since and were placed in
glass battery jars. The water of this particular jar was changed
after four days. He lately found fifty colonies of Melicerta at-
tached to the sides of the jar ; but four days previously he could

84 JOURNAL OF THE [July,

find none. These specimens built their tubes with remarkable
rapidity. Large aquatic worms infested all the colonies, writhing
amid the bases of the tubes, and continually startling the rotifers
to contraction, as could be seen under the microscope.

Meeting of May 4Th, 1894.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Sixteen persons present.

Mr. James C. Gregory was elected a Resident Member of the
Society.

The Recording Secretary read a communication from the
Council of the Scientific Alliance requesting the concurrence of
the Society in the arrangement of a co-operative course of ten
lectures, to be delivered at the American Museum of Natural
History or the Cooper Union Building. On motion such concur-
rence was granted.

The Recording Secretary read a communication from the Citi-
zens Committee of Brooklyn on Entertainment of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science, inviting the Society
to attend the receptions, meetings, and excursions of the Associ-
ation. On motion the invitation of the Citizens Committee was
accepted with thanks.

Mr. James Walker reported for the Committee on Uniform
Cases, Drawers, Trays, and Labels, and the report was accepted
and adopted.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Rare living form of Hydra with rudimentary tentacles : by
Henry C. Bennett.

2. Living Flumatella, developed from statoblast in aquarium :
by James Walker.

3. Living Fredericella from Croton water : by A. D. Balen.

4. Section of Labradorite : by George E. Ashby.

From the Society's Cabinet.

5. Sunstone : aventurine feldspar, internal reddish, fire-like
reflection from disseminated crystals of hematite or gothite,

6. Aventurine, artificial ; glass mixed with filings of copper.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 85

7. Hypersthene ; silicate of magnesia containing iron.

8. Oolite from India.

9. Oolitic sand from Great Salt Lake.

Mr. Ashby said of his exhibit of Labradorite : " The play of
colors, especially remarkable in much Labradorite, indicates,
according to Reusch, the existence of a cleavage structure of
extreme delicacy, transverse to the median or brachydiagonal
section. The play of color appears to be that of thin plates ;
yet the linings of what he regards as a cleavage system appear to
be of indistinguishable minuteness ; and although the existence
of thin plates can hardly be established by means of the micro-
scope, it is proved by their effects in the play of colors, nebulous
images within, and the phenomena of inflection or diffraction
which result from their regular grouping. This play of colors is
independent of the disseminated microscopic crystals of foreign
substances which occasion the aventurine effect."

Meeting of May i8th, 1894.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Eighteen persons present.

The Recording Secretary read a communication from the
American Geographical Society relative to the Sella collection of
mountain photographs now on exhibition at the American Mu-
seum of Natural History. The Recording Secretary stated that
he had replied to this, and had received tickets of admission
which he would distribute to the members. On motion the
Recording Secretary was directed to express the thanks of the
Society to the American Geographical Society.

The President called the attention of the Society to the pro-
posed meeting of the American Microscopical Society, to be held
in Brooklyn three days before the meeting of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science. After an address
on the subject by Mr. George S. Woolman, and the reading by
the Recording Secretary of a communication from the Secretary
of the American Microscopical Society to Mr. Woolman asking
for information regarding accommodations, on motion the Chair
appointed the following committee to consider and report any

86 JOURNAL OF THE [July^

possible action on the matter : Dr. Edvv. G. Love, Messrs. George
S. VVoolman and L. Riederer.

OBJECTS EXHIBITED.

1. Mounts, in toto, of chick embryos of 36 and 54 hours' incu-
bation : by George W. Kosmak.

2. Series of cross-sections of the 54-hour embryo : by George
W. Kosmak.

3. Insect in amber : by James Walker.

4. Living embryo leech : by Henry C. Bennett.

5. Living Plumatella : by A. D. BALENand Frederick Kato.

6. Curious green-colored sand from Kentucky : byF. D. Skeel.

7. Insect in fossil gum copal from Zanzibar, Africa : by
George E. Ashby.

Mr. Kosmak explained the method of preparation of his sec-
tions of chick embryo.

Meeting of June ist, 1894.

In the absence of the President and the Vice-President, Rev.
J. L. Zabriskie was elected Chairman.

Fifteen persons present.

Mr. E. Gerber was elected a Resident Member of the Society.

The Recording Secretary read the report of Mr. George S.
Woolman, of the Committee on Entertainment of the American
Microscopical Society, stating that the said society would be
accommodated at the Polytechnic Institute, Brooklyn. The
report was accepted and adopted.

objects exhibited.

1. Serpentine from Meissen, Saxony, polarized : by Henry C.
Bennett.

2. Sunstone : by F. D. Skeel.

3. The common scarlet leaf-hopper, Diedrocephala coccinia
Forst., entire : by J. L. Zabriskie.

4. Hairs of sea mouse, Aphrodite acideata : by H. W. Calef.

5. Pond life : by James Walker.

6. Living cheese mites : by Thomas S. Nedham.

7. Living Pectinatella magnifica : by A. D. Balen.

1894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCO'PICAL SOCIETY. 87'

Meeting of June 15TH, 1894.

The President, Mr. Charles S. Shultz, in the chair.

Thirteen persons present.

The Corresponding Secretary read a communication from Mr.
K. M. Cunningham, dated Mobile, Ala., June 7th, 1894, an-
nouncing to the Society that he had, in a manner most satis-
factory to himself, just succeeded in perfecting the proof that
the diatom belongs to the animal kingdom.

OBJECTS exhibited.

1. Section of conglomerate from the drift of Long Island,
N. Y. : by James Walker.

2. The curious parasitic wasp, Ceratomiis sp.? by J. L. Za-

BRISKIE.

3. Flowers of Viiicetoxicum acuminatum with captured mosqui-
toes : by.T. B. Briggs.

4. Androconium scales of wing of the butterfly, Pieris rapce. .'
by E. G. Love.

5. Circulation in Nitella, from Crotona Park, N. Y. : by F. W.
Leggett.

6. Living Volvox globator : by A. D. Balen.

Objects from the Society s Cabinet.

7. Group of foraminifera.

8. Group of foraminifera and spicules.

9. Group of foraminifera^ Spirolina austriaca.

10. Foraminifera from the Levant.

11. Section of orbitolite.

12. Section of Polystomella scrobiculata.

Mr. Briggs stated that his specimen of Vincetoxicum was from
the gardens of Mr. Charles A. Dana. The mosquitoes are at-
tracted and held captive by the very viscid nectar of the flowers.

Dr. Love with blackboard drawings explained the situation
and structure of the " androconium^^ scales of the butterfly wing.
They are found only on the wing of the male, and are supposed
to be scent organs.

Mr. Leggett said that his specimen of Nitella was taken from a
small pool of exceedingly foul water in Crotona Park, where the
plant was growing in astonishing luxuriance.

88 JOURNAL OF THE l]^^,

Mr. Balen stated that his specimens of Volvox were also taken
from a pool with water so foul that the Volvox could not be seen.
They appeared to thrive under the circumstances, and many spe-
cimens showed that they contained within an astonishing number
of young forms.

The Society adjourned to meet on the first Friday .of October,
1894.

An Introduction to Structural Botany. By Dukinfield
Henry Scott, Jodrell Laboratory, Kew, London. 113 fig-
ures. London : Adam & Charles Black, 1894. Pp. 288.
Trice, $1.

This is intended to be a first guide to the study of the structure of plants
in schools. It treats of three types of phanerogams — the Wallflower, the
White Lily, and the Spruce Fir — and seems well adapted to its purpose.

Practical Botany for Beginners, By F. O. Bower, Profes-
sor of Botany in the University of Glasgow. 13 figures. New
York : Macmillan & Co., 1894. Pp. 275. Price, 90 cents.
An excellent condensed guide to biological laboratory work for beginners,

conducting them through the microscopical examination — sectioning and

mounting — of many selected types of plants, from the highest to the lowest

orders.

A Manual of Microchemical Analysis. By Prof. H. Beh-
RENS, Polytechnic School, Delft, Holland, with an introduc-
tory chapter by Prof, John W. Judd, Royal College of Sci-
ence, London. 84 figures- New York : Macmillan »& Co.,
1894. Pp. 246. Price, $1.50.

The English translation of this work is by the author, Prof. Behrens, and
it is devoted mainly to the qualitative microchemical wet methods of the
examination of the rock-forming minerals. Part I, contains the general
method, and the reactions of sixty-three minerals. Part II. contains the ana-
lytical examination of mixed compounds. The work is one of Macmillan's
Manuals for Students, under the division of chemistry, and is a late sum-
marization of the labors of most eminent men in this branch of study. To
those who are engaged in crystallography and petrography it would seem to
be invaluable.

l894-] new-york microscopical society. 89

Systematic Survey of the Organic Coloring Matters.
By G. ScHULTZ and P. Julius. Translated and edited with
extensive additions by Arthur G. Green, London Institute,
London. New York : Maxmillan & Co., 1894. Pp. 205.
Price, $5.

This work is devoted to the exposition of the products of coal tar. It
states that the average quantity of gas tar worked up per annum by the
whole world is 530,000 tons. In three divisions it explains the manufacture
and gives the formulce of the raw products, the intermediate products, and
the coloring matters; under this latter division tabulating 454 colors by
means of parallel columns under the headings : commercial name, scientific
name, empirical formula, constitutional formula, method of preparation,
year of discovery, discoverer, patents, literature, behavior with reagents,
shade and dyeing properties, method of employment.

JOURNAL

OF THE

NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

Vol. X. OCTOBER, 1894. No. 4.

THE CRETACEOUS FORAMINIFERA OF NEW JERSEY.

PAR I' II. ORIGINAL INVESTIGATIONS
AND REMARKS.

BY ANTHONY WOODWARD, PH.D.
(,Presented April 6tk, i8g4.)

After a number of years of close and careful study a vast
amount of rough material has been worked over. I have suc-
ceeded in identifying twenty-six genera and fifty-nine species of
Foraminifera from the cretaceous formation of New Jersey. The
material examined was in part kindly sent to me by the late
Prof. Geo. H. Cook, State Geologist of New Jersey, and col-
lected by Dr. N. L. Britton ; it was also received in part from
Wm. E. Chase, of Franklin, N. J , and James Walker, of Brook-
lyn, N. Y., besides many other sources. I spent two days at
Mullica Hill, a beautiful Quaker village, collecting marls from the
terebratula, gryphsea beds, and the one just above it. From these
beds I identified most of the species mentioned in this paper.

The marls from certain localities are very rich in Nodosaria,
Crislettaria, and Polymorphina, especially those from Mullica
Hill and the yellow limestone from Timber Creek. My most es-
teemed friend, the late H. B. Brady, F.R.S., of London, Eng-
land, aided me greatly by verifying such species as I doubted.

92 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

LITUOLID^.

Sub-family TROCHAMMIN^.
TROCHAMMINA Parker and Jones.

Trochammina inflata Montagu, sp.
Nautilus inflatus Montagu. 1808. Test. Brit. Suppl. 81. pi.

xviii. fig. 3.
Rotalina inflata W\\\\a.n\sor\. 1858. Rec. Foram. Gt. Brit. 50.

pi. iv. figs. 93, 94.
Rotalina {^Trochammina) inflata Yzxk&x and Jones. 1859. Ann.

and Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3. iv. 347. fig. F.
Trochammina inflata. Carpenter. 1862. Introd. Foram. 141.

pi. xi. fig. 5.
Troshammina sqiiamata, var. inflata Parker and Jones. 1862.

Introd. Foram. Appendix. 310.
Trochammina inflata Brady. 1865. Nat. Hist. Trans. Northd.

and Durham, i. 95.
Trochammina inflata (.') Tate and Blake. 1876. Yorkshire

Lias. 452. pL xvii. fig 18.
Trochammina inflata Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M.

S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 338. pi. xli. fig. 4. a-c.
Trochammina ijiflata Woodward and Thomas. 1893. Final Re-
port Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. iii. 28. pi. D. fig. 31.
" Test free ; trochoid or convex, depressed, rotaliform ; con-
sisting of about three convolutions, the outermost of which is
formed of five or six very ventricose segments with deeply exca-
vated septal lines. Inferior face somewhat concave, with sunken
umbilicus : peripheral margin lobulated. Aperture small,
arched ; situate on the inferior side of the final segment, close to
previous convolution, a little within the periphery. Color pale
brown, the small primary segments much darker than the rest.'' —
Brady, loc. cit.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare. Timber Creek, yellow lime-
stone. Rare.

WEBBINA d'Orbigny.

Webbina rugosa d'Orbigny.
Webbina rugosa ^Ox\n^x\y. 1839. Foram. d. lies Canaries. 125.
pi. i. figs. 16-18.

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 93

Webbina rugosa d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 74. pi.
xxi. figs. II, 12.

Test depressed, elongate, twisted, white, above convex rugose,
below complanate, with three pyriform chambers ; spinose, round
aperture, peristome elevated, enlarged.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the yellow limestone. Rare.
Also in the teredo bed. Rare.

TEXTULARIDiE.

Sub-family TEXTULARIN^.

TEXTULARIA Defrance.

Textularia agglutinans d'Orbigny.

Textularia agglutinans d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Cuba 144. pi.

i. figs. 17, 18, 32-34.
Textularia agglutinans Seguenza. 1862. Atti dell' Accad. Gi-

senia. ser. 2. xviii. 112. pi. ii. fig. 4.
Plecanium sturi Karrer. 1864. Sitzungsb. d. K. Ak. Wiss.

Wien. i. 704. pi. i. fig. i.
Textularia agglutinans Parker and Jones. 1865. Phil. Trans.

civ. 369. pi. XV. fig. 21.
Plecanium agglutinans Reuss. 1869. Sitzungsb. d. K. Ak.

Wiss. Wien. lix. 452. pi. i. figs, i, 2.
Textularia agglutinans G. M. Dawson. 1875. Report Geol.

Resources 49th Parallel, British N. A. Boundary Comm. 79.
Textilaria agglutinans Moebius. 1880. Foram. von Mauritius.

93. pi. ix, figs. 1-8.
Textularia agglutijtans Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M.

5. Challenger. Zool. ix. 363. pi. xliii. figs. 1-3. vars. figs. 4,
12.

Textularia agglutinans Woodward and Thomas. 1885. Geol.
Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. 13th Ann. Report. 167. pi. iii. figs.

6, 7-

Textularia agglutinans Tyrrell. 1890. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can.
vii. 114.

Test elongate, conical, rugose, agglutinous (from grains of
sand), white, laterally convex, posteriorly cuneate, segments
large, the last convex, aperture semi-lunate.

Jx)cality. Timber Creek, in the yellow limestone. Rare.

94 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Textularia carinata d'Orbigny.

J extidaria cari?iata d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii. 263.

No. 23,
Textularia carinata d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 247.

pi. xiv. figs. 32-34.
Textularia lacera Reuss. 185 1. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Ge-

. sell. iii. 84. pi. vi. figs. 52, 53.
Textularia atteiiuata Reuss. 185 1. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol.

Gesell. iii. 84. pi. vi. fig. 54.
7 extilaria carinata, and T. carinata, va.r. attenuata Reuss. 1870.

Sitzungsb. d. K. Ak. Wiss. Wien. Ixii. 489. No. i.

Schlicht. 1870. Foram. Pietzpuhl. pi. xxxiii. figs. 1-4,8, 9.
Textilaria carinata Hantken. 1875. Mitth Jahrb. d. k. ung.

geol. Anst. iv. 66. pi. vii. fig. 8.
Textularia carinata Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 360. pi. xlii. figs. 15, 16.
Textularia carinata Woodward and Thomas. 1893. Final Re-
port Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. iii. 30. pi. C fig. 11.

Test cuneiform, lingulata, convex, punctate, anteriorly dilate,
truncate, posteriorly obtuse acuminate, laterally carinate, acute,
lamellose ; foramina narrow, oblique, arcuate, marginate.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Quite rare.

Textularia gramen d'Orbigny.

Textularia gramen 6.' Oihigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 248.

pi. XV. figs. 4, 6.
Textularia gramen Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. Fl. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 365. pi. xliii. figs. 9, 10.

Test ovate-lingulate, compressed, punctate, anteriorly dilate,
rotund, posteriorly obtuse, laterally angular, subcarinate ; with
wide chambers, obliquely transverse, arcuate, somewhat convex.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the yellow limestone. Not com-
mon.

Textularia turris d'Orbigny.

Textularia turris d'Orbigny. 1840. Mem. Soc. geol. France, iv.
46. pi. iv. figs. 27, 28.

r894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 95

Tex^ulari'a turn's Vsivker send Jones. 1863. Ann. and Mag. Nat.

Hist. ser. 3. xi. 97.
Textularia turris Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 366. pi. xliv. ngs. 4, 5.
Textularia turris Woodward and Thomas. 1885. Geol. Nat.

Hist. Survey Minn. 13th Ann. Report. 167. pi. iii. fig. 8.
Textularia turris (?) Tyrrell. 1890. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. vii.

114.
Textularia turris Woodward and Thomas. 1893. Final Report

Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. iii. 30. pi. C. figs 9, 10.

Test elongate, conical, turriculate, rugose, non-compressed,
posteriorly acuminate, anteriorly truncate ; chambers complanate.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the yellow limestone and gryphgea
bed. Not abundant.

« Textularia sagittula Defrance.

'' Polyuwrphum sagittula " Soldani. 1791. Testaceographia. i.

120. pi. cxxxiii. fig. T.
Textularia sagittula yyeixdincQ. 1824. Diet. Sci. Not. xxxii. 177;

liii. 344 ; Atlas Conch, pi. xiii. fig. 5.
Textularia sagittula Blainville. 1825. Malacologie. 370. pi. v.

fig- 5-
Textularia sagittula d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii. 263.

No. 20.
Textularia saulcyana^Oxh'xgxi)-. 1839. Foram. Cuba. 137. pi. i.

figs. 21, 22.
Textularia cuneiformis d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Cuba. 138. pi.

i- figs. 37.- 38.
Textularia ?iussdorfensis d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien.

243. pi. xiv. figs. 17-19.

Textularia broniiiana d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien.

244. pi. xiv. figs. 20-22.

Textularia deperdita d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 244.

pi. xiv, figs. 23-25.
Textularia prcelonga Czjzek. 1847. Haidinger's Naturw. Ab-

handl. ii. 149. pi. xiii figs. 28-30.
Textularia acuta Reuss. 1849. Denkschr. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. i. 381. pi. xlix. fig. i.

96 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Textularia cuneiformis Williamson. 1858. Rec. Foram. Gt. Br.

75. pi. vi. figs. 158, 159.
Textularia agglutinans, var. sagittula Parker and Jones. 1865.

Phil. Trans, civ. 369 pi. xvii. fig. 77. a, b.
Textularia sagittula Brady. 1884. Keport on Foram H. M. S.
Challenger. Zool. ix. 361. pi. xlii. figs. 17, 18.
Test elongate, somewhat compressed, very rugose, posteriorly
acuminate-carinate, anteriorly subcylindrical-truncate ; with nar-
row chambers, arcuate, limbate above, aperture linear.

Locality. New Egypt, in the green marl. Rare. Timber
Creek, in the gryphsea bed. Quite rare.

SPIROPLECTA Ehrenberg.
SptROPLECTA AMERICANA Ehrenberg.

Spiroplecta ainericajia Ehrenberg. 1854. Mikrogeologie. pi.
xxxii. I. figs. 13, 14 ; II. fig. 25.

Spiroplecta americana Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M.
S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 376. pi. xlv. fig. 24. a, b.

Spiroplecta americana Woodward and Thomas. 1885. Geol. Nat.
Hist. Survey Minn. 13th Ann. Report. 168 pi. iii. fig. 9.

Spiroplecta americana Woodward and Thomas. 1893. Final Re-
port Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. iii. 31. pi. C. figs. 12,
13. 14.
" The test is usually much compressed, and widens rapidly

towards the distal end ; the lateral edges are thin and slightly

lobulated, the chambers somewhat inflated, and the septal lines

correspondingly depressed on the exterior ; the walls are thin and

smooth." — Brady, loc. cit.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the gryphsea bed. Rare.

GAUDRYINA d'Orbigny.
Gaudrvina pupoides d'Orbigny.

Gaudryifia pup }i lies d'Orbigny. 1840. Mem. Soc. geol. France.

iv. 44. pi. iv. figs. 22-24.
Gaudryina pupoides d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 197.

pi. xxi. figs. 34-36-
Gaudryina subglabra Giimbel. 1868. Abh. d. K. bayer. Akad.

Wiss. II. cl. X. 602. pi. i. fig. 4.

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 97

Gaudryina pupoides Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 378. pi. xlvi. figs. 1-4.
Gaudryina pupoides Woodward and Thomas. 1885. Geol. Nat.

Hist. Survey Minn. 13th Ann. Report. 168. pi. iii. fig. 10.
Gaud?yina pupoides y^ood-wdixdi axid Thomas. 1893. Final Re-
port Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. iii. 31. pi. C. figs. 15, 16.
Test elongated, rugose, (young) rotund, (adult) compressed ;
spire obtuse ; chambers convex, (young) narrow, transversely
oblong, (adult) globular.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near MuUica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Quite rare.

VERNEUILINA d'Orbigny.
Verneuilina triquetra Miinster, sp.

Textularia triquetra Miinster. 1838 (in Romer's paper). Neues

Jahrb. fiir Minn. etc. 384. pi. iii. fig. 19.
Textularia triquetra Reuss. 1845. Verstein. Bohm. Kreid. pt.

I. 39. pi. xiii. fig. 77.
Textularia atlantica Bailey. 185 1. Smithsonian Contrib. ii. art.

3. 12. figs. 38-42.
Textularia ( Verneuilina) triquetra Parker and Jones. 1863. Ann.

and Mag. Nat. Hist, ser, 3. xi. 92.
Verneuilina triquetra Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 383. pi. xlvii. figs. 18-20.
Test carinate, acutely triangular with a curved lateral side (or
face) in the centre, so that a cross section presents the appear-
ance of a triangle, with somewhat concave sides. On every side
seven to eight very low, somewhat rough chambers, whose sutures
are slightly elevated, the uppermost chamber somewhat arched;
aperture a slit on the inner side of the last chamber, parallel to a
side face of the pyramid.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Very abundant. Timber Creek, in the
gryphsea bed. Abundant.

TRITAXIA Reuss.
Tritaxia tricarinata Reuss.

Textularia tricarinata Reuss. 1845. Verstein. Bohm. Kreid. i.
39. pi. viii. fig. 60.

98 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Verneuilina dubia Reuss. 185O;. Haidinger's Naturvv. Abhandl.

iv. 40. pi. iv. fig. 3.
Tritaxia tricariuata Reuss. i860. Sitzungsb. d. K. Ak. Wiss.

Wien. xl. 228. pi. xii. figs, i, 2,
Tritaxia tricariuata Brady. 1884. Report on Forarp. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 389. pi. xlix. figs. 8, 9.

Test very rough, elongate elliptical, triangular, tricarinate, on
either side attenuate, walls somewhat concave, sutures obsolete,
aperture small, subelliptical.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the yellow limestone. Quite rare.

CL.WULINA d'Orbigny.

Clavulina communis d'Orbigny.

Clavulina communis d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii. 268.

No. 4.
Clavulina communis d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 196.

pi. xii. figs. I, 2.
Verneuilina communis Jones and Parker, i860. Quart. Journ.

Geol. Soc. xvi. 303. No. 82.
Clavulina communis Fischer. 1870. Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux.

xxvii. 393. No. iz-
Verneuilina communis Van den Broeck. 1876. Ann. Soc. Belg.

Micr. ii. 136. pi. iii. fig. 14.
Clavulina communis Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 394. pi. xlviii. figs. 1-13.
Test elongate, clavate, rugose, cylindrical anteriorly, posteriorly
inflated, obtuse, convex chambers, terminal one anteriorly sub-
acuminate.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near MuUica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Common. Timber Creek, teredo bed.
Abundant.

Sub-Family BULJMIN.*:.

BULIMINA d'Orbigny.

BuLiMiNA PUPOIDES d'Orbigny,

Bulimina pupoides d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 185.
pi, xi. figs, II, 12,

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 90

Bulimina pupoides Williamson. 1858. Rec. Foram. Gt. Br. 62.

pi. V. figs. 124, 125.
Bulimitia tortilis Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad, VViss.

Wien. xliv. 338. pi. viii. fig. 3.
Bulimina presli, wo-x, pupoides Parker and Jones. 1862. Introd.

Foram. Appendix. 311.
Bulimina pupoides Terrigi. 1880. Atti dell' Accad. Pont, xxxiii.

193. pi. ii. figs. 30-34.
Bulimina pupoides Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zocl. ix. 400, 401. pi. 1. fig. 15. a, b.
Bulimina pupoides Woodward and Thomas. 1885. 13th Ann.

Report Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. 169. pi. iii. fig. ir.
Bulimina pupoides Tyrrell. 1890. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 114.
Bulimina pupoides Woodward and Thomas. 1893. Final Report

Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. iii. 32. pi. C. figs. 20-24.
Test oblong ; obtuse, especially at the inferior lateral surface ;
composed of numerous segments, arranged in an indistinct spiral,
and exhibiting a tendency to form three oblique vertical rows ;
segments remarkably ventricose and prominent ; the anterior one
usually more oblong than the rest, from its anterior part not being
embraced, as all the preceding ones, by the next segment. Septal
plane convex ; semilunar. Septal orifice single, placed near the
umbilical border of the septal plane, and usually characterized by
a curious obliquity at its part, owing to the two lips of the orifice
not meeting at their umbilical extremities, but passing one behind
the other.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare. Fragments only.

Bulimina pyrula d'Orbigny.

Bulimina caudtgera d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii. 270.

No. 16 ; Modele No. 68.
Bulimina ovula d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Amer. Merid. 51. pi.

i. figs. 10, II.
Bulimina pyrula d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 184. pi.

xi. figs. 9, 10.
Bulimina auriculata Bailey. 1851. Smithsonian Contrib. ii. Art.

3. 12. figs. 25-27.
Bulijnina turgida Id. Ibid. 12. figs. 28-31.

100 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Guttulina prunella Costa. 1856. Atti dell' Accad. Pont. vii. 274.

pi. xiii. figs. 32, T,i, 37, 38.
Guttulina mutabilis Id. Ibid. 275. pi. xviii. figs. 1-3.
Buliniina auriculata Dawson. 1859. Canad. Nat. iv. 31. fig. 22.
Bulimina auriculata Id. i860. Can. Nat. and Geol. v. 190.
Bulimina presli, var. pyrula Parker and Jones. 1865. Phil.

Trans, civ. 372. pi. xv. figs. 8, 9.
Bulimina pyrula Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 399. pi. 1. figs. 7-10.
Bulimina py rill a Wh\tQdiV&'&. 1887. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. iv. 114.
Test ovate, anteriorly and posteriorly acuminate, smooth, short
spire, obtuse ; with three narrow convolutions ; with three some-
what convex segments.

Locality. Timber Creek, teredo bed. Rare.

PLEUROSTOMELLA Reuss.
Pleurostomella subnodosa Reuss.

Nodosaria nodosa (pars) Reuss. 1845. Verstein. Bohm. Kreid.

pt. I. 28. pi. xiii. fig. 22 {^fide Reuss).
Dentalina subnodosa (pars) Id. 1850. Haidinger's Naturw. Ab-

handl. iv. 24. pi. i. fig. 9 {^fide Reuss).
Pleurostotnella subnodosa Id. i860. Sitzungsb. d. K. Ak. Wiss.

Wien. xl. 204. pi. viii. fig. 2. a, b.
Pleurostomella subnodosa yidix^tson. 1878. Mittheil. Naturw. Ver-

eine Neu-Vorpom. u. Riigen. x. 133.
Pleurostomella subnodosa Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H.

M. S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 412. pi. Hi. figs. 12, 13.
Test elongated, nearly straight ; chambers quite regularly in-
creasing, slightly convex, the last one the largest, convex, shortly
acute ; the first chamber smallest, rather obtuse ; aperture naked.
Locality. Timber Creek, gryphsea bed. Rare.

BOLIVINA d'Orbigny.

BoLiviNA PUNCTATA d'Orbigny.

Bolivina punctata d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Amer. Merid. 61.

pi. viii. figs. 10-12.
Bolivina antiqua d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 240. pi.

xiv. figs. 11-13.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 101

Grammostomum polystigma Ehrenberg. 1854. Mikrogeologie. pi.

xix. fig. 84.
Grammostovium caloglossa Ehrenberg. 1854. Mikrogeologie. pi.

XXV. figs. 17, 18.
Bolivina punctata Brady. 1864. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. xxiv.

468. pi. xlviii. fig. 9. a, b.
Bulimina presli, var. {Bolivina) punctata Parker and Jones. 1865.

Phil. Trans, civ. 376. pi. xviii. fig. 74.
■ Bolivina elongata Hantken. 1875. Mittheil. Jahrb. d. K. ung.

geol. Anstalt. iv. 65. pi. vii. fig. 14.
Bolivina antiqua Terrigi. 1880. Atti dell' Accad. Pont, xxxiii.

196. pi. ii. fig. 40.
BoliviJiapunctataM.oth'wis. 1880. Foram.vonMauritius.94.pl.

ix. figs. 9, 10.
Bulimina {Bolivina) punctata Goq's. 1882. Kongl. Sv. Vet. Akad.

xxix. 69. pi. iv. figs. 1 14-126.
Bolivina punctata Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 417. pi. Hi. figs. 18, 19.
Bolivina punctata Woodward and Thomas. 1885. Geol. Nat.

Hist. Survey Minn. 13th Ann. Report. 169. pi. iii. fig. 12.
Bolivina punctata Woodward and Thomas. 1893. Final Report

Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. iii. 34. pi. C. figs. 27, 28.
Test elongated, compressed, conical, obtuse anteriorly, acu-
minate posteriorly, white, punctate, sub-carinate on sides ; with
numerous oblique undulate segments, the last obtuse ; aperture
simple.

Locality. Lower marl bed, light gray, sandy marl at Bruere's
pits, Crosswick's Creek. Rare.

LAGENID^.

Sub-family LAGENIN^.
LAGENA Walker and Boys.

Lagena globosa Montagu, sp.

^^ Serpula{Lagena) Icevis globosa" y^z\ktx diV^Alioy?.. 1784. Test.

Min. 3. pi. i. fig. 8.
^^ Ossicula madreporaria" So\6.2Lm. 1795. Testaceographia. i. pt.

3. 245. pi. clxxii. figs. B, C, etc.

103 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Vermicitlum globosum yionidigvi. 1803. Test Brit. 523.

Oolma inornata d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Amer, Merid. 21. pi.

V. fig 13.
Oolina simplex Reuss. 185 1. Haidinger's Naturw. Abhandl. iv.

22. pi. i. fig. 2.
Miliola sphczroidea Ehrenberg. 1854. Mikrogeologie. pi. xxxiii.

fig. I.
Cenchridiiwi oliva Ehrenberg. 1854. Mikrogeologie. pi. xxiv.

figs. 3» 4-
Phialina oviformis Costa. 1856. Atti dell' Accad. Pont. vii.

123. pi. xi. figs. 8, 9.
Fissurina obtusa Egger. 1857. Neues Jahrb. fiir Min. etc. 270.

pi. V. figs. 16-19.
Entosolenia globosa Parker and Jones. 1857. Ann. and Mag.

Nat. Hist. ser. 2. xix. 278. pi. xi. figs. 25-29.
Entosolenia globosa Williamson. 1858. Rec. Foram. Gt. Br. 8.

pi. i. figs. 15, 16.
Fissurina solida Seguenza. 1862. Foram. Monotal. Mess. 56.

pi. i. fig. 42.
Entosolenia globosa Dawson. 1859. Can. Nat. and Geol. iv. 28.

figs. 4, 5-
Entosolenia globosa Dawson. 1862. Proc. Portland Soc. Nat.

Hist, i 83.
Fissurina rugosula Seguenza. 1862. Foram. Monotal. Mess.

56. pi. i. fig. 43.
Lagena sulcata, var. {Entosolenia) globosa Parker and Jones.

1865. Phil. Trans, civ. 348. pi. xiii. fig. 37; pi. xvi. fig. 10.
Lagena globosa Jones, Parker, and Brady. 1866. Monograph of

the Foram. of the Crag. 32. pi. i. fig. 32.
Cenchridium aargovense Kiibler. 1870. Foram. Schweiz. Jura.

13. pi. ii. I. fig. 2.
Lagena parkinsoni Kiibler. 1870. Foram. Schweiz. Jura. 17.

pi. ii. in. fig. I.
Lagena minutissiina Kiibler. 1870. Foram. Schweiz. Jura. 19, 21.

pi. ii. IV. fig. I.
Lagenulina globosa Terquem. 1876. Anim. sur la Plage de

Dunkerque. fasc. 2. 67. pi. vii. figs. 3, 4.
Lagena globosa Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S. Chal-
lenger. Zool. ix. 452. pi. Ivi. figs. I, 2, 3.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY, 103

Test ovato-globose, sometimes projecting slightly at the apex ;
smooth, and without surface-marking. Tube entosolenian.
Walls thin and hyaline.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare.

Sub-family NODOSARIN^.

NODOSARIA Lamarck.

NoDOSARiA (D.) COMMUNIS d'Orbigny.

Nodosaria {Dentalina) communis (?) d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann.

Sci. Nat. vii. 254. No. 35.
Dentalina communis diOrh\gx\Y. 1840. Mem. Soc. geol. France,

iv. 13. pi. i. fig. 4.
Nodosaria linearis Romer. 1842. Verst. Nordd. Kreidegeb.

95. pi. XV. fig. 5.
Nodosaria communis ^QViS?,. 1845. Verstein. Bohm. Kreid. pt. i.

28. pi. xii. fig. 21.
Nodosaria legumen Id. Ibid. 28. pi. xiii. figs. 23, 24.
Dentalina inornata d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien, 44.

pi. i. figs. 50, 51.
Dentalina badenensis Id. Ibid. 44. figs 48, 49.
Dentalina ferstliana Czjzek. 1847. Haidinger's Naturw. Ab-

handl. ii. 140. pi. xii. figs. 10-13.
Dentalina intermedia Corn. 1848. Nouv. Foss. Microsc. Cret. ;

Mem. Soc. geol. France, ser. 2. iii. 251. pi. i. fig. 20.
Dentalina gracilis Alth, 1849. Umgeb. Lemb. ; Haidinger's

Naturw. Abhandl. iii. (2) 269. pi. xiii. fig. 27.
Dentalina mutabilis Bailey. 1850. Smithsonian Contrib. ii.

Art. 3. 10. fig. 7.
Marginulina ensis Reuss. 185 1. Haid. Nat. Abhandl. iv. p. ii.

figs. 16-18.
Dentalina haueri Neugeboren. 1856. Denkschr. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. xii. 81. pi. iii. fig. 12.
Dentalina orbignyana Id. Ibid. pi. iii. figs. 1-3.
Dentalina subarcuata y^\\\\zmson. 1858. Rec. Foram. Gt. Brit.

18. pi. ii. figs. 40, 41.
Dentalina torta Terquem. 1858. Foram. du Lias, i" mem. 599.

pi. ii. fig. 6.

104 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Dentalina vetusta Terqueni. Ibid. 598. pi. ii. 4.

DentaUna legumen Reuss. i860. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xl. 187. pi. iii. fig. 5.
Dentalina intermedia Id. Ibid. 186. pi. ii. fig. 8.
Dentalina communis Id. Ibid. 186.
Dentalina colligata Reuss. i86[. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xliv. 334. pi. vii. fig. 4.
Dentalina deflexa Reuss. 1862. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xlvi. 43. pi. ii. fig. 19.
Dentalina inornata Id. 1863. Ibid, xlviii. 45. pi. ii. fig. 18.
Dentalina boettcheri Id Ibid. 44. pi. ii. fig. 17.
Dentalina cequalis Karrer. 1865. Foram. Griinsandstein. N.

Zealand; Novara Reise. geol. ii."74. pl.^xvi. fig. i.
Dentalina communis Jones, Parker, and Brady. 1866, Mono-
graph of the Foram. of the Crag. 58. pi. i. fig. 13-18, 20 ;

pi. iv. fig. 10.
Marginulina ensis Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xliv. 335.
Nodosaria neugeboreni Schwager. 1866. Novara Exped. geol.

ii. 232. pi. vi. fig. 67.
Nodosaria gracilescens Id. Ibid. 234. pi. vi. fig. 70.
Dentalina intorta Terquem. 1870. Foram. du Syst. Oolith.

3'^'"Lmem. 262. pi. xxvii. figs. 26-34.
Detitulina budensis Hantken. 1875. Mittheil. Jahrb. d. K. ung.

geol. Anstalt. iv. 34. pi. iii. fig. 12.
Nodosaria {D.) communis Brady. 1884. Report on Foram.

H. M. S. Challenger Zool. ix. 504. pi. Ixii figs. 19-22.

Test elongated, arched, smooth ; posteriorly acuminate, cau-
date ; numerous chambers, oblique, last very convex, acuminate,
first convex ; sutures subcomplanate ; very small aperture, ra-
diate.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Not abundant. New Egypt, green
marl. Fragments. Lower marl bed, gray sandy marl at Bruere's
pits, Crosswick's Creek. Fragments. Timber Creek, in the yel-
low limestone. Fragments. Teredo bed. Quite abundant.
Gryphsea bed. Not rare.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY, 105

NoDOSARiA (D.) FiLiFORMis d'Orbigny.

'* Orthoceratia fillformia ant capillaria " Soldani. 1798. Testa-

ceographia. ii. 35. pi. x. fig. e.
Nodosaria filiformis d'Oxhigny. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii. 253.

No. 14.
Dentalina acutissima d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Amer. Merid.

23. pi. iii. fig. 15.
Dentalina acuta Id. Ibid. fig. 16.
Dentalina gracilis Id. 1840. Mem. See. geol. France, iv. 14. pi.

i- fig. 5.
Dentalina elegans Id. 1846, Foram. Foss. Vien. 45. pi. i. figs.

52-56-
Dentalina reussi Neugeboren. 1856. Denkschr. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. xii. 85. pi. iii. figs. 6, 7.
Dentalina prcelonga Costa. 1856. Atti dell' Accad. Pont. vii.

163. pi. xii. fig. 21.
Dentalina vetustissima Terquem. 1858. Foram. du Lias, i'^'"'^

mem. 600. pi. ii. fig. 8.
Dentalina baccata Id. Ibid. 601. pi. ii. fig. 9.
Dentalina pseudomonile Id. Ibid. 606. pi. ii. fig. 18.
Dentalina gracilis Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien, xliv. 334.
Nodosaria elegans Sch wager. 1866. Novara Exped. geol.

Theil ii. 233. pi. vi. fig. 68.
Dentalina jiliformis Parker, Jones, and Brady. 187 1. Ann. and

Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4. viii. 156. pi. ix. fig. 48.
Nodosaria {D.) jiliformis Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H.

M. S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 500. pi. Ixiii. figs. 3-5.

Test elongate, arcuate, smooth, shining white, anteriorly ob-
tuse, posteriorly acuminate, very acute, with numerous chambers,
laterally semi-distinct ; aperture round simple.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare. Timber Creek, in the yellow
limestone. Fragments only. Teredo bed. Rare.

Nodosaria obliqua Linne, sp.

'^ Orthoceras fnininmm," etc. Gaultieri. 1742. Index Test. pi.
xix. fig. N.

106 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Nautilus obliquus lAnr\€. 1767. Syst. Nat. 12th ed. 1163. 281 ;

1788. Ibid. 13th (Gmelin's) ed. 3372. No. 14.
Nautilus jugosus Montagu. 1803. Test. Brit. 198 pi. xiv.

fig. 4.
Orthocera obliqua Lamarck. 1822. Anim. sans Vert, vii 594.

No. 4.
Nodosaria sulcata Nilsson. 1827. Petrif. Suec. 8. pi. ix. fig. 19.
Nodosaria elegans Roemer. 1838. Neues. Jahrb. fiir Min. etc.

382. pi. iii. fig. I.
Dentalina bifurcata^&\x%%. 1849. Denkschr. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

VVien. i. 367. pi. xlvi. fig. 10.
Dentalina priiimva d'Orbigny. 1850. Prod. Paleont. i. 242.

No. 260.
De?italina kingii Jones. 1850. King's Monogr. Permian Foss.

17. pi. vi. figs. 2, 3.
Dentalina steenstrupi Reuss. 1855. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol.

Gesellsch. vii. 268. pi. viii. fig. 14, a.
Dentalina sulcata Id. Ibid. 269, pi. viii. fig 14, b.
Dentalina haltica Id. Ibid. 269. pi. viii. fig. 15.
Dentalina bifurcata Costa. 1856. Atti dell' Accad. Pont. vii.

162. pi. xii. fig. 27.
Nodosaria mutabilis Id. Ibid. 150. pi. xiii. fig. i.
Nodosaria siphunculoides Costa. 1857. Mem. Accad. Sci. Nap.

ii. 135. pi. i. fig. 27.
Nodosaria {^Dentalina) obliqua Parker and Jones. 1859. Ann.

and Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3. iii. 482.
Dentalina pulchra Gabb. i860. Journ. Acad Nat. Sci. ser. 2.

iv. 402, 403. pi. Ixix. figs. 40, 41.
Dentalina steenstrupi Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. d.

Wiss. xliv. 326.
Dentalina confluens Reuss. Id. Ibid. 335. pi. vii. fig. 5.
Nodosaria siphunculoides Costa. 1857. Foram. Foss. Marne

Terziar Messina. 9. pi. i. fig. 27.
Dentalina lineata Reuss. 1864. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. d. Wiss.

1. 22. pi. iv. fig. II.
Dentalina schwarzii Karrer. 1864. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. d.

Wiss. 1. 15. pi. i. fig. 5.
Dentalina obliqua Jones, Parker, and Brady. 1866. Monograph

of the Foram. of the Crag. 54. pi. i. fig. 9.

1894] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 107

Nodosaria obliqua Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 513. pi. Ixiv. figs. 20-22.
Nodosaria obliqua Meyer, 1886. Bull. Geol. Survey Ala. 85. pi.

i. fig. 31.

Test elongated, arcuate, tapering ; composed of numerous (six
to fifteen) chambers, which are subcylindrical and more or less
ventricose, with the septal lines generally constricted, and the sur-
face covered with riblets, varying in number and size in different
specimens.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Very common. Timber Creek, teredo
bed. Not abundant. Near Harrisonville, middle bed, associ-
ated with echinoderms. Common.

This is the species that Gabb speaks of finding, and described
as anew species Dentalina pulchra, from the marl near Mullica
Hill. AlsoiV. sulcata of Nilsson, who H. v. Credner mentions in
Die Kreide von New Jersey d. d. geol. Ges. xiii. 1870, as occur-
ring common in the bryozoan bed at Brownville and Turtle Hill.

Nodosaria radicula Linne, sp.

" Co?-nu Hammonis erectuui'' Plancus. 1739. Conch. Min. 14.

pi. i. fig. 5.
Nautilus radicula Linne. 1767. Syst. Nat. 12th ed. 1164. 285 ;

1788. Ibid. 13th (Gmelin's) ed. i. pt. 6. 3373. No. 18.
Nautilus radicula Montagu. 1803. Test. Brit. 197. pi. vi. fig. 4.
Nodosaria radicula d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann Sci. Nat. vii. 252.

No. 3 ; Modele No. i.
Nodosaria geinitziana Neugeboren. 1852. Verhandl. u. Mitth.

siebenb. Vereins f. Nat. iii. 37. pi. i. fig. i.
Nodosaria glandulinoides Id. Ibid. 37. pi. i. fig. 2.
Nodosaria inconstans Id. Ibid. 38. pi. i. figs. 6, 7.
Glandulina temiis Bornemann. 1854. Lias-formation. 31. pi. ii.

fig. 3. a, b.
Glandulina major Id. Ibid. 31. pi. ii. fig. 4. a, b.
Nodosaria geinitzi Reuss. 1854. Jahresb. d. Wetterauer Ge-

sellsch. 1851-53. 77. fig. 12.
Glandulina elegants Neugeboren. 1856. Denkschr. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. 69. pi. i. fig. 5.

108 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Glandulina reussi Id. Ibid. 69. pi. i. fig. 6.

Nodosaria beyrichi Id. Ibid. 72. pi. i. figs. 7-9.

Nodosaria incerta Id. Ibid. 72. pi. i. figs. 10, 11.

Nodosaria radicula Jones and Parker, i860. Quart. Journ.

Gaol. See. xvi. 453. figs. 1-5 (Triassic).
Nodosaria geinitzi Richter. 1855. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. Geol.

Gesellsch. vii. 532. pi. xxvi. fig. 26.
Nodosaria kirbyi Richter. 1861. Geinitz's Dyas. 121. pi. xx. fig.

Glandulina conica Terquem. 1862. Foram. du Lias. 2'^™*' mem.

435- pl- V. fig. 10. a, b.
Nodosaria jonesi Reuss. 1862. Sitzungsb. d K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xlvi. 89. pi. xii. fig. 6.
Nodosaria claviformis Terquem. 1866. Foram. du Lias. 6'^'"''

mem. 447. pi. xix. figs. 17, 18.
Nodosaria radicula Brady. 1867. Proc. Somerset Arch, and

Nat. Hist. Soc. xiii. 106. pi. i. fig. 4.
Nodosaria conferta Schmid. 1867. Neues Jahrb. fiir Min. Jahrg.

1857- 585- pl- vi. fig. 49-
Nodosaria radicula Brady. 1876. Pal. Soc. xxx. 124. pi. x. figs.

6-16.
Nodosaria radicula Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.
Challenger. Zool. ix. 495. pi. Ixi. figs. 28-31.
Test cylindrical, tapering, composed of several subglobose
segments united in a straight line. Surface smooth more or less.
A good typical specimen of Nodosaria radicula has four or more
segments, rarely as many as eight ; the segments are subglobular
in form, regularly but only slightly increasing in size, from the
earliest to the last formed, and quite symmetrically joined end to
end.
Locality. Timber Creek, in the yellow limestone. Rare.

Nodosaria raphanus Linne, sp.

^' Cornu Hammonis erectum slriafum " Flancus. 1739. Conch.

Min. 15. pi. i. fig. 6.
" Orthoceras minimum," etc. Gaultieri. 1742. Index Test. pi.

xix, fig. L.
Nautilus raphanus Linne. 1767. Syst. Nat. 12th ed. 1164, 283 ;

1788. Ibid. 13th (Gmelin's) ed. 3372. No. 16.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 109

*^ Orthoceratia sen tubuli " Soldani. 1791. Testaceographta. i. pt.

2. 91. pi. xciv. figs. T, V.
JVautilus costafiis M.onta.gn. 1803. Test. Brit. 199. pi. xiv. fig. 5.
Nautilus costatus,v2ir. Montagu. 1808. Test. Brit. Suppl. 83.

pi. xix. fig. 2.
Orthocera rapha?ius Lamarck. 1822. Anim. sans Vert, vii, 593.

No. I ; Tabl. Encycl. et Meth. pi. cccclxv. fig. 2. a, b, c.
Nodosaria scalaris d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii. 253.

No. 18.
Nodosaria rapa Id. Ibid. 253 No. 27.
Nodosaria obscura Reuss. 1845. Verstein. bohm. Kreid. pt- i.

26, pi. xiii. figs. 7-9.
Nodosaria bolli Reuss. 1855. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Ge-

sellsch. vii. 265. pi. viii. fig. 6.
Nodosaria propinqua Costa. 1856. Atti dell' Accad. Pont. vii.

151. pi. xiii. fig. 2.

Nodosaria turgidula Costa. 1856; Atti dell' Accad. Pont. vii.

152. pi. xiii. fig. 3.

Nodosaria raphanus Parker and Jones. 1859. Ann. and Mag.

Nat. Hist. ser. 3. iii. 477.
Dentalina pulchra Gabb. i860. Jour Acad. Sci. Phila. n. s.

iv. 402. pi. Ixix figs. 40, 41.
Nodosaria bactroides Reuss. 1862. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. xlvi. 37. pi. ii. fig, 5.
Nodosaria lajnelloso-costata Id. Ibid. 38. pi. ii. fig. 6.
Nodosaria prismatica Id. Ibid. 36. pi. ii. fig. 7.
Nodosaria raphanus ?)'i\v&%ix\. 1872. Nodos. Foss. e Viv. d'ltal.

43. pi. iv. figs. 67-81.
Phonemus {Dentalijia) pulcher Meek. 1864. Smithsonian Inst.

Mis. Coll. 177. p. I. 1868. Appendix A. Geology of New

Jersey. 721.
Nodosaria raphanus Jones, Parker, and Brady. 1866. Mono-
graph. Foram. of the Crag 49. pi. i. figs. 4, 5, 22, 23.
Nodosaria obscura Reuss. 1874. Das Elbthalgebirge in Sachsen.

pt. ii. 81. pi. XX. fig. 14.
Nodosaria rapha?ius 'Qxa.dy. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M.S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 512. pi. Ixiv. figs 6-10.

Shell straight, subcylindrical, tapering, composed of a few larg-

110 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

ish chambers, and externally ribbed from end to end by stout
parallel ridges. The constrictions marking the septal lines are
sometimes concealed by overgrowing longitudinal costte. Liable
to become either curved or compressed, or both, with more or
less eccentric aperture.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the teredo ])ed. Rare.

NoDOSARiA RAPHANISTRUM Linne, sp.

Nautilus raphauistru)n Linn. 1758. Syst. Nat. loth ed. 710.

No. 242 ; 1767. 12th ed. 1163. No. 282.
Orthoccra raphanistrum Lamarck. 1822. An. s. Vert. 594. No. 3.
Nodosaria bacilluui Defrance. 1825. Diet. Sci. Nat. xxxv. 127;

xxvi. 487; Atlas Conch. 13. fig. 4.
Nodosaria zippei Reuss. 1844. Kreidegebirg. 210; 1845. Verst.

bohm. Kreid. i. 25. pi. viii. figs. 1-3.
Nodosaria baciUum d'Orbigny. 1846. For. Loss. Vien. 40. pi. i.

figs. 40-47.
Nodosaria raphaiius Parker and Jones, i860. Quart. Journ.

Geol. Soc. xvi. 453. pi. xix. fig. 10.
Nodasaria spectrum Reuss. 1862. Sitzungsb. Akad. Wien. Math.

Nat. CI. xlvi. 37. pi. ii fig. 3.
Nodosaria bifor/nis, N. bactridium Reuss. 1866. Denks. Akad.

Wien. XXV. 14. pi. i. figs. 23-25.
Nodosaria raphanistrum Jones, Parker, and Brady. 1866. Foram.

of the Crag. 50. pi. i figs. 6-8.
Nodosaria raphanistrum Sherborn and Chapman. 1886. Journ.

Roy. Mic Soc. ser. 2. vi. 749. pi. xiv. fig. 37.
Test long, straight, cylindrical, many chambered ; septa more
or less constricted; surface ornamented by numerous stout parallel
ribs running from end to end of the shell.

Locality. Stratton's marl j)it, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Common. Also at Timber Creek, yellow
limestone. Rare. Gryphaea bed. Rare.

Nodosaria scalaris Batsch, sp.

" Orthocerata striata niicroscopica" Soldani. 1780. Saggio Oritt.

107. pi. V. figs. L, A, B, C, D ; pi. viii. fig. CC.
" Orthoceratia flosculi" Soldani. 1791. Testaceographia. i. pt.

2. 91. pi. xcv. figs. B-M.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. Ill

'''' Polytnorphia pi/iciformia" Soldani. 1791- Ibid. 118. pi,

cxxvii. fig. C.
Nautilus {Orthoceras) sca/aris Batsch. 1791- Conchyl. des See-

sandes. No. 4. pi. ii. fig. 4. a, b. '
JVodosaria long icauda d^Oxhxgny. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii. 254.

No. 28.
Nodosaria sulcata Id. Ibid. 253. No. 21.
Nodosaria candei d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Cuba. 44 pi. i.

figs. 6, 7.
Nodosaria striaticoUis di^Oxhx'ffxy. 1839. Foram. Canaries. 124

pi. i. figs. 2-4.
Lagena williamsoni (?) Harvey and Bailey. 1853. Proc. Acad.

Phila. vi. 431.
Nodosaria tenuicostata Costa. 1856. Atti dell' Accad. Pont. vii.

156. pi. xii. fig. 5 ; pi. xvi. figs. 8-13.
Nodosaria reussi Id. Ibid. 155. pi. xvi. fig. 5.
Nodosaria anuulata Costa. 1857. xMem. Accad. Sci. Nap. ii.

139. pi. i. fig. 16.
Nodosaria radicula Williamson. 1858. Rec. Foram. Gt. Br.

15. pi. ii. figs. 36-38.
Nodosaria scalaris Parker and Jones. 1865. Phil. Trans, civ.

340. pi. xvi. fig. 2. a, b, c.
Nodosaria subradicula Sch wager. 1866. Novara Exped. geol.

ii. 222. pi. v. fig. 50.
Nodosaria longicauda Silvestri. 1872. Nodos. Foss. e Viv.

d'ltal. 58. pi. v. figs. 101-127.
Nodosaria scalaris Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 510. pi. Ixiii. figs. 28-31 ; var. pi. Ixiv.

figs. 16-19.
'' Test is straight ; the segments comparatively few, generally
from three to six in the adult shell and never more than eight,
inflated or subglobular, and increasing rapidly, though not always
regularly, in size. The final chamber is drawn out into an aper-
tural tube of some length with a terminal phialine lip, and the
opposite extremity of the test is commonly mucronate. The
superficial costse vary both as to number and thickness, and are
frequently more numerous and less strongly marked than shown
by the figures.' — Brady, loc. cit.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell

112 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

layers of the green marl. Frequent. Timber Creek, in the yel-
low limestone. Quite rare.

Nodgsari'a (D.) soluta Reuss.

Dentalina oligostegia Reuss. 1850. Haidinger's Naturw. Ab-

handl. iv. 25. pi. ii. fig. 10.
Dentalina lilli Id. Ibid. 25. pi. ii. fig. 11.
Dentalina soluta '^.G.viss. 1851. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Ge-

sellsch. iii. 60. pi. iii. fig. 4. a, b.
Dentalina globifera Reuss. 1855. Sitzungsb. d. K. Ak. Wiss,

Wien. xviii. 223. pi. i. fig. 3.
Nodosaria soluta Bornemann. 1855. Zeitschr. d. deutsch.

geol. Gesellsch. vii. 322. pi. xii. fig. 12.
Dentalina globuligera Neugeboren. 1856. Denkschr. d. K.

Akad. Wiss. Wien. xii. 81. pi. ii. fig. 10.
Nodosaria ovularis Costa. 1857. Mem. Accad. Sci. Napoli. ii.

141. pi. i. figs. 8, 9.
Dentalina distincta Reuss. i860. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xl. 184. pi. ii. fig. 5.
Dentalina catenula Id. Ibid. 185. pi. iii. fig. 6.
Dentalina discrepans Id. Ibid. 184. pi. iii. fig. 7
Dentalina soluta Stache. 1864. Novara Exped. geol. i. Pa-

laont. 203. pi. xii. fig. 29.
Nodosaria {D.) grandis Reuss. 1865. Denkschr d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. xxv. 131. pi. i. figs. 26-28.
Nodosaria {D.) soluta Id. Ibid. 131. pi. ii. figs. 4-8.
Nodosaria {D.) guttifera Parker and Jones. 1865. Phil. Trans.

civ. 343. pi. xiii. fig. II.
Dentalina soluta Hantken. 1875. Mitth. Jahrb. d. K. ung.

geol. Anstalt. iv. 29. pi. ii. figs. 2, 14.
Nodosaria (D.) soluta Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M.

S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 503. pi. Ixii. figs. 13-16 ; pi. ixiv.

fig. 28.

Test elongate, a little arcuate, with a few spherical chambers ;
with constricted interstices, first chamber somewhat mucronate,
the last produced into a short siphon ; aperture naked.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the yellow limestone. Rare.
Teredo bed. Frequent.

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 113

NODOSARIA VERTEBRALIS Batsch, sp.

Nautilus {Orthoceras) vertebralis Batsch. 1791- Conchyl. des

Seesandes. 3. No. 6. pi. ii. fig. 6. a, b.
Nodosaria fascia Parker, Jones, and Brady. 1865. Ann. and

Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3. xv. 227. No. vi.
Nodosaria vertehi-alis Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.
Challenger. Zool. ix. 514. pi. Ixiii. fig. 35 ; pi. Ixiv. figs. 11-
14.
'* The shell of Nodosaria vertebralis is long, slender, slightly ta-
pering, and generally more or less curved ; the segments are very
numerous and the septal lines straight; and the surface is marked
by distinct, continuous, longitudinal striae or riblets. The outline
is even and the sutures areunconstricted ; the septa are conspicu-
ously thick and formed of transparent shell substance, but not
limbate externally." — Brady, loc. cit.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare. Timber Creek, teredo bed. Not
abundant.

LINGULINA d'Orbigny.

LiNGULiNA CARiNATA d'Orbigny.

Lingulina carinata d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii. 257.

No. I ; Modele. No. 26.
Lingulina carinata d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Canaries. 124. pi.

i. figs. 5, 6.
Lingulina carinata WxWx^mson. 1858. Rec. Foram. Gt. Br. 14.

pi. ii. figs. 33-35.
Lingulina carinata Parker and Jones. 1S60. Foram. Chellast.

Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. xvi. pi. xix. figs. 13, 14.
Frondicularia nysti Reuss. 1863. Crag. d'Anvers Bull. Acad.

Belg. ser. 2. xv. 148. pi. ii. fig. 20.
Lingulina bursceforniis Giimbel. 1868. Nordalp. Eociin. K.

Bayr. Akad. Abhandl. 1. x. 628. pi. i. fig. 51.
Lingulina pygnicea^tVL%s. 1873. Geinitz' Elbthalgeb. Sachsen.

2. 90. II. 2c. fig. 23.
Lingulina glabra Hantken. 1875. Mitth. Jahtbuch. d. K. un-

gar. geol. Anstalt. iv. 42. pi. xiii. fig. 14.
Nodosarina carinata Goes. 1882. Kongl. Svenska Vet. Akad.

xix. pi. i. figs. 65-67.

114 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Linguliiia carinata Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.
Challenger. Zool, ix. 517. pi. Ixv. figs. 16, 17.

Test oblong-elongate, compressed, carinate, shining, smooth,
translucent, anteriorly rotund, posteriorly cuneate, with numerous
inequal chambers ; aperture linear, transverse.

Locality. Timber Creek, teredo bed. Rare. Gryphsea bed.
Rare.

FRONDICULARIA Defrance.

Frondicularia alata d'Orbigny.

''' JVaiitili caiidi/oniics" ?)o\ddL\M. 179S. Testaceographia. ii. 13.

pi. i. fig. C.
Frondicularia alata d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii. 256.

No. 2.
Frondicularia alata Parker, Jones, and Brady. 187 1. Ann. and

Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4. viii. 161. pi. x. fig. 66.
Frondicularia alata, var. sagittula Vanden Broeck. 1876. Ann.

Soc. Belg. Micr. ii. 113. pi. ii. figs. 12, 14.
Frondicularia alata, var. lanceolata Id. Ibid. 117, pi. ii. fig. 13.
Frondicularia complanata, var. concinna Id. Ibid. 109. pi. iii.

fig. 2.
Frondicularia alata Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 522. pi. Ixv. figs. 20-23 \ var. pi. Ixvi.

figs- 3-5-

"The figure in the Testaceographia, selected by d'Orbigny to
bear the name Frondicularia alata, is that of a short complanate
shell, which is very broad near the initial end, owing to the arms
of the V-shaped segments reaching back nearly into a line with
the primordial chamber. The free ends of the segments are irre-
gular, and most of them projecting and pointed. The drawing
is somewhat rough, but represents in their extreme development
characters easily recognized in more typical specimens.

" Referring to the illustrations, the two large figures (figs. 20,
21) represent good examples of the species in the adult condi-
tion, the free ends of the chambers forming a nearly straight line,
and one here and there extended into a projecting point. Such
shells attain large dimensions, the length sometimes exceeding
one-fifth inch (5 mm.). Vanden Broeck {loc. cit.) gives an ex-

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 115

cellent series of drawings, representing individual modifications
of the species rather than distinct varieties." — Brady, loc. cit.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill. Frequent.
Timber Creek, teredo bed. Rare. Gryphaea bed. Rare. Yel-
low limestone. Rare.

Frondicularia angusta Nilsson, sp.

Planularia angusta Nilsson. 1827. Petrifacta Suecana. 11. pi.

ix. fig. 22.
Fi'ondicularia angiistata Roemer. 1827. Petrifacta Suecana. 96.
Frondicularia angusta Reuss. 1844. Geog. Skizzen. aus Boh.

ii. 211.
Frondicularia angusta Geinitz. 1844. Geog. Skizzen. aus Boh.

ii. 70. pi. xvii. fig. 22.
Frondicularia angusta Reuss. 1845. Versteinerungen der boh.

Kreid. 20. pi. viii. figs. 13, 14.

" Test 2-6"' elongate, small, lancet-shaped, at the lower end
much elongated, above pointed, broadest at or above the centre.
From the centre out to the marginal borders decreasing. Nu-
merous (15-25) very small chambers, which are separated by
proportionally broad roof-shaped sloping edges. These are inter-
rupted in the centre by a longitudinal furrow which is smaller
below, and moreover striated by more fine short lateral furrows,
which nevertheless are not continued into the spaces between the
edges. The lowest chamber very small, quite spherical, on every
side provided with thin sharp longitudinal ribs and a short point
on the base. The tolerably sharp lateral margin is continued
over the first chamber to the end of the shell. "^-Reuss, loc. cit.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Quite rare. Bruere's pits, Crosswick's
Creek, lower marl bed, above the gray layer. Rare. Timber
Creek, in the teredo bed. Quite rare.

MARGINULINA d'Orbigny.

Marginulina costata Batsch, sp.

N'autilus {Ortkoceras) costatus Batsch. 1791. Conchyl. des See-

sandes. 2. pi. i. fig. i. a-g.
" Orthoceratia, Raphanus, Raphanistruni et Rapistrum " Soldani.

116 jouRNAi. OF THK [October,

1791. Testaceographia. i. pt. 2. 91. pi. xciv. figs. N, P, Q,

R, X, Y.
Marginulina r-aphanus d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii.

258. No. I. pi. X. figs. 7, 8 ; Modele. No. 6.
Marginulina interaimiice Costa. 1856. Atti dell' Accad. Pont.

vii. 184. pi. xiii. fig. 9.
Marginulina obliquestriata Karrer. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K.

Akad. Wiss. Wien. xliv. 446. pi. i. fig. 8.
Marginulina striatocostata Reuss. 1862. Ibid. xlvi. 62. pi. vi. 1

fig. 2.
Marginulina turgida Id. Ibid. 63. pi. vi. fig. 7.
Marginulina raphanus Parker, Jones, and Brady. 1865. Ann.

Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3. xvi. 19. pi. i. fig. 35.
Marginulina hamus Terquem. 1866. Foram. du Lias. 6'^™®

mem. 501. pi. xxi. fig. 8. a, b.
Maj'ginulina radiata Id. Ibid. 505. pi. xxi. figs. 16, 17.
Marginulina, var. crebicosta Seguenza. 1880. Atti R. Accad.

dei Lincei. ser. 3. vi. 90. pi. ix. fig. 6.
Margifiulijia costata Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 528. pi. Ixv. figs. 10-13.

Test elongate, cylindrical, the chambers or members separated
from each other like balls, but are connected by strong ribs,
which unbrokenly extend over the entire shell and for the most
part have a rectilinear back.

Locality. Timber Creek, teredo bed. Rare.

VAGINULINA d'Orbigny.
Vaginulina. legumen Linne, sp.

Nautihis legumen Linne. 1758. Syst. Nat. loth ed. 711. No.

248 ; 1767. 12th ed. 1164. No. 288.
Nautilus {Orthoceras) leguminiformis Batsch. 1791. Conchyl.

des Seesandes. No. 8. pi. iii. fig. 8. a.
Vaginulina legumen d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii. 257.

No. 2.
Vaginulina Icevigata Roemer. 1S38. Neues. Jahrb. flir Min. etc.

383. pi. iii. fig. II.
Vaginulina elongata Roemer. 1840. Verst. Nordd. Kreid. 96,

pi. XV. fig. 13.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 117

Nodosaria legumen Reuss. 1845. Verst. bohm, Kreid. part i.

28. pi. xiii. figs. 23, 24.
Denfalina legumen Williamson. 1858. Rect. Foram. Gt. Br. 21.

pi. ii. fig. 45.
VaginuUua legumen Jones, Parker, and Brady. 1866. Monogr.

Foram. Crag. 64. pi. iv. fig. 9.
Vaginulina legutnen Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 530. pi. Ixvi. figs. 13-15.

Test smooth, sometimes straight, often arcuate, and sometimes
considerably so ; slightly compressed laterally ; consisting of a
linear series of flat, smooth, oblique segments, rarely exceeding
twelve in number. Primordial segment abruptly truncate ; some-
times cuneiform ; occasionally prolonged into a large, solid, trans-
parent mucro. Peripheral outline entire, and not lobulated ;
though sometimes having the ultimate segment ventricose, and
separated from the rest by a deeply constricted septal line. Septal
lines smooth, oblique ; tending backwards as they approach the
convex margin of the shell. Septal aperture at the extremity of
the ultimate segment, which extremity is not central, but at the
concave margin ; surrounded by a well-defined coronal.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare.

Vaginulina linearis Montagu, sp.

Nautilus linearis Montagu. 1808. Test. Brit. Suppl. 87. pi.

XXX. fig. 9.
Alarginulina vaginella Reuss. 1851. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol.

Gesellsch. lii. 152. pi. viii. fig. 2.
Vaginulina striata Costa. 1856. Atti dell' Accad. Pont. vii.

182. pi. xvi. fig. 17.
Dentalina legumen^ var. ///'^i?ar/j» Williamson. 1858. Rect. Foram.

Gt. Br. 23. pi. ii. figs. 46-48.
Vaginulina linearis Parker and Jones. 1865. Phil. Trans, civ.

343. xiii. figs. 12, 13.
Vaginulina linearis Jones, Parker, and Brady. 1866. Mono-
graph of the Foram. of the Crag. 67. pi. i. figs. 10-12.
Vaginulina eoccena G\xmht\. 1868. Abhand. d. K. bayer. Akad.

d. Wiss. II. Cl. X. 632. pi. i. fig. 48. a, b.

118 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Cristellaria dilute-striata Id. Ibid. 639. pi. i. fig. 69.
Vaginulina linearis Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.
Challenger. Zool. ix. 532. pi. Ixvii. figs. 10-12.

Test straight or bent, more or less compressed ; chambers com-
pactly set on, more or less oval in section ; ornamented in a vari-
able degree with delicate parallel riblets, mostly oblique to axis of
the shell ; aperture eccentric.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare. New Egypt, in the lower green
marl. Fragments. Bruere's pits, Crosswick's Creek, lower marl
bed, above the gray layers. Rare.

CRISTELLARIA Lamarck.
Cristellaria acutauricularis Fichtel and Moll, sp.

^'' Hammoniie subrotund'X,'' etc, Soldani. 1789. Testaceographia.

i. pt. I. 61. pi. xlix. fig. X.
Nautilus acutauricularis Fichtel and Moll. 1803. Test. Micr.

102. pi. xviii. figs. g-i.
Cristellaria navicula d'Orhigwy. 1840. Mem. Soc. geol. France.

iv. 27. pi. ii. figs. 19, 20.
Cristellaria polita Reuss. 1855. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xviii. 237. pi. iii. fig. 41.
Robulina liinbata (pars) Bornemann, 1855. Zeitschr. d. deutsch.

geol. Gesellsch. vii. 335. pi. xv. figs. 4, 5.
Cristellaria acutauricularis Parker and Jones, i860. Ann. and

Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3. v. 114. No. 20.
Cristellaria acutauricularis Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H.

M. S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 543. pi cxiv. fig. 17. a, b.

Test spiral, involute, suboval, smooth, ventricose, exumbili-
cate, keel acute carinate ; convolutions with ten conspicuous
subelevated joints ; dissepiments moderately convex in front,
oval plane ovate-convex, marginate, with the exterior angle com-
pressed, obtuse, subincurvate ; with orifice in the extremity of
the said angle minutely rotund.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the gryphaea bed. Rare.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 119

Cristellaria articulata Reuss.

Robulina articulata Levi's,?,. 1863. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xlviii. 53. pi. v. fig 62.
Cristellaria articulata Id. 1870. Ibid. Ixii. 483 ; Schlicht. 1870.

Foram. Pietzpuhl. pi. xvii. figs. 5-12.
Cristellaria articulata Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M.

S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 547. Ixix. figs. 10-12 ; wild-growing

forms, figs. 1-4.

Test quite circular, slightly angular, compressed, in the centre
slightly beaked, with six to eight curved chambers of which the
last are moderately broadly triangular, considerably arched, sepa-
rated by deep sutures, the septal walls of the last chamber oval,
deeply outlined on the base, slightly convex.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Quite rare. Timber Creek, teredo
bed. R.are.

Cristellaria crepidula Fichtel and Moll, sp.

Nautilus crepidula Fichtel and Moll. 1803. Test. Micr. 107.

pi. xix. figs. g-i.
Cristellaria crepidula d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Cuba. 64. pi.

viii. figs. 17, 18.
Cristellaria berthelotiana d'Oxh'xgny. 1839. Foram. Canaries. 125.

pi. i. figs. 14, 15.
Cristellaria intermedia Reuss. 1845. Verstein. bohm. Kreid. pt.

i- ZZ. 108. pi. xiii. figs. 57, 58 ; pt. ii. pi. xxiv. figs. 50, 51.
Cristellaria cymboides d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 85.

pi. iii. figs. 30, 31.
Cristellaria intermedia Alth. 1850. Haidinger's Naturw. Ab-

handl. iii. 267. pi. xiii. fig. 23.
Cristellaria jugleri Reuss. 1851.° Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol.

Gesellsch. iii. 89. pi. iv. fig. 19. a, b.
Cristellaria subarcuatula Williamson. 1858. Rect. Foram. Gt.

Br. 29. pi. ii. figs. 56, 57.
Cristellaria intermedia Reuss, var. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K.

Akad. Wiss. Wien. xliv. 328. pi. viii. fig. 2.
Cristellaria grata Reuss. 1862. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xlvi. 70. pi. vii. fig. 14.

120 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Cristellaria pla7iiiiscula Id. Ibid. 71. pi. vii. fig. 15.

Cristellaria cordiformis Terquem. 1S63. Foram. du Lias. 3ieme

mem. 203. pi. ix. fig. 14. a, b.
Cristellaria acuminata Id. Ibid. 210. pi. x. fig. 5. a, b.
Hemirobulina compressa Stache. 1864. Novara Exped. i. Pala-

ont. 229. pi. xxiii. fig. 8. a, b.
Cristellaria crepidula Parker and Jones. 1865. Phil. Trans.

civ. 344. pi. xiii. figs. 15, 16 ; pi. xvi. fig. 4.
Cristellaria kochi Reuss. 1866. Denkschr. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xxv. 139. pi. ii. fig. 35. a, b.
Cristellaria galeata Id. Ibid. 141. pi. iii. fig. 8. a, b.
Cristellaria crepidula Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 542. pi. Ixvii. figs. 17, 19, 20; pi. Ixviii.

figs. I, 2.
Test spiral subinvolute, elongate, slightly curved, smooth,
pellucid, compressed, with subelevated sides, back obtuse, 12-13
conspicuous chambers, planate except the last which is more ele-
vated ; chamber walls slightly convex anteriorly, radiating from
a common centre with the last two or three, scarcely elevate plane-
oval lanceolate convex ; orifice minute rotund slightly crenate
on the outside of the angle.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare.

Cristellaria cultrata Montfort, sp.

"' Cornu Hainmonis'^ Plancus. 1760. Conch. Min. ed. altera-

120. pi. i. fig. xii. sec. 552.
^^ Nautili {LeiiticulcB marginatczY' Soldani. 1789. Testaceographia.

i. pt. I. 54. pi. xxxiii. figs. B etc.
Robulus cultratus Montfort. 1808. Conchyl. System, i. 214

54^ genre.
Robulina cultrata d'Orbigny. * 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii. 287.

No. I ; Modele No. 82.
Robulina canariensis d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Canaries. 127.

pi. iii. figs. 3, 4.
Robulina subcultrata d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Amer. Merid.

26. pi. V. figs. 19, 20.
Robulina cultrata d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 96. pi.

iv. figs. 10-13.

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 121

Robuli7ia similis d'Orbigny. Ibid. 98. pi. iv. figs. 14, 15.
Cristellaria hoffmanni Ehrenberg. 1854. Mikrogeologie. pi. xxvi.

fig- 53-
Robulma li?nbosa Reuss. 1863. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xlviii. 55. pi. vi. fig. 69.
Cristellaria gyroscalprum Stache. 1864. Novara Exped. geol.

i. Palaont. 243. pi. xxiii. fig. 22. a, b.
Robulina cultrata, var. aniipodum Id. Ibid. 251. pi. xxiii. fig. 30.

a, b.
Robulina tcettovata Id. Ibid. 253. pi. xxiii. fig. 32. a, b.
Cristellaria cultrata Parker and Jones. 1865. Phil. Trans, civ.

344. pi. xiii. figs. 17, 18 ; pi. xvi. fig. 5.
Robulina curvispira Seguenza. 1879. Atti R. Accad. dei Lincei.

ser. 3. vi. 144. pi. xiii. fig. 28.
Robulina stellata Id. Ibid. 144. pi. xiii. fig. 29.
Robulina dubia Id. Ibid. 144. pi. xiii. fig, 30.
Cristellaria cultrata Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 550. pi. Ixx. figs. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
Cristellaria cultrata Whiteaves. 1887. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can.

iv. 114.

Test orbicular-convex, smooth, or radiate, costate, carinate
margin, lamellose ; with eight oblique chambers, somewhat con-
vex, smooth or costate, with the last excavated above, aperture
radiate.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Common. Bruere's pit, Crosswick's
Creek, lower marl bed above the gray layers. Not common.
New Egypt, green marl. Fragments. Timber Creek, teredo bed.
Common. Marlborough, green marl. Quite abundant.

Cristellaria gibba d'Orbigny.

Cristellaria gibbia d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Cuba. 6^. pi. vii.

figs. 20, 21.
Cristellaria excisa Bornemann. 1855. Zeitschr. d. deutsch.

geol. Gesellsch. vii. 328. pi. xiii. figs. 19, 20.
Cristellaria nuda Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Ak. Wiss.

Wien. xliv. 328. pi. vi. figs. 1-3.
Cristellaria pulchella Id. 1862. Ibid. xlvi. 71. pi. viii. fig. i.

122 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Robulina concinna Id. 1863. Ibid, xlviii. 52. pi. v. fig. 58.
CristeUaria gibba Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.
Challenger. Zool. ix. 546. pi. Ixix. figs. 8, 9.

Test oblong-convex, inflated, subcarinate, smooth, shining,
yellowish ; ten elongate chambers, arcuate, terminal one subcon-
cave above, margined, with sutures complanate, umbilicus im-
pressed ; aperture marginate, radiate.

Locality. vStratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Quite rare. Timber Creek, teredo
bed. Quite rare. Gryphsa bed. Rare.

Cristellaria italica Defrance, sp.

Saracenaria italica Defrance. 1824. Diet. Sci. Nat. xxxii. 177 ;

xlvii. 344. Atlas Conch, pi. xiii. fig. 6.
Saracenaria italica Blainville. 1825. Man. de Malacol. 370. pi.

V. fig. 6.
Cristellaria {Saracenaria) italica 6: Oxhigwy. 1826. Ann. Sci.

Nat. vii. 293. No. 26. Modeles Nos. 19 and 85.
Frondicularia friedra Costa. 1856. Atti dell' Accad. Pont. vii.

174. pi. xiii. figs. 26, 27.
Cristellaria italica Parker, Jones, and Brady. 1865. Ann. and

Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3. xvi. 22, 32. pi. i. figs. 41, 42.
Cristellaria {Margini/liua) italica, \2.x. cinctaY^^iXX^x. 1877. Geol.

K. F.-J. Wasserleitung. 383. pi. xvi. b. fig. 38.
Cristellaria {Marginulina) italica, var. aureola Id. Ibid. 383.

pi. xvi. b. fig. 39.
Cristellaria italica Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 544. pi. Ixviii. figs. 17, 18, 20-23.

" Saracenaria. Shell almost microscopical, oval, celled, with a
sort of sinuous keel in its middle, from which start oblique striae,
indications of interior partitions, not sinuous, which divide its
cavity into two ranges of chambers ; no trace of an exterior open-
ing."— D'Blainville. 370. pi. v. fig. 6.

" The test of Cristellaria italica is elongate and trihedral ; the
planospiral segments are few and inconspicuous, whilst those of
the body of the shell are superimposed so as to form a curved
line. The convex or dorsal margin is sharp but not carinate, and
the ventral face is so broad that the transverse section of the shell

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 123

has the form of a nearly equilateral triangle. The segments are
short and obliquely set, dipping at the front more or less towards
the initial end, as in VaginuUna." — Brady, .loc. cit.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare.

This being such a peculiar species I have given the original
generic description and specific characters given by my esteemed
friend, H. B. Brady.

Cristellaria rotulata Lamarck, sp.

' Cornii ffammonis seu Nautili'' Plancus. 1739. Conch. Minn.

13. pi. i. fig. III.
Lenticulites rotulata Lamarck. 1804. Ann. du Museum, v. 188.

No. 3 ; Tableau Encycl. et Meth. pi. cccclxvi fig. 5.
Robulina miiensteri Roemer. 1841. Verstein. norddeutsch.

Kreid. pt, 2. 98. pi. xv. fig. 30.
Cristellaria rotulata Forbes. 1845. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. i.

65, 66. fig.
Robulina simplex d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 102. pi.

iv. figs. 27, 28.
Robulina stellifera Czjzek. 1847. Haidinger's Naturw. Abhandl.

ii. 142. pi. xii. figs. 26, 27.
Robulina trigonostoma Reuss. 185 1. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol.

Gesellsch. iii. 69. pi. iv. fig. 26.
Robulina neglect a Id. Ibid. 69. pi. iv. fig. 27.
Robulina def or mis (pars) Bornemann. 1855. Ibid. vii. 337. pi.

xiv. fig. I.
Robulijia depauperata Id. Ibid. 337. pi. xiv. fig. 11.
Robulina incompta (?) Id. Ibid. 336. pi. xiv. fig. 12.
Cristellaria calcar (typica) Williamson. 1858. Rec. Foram. Gt.

Br. 27. pi. ii. figs. 52, 53.
Cristellaria rotulata ^QWi^. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xliv. 326, 336.
Phonemus {^Cristellaria) rotulatus (d'Orbigny ?) Meek. 1864.

Smithsonian Inst. Mis. Coll. 177. i.
Cristellaria rotulata Parker and Jones. 1865. Phil. Trans, civ.

345. pi. xiii. fig. 19.
Cristellaria inornata Terquem. 1876. Anim. sur la Plage de

Dunkerque. 70. pi. vii. fig. 18.

124 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Cristellaria aiistriaca Id. Ibid. 70. pi. vii. fig. 20. a, b.

Cristcllaria simplex Id. Ibid. 70. pi. vii. fig. 21. a, b.

Robulina simplicissiiiia Seguenza. 1879. Atti R. Accad. dei Lin-

cei. ser. 3. vi. 141. pi. xiii. fig. 18.
Robuliua lucida Id. Ibid. 142. pi. xiii. fig. 19.
Cristellaria falcifer Stache. 1864. Novara Exped. geol. i. Pa-

laont. 240. pi. xxiii. fig. 19 a, b.
Cristellaria rotulata Schlumberger. 1882. Journ. Cin. Soc. Nat.

Hist. V. 119 pi. V. figs. 2, 2a.
Cristellaria rotulata ^x-a.dy. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 547. Ixix. fig. 13. a, b.

Test orbiculate, con .'ex, smooth, nDn-costate sutures forming a
star in the plane centre, without central disc, margin narrowly
carinate ; nine triangular narrow complanate chambers ; aper-
ture radiate

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Very common. Timber Creek, in the
yellov,' limestone. Abundant. Teredo bed. Not abundant.

Cristellaria wetherellii Jones, sp.

Margi/iiiliiia sp. Sowerby. 1834. Trans. Geol. Soc. Lond. ser.

2. V. 135. pi. ix. fig. 12.
Marginulina wetherellii Jones. 1854. Morris's Cat. Brit. Foss. 37.
Marginiilina wetherellii Parker and Jones. 1859. Ann. and Mag.

Nat. Hist. ser. 3. iv. 350.
Marginulina fragaria Giimbel, 1868. Abhandl. d. K. bayer.

Akad. d. Wiss. II. cl x. 635. pi i. fig. 58. a, b, c.
Cristellaria asperula Id. ibid. pi. i. fig. 65. a, b.
Cristellaria areuata Hantken. 1875. Mittheil. Jahrb. d. K. ung.

geol. Anstait. iv. 51. pi. v. fig. 10.
Cristellaria fragaria Id Ibid. 53. pi. vi. figs. 1-3.
Cristellaria ivetherellii Brady, i 884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 537. pi. cxiv. fig. 14.

"The test of Cristellaria 7vctherellii is usually ]Dod-like or
crosier-shaped, but varies greatly in length and in the relative
development of the spiral and linear portions. It is, however,
always more or less spiral at the commencement, and almost in-
variably exhibits considerable lateral compression ; therefore, so

1894] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 125

far as such characters are of any distinctive value, it belongs to
the genus Cristellaria rather than to MarginuUna. The salient
feature of the species is its peculiar surface-decoration, consisting
of closely-set raised tubercles, which take the place of continuous
limbate septal lines. These are often, but not invariably, con-
nected by slight, oblique, longitudinal costse, most apparent on
the earlier portions of the shell." — Brady, loc. cit.

Locality. vStratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Quite rare. Timber Creek, teredo
bed. Abundant.

Sub-family POLYMORPHININ.^
POLYMORPHINA d'Orbigny.

POLYMORPHINA ANGUSTA EggCr.

Po'vinorpkina {^Globulina) fiisiformis Roemer. 1838. Neues

Jahrb. fiir Min. 386. pi. iii. fig. 37.
Polymorphina liassica Strickland. 1845. Quart. Journ. Geol.

Soc. ii. 30. fig. b.
Globiilina leopolitana Reuss. 1850. Haidinger's Abhandl. iv. 44.

pi. V. fig. I I.

Grammostomuin turis Ehrenberg. 1S54. Mikrogeologie. pi. xxvi.

fig. 19.
Globiilina acuta ^^vl^"^. 1855. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. VVissensch.

xviii. 51. pi. vi. fig. 62.
Polymorphina {^Globiilina) angusia Egger. 1857. Neues Jahrb.

fiir Min. 290. pi. xiii. figs. 13, 15.
Polymorphina suhrhonibica Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. xliv. 339. pi. vii. fig. 3
Polymorphina lanceolata (pars) Reuss. 1870. Sitzungsb. d. K.

Akad. Wiss. Wien. Ixii. 487. No. 12 ; Schlicht. 1870. Forara.

Pietzpuhl. pi. xxxi. figs. 2, 3. 4.
Polymorphina gracilis Id. Ibid. Schlicht. 1870. Foram. Pietz-
puhl. 486. No. 7. pi. xxxi. figs. 34, 45.
Polymorphina fiisiformis (pars) Brady, Parker, and Jones. 1870.

Trans. Linn. Soc Lond. xxvii. 219, pi. xxxix. fig. 5. a, b, c.
Polymorphina angiista Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 563. pi. ixxi. figs. 1-3.
Test elongate, subcylindrical, tapering at both extremities-

126 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Chambers few, from three to four, oblique, somewhat convex,
septal lines but slightly depressed. Surface smooth.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare.

PoLYMORPHiNA COMMUNIS d'Orbigny.

Polymorp/iina {Guttulina) coini)iiiiiis d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann. Sci.

Nat. vii. 226. No. 15. pi. 12. figs. 1-4; Modele No 62.
Guttulina vitrea d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Cuba. 128. pi. ii.

figs. 1-3
Polyuiorphina {Guttulina) cflmiiiiinis'^oyzxwQX. 1838. Neues Jahrb.

fiir Min. Jahr. 1838. 385. pi. iii. fig. 29.
PGlymorphina glomerata^oQ.m^x. 1841. Verstein. norddeutsch.

Kreid. pt. 2. 19. pi. xv. fig. 19.
Polymorphiiia glomerata Reuss 1845. Verstein. bohm. Kreid.

pt. I. 40. pi. xii. fig. 32.
Guttulitia communis Reuss. 1845. In Ceinitz's Grundriss der

Verstein. 669. pi. xxiv. fig. 82.
Guttulina communis d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 224.

pi. xiii. figs. 6-8.
Guttulina irregularis d'Orbigny. Id. Ibid. 226. pi. xiii. figs. 9,

10.
Globulina discreta Reuss. 1849. Denkschr. Mathem-Natur. CI.

K. Akad. VVissensch. i. 378. pi. xlviii. fig. 10.
Guttulina cetacea Alth. 1849. Haidinger's Abhandl. iii. 262.

pi. xiii. fig. 14.
Guttulina semiplana Reuss. 1851. Deutsch. d. geol. Gesell. iii.

82. pi. vi. fig. 48
Guttulina semiplana Bornemann 1855. Zeitsch. deutsch. geol.

Gesell. vii. 344. -
Polymorplii/ui {Guttulina) communis Egger. 1857. Neues Jahrb.

fiir Min. Jahr. 1857. 288. pi. xiii. figs. 16-iS.
Polymorphina {Guttulina) lata Egger. Ibid. 228. pi. xiii. figs.

22-24.
Guttalina fissurata Stache. 1865. Novara Exped. Geol. i. pt. 2.

263. pi. xxiv. fig. 10.
Guttalina obliquata Id. Ibid. 264. pi. xxiv. fig. 11.
Polymorphina proble ma, way. deltoidea Kmis?,. 1866. Denkschr. d.

mathem. Natur. Cl. Akad. Wiss. xxv. 154. pi. iv. fig. 8.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 127

Polyinorphina scuiiplana Reuss. 1870. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. Ixii. 488 No. 16 ; Schlicht. 1870. Foram. Pietz-

puhl. pi. xxvii. figs. 22-33.
Polyinorphina problenta^ var communis Id. Ibid. 487. No. 15 ;

Schlicht. pi. XXX. figs. 13-16.
/'6'/)7;/C'';7^/////<z rc7;;/;/////?/.y Brady, Parker, and Jones. 1870. Trans.

Linn. Soc. Lond- xxvii. 224. pi. xxxix. fig. 10. a, b.
Polymorphina communis Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H.

M. S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 568. pi. Ixxii. fig. 19.
Test ovate, gibbous, more or less compressed at three sides ;
anterior extremity acute ; posterior obtuse and rounded. Cham-
bers few, oblique, inflated. Sutures depressed. Surface smooth.
Aperture circular, coronate.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare. Timber Creek, in the yellow
limestone. Rare. Teredo bed. Abundant. In the gryphaea
bed. Rare.

PoLYMORPHi.NTA COMPRESSA d'Orbigny.

Fistulose form.

Polvinorpha corcula spinosa Soldani. 1791. Testaceographia ac

Zoophytographia. i. pt. 2. pis. 109-111.
Guttulina damcecornis ^Qn'-,?^. 1845. Verst. bohm, Kreid. I'^Ab-

theil. 40. pi. xiii. fig. 85.
Guttulina tubulosa d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 228.

pi. xiii figs. 15, 16.
Aulostomella pediculus Alth. 1849. Haidinger's Naturw. Ab-

handl. iii. 264. pi. xiii. fig. 17.
Globulina horrida Reuss. 1850. Ibid. iv. 43. pi. iv. fig. 8.
Polymorphina fistulosa Williamson. 1858. Rec. Foram. Gt. Brit.

72. pi. vi. fig. 150.
Polymorphina lactea, var. tubulosa Parker and Jones. 1865.

Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. civ. 362. pi. xiii. fig. 52. a-d.
Polymorphijia orbignii (pars) Brady, Parker, and Jones. 1870.

Trans. Linn, Soc. Lond. xxvii. 244. pi. xiii. fig. 38. d,
Polymorphina compressa (Fistulose form) Brady. 1884. Report

on Foram. H, M. S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 566. pi. Ixxiii.

fig. 17.

128 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Polymorphina coinpressa Whiteaves. 1887. Trans. Roy. Soc.
Can. iv. 114.

Test free or adherent. General form variable ; oval, oblong,
or compressed. Terminal segments developing numerous irreg-
ular expansions and tubular outgrowths.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare. Timber Creek, in the yellow
limestone. Quite rare.

Polymorphina lactea Walker and Jacob, sp.

''' Serpula tenuis ovalis hcvis" Walker and Boys. 1784. Test.

Min. 2. pi. i. fig. 5.
Serpula lactea Walker and Jacob. 1798 (fide Kanmacher).

Adams' Essays. 2d ed. 634. pi. xxiv. fig. 4.
Vermiculuin lacteum Montagu. 1803. Test. Brit. 522.
Guttulina plancii d'Orbigny. 1839. Voyage dans I'Amer. Me-

rid. 60. pi. i. fig. 5.
Polymorphiua lactea M.3iCg\\\\\x?iy. 1843. Moll, Aberd. 320.
Arethusa lactea Thorpe. 1844. Brit. Mar. Conch. 233.
Globulina lachryma Reuss. 1845. Verstein. bohm. Kreid. pt. i.

40, no. pi. xiii. fig. 83; Alth. 1849. Haidinger's Ab-

handl. iii. 263. pi. xiii. fig. 16 ; Reuss. 1850. Ibid. iv. 43.

pi. v. fig. 9.
Pyrulina ovuluin Ehrenberg. 1854. Mikrogeologie. pi. xxxi. figs.

35' 36-
Polymorpliina iiuiensteri Reuss. 1855. Sitzungsb. d K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. xviii. 249. pi. viii. fig. 80.
Globulina roeineri Id. Ibid. 245. pi. vi. fig. 63.
Polymorphina lactea, typica (pars) Williamson. 1858. Rec. Fo-

ram. Gt. Brit. 71. pi. vi. fig. 147.
Polymorphina lactea. var. connnunis Id. Ibid. 72. pi. vi. figs. 153

-155-
Polymorphina lactea Dawson. 1859. Can. Nat. and Geologist.

iv. 28. figs. 2, 3.
Guttulina diluta Bornemann. i860. Zeitschr. deutsch. geol.

Gesellsch xii. 160. pi. vi. fig. 11.
Globulina lacrima Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xliv. 318, 338.
Polymorphina lactea Brady, Parker, and Jones. 1870. (Mono-

1894.] new-Vork Microscopical society. 129

graph oi Polymorphina) Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. xxvii. 213,

pi. xxxix. fig. I. a-c.
Polymorphina lactea Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 559. pi, Ixxi. (typical) fig. 11 ; (var.)

fig. 14.
Polymorphina lactea VVhiteaves. 1887. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can.

iv. 114.

Fistulose form.

^^ Polymorpha corcula spinosa" Soldani. 1791. Testaceogra-

phia. i. pt. 2. 114. pi. cix. fig. I, etc.
Misilus aqiiatifer Montfort. 1808. Conch. System, i. 294. 74^

genre.
Apiopterina d'Orbigni Zborzevvski. 1834. Nouv. Mem. Soc.

Imp. Nat. Moscou. iii. 311. pi. xxviii. fig. 2. b.
Polomorphina lactea (fistulose form) Brady. 1884. Report on

Foram. H. M. S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 560. pi. Ixxiii. fig. 14.
Test ovate, gibbous, slightly unsymmetrical ; anterior extrem-
ity acute ; posterior obtuse, rounded. Chambers few, oblong,
oblique, somewhat inflated. Sutures depressed. Surface smooth.
Aperture simple, circular or oval, radiate.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the yellow limestone. Rare.
Teredo bed. Quite abundant.

The fistulose forms are those having a hollow, like a pipe or
reed. They are occasionally found in the teredo bed.

Polymorphina oblonga d'Orbigny.
Polymorphina oblonga d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien.

232. pi. xxii. figs. 29—31.
Polymorphina uvceformis Reuss. 1855. Zeitschr. d. deutsch.

geol. Gesellsch. vii. 289. fig. 5.
Polymorphina guttata Reuss. 1870. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.
Wiss. Wien. Ixii, 487 ; Schlicht. 1870. Foram. Pietzpuhl.
pi. XXX. figs. 25-32.
Polymorphina oblonga Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M.
S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 569. pi. Ixxiii. figs. 2-4.
Test elongate, smooth, anteriorly acuminate, posteriorly obtuse,
compressed ; with six oblong chambers, convex ; sutures exca-
vate, aperture radiate.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the teredo bed. Rare.

130 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

PoLYMORPHiNA PROBLEMA d'Orbigny.

Polymorphina {Guttitlina) p>'ol>le/)ia d'Ovh'xgwy. 1826. Ann. Sci.

Nat. vii. 266. No. 14 ; Modele No. 61.
Polymorphina ^Giittiilina) crassatina Minister. 1838 (fide Roe-

mer). Neues Jahrb. fiir Min. Jahr. 1838. 385.pl. iii. fig. 30.
Polyino)phina {^Gitttiilina) spicceformis Roemer. 1838. Ibid.

.386. pi. iii. fig. 31.
Gi/tfii/inci prohlcma Reuss. 1845. In Geinitz's Grundriss der

Verstein. 669. pi. xxiv. fig. '^2,-
Gitttiilina prohlcma d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 224.

pi. xii. figs. 26-28.
Giittitlina aiistriaca Id. Ibid. 223. pi. xii. figs. 23-25.
Giittiiliiia cretacea Alth. 1849. Haidingcr s Nalurw. Abhandl.

iii. 262. pi. xiii. fig. 14.
Polymorphina uvula Ehrenberg. 1854. Mikrogeologie. pi. xxvi.

^ fig. 28.
Polymorphina uvula Egger. 1857. Neues Jahrb. fiir Min. Jahr.

1857. 285. pi. x. figs. 26-29.
Guttulina cretacea Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xliv. 319, 339.
Guttulina rotunJata Reuss. 1864. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. 1. 469. pi. iii. fig. 4.
Guttulina pusilla Stache. 1865. Novara Exped. Geol. i. pt. 2.

265. pi. xxiv. fig. 12.
Polymorphina //W'/ciw^? Parker, Jones, and Brady. 1866. Monogr.

Crag Foram. pi. i. fig. 64.
PolymorpJiina prol^lcnia \ix'a.^y,Y'Ax\iitx, ^x\(\. Jones. 1870. Trans.

Linn. Soc. Lond. xxvii. 225. pi. xxxix. fig. 11. a, b.
Polymorphina problema Brady. 1884. Report Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 568. pi. Ixxii. fig. 20 ; pi. Ixxiii. fig. i.
Test oblong, ovate, irregular. Chambers numerous, much in-
flated, and separated by deep sutures ; sometimes arranged tri-
serially, but more frequently crowded together irregularly ; orifice
round, radiate ; surface smooth.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare. Timber Creek, in the teredo
bed. Abundant.

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. I3l

PoLYMORPHiNA REGULARis von Munster.

Polymorphina?-egj{laris von yiux\%\.tr. 1838 (fide Roemer). Neues

Jahrb. fur Min. Jahr. 1838. 385. pi. 3. fig. 21.
Polymorphina regularis Philippi. 1844. Beitrage zur Kennt-

niss d. Tertiarverst. nordwest. Deutsch. 41, 70.
Polymorphina regularisYi.3ir^iQV\. 1849. Verzeichn. d. Rostock.

Verst. a. d. Sternberger Gestein. 8.
Polymorphina regularis Reuss. 1855. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.
Wiss. Wien. xviii. 247. pi. vii. figs. 70-73 ; 1. 38. pi. iii. figs.
II, 12. pi. iv. fig. i.
Polymorphina regularis, var. Nysti Reuss. 1863. Bullet, de

I'Acad. roy. de Belgique. xv. 162. pi. iii. fig. 42.
Polymorphina lingulata Stache. 1865. Novara Reise i. 2^* Ab-

theil. Palaont. von Neu-Seeland. 255. pi. 24. fig. i.
Polymorphina marsupium Stache. 1865. Novara Reise. i. 2'*

Abtheil. Palaont. von Neu-Seeland. 258. pi. xxiv. fig. 5.
Polymorphina dispar Stache. 1865. Novara Reise. i. 2'^ Ab-
theil. Palaont. von Neu-Seeland. 261. pi. xxiv. fig. 8.
Polymorphina gigantea Stache. 1865. Novara Reise. i. 2'^ Ab-
theil. Palaont. von Neu-Seeland. 262. pi. xxiv. fig. 9.
Polymorphina regularis Brady, Parker, and Jones. 1870,
Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. xxvii. 229, pi. xl. fig. 13. a-c.
Test oblong, irregularly biconvex, broadest in the upper half,
tapering towards both base and apex ; periphery thin and pro-
duced but not carinate. Septal lines marked by slight constric-
tion. Chambers numerous, long, oblique. Surface smooth.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Common. Timber Creek, in the te-
redo bed. Not common.

Polymorphina rotundata Bornemann, sp.

Guttulina rotundata Bornemann. 1855. Zeitschr. d. deutsch.

geol. Gesellsch. vii. 346. pi. xi. p. xviii. fig. 3.
Guttulina incurva Id. Ibid. 345. pi. xvii. fig. 6,
Guttulina fracta Id. Ibid. 344. pi. xvii. fig. 4.
Guttulina dimorpha Id. Ibid. 345. pi. xvii. fig. 5.
Polymorphina rotmida Reuss. 1866. Denkschr. mathem. Na-

turw. CI. K. Akad. Wissensch. xxv. 153.

132 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Polymorphina tenera Karrer. 1868. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. Iviii. 174. pi. iv. fig. 9.
Rostrolina sp. Schlicht. 1870. Foram. Pietzpuhl. 72. No. 412.

pi. xxvi. figs. 13-15.
Polymo7'phina rotunda Reuss. 1870. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien, Ixii. 487. No. 14; Schlicht. op. cit. pi. xxvi.
■ figs. 13-15 ; Pl- xxviii. figs. 1-5 ; pl.xxx. figs. 33-40.
Polymorphina turgida Id. Ibid. 487. No. 10 ; Schlicht. pi. xxviii.

figs. 6-10 ; pi. xxix. figs. 1-5.
Polytnorphina rotundata Brady, Parker, and Jones. 1870. Trans.

Linn. Soc. Lond. xxvii. 234. pi. xl. fig. 19. a-e, and wood-
cuts.
Polymorphina rotundata Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M.

S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 570. pi. Ixxiii. figs. 5-8.
Test oblong, ovoid, subcylindrical, gibbous, rounded at the
base, more or less produced at the apex. Chambers numerous,
broad. Septa marked by lines only, neither constricted nor
excavated. Orifice simple, round, oval, or radiate. Surface
smooth.
Locality. Timber Creek, in the teredo bed. Rare.

GLOBIGERINID^.

GLOBIGERINA d'Orbigny.

Globigerina cretacea d'Orbigny.

Globigerina cretacea d'Orbigny. 1840. Mem. Soc. Geol. France.

iv. 34. pi. iii. figs. 12-14.
Globigerina fo%!eolata (pars) Ehrenberg. 1854. Mikrogeologie.

pi. xxiv. fig. 49.
Globigerina libani Ehrenberg. Ibid. pi. xxv. fig. 30.
Planulina pachyder77ia Id. Ibid. pi. xxv. fig. 31.
Rotalia pertusa Id. Ibid. pi. xxiv. fig. 41.
Rotalia aspera Id. Ibid. pi. xxvii. figs. 57." 58 ; pi. xxviii. fig.

42 ; pi. xxxi. fig. 44.
Rotalia globulosa Id. Ibid, pi. xxvii. fig. 60 ; pi. xxviii. figs. 40,

41 ; pi. xxxi. figs. 40, 41, 43.
Rotalia densa Id. Ibid. pi. xxvii. fig. 62.
Rotalia quatcrna Id. Ibid. pi. xxvii. fig. 53 ; pi. xxviii. fig. 34.

1S94.] NEW-YORtC MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 133

Rotalia rosa Id. Ibid. pi. xxvii. fig. 54.

Rotalia pachyomphala Id. Ibid. pi. xxvii. fig. 55.

Rotalia tracheotetras Id. Ibid. pi. xxvii. fig. 35.

Rotalia perforata Id. Ibid. pi. xxviii. fig. 36 ; pi. xxix. fig. 2.

Rotalia protacmcea Id. Ibid. pi. xxviii. fig. 37.

Rotalia laxa Id. Ibid. pi. xxviii. fig. 38 ; pi. xxix. fig. i ; pi.

xxxi. fig. 42.
Rotalia centralis Id. Ibid. pi. xxviii. fig. 39.
Globigerina cretacea G. M. Dawson. 1875. Report Geol. and

Resources, 49th Parallel British N. A. Boundary Comm. 79.
Globigerina cretacea Brady. 1879. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.

xix. n. s. 285.
Globigerina cretacea Sch wager. 1883. Palseontographica. xli.

fig. 13. a-d.
Globigerina cretacea Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M.

S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 596. pi. Ixxxiii. Fossil specimens.

fig. II. a-c.
Globigerina cretacea Woodward and Thomas. 1885. 13th Ann.

Report. Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. 171.pl. iii. figs. 14-

16 ; ii. fig. 19.
Globigerina cretacea Tyrrell. 1890. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. vii.

114.
Globigerina cretacea Woodward and Thomas. 1893. Final Re-
port Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. iii. 41. pi. D. figs. 18, 19.
Test suborbicular, compressed, rugose aculeate, spire obtuse,
with three distinct convolutions, five to seven segments, de-
pressed spheroidal, sutures excavated, aperture large in the
umbilicus.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Common. Timber Creek, in the yel-
low limestone. Rare. Teredo bed. Common.

ROTALID^.

DISCORBINA Parker and Jones.

DiscoRBiNA BERTHELOTi d'Orbigny, sp.

Rosalina bertheloti il'OvhxgnY^ 1839, Forani. Canaries.135.pl,
i, figs-. 28-30,

134 'journal of the [October,

Discorbina bertheloti Brady. 1864. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond.

xxiv. 469. pi. xlviii. fig. 10. a, b.
Discorbina turbo, var. parisie?isis, subvar. berthclotiana Parker and

Jones. 1865. Phil. Trans, civ. 387. pi. xvi. figs. 26, 27.
Discorbina berthclotiana Goes. 1882. Kongl. Sv. Vet. Akad.

xix. 107. pi. viii. figs. 266-268.
Discorbina bertheloti Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 650. pi. Ixxxix. figs. 10-12.
Discorbina bertheloti Woodward. 1887. Journ. N. Y. Mic. Soc.

iii. 17.
Test very depressed, carinate, punctate ; spire short, with two
convolutions, partly with depressed chambers, carinate, arcuate,
margin limbate.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the yellow limestone. Quite rare.
Teredo bed. Rare.

TRUNCATULINA d'Orbigny.
Truncatulina haidingerii d'Orbigny, sp,

Rotalina haidingerii d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 154.

pi. vii. figs. 7-9.
Rotalina ehrenbergii 'RaWty. 1851. Smithsonian Contrib. ii. art.

3. 10. figs. 11-13.
Rotalia brueckneri Reuss. 1855. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol.

Gesellsch. vii. 273. pi. ix. fig. 7.
Rotalia propifiqtia Reuss. 1855. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xviii. 241. pi. iv. fig. 53. a, b, c.
Rotalia hetnisphmrica Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. xliv. 314. pi. ii. fig. 5.
Rotalia lenticula Reuss. 1863. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xlvi. 35. pi. x. fig. 3.
Planorbnlina haidingeri 'Rxdidy. 1864. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond.

xxiv. 469. pi. xlviii. fig. 11.
Planorbulina farcta var. haidingerii Parker and Jones. 1865.

Phil. Trans, civ. 382. pi. xvi. fig. 22. a, b.
Truncatulina haidingeri Reuss. 1867. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. iv. 28.
Pulvinulina haidingeri Hantken. 1875. Mittheil. Jahrbuch. d,

Kon. ungar. geol, Anstalt. iv. 7y. pi. xv. fig. 10. a, b.

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 135

Truncatulina haidingerii Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H.
M. S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 663. pi. xcv. fig. 7- a-c.

Test orbicular, trochiform, i)unctate, below somewhat convex,
umbilicate, spire conical ; with four narrow convolutions, ex-
ternally carinate, with six chambers arcuate above, below
narrowly triangular, convex.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the yellow limestone. Rare.

Truncatulina lobatula Walker and Jacob, sp.

^'Nautilus spiralis lobatus, Gic." WdiWiQX a.x\d Boys. 1784. Test.

Min. 20. pi. iii. fig. 71.
'" Hammonice fuberculatce, etc." Soldani. 1789. Testaceographia.

i. pt. I. 58. pi. xlv. figs. ii. kk, 11, mm.
Nautilus lobatulus Walker and Jacob. 1798. Adam's Essays,

Kammacher's Ed. 642. pi. xiv. fig. id.
Serpula lobatula M.ontdig\i. 1803. Test. Brit, 515. Suppl. 160.
TruncatuVna tuberculata d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii.

279. No. I ; Modele No. 37.
Truncatulina lobatula d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Canaries. 134.

pi. ii. figs. 22-24.
Biscorbis lobatulus yi3.cg\\\\vrd.y. 1843. Moll. Anim. Aberd. 34.
Truncatulina lobatula d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien.

168. pi. ix. figs. 18-23.

Truncatulina boveana d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien.

169. pi. ix. figs. 24-26.

Anomalijta variolaria 6.' Oxh'igny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 170.

pi. ix. figs. 27-29.
Truncatulina communis Reuss. 1855. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. xviii. 242. pi. v. fig. 56.
Truncatulina lobatula Parker and Jones. 1857. Ann. and Mag.

Nat. Hist. ser. 2. xix. 293. pi. x. figs. 17-21.
Truncatulina lobatula Williamson. 1858. Rec. Foram. Gt.

Br. 59. pi. V. figs. 121-123.
Truncatulina varians Reuss. i860. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. xlii. 359. pi. ii. fig. 12. a, b.
Truncatulina lobatula Dawson, i860. Can. Nat. and Geologist.

V. 192. fig. 50.
Rotalia polyraphes Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss,

Wien, xliv. 337.

136 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Rosalina hosqueti Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xliv. 337. pi. iii. fig. i.
TncncatuUna dekayi Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. xliv. 338. pi. vii. fig. 6. a, b, c.
Planorbulina farda, var. {Truncatulina) lobatula Parker and

Jones. 1865. Phil. Trans, civ. 381. pi. xiv. figs. 3-6 ; pi.

xvi. figs. 18-20.
Truncatulina lobatula Jones, Parker, and Brady. 1866. Mon-

ogr. Foram. Crag. pi. ii. figs. 4-10 ; pi. iv. fig. 18.
Truncatulina {lobulata ? d'Orb.) Hilgard and Hopkins. 1878.

Reclamation of the Alluvial Basin of the Miss. River. 43. pi.

ii. fig. 65.
Truncatulina lobatula Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M.

S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 660. pi. xcii, fig. 10 ; pi. xciii. figs.

I, 4, 5 ; pi. cxv. figs. 4, 5.
Truncatulina lobatula Whiteaves. 1887. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can.

iv. 115.

Test suborbiculate, depressed, slightly punctate, beneath
somewhat convex ; with three convolutions, externally angular ;
with seven chambers, arcuate above, irregular somewhat convex.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare. Timber Creek, in the yellow
limestone. Common. Teredo bed. Common. New Egypt, in
the green marl. Rare.

Truncatulina ungeriana d'Orbigny, sp.

Rotalina ungeriana d'Orbigny. 1846. Foram. Foss. Vien. 157.

pi. viii. figs. 16-18.
Rotalina grajiosa Reuss. 185 1. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. g2ol. Ge-

sellsch. iii. 75. pi. v. fig. 36.
Rotalina semipunctata Bailey. 185 1. Smithsonian Contrib. ii.

art. 3. II. figs. 17-19.
Rotalia roemeri Reuss. 1855. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xviii. 240. pi. iv. fig. 52.
Rotalia mortoni Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xliv. 337. pi. viii. fig. i.
Planorbulina ungeriana Brady. 1864. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond.

xxiv. 469. pi. xlviii. fig. 12,

1894.] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 137

Planorhiilina farcta, var. luigeriana Parker and Jones. 1865.

Phil. Trans, civ. 382. pi. xvi. figs. 23-25.
Truncatulina ungeriana Reuss. 1866. Denkschr. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. xxv. 161. No. 10.
Truncatulina ungeriana Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H.

M. S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 664. pi. xciv. fig. 9. a, b, c.

Test orbicular, depressed, punctate, below somewhat convex,
umbilicate, spire complanate, granulose, with three wide convolu-
tions, externally acutely carinate ; with eleven chambers, above
triangular, below flexuose, somewhat convex, externally mar-
gined (limbate), the last convex.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near MuUica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare. Timber Creek, in the yellow
limestone and the teredo bed. Rare.

ANOMALINA d'Orbigny.

Anomalina ammonoides Reuss, sp.

Rosalifia ammonoides Reuss. 1845. Verstein. bohm. Kreid. pt.

1.36. pi. xiii. fig. 66; pi. viii. fig. 53.
Rosalina ammonoides Reuss. 1850. Haidinger's Naturw. Ab-

handl. iv. 36. pi. iv. fig. 2.
Rotalia a7?i?nonoides Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xliv. 337.
Nonionina bathyomphala Reuss. 1862. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. xlvi. 95. pi. xiii. fig. i. a. b.
Rosalina weinkauffi Reuss. 1863. Sitzungsb. d K. Akad. Wiss.

Wien. xlviii. 68. pi. viii. fig. 97.
Rosalina maorica Stache. 1864. Novara Exped. geol. i. 282.

pi. xxiv. fig. 32.
Rosalina orbiculus Stache. 1864. Novara Exped. geol. i. 285.

pi. xxiv. fig. 34.
Planorbulina ammonoides Parker and Jones. 1865. Phil. Trans.

civ. 379.
Rotalia capitata Giimbel. 1868. Abhandl. d. K. bayer. Akad.

Wiss. II. cl. x. 653. pi. ii. fig. 92.
Rotalia am7nonoides Reuss. 1870. Sitzungsb. d. K. bayer. Akad.

Wiss. 283.

138 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

Planorbulina {Anotnaltna) ainmonoides Jones and Parker. 1872.

Quart. Journ. Geol Soc. xxviii. 106; table 109.
Planorbulina ammonoides Reuss. 1874. Das Elbthalgebirge in

Sachsen. ii. 114. pi. xxiii. fig. 9.
Anomalina ainmonoides Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 672. pi. xciv. figs. 2, 3.
Anomalina ammonoides Tyrrell. 1890. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. vii.

114.
Anomalina ammonoides Woodward and Thomas. 1893. Final

Report Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. iii. 44. pi. D. figs. 28,

29, 30.
"The nautiloid aspect of the test is perhaps a more constant
and more noticeable feature of Anomalina ammonoides than of
any other member of the group. The shell is generally much
compressed, and nearly equally convex on the two sides ; the
peripheral edge is round, and the aperture is placed almost sym-
metrically in the median line. In certain characters, however,
the species betrays a tendency to variation. Some specimens are
depressed at both umbilici (fig. 3), others are umbonate at one or
both (fig. 2); sometimes the earlier convolutions are visible to a
nearly equal extent on both faces; sometimes, on the other hand,
they are nearly involute on the inferior side, though the shell
retains its bilateral symmetry, as in Reuss's figure. The coarse
perforation of the shell-wall is usually more conspicuous on the
inferior than on the superior face." — Brady, loc. cit.

Locality. Bruere's pits, Crosswick's Creek, lower marl bed, in
the gray marl. Rare. Timber Creek, in the teredo bed. Quite
abundant.

PULVINULINA Parker and Jones.

PuLviNULiNA MiCHELiNiANA d'Orbigny.

Rotalina tn/ncatulinoides d'Orbigny. 1839. Foram. Canaries.

132. pi. ii. figs. 25-27.
Rotalina micheliniana d'Oxh\g\\y. 1840. Mem. Soc. geol. France.

iv. 31. pi. iii. figs. 1-3.
Rotalina nitida Reuss. 1845. Bohm. Kreide. i. 35. pi. xii. figs.

8, 20, 31; pi. viii. fig. 52.
Rotalia micheliniajia Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.Wiss.

Wien. xliv. 336.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIEl'Y. ISg''

Discorbina micheliniana Reuss. 1865. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. liii. 455. No. i.
JPulvinulina repanda, var. menardii, sub var. inicheliniatia Parker

and Jones. 1865. Phil. Trans, civ. 396. pi. xiv. fig. 16; pi.

xvi. figs. 41-43-
Pulvinidma micheliniana Owen. 1867. Journ. Linn. Soc. I^ond.

ix. Zool. 148. pi. V. fig. 17.
Pulvinulina ?iormanni Karrer. 1878. For. Luzon. Bolet. Comis.

Mapa geol. d. Espano. 7. 2, 24. pi. F. fig. 10.
Pulvinulina micheliniana '^rdid-j. 1879. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.

xix. n. s. 80.
Pulvinulina micheliniana Goes. 1882. Kongl. Sv. Vet. Akad.

xix. 114. pi. viii. figs. 296-298.
Pulvinulina micheliniana Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H..

M. S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 694. pi. civ. figs, i, 2.

Test orbicular convex, smooth, above plane, beneath convex-
conical, margin carinate, spire complanate, with three convolu-
tions, feebly distinct; with angular chambers, subcomplanate^
umbilicus convex, aperture elongate.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the yellow limestone. Rare.

Pulvinulina karsteni Reuss, sp.

Rotalia karsteni Reuss. 1855. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Ge-

sellsch. vii. 273. pi. ix. fig. 6.
Potalia karsteni 'R.QViSS,. 1861. Sitzungsb. xliv. 337.
Pulvinulina karsteni Brady. 1864. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond..

xxiv. 470. pi. xlviii. fig. 15.
Pulvinulina repanda, var. karsteni Favker a.nd Jones. 1865. Phil.

Trans, civ. 396. pi. xiv. figs. 14, 15, 17 ; pi. xvi. figs. 38-40.
Pulvinulina karsteni Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M.

S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 698. pi. cv. figs. 8, 9.
Pulvinulifia karsteni Y^hittzwQs. 1887. Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. iv.

115-

" The test of Pulvinulina karsteni, in well-developed speci-
mens, is nearly round and very regularly built, convex on both
faces, and with obtuse subangular periphery. It is composed of
from three to four convolutions, the final circuit having about
seven chambers ; the sutures, which are marked by fine lines on

140 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

the superior face, are somewhat depressed on the inferior ; and
the margin of the test on the inferior side has a limbate border."
— Brady, loc. cit.

Locality. Timber Creek, in the yellow limestone. Common.
Teredo bed. Not common.

ROTALIA Lamarck.
RoTALiA ORBICULARIS d'Orbigny.

Rotalia{Gyroidina) orbicularis d'Oxh\gr\y. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat.

vii. 278. No. I ; Modele No. 13.
Rotalia orbicularis Brady. 1864. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. xxiv.

470. pi. xlviii. fig. 16.
Rotalia beccarii, wsix. orbicularis Parker and Jones. 1865. Phil.

Trans, civ. 389. pi. xvi. fig. 34.
Rotalia orbicularis Terquem. 1882. M^m. Soc. geol. France.

ser. 3. ii. Mem. III. 60. pi. iv. figs. 1-3.
Rotalia orbicularis Brady. 1884. Report on Foram. H. M. S.

Challenger. Zool. ix. 706. pi. cvii. fig. 5 ; pi. cxv. fig. 6.

'" The test of Rotalia orbicularis is approximately plano-convex,
the superior face being flat or only slightly arched, the inferior
convex and more or less excavated at the umbilicus, and the per-
ipheral edge subangular. It is isomorphous with Truncatulina
lobatula in the Planorbuline series, and forms a connecting link
between Rotalia beccarii and Rotalia soldanii. — Brady, loc. cit.^'

Locality. Timber Creek, in the yellow limestone. Rare. Te-
redo bed. 'Quite common.

NUMMULINID^,

Sub-Family NUMMULITIN^.
OPERCULINA d'Orbigny.

Operculina complanata, var. granulosa Leymerie.

Amphistegina fleuriausi d'Orbigny. 1826. Ann. Sci. Nat. vii.

304. No. 7. (name only, fide Reuss).
Operculina granulosa \.Qjvs\&x\&. 1846. Mem. Soc. geol. France.

ser. 2. i. 359. pi. xiii. fig. 12. a, b.

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 141

Amphistegi?ia fleuriaiisi Reuss. 1861. Sitzungsb. d. K. Akad.

Wiss. Wien. xliv. 308. pi. i. figs. 10-12.
Operculina irregularis Reuss. 1864. Denkschr. d. K. Acad.

Wiss. Wien. xxiii. 10. pi. i. figs. 17, 18.
Operculina granulata Giimbel. 1868. Abhandl. d. K. bayer*

Akad. d. Wiss. II. CI. x. dd^. pi. ii. fig. iii. a, b.
Operculina complanata,vz.x. granulosa '^x^.^^. 1884. Report on

Foram. H. M. S. Challenger. Zool. ix. 743. pi. cxii. figs. 6,

7, 9, 10.
Operculina cotnpla7iata, var. granulosa Woodward and Thomas.

1885. Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. 13th Ann. Report.

176. pi. ii. fig. 36.
Operculina compla^iata, var. gratiulosa Woodward and Thomas.

1893. Final Report Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minn. iii. 46.

pi. E. fig. 38.

Test. It is uniformly smaller than complanata j its parti-
tions, which form a slight relief upon the surface of the very thin
shell which encloses the convolutions, are proportionally more
approximate. This species is very flat, and is made up of three or
four spirals. It carries on its surface on each side a number of
fine granulations, which are found irregularly distributed upon
the little elevations which correspond to the interior partitions.
These projecting points, scarce upon the last convolutions, are
found crowded towards the centre in many individuals.

Locality. Stratton's marl pit, near Mullica Hill, in the shell
layers of the green marl. Rare. New Egypt, in the green marl.
Rare.

142 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

PUBLICATIONS RECEIVED.

American Monthly Microscopical Journal: Vol. XV., Nos. 2—10 (February
— October, 1894).

The Microscope: Vol. II., Nos. 2 — 10 (February — October, 1894).

The Observer: Vol. V., Nos. 2 — 9 (February — September, 1894).

Natural Science Association of Staten Island, Proceedings: Vol. IV., Nos.
4 — 9 (February — September, 1894).

Insect Life : Vol. VI., Nos. 3, 4 (February, May, 1894).

Psyche : Vol. VII., Nos. 215 — 223 (March — November, 1894).

Torrey Botanical Club, Bulletin: Vol. XXI., Nos. 2 -9 (February— Sep-
tember, 1894).

School of Mines Quarterly : Vol. XV., Nos. 2 — 4 (January — July, 1894).

Alabama Experiment Station, Bulletin: Nos. 53 — 58 (January — August,
1894).

Cornell University Experiment Station, Bulletin : Nos. 62 — 72 (January —
September, 1894).

Michigan Experiment Station, Bulletin: Nos. 103 — 112 (February — June,

1894).

Iowa Experiment Station, Bulletin : Nos. 23 — 26 (1893 — 94).

Texas Experiment Station, Bulletin : No. 29 (December, 1893); Sixth An-
nual Report ( I ?93).

United States Department of Agriculture, Report of the Microscopist (1892);
Food Products, Nos. i — 3 (1893).

United States Geological Survey, Twelfth Annual Report, Parts i, 2 (1891);
Thirteenth Annual Report, Parts i — 3 (1892).

New York Academy of Sciences, Transactions : Vol. XIII. (1893 — 94).

Rochester Academy of Science, Proceedings : Vol. II., No. 2 (1894).

American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Proceedings: Vol. XXVIII. (1893).

Boston Society of Natural History, Proceedings: Vol. XXVI., Parts, i, 2
(1894).

Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, Proceedings : 1893, Part 3 —
1894, Part 2.

Cincinnati Society of Natural History, Journal : Vol. XVI., No. 4, XVII.,
No. I (January, April, 1894).

Franklin Institute, Journal : Vol. CXXXVIL, No. 819— Vol. CXXXVIII.
No. 826 (March — October, 1894).

Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College, Bulletin: Vol. XXV.,
Nos. 5— 8 (January— September, 1894).

Linnsean Society of New York, Abstract of Proceedings : 1893 — 94, No. 6.

Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, Journal : Vol. X., Parts i, 2 (1893).

American Museum of Natural History, Annual Report (1893).

Massachusetts Horticultural Society, Transactions : 1893, Part 2.

Essex Institute, Bulletin : Vol. XXV., No. 10— Vol. XXVI., No. 3 (Octo-
ber, 1893— March, 1894).

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 143

Academy of Science of St. Louis, Transactions : Vol. VI., No. 17 (June,
1894).

Geological and Natural History Survey of Minnesota, Botanical Studies:
No. 9, Parts 2 — 4 (March — September, 1894).

Tufts College Studies : Nos. i — 3 (1894).

" Iligiene del Ciclismo en Cuba"; " Los Incendios "; " Tecnica Anatom-
ica. " From the author, Dr. D. Antonio de Gordon y de Acosta (1894).

Colorado Scientific Society, Proceedings : (January 8 — August 6, 1894).

" Sieben Objecte unter dem Mikroskop." From the author, Dr. E. Giltay.
Leiden (1893).

" L'Tsaria densa (Link) Fries"; " Lachnidium acridiorum Gd." From the
author, Alfred Giard (1893).

" Leitneria floridana " In advance from the sixth annual report of the
Missouri Botanical Garden. From the author, William Trelease (May 30,

1894).

Nova Scotian Institute of Science, Proceedings: Vol. I., Part 3 (1893).

Canadian Record of Science : Vol. V., No. 8 (1893).

Historical and Scientific Society of Manitoba, Annual Report (1893); Trans-
actions, Nos. 45 — 47 (1894).

The Ottawa Naturalist : Vol. VII., No. 11— Vol. VIII., No. 7 (March-
October, 1894).

Canadian Institute : Seventh Annual Report (1894); Transactions, Vol. IV.,
Part I (March, 1894).

Anthony's Photographic Bulletin : Vol. XXV., Nos. 3 — 10 (March — October,
1894).

Brooklyn Medical Journal: Vol. VIII., Nos. 3— 11 (March — November,
1894).

Pacific Medical Journal: Vol. XXXVII., Nos. 4—10 (April— October, 1894).

Universal Medical Journal : Vol. VIII. (February — October, 1894).

National Druggist: Vol. XXIV., Nos. 3 — 10 (March — October, 1894).

Johns Hopkins University Circulars : Vol. XIII., Nos. no — 113 (March —
June, 1894).

American Lancet : Vol. XVIII. , Nos. 3 — 10 (March — October, 1894).

Mining Review: Vol. XXXtl., No. 8 -Vol. XXXIIL, No. 11 (February—
Septenttber, 1894).

New York State Museum : Annual Reports (1890 — 1893).

New York State Entomologist : Eighth and Ninth Reports (1891, 1892).

Missouri Botanical Garden : Fifth Annual Report (1894).

The Biology of Ferns, by G. F. Atkinson (1894): Macmillan & Co.

Organic Coloring Matters, by Schultz and Julius (1894): Macmillan & Co.

Structural Botany, by D. H. Scott (1894): Macmillan & Co.

Practical Botany for Beginners, by F. O. Bower (1894): Macmillan & Co.

Manual of Microchemical Analysis, by H. Behrens (1894): Macmillan & Co.

Microscopical Methods, by Simon II. Gage (1894): Comstock Publishing Co.

Microscopical Praxis, by Alfred C. Stokes (1894): Edward F. Biglow.

Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society: 1894, Parts i — 4.

144 JOURNAL OF THE [October,

International Journal of Microscopy and Natural Science : Vol. IV., Parts
21, 22 (April, July, 1894).

Quekett Microscopical Cluf), Journal : Vol. V., No. 34 (April, 1894).

The Naturalist: Nos. 224—231 (March — October, 1894).

North Staffordshire Naturalists' Field Club, Annual Report (1894).

Penzance Natural History and Antiquarian Society, Report and Transac-
tions (1893 — 94).

Victorian Naturalist: Vol. X., No. 10— Vol. XL, No. 5 (January — August,
1894).

Royal Society of New South Wales, Journal and Proceedings : Vol. XXVII.
(1893).

Royal Society of South Australia, Transactions : Vol. XVII., Part 2 (1893).

Australian Museum, Report (1894).

Wissenschaftlicher Club in Wien, Annual Report (1894); Monatsblatter,
Vol. ;XV., Nos. 5 — 12 (February— September, 1894). Ausserordentliche Bei-
lage, Vol. XV., No. 3 (December, 1893).

Naturwi;;senschaftlicher Verein in Frankfurt a. Oder, Societatum Literse :
Vol. VIII., Nos. 1—8 (January— August, 1894); Helios, Vol. XI., No. 10—
Vol. XII., No. 6 (January — September, 1894).

Naturhistorische Gesellschaft zu Nlirnberg, Transactions : Vol. X., Part 2

(1894).

Naturhistorische Gesellschaft zu Hannover, Forty-second and Forty-third
Reports (1892 — 93).

Naturforschende Gesellschaft zu Freiburg, Transactions : Vols. VII., VIII.
(T893, 1894).

Konigl. Bohm. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Prag, Report (1892—93);
Transactions (1892—93).
Verein fiir Naturkunde zu Kassel, Report XXXIX. (1892—94).

Gesellschaft zur Beforderung der gesammten Naturwissenschaften zu Mar-
burg, Report (1893^

Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein fiir Schwaben und Neuburg, Thirty-first Re-
port (1894).

Siebenbilrgischer Verein fiir Naturwissenschaften, Hermannstadt, Forty-
third Report (1894).

Le Diatomiste : Vol. II., Nos. 4— 6 (March— September, 1894).

Revue Internationale de Bibliographic Medicale: Vol. V., Nos. 3—19 (Feb-
ruary— October, 1894).

Societe Beige de Microscopic, Bulletin : Vol. XX., Nos. 5—9 (1894); Re-
port, Vol. XVII., Part 2 (1893).

Le Botaniste : Vol. IV., Nos. i, 2 (1894).

La Societe Scientifiques d' Angers, Bulletin : Vol. XXII. (1893).

La Societe les Amis des Sciences et Arts de Rochechouart, Bulletin: Vol. III.,
No. 5— Vol. IV., No. I (1894).

La Societe des Sciences Naturelles de la Creuse, Memoires: Vol. VIII. (1893).

Feuilledes Jeunes Naturalistes : Vol. XXIV., Nos. 281—288 (March— Oc-
tober, 1894).

l894-] NEW-YORK MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY, 145'

La Societe Royale de Botanique de Belgique, Bulletin: Vol. XXXII. (1893).

La Nuova Notarisia : Vol. V. (1894).

Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano : Vol. I., Nos. 2 — 4 (April — October^
1894).

Societa Botanica Italiana, Bulletino : 1894, Nos. 2 — 7.

La Notarisia : Vol. IX , No. 2, with supplements (1894).

Academie d'Hippone, Bulletin (October, 1893); Transactions (1893).

La Sociece Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscou, Bulletin : 1893, No 4,
1894, No. I.

Museo Nacionale de Montevideo, Anales : 1894, Part i.

La Societe Scientifique du Chili, Actes : Vol. III., No. 3 — Vol. IV., No. i
(March — May, 1894).

Museo de la Plata, Revista : Vol. IV. (1893).

" Minerva," La Sociedad de Ingenieros de Puebla : Vol. II., No. i (March,
1894).

La Sociedad Cientifica "Antonio Alzate," Memorias : Vol. VII., Nos. 7 —
10 (1894).

INDEX TO VOLUME X.

PAGE

Abbott, Frank, Centrifuge by Leitz, 25

Adulterations in paper stock 31

^cidiuni adoxce 26

American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science, Invitation to

meetings of 84

Greographical Society, Invitation

to view Sella photographs by 85

— — Microscopical Society, Approach-
ing meeting of 85, 86

Amphiprora conspiciia, var. pulchra, 23

Anatomy of the vertebrate skin 42

Androconium butterfly scales 87

Annual address of the President 31

Aperture, Measurement of 57

AsHBY, George E. , Labradorite 85

Bennett, Henry C, ^cicUum adoxoe, 26

Book notices 61,68

Bottles, Trays for small 20

Botrytis reptans 24

Boxes and cabinets, Uniform 17

Briggs, Thomas B., Vincetoxicum

acuminatum 87

Butterfly, Androconium, scales of . . . 87

Centrifuge by Ernest Leitz 25

Cellulose, Staining of 70

Committee on uniform boxes and

cabinets . . 17, 84

on annual exhibition 19, 83

on nominations of officers v!.', 25

on publications 55

on admissions 55

on amending By-Laws 56

on American Microscopical So-
ciety. 85

Co-operative lectures of Scientific Al-
liance 84

Cretaceous foraminifera of New Jer-
sey 91

Cunningham, K. M., Various mineral

specimens 58

Curtis, Carlton C, Formation of the

lichen thallus 63

PAGE

Diamond ink for marking glass 19

Diatoms : Ampliiprora conspicua,

var. pulchra 23

Donations :

Alfred A. Mayer 18

K. M. Cunningham 22, 58

H. G. Piffard 22

Charles S. Shultz 22

Frank D. Skeel 26

Eccentric growth of Rhus toxicoden-
dron 6!

Election of officers 54

Electrical engraving of glass 19

Engraving glass by electricity 19

Endosperm of Phytelephas and Smila-

cina 14

Equisetum cuticle for nail files ...... 57

Exhibition, Annual 77

Foraminifera, Cretaceous, of New Jer-
sey 91

Fungus, ^cidium adoxce 26

on lantern slide 24

Glass engraved by electricity 19

marked with diamond ink 19

Helm, Stephen, Marine life 76

Hoffman, Dr. Paul, death of 25, 53

Hyatt, J. D., Amphiprora conspicua,

var. pidchra 23

Oolitic chert 26

Eccentric growth of Rhus toxico-
dendron 61

JuLiEN, A. A., Stained cover-prepara-
tions 1

KosMAK, George William, Anatomy

of the vertebrate skin 42

Labradorite 85

Lantern slide with fungus 24

Lectures, Co-operative, of the Scien-
tific Alliance 84

INDEX TO VOLUME X.

147

PAGE

Lichen thallus, Formation of 63

LocKwooD, Ph.D., Rev. Samuel, Obit-
uary 51

Love, Edward G., Marking glass with

diamond ink 19

Staining of cellulose 70

Androeonium scales of butter-
fly 87

Marine life ;.... 76

Melicerta ringens 83

Mosquito trap. Vegetable 87

Mounting stained cover-preparations, 1

Nail files of Equisetuni cuticle 57

Officers, Election of 54

Oolitic chert 26

Ophryolegna sit> 23

Paper stock, Adulterations in 31

Phytelephas viacrocarpa, Endosperm

of 14

PiFFARD, H. G., Engraving glass by

electricity 19

Ophryolegna sp 23

Postage on scientific specimens ... 76

Proceedings ;

Meeting of October 6th, 1893 17

20th 18

November 3d 19

17th 22

December 1st . . 22

15th 24

January 5th, 1894 53

19th 55

February 2d 5

16th 56

March 2d 57

16th 57

April 6th 76

20th 8^

PAGE

Proceedings :

May 4th 84

18th 85

June 1st ... 86

15th 87

Publications received 26, 142

Rhus toxicodendron, Eccentric

growth of 61

Scales, Androeonium, of butterfly.... 87
Scientific Alliance, Co-operative lec-
tures of 84

Shtjltz, Charles S., Adulterations in

paper stock 31

Skeel, Frank D., Equisetum cuticle . . 57

Measuring aperture 57

Skin, Anatomy of the vertebrate 42

Smilacina racemosa, Endosperm of . . 14

Specimens, Postage on scientific 76

Stained cover-preparations 1

Staining of cellulose 70

Thallus, Formation of the lichen 63

Trays for small bottles 20

Uniform boxes and cabinets . . 17

Uniformly stained cover-preparations, 1
Urinary tract discharging Ophryoleg-
na sp 23

Vegetable mosquito trap 87

Vertebrate skin. Anatomy of the 42

Vincetoxicum acuminatum 87

Walker, James, Melicerta ringens 83

Woodward, Anthony, Cretaceous

foraminif era of New Jersey 91

Zabriskib, J. L., Endosperm of

Phytelephas and Smilacina 14

Trays for small bottles 20

Fungus on lantern slide 24

New York Botanical Garden Librar

3 5185 00267 0196

m"'--
^^^'h

■M^^